Download - M/s HARSHA SUGARS LTD - environmentclearance.nic.inenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · M/s. Harsha Sugars Ltd M/ s. EHS Consultants Pvt Ltd x ABBREVIATIONS AAQM Ambient

FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

for obtaining

Environmental Clearance

for the

Proposed expansion of Sugar Plant from 4500 TCD to

7500 TCD, 14 MW/Hr to 30 MW/Hr Cogeneration

Unit & establishment of new 60 KLPD Distillery along

with installation of Incineration Boiler to

generate 3 MW/Hr Power

By

M/s HARSHA SUGARS LTD

Located at

Sy No 411/1, 411/2, 413/1, 412, 411/3 Saundatti Village,

Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi District, Karnataka.

Prepared by

No. 13/2, 1st Main Road, Near Fire Station, Industrial Town, Rajajinagar, Bengaluru– 560010 QCI/NABET/EIA/ACO/18/00732

Expansion of Sugar Complex from 4500 TCD to 7500 TCD, 14 MW/Hr to 30 MW/Hr

and Establishment of 60 KLPD distillery &3 MW/Hr from incineration boiler at Final EIA Report

Saundatti Village, Belagavi District, Karnataka State

M/s. Harsha Sugars Ltd M/s. EHS Consultants Pvt Ltd i

REVISION RECORD

Rev. No Date Purpose

01 22-01-2018 Submitted as draft EIA report to client for

verification and comments

02 04.04.2018 Submitted as Draft EIA report to KSPCB for EPH

03 13-08-2018 Submitted to Client as Final EIA report for

verification& comments

04 29-08-2018 Issued as Final EIA report for submission to MoEF

& CC

Prepared by Verified by Approved by

Praveena Kumari H.N

EIA Coordinator

Madhu Kumar C.

Director (Technical)

Shivanand M. Dambal

Chairman & Managing Director

DOCUMENT NO. EHSCPL/HSL/2017-18/

05 12-11-2018Reissued as Final EIA report for submission to

MoEF&CC




M/s. Harsha Sugars Ltd M/s. EHS Consultants Pvt Ltd

ii





iii





iv





v





vi





vii





viii





ix





x

ABBREVIATIONS

AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

AMSL Above Mean Sea Level

APC Air Pollution Control

AQI Air quality Index

BGL Below Ground Level

BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand

BIS Bureau of Indian Standards

CDM Clean Development Mechanism

CFE Consent For Establishment

CFL Compact Fluorescent

CGWA Central Ground Water Board

CHP Combined Heat and Power

COD Chemical Oxygen Demand

CPCB Central Pollution Control Board

CPU Condensate Polishing Unit

CRZ Coastal regulation zone

CREP Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection.

CSR Corporate Social Responsibility

CW Carriage Way

db(A) Decibels

DCP Dry Chemical Powder

DCS Distributed Control System

DG Diesel Generator

DFO DeFoaming Oil

DM De Mineralisation

DMP Disaster Management Plan

EC Environmental Clearance

EC Electrical Conductivity

EHSCPL Environmental Health And Safety Consultant Pvt Ltd

EHSRDC Environmental Health and Safety Research and Development Centre

EIA Environment Impact Assessment

EMC Environmental Management Cell

EMP Environmental Management Plan

EMoP Environmental Monitoring Plan

ENA Extra Neutral Alcohol

ESP Electrostatic Precipitator

ESC Enterprise Social Commitment

ETP Effluent Treatment Plant

ETA Event Tree Analysis

FTA Fault Tree Analysis

FEI Fire Explosion Index

AFFF Aqueous Film-Forming Foams (Fire Fighting)

GCMS Gas Chromatography Mass Spectrometry

GCV Gross Calorific Value

GDP Gross Domestic Product

GEM Ground Water Estimation Committee Methodology





xi

GIS Geographic Information System

GLC’s Ground Level Concentrations

GM Geometric Mean

GPS Global Positioning System

HP High Pressure

HSD High Speed Diesel

HSL Harsha Sugars Ltd

HSE Health, Safety and Environment

HESCOM Hubli Electricity Supply Company

IMD India Meteorological Department

IMFL Indian Made Foreign Liquor

IRC Indian Roads Congress

IRS Indian Remote Sensing Satellite

IS Indian Standard

ITE Institute of Transportation Engineers

IUCN International Union For Conservation of Nature

KLD/ KLPD Kilo Litre Per Day

KPTCL Karnataka Power Transmission Corporation Ltd

KSEIAA Karnataka State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority

KSPCB Karnataka State Pollution Control Board

KSRSAC Karnataka State Remote Sensing Application Centre

KNNL Karnataka Neeravari Nigam Limited

KVA Kilo Volt Ampere

KFD Karnataka Forest Department

KW Kilo Watt

LED Light Emitting Diode

LPG Liquefied petroleum gas

LPS Liters per Second

LOS Level of Service

LULC Land Use And Land Cover

MCC Motor Control Centre

MCR Master Control Room

MCA Maximum Credible Accident

MEE Multi Effect Evaporator

MLA Member of Legislative Assembly

MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids

MM Mitigation measures

MoEF CC Ministry of Environment & Forests and Climate Change

MOL Molasses

MP Medium Pressure

MS Mild Steel

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet

MSSV Main Steam Stop Valve

MSIHC Manufacturing, Storage and Identification of Hazardous Chemicals

MT Metric Tons

MVA Mega Volt Ampere

MW/Hr Mega Watt per Hour

NAAQM National Ambient Air Quality Monitoring





xii

NABL National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories

NBSSLP National Bureau of Soil Survey and Land Use Planning

NE North East

NA Not Applicable

NGO Non-Governmental Organization

NHS National Hydrological Service

NMHC Non-Methane Hydrocarbons

NOC No Objection Certificate

NW North West

O&M Operation and maintenance

OHS Occupational Health and Safety

OISD Oil Industries Safety Directorate

OP Orthophosphoric Acid

PAH Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons

PCU Passenger Car Units

PPE Personal Protection Equipment

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

PIA Project Impact Area

PPM Parts Per Million

P&ID Piping and Instrumentation diagrams

RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete

RET Rare, Endangered and Threatened

ROW Right of Way

RPM Revolution Per Minute

RS Rectified Sprit

RRA Rapid Rural Appraisal

RDPR Rural Development and Panchayat Raj

RO Reverse osmosis

SAR Sodium Absorption Ratio

SD Standard deviation

SH State Highway

SOI Survey of India

SOP Standard Operating Procedure

SPM Suspended Particulate Matter

SCBA Self Contained Breathing Apparatus

SWD Side Water Depth

TAC Tariff Advisory Committee

TCD Tons of Cane Crushing Per Day

TCH Tons Cane per Hours

TG Turbo Generator

TOR Terms of Reference

TPD Tons Per Day

TPH Tons Per Hour

TRO Turkey Red Oil

TSS Total Suspended Solids

UASBR Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor

UOM Unit of Measurement

USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency.





xiii

VCE Vapour Cloud Explosion

WL Wild Life

WTP Water Treatment Plant

WHC Water Holding Capacity





i





ii





iii


and Establishment of 60 KLPD distillery & 3 MW/Hr from incineration boiler at Final EIA Report



xvi

COMPLIANCE TO TOR CONDITIONS

Sl.

No. TORs

Compliance with respect to Final EIA

Report

A. SPECIFIC TOR

1 List of existing distillery units in the study area

along with their capacity and sourcing of raw

material.

Nil in the study area of 10 kms radius.

However, Renuka Sugars Ltd., Munoli,

Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi having 120

KLPD distillery is located at 15.50Km

2 Number of working days of the distillery unit. 330 Days

3. Details of raw materials such as molasses/grains,

their source with availability.

Chapter-2 Project description; 2.6 Raw

Material required for Sugar and Cogen

unit; Distillery Pg. 37-44

4. Details of the use of steam from the boiler. Chapter-2 Project description; Table 2.16

Technical features of the plant - Sugar

and Cogen: Pg 49-55

5. Surface and Ground water quality around proposed

spent wash storage lagoon, and compost yard.

As there is no source of water available

near proposed spentwash storage lagoon

and compost yard ground water has not

been analysed for water quality.

However, water quality analysis has been

carried out in different places as described

in Chapter- 3 Description of the

Environment; 3.6 Water Environment;

3.6.1 Water sources in the study area;

3.6.2 Sources of water pollution in the

study area; 3.6.4 Water Quality ; Pg 130-

143;

6. Plan to reduce spent wash generation within 6-8

KL/KL of alcohol produced.

Chapter-2 Project description; 2.7

Resource requirement – water; Table 2.14

Resource requirement; Pg 44-48

7. Proposed effluent treatment system for

molasses/grain based distillery (spent wash, spent

lees, condensate and utilities) as well as domestic

sewage and scheme for achieving zero effluent

discharge (ZLD).

Chapter-4 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts And Mitigation Measures; 4.4.5

Condensate Polishing Unit/ETP design

report for distillery section; Pg 241-258

8. Proposed action to restrict fresh water consumption

within 10 KL/KL of alcohol production.

Chapter-2 Project description; 2.7

Resource requirement – water; Table 2.14

Resource requirement; Pg 44-48

9. Details about capacity of spent wash holding tank,

material used, design consideration. No. of

piezometer to be proposed around spent wash

holding tank.

Chapter-2 Project Description; 2.13 Spent

wash treatment and power generation –

using incineration boiler; Pg 79-83

Chapter 4 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts And Mitigation Measures; 4.4.8

Ground water impact assessment studies;

4.4.8.4 Construction of piezometer Pg

263-264

10. Action plan to control ground water pollution. Chapter-4 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts and Mitigation Measures; 4.4.8





xvii

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

Ground water impact assessment studies;

Pg 263-264

11. Details of solid waste management including

management of boiler ash, yeast, etc. Details of

incinerated spent wash ash generation and its

disposal.

Chapter 4.0 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts And Mitigation Measures;

Refer Table No: 4.20 Pg: 272

12. Details of bio-composting yard (if applicable). Not applicable

13. Action plan to control odour pollution. Chapter 4.0 Anticipated Environmental


Refer Paragraph No:4.2.5 Pg:230

14. Arrangements for installation of continuous online

monitoring system ( 24x7 monitoring device)



4.2.2.4 Mitigation measures; Pg 228

Sugar

15. Complete process flow diagram describing each

unit, its processes and operations in production of

sugar, along with material and energy inputs and

outputs (material and energy balance)

Chapter 2.0 Project Description; 2.10

Sugar manufacturing process: Fig: 2.13 &

2.14 Pg: 57-69

16. Details on water balance including quantity of

effluent generated, recycled & reused. Efforts to

minimize effluent discharge and to maintain quality

of receiving water body.

Chapter 2.0 Project Description; Water

balance for Sugar and Distillery unit ; Fig

2.10, 2.11 & 2.12 pg: 44-48

17. Details of effluent treatment plant, inlet and treated

water quality with specific efficiency of each

treatment unit in reduction in respect of all

concerned/regulated environmental parameters.



Details of effluent treatment plant 4.4.5

pg: 241-258

18. Number of working days of the sugar production

unit.

Chapter 2.0 Project Description ;Sugar

unit: 180 days

19. Details of the use of steam from the boiler Chapter-2 Project description; Table 2.19

Description of spent wash incineration

boiler; Pg 55; Table 2.16 Technical

features of the plant - Sugar and Cogen:

Pg 49-55

20. Details of proposed source-specific pollution

control schemes and equipments to meet the

national standards.



Details of effluent treatment plant 4.4.5

pg: 241-258

21. Collection, storage, handling and transportation of

molasses,

Chapter 2.0 Project Description;

2.8.3.2 Storage of Products and By

Products Pg: 56

Molasses stored in steel structural tank of

capacity of 4x 5000MT

22. Collection, storage and handling of bagasse and

press mud.

Chapter 2.0 Project Description; Refer

2.8.3.2 Storage of Products and By

Products Pg: 56

23. Fly ash management plan for coal based and

bagasse and action plan







xviii

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

4.2.4 Fly ash Management Pg:229

24. Details on water quality parameters such as

Temperature, Colour, pH, BOD, COD, Total

Kjeldhal Nitrogen, Phosphates, Oil & Grease, Total

Suspended Solids, Total Coli form bacteria etc.

Chapter 3.0 Description of the

Environment ; Details of Water Quality,

Refer Table: 3.33, 3.34 & 3.31

Pg: 138-141

25. Details on existing ambient air quality and

expected, stack and fugitive emissions for PM10,

PM 2.5, SO2*, NOx*, etc., and evaluation of the

adequacy of the proposed pollution control devices

to meet standards for point sources and to meet

AAQ standards. (* - As applicable)

Chapter 3.0 Description of the

Environment ; Refer Paragraph: 3.4.7

and enclose report as annexure-2

Pg:109-116

GENERIC TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

1 Executive summary of the project Executive summary of the project has

been prepared and enclosed at the

beginning of the EIA report

2 Introduction

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET

accreditation

Details of the EIA Consultant including

NABET accreditation given in Chapter 10

Pg: 387-389

ii. Information about the project proponent Chapter 1.0 Introduction Refer paragraph

No:1.2 Pg:19-20

iii. Importance and benefits of the project Chapter 1.0 Introduction

Refer paragraph No:1.4 Pg:20-21

Chapter 7.0 Project Benefits ; Pg:361

3 Project description

i. Cost of project and time of completion. Chapter 2.0 Project Description;

Cost of the project Rs. 307.32 Crores

ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project Chapter 2.0 Project Description;

Refer Para 2.9 Proposed Product Details

:Table No:2.20 ;Pg:57

iii. If expansion project, details of existing products

with capacities and whether adequate land is

available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if

any.


Refer Para 2.9 Proposed Product Details

:Table No:2.20 ;Pg:57

iv List of raw materials required and their source

along with mode of transportation.


Refer 2.6.5 Raw Material Requirement-

Sugar Plant&2.6.6 Raw material for

cogeneration; Pg: 42-44 v Other chemicals and materials required with

quantities and storage capacities

vi Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste

generation and their management.


Details of effluent generation :Table 2.14

Pg:44-45 ; Process emissions generation

from proposed 140 TPH bagasse fired

boiler and 22TPH slop fired boiler will be

managed by the installation of ESP


Impacts And Mitigation Measures; Table





xix

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

4.20 Mitigation measures for handling

solid and hazardous waste

vii Requirement of water, power, with source of

supply, status of approval, water balance diagram,

man-power requirement (regular and contract)


Refer Table:2.14 & 2.15

and fig 2.10 & 2.11

viii Process description along with major equipments

and machineries, process flow sheet (quantities)

from raw material to products to be provided

Chapter 2.0 Project Description; Refer

Paragraph No: 2.8 & Table 2.16, 2.17 &

2.18 Pg: 49-55

ix Hazard identification and details of proposed safety

systems.

Chapter 6.0 Additional Studies Refer

paragraph: 6.4.6 ; Table 6.29 Pg:336-341

x Expansion/modernization proposals Expansion

Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s)

including Amendments thereto obtained for the

project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an

Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring

Report of the Regional Office of the Ministry of

Environment and Forests as per circular dated 30th

May, 2012 on the status of compliance of

conditions stipulated in all the existing

environmental clearances including Amendments

shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance

of Consent to Operate for the ongoing I existing

operation of the project from SPCB shall be

attached with the EIA-EMP report.

-Not applicable-

Existing capacity of the industry is 4500

TCD cane crushing and 14 MW/Hr

cogeneration; it doesn’t attract EIA

Notification 2006 and subsequent

amendments.

In case the existing project has not obtained

environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC

under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994

and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided.

Copies of Consent to Establish/No Objection

Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units

operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and

CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB

shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to

the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be

submitted.

-Not applicable-


TCD and 14 MW/Hr cogeneration,

doesn’t attract EIA Notification 2006 and

subsequent amendments.

Copy of the CFE enclosed as annexure -1

4. Site Details

i. Location of the project site covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for

selecting the site, whether other sites were

considered.

Chapter -2.0 Project description; 2.1

Location of the proposed project; Pg 23

2.2 Criteria for site selection; Pg-23

ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km

and site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an

A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas and

environmentally sensitive places)

Chapter -2.0 Project description; Fig 2.2

Toposheet with 10 Km radius

demarcation showing location of the

proposed project site; Pg 27

iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site Not applicable as it is an expansion

proposal within the existing premises

iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the Chapter 2.0 Project Description;





xx

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

site Refer Table. 2.2

15 0 43' 19.25" N : 75

0 03' 30.99" E

15 0 43' 09.98" N : 75

0 03' 29.91" E

15 0 42' 58.59" N : 75

0 03' 28.15" E

15 0 42' 58.43" N : 75

0 03' 37.96" E

15 0 43' 05.13" N : 75

0 03' 35.46" E

15 0 43' 04.96" N : 75

0 03' 46.65" E

15 0 43' 10.46" N : 75

0 03' 47.22" E

15 0 43' 21.09" N : 75

0 03' 53.56" E

v. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site. Chapter 2.0 Project Description;

Refer Fig. 2.5 & 2.6 Pg: 31-32

vi. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as

proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area,

greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an

Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial

Area indicating location of unit within the

Industrial area/Estate.


Refer Fig. 2.8 & 2.9 and also details plan

enclosed as annexure-4;Pg 35-36

vii. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs

of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.


Refer Fig. 2.3 and for Green belt

development refer Fig 3.35 of Chapter 4

of EIA report

viii. Land use break-up of total land of the project site

(identified and acquired), government/private -

agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc shall be included. (not required for

industrial area)


Refer Table No:2.1 Pg: 24

ix. A list of major industries with name and type

within study area (10km radius) shall be

incorporated. Land use details of the study area.

Chapter -2.0 Project description; Fig 2.7

Map of Saundatti District with location of

existing sugar industry; Pg 33

x. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of

the study area shall be included.

Chapter- 3.0 Description of the

Environment; 3.6.6 Geology; Pg 143

3.6.7 Hydrogeology, ground water and

water conservation; Pg 147

xi. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius

of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of

any major river, peak and lean season river

discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency

based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years.

Details of Flood Level of the project site and

maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be

provided. (mega green field projects)


Environment; 3.6.5 Hydrology profile;

Drainage; Fig; 3.27

xii Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not

complete, stage of the acquisition process and

expected time of complete possession of the land.

Total 51.3 Acres land was purchased

Land is already in the name of Harsha

Sugars Ltd.

xiii R&R details in respect of land in line with state

Government policy

- NA-

5 Forest and Wildlife related issues (if applicable)





xxi

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

i Permission and approval for the use of forest land

(forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations

of the State Forest Department. (if applicable)

No forest land required for the project

No wild life related issues involved

ii Land use map based on High resolution satellite

imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the

forestland (in case of projects involving forest land

more than 40 ha)

iii Status of Application submitted for obtaining the

stage I forestry clearance along with latest status

shall be submitted.

iv The projects to be located within 10 km of the

National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,

Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project

proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated

by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features

vis-à-vis the project location and the

recommendations or comments of the Chief

Wildlife Warden-thereon

v Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by

the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State

Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna,

if any exists in the study area

vi Copy of application submitted for clearance under

the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing

Committee of the National Board for Wildlife

6 Environmental Status

i Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the

project site and site-specific micro-meteorological

data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly

wind speed and direction and rainfall.


Environment; 3.4 Air Environment; Pg

100-116

ii AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other

parameters relevant to the project shall be

collected. The monitoring stations shall be based

CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-

dominant wind direction, population zone and

sensitive receptors including reserved forests.


Environment; 3.4.5 selection of sampling

station; Pg 105-106

iii Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of

all stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM

Notification of Nov. 2009 along with – min., max.,

average and 98% values for each of the AAQ

parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be

provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.


Environment; 3.4 Air environment ; 3.4.7

results of ambient air quality monitoring

done in radius of 10 km; Pg 109-114

Raw data enclosed as annexure-2

iv Surface water quality of nearby River (100m

upstream and downstream of discharge point) and

other surface drains at eight locations as per


Environment; 3.6 water environment;

3.6.1 surface water sources; Table 3.31





xxii

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines. Details of Water Quality Sampling

Stations; Pg:133-134

Table 3.32 overall observation on water

sources and sanitation status in villages in

study area; Pg 137

Only 3 surface water samples were

collected out of 9 locations mentioned in

the TOR due to non availability of surface

water.

v Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of

river identified by the CPCB/MoEF & CC, if yes

give details.

No

vi Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8

locations shall be included.


Environment; 3.6.4.3 details of sampling

location; table 3.31 details of water

quality sampling stations; Pg 133-134

vii Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the

study area.


Environment 3.5 noise levels; table 3.29

details of ambient noise level monitoring

station; Pg 127-128

viii Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. Chapter- 3.0 Description of the

Environment; 3.3.2 soil characteristics;

Pg 92-100

ix Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles,

frequency of vehicles for transportation of

materials, additional traffic due to proposed

project, parking arrangement etc.


Environment; 3.4.8 Traffic study; Pg 116-

126

x Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial

and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be

given with special reference to rare, endemic and

endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found

within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan

shall be prepared and furnished.


Environment; 3.7 Biological

Environment; Pg 161-190

xi Socio-economic status of the study area. Chapter- 3.0 Description of the

Environment; 3.8 Social Environment; Pg

190-210

7. Impact and Environment Management Plan

i Assessment of ground level concentration of

pollutants from the stack emission based on site-

specific meteorological features. In case the project

is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling

shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics for determining the potential

impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative

impact of all sources of emissions (including

transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be

Chapter- 4.0 Anticipated Environmental

Impacts and Mitigation Measures; 4.2 Air

Environment; Pg 213-215





xxiii

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

assessed. Details of the model used and the input

data used for modeling shall also be provided. The

air quality contours shall be plotted on a location

map showing the location of project site, habitation

nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

ii. Water Quality modeling – in case of discharge in

water body

-NA-

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and

end products on the surrounding environment shall

be assessed and provided. In this regard, options

for transport of raw materials and finished products

and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum

road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall

be examined.



impact of traffic; Pg 230-233

iv A note on treatment of wastewater from different

plant operations, extent recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be included. Complete

scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of

untreated and treated effluent to meet the

prescribed standards of discharge under E (P)

Rules.



ETP /condensate polishing unit design

report for distillery section; Pg 241-258

v Details of stack emission and action plan for

control of emissions to meet standards.



impact on air environment; Pg 213-215;

4.2.2.3 Air pollution control equipment;

table 4.8 technical specification of ESP;

Pg 222

vi Measures for fugitive emission control Chapter- 4.0 Anticipated Environmental


Fugitive emissions; table 4.12 Fugitive

emissions control strategy; Pg 228

vii Details of hazardous waste generation and their

storage, utilization and management. Copies of

MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous

waste in cement plant shall also be included. EMP

shall include the concept of waste-minimization,

recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy

conservation, and natural resource conservation.


Impacts and Mitigation Measures; 4.8

Solid waste and HW generation and

management; Pg 271-272

Chapter-8 Environmental Management

Plan; 8.3 conservation of air, water and

energy recovery ; Pg 383

viii Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per

Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of

action shall be provided.



Fly ash Management Pg:229 ;


Impacts and Mitigation Measures; 4.8

Solid waste and HW generation and

management; Pg 271-272

ix Action plan for the green belt development plan in

33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees

Chapter 8 Environmental Management

Plan





xxiv

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

per ha. Giving details of species, width of

plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included.

The green belt shall be around the project boundary

and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the

project shall also be incorporated.

Table 8.4 Details of Green belt

development plan Pg 380-381; 8.1.2

Guidelines for plantation; Pg 378-379

x Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at

plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater

from the roof tops and storm water drains to

recharge the ground water and also to use for the

various activities at the project site to conserve

fresh water and reduce the water requirement from

other sources.



Storm water management; Pg 258-264

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for

environmental pollution control measures shall be

included.

Chapter-8.0 Environmental Management

Plan; 8.2 Cost of estimates for

implementation of EMP; Pg 382-383

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring shall be submitted.

Chapter- 5.0 Environmental Monitoring

programme; table 5.1 & 5.2

Environmental Monitoring Programme

during construction and operation

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-

made) Preparedness and Emergency Management

Plan including Risk Assessment and damage

control. Disaster management plan should be

linked with District Disaster Management Plan.

Chapter 6 Additional studies; 6.4 DMP;

Onsite DMP & Offsite emergency plan;

&; Pg 322-334

8. Occupational Health

i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational

health & safety of all contract and casual workers

Chapter -6.0 Additional Studies; 6.4.5

Occupational Health surveillance; Pg

334-335

NA

NA

ii. Details of exposure specific health status

evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health is

being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x

rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far

& Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular

defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical

examinations give the details of the same. Details

regarding last month analyzed data of above

mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of

exposure and department wise.

iii. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards.

What are the exposure levels of hazards and

whether they are within Permissible Exposure level

(PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures

the company has adopted to keep them within PEL

so that health of the workers can be preserved,

iv. Annual report of heath status of workers with

special reference to Occupational Health and

Safety.

9. Corporate Environmental Policy





xxv

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

i. Does the company have a well laid down

Environment Policy approved by its Board of

Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

report.

Chapter - 11.0 Corporate Environmental

Responsibility; Pg 389-390

ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for

standard operating process/procedures to bring into

focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the

environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it

may be detailed in the EIA.

iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative

order of the company to deal with the

environmental issues and for ensuring compliance

with the environmental clearance conditions?

Details of this system may be given.

iv. Does the company have system of reporting of non

compliances / violations of environmental norms to

the Board of Directors of the company and / or

shareholders or stakeholders at large? This

reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA

report

10. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as

sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the

labour force during construction as well as to the

casual workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.

Chapter-2.0 Project description; 2.15

Facilities to Labour; Pg 83

Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

11. i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project

cost) shall be earmarked towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues

and item-wise details along with time bound action

plan shall be included. Socio-economic

development activities need to be elaborated upon.

Chapter - 11.0 Corporate Environmental

Responsibility; Pg 389-390 and also in

3.8.22.2 CSR- Budget estimates; Pg 208-

210

12 Any litigation pending against the project and/or

any direction/order passed by any Court of Law

against the project, if so, details thereof shall also

be included. Has the unit received any notice under

the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act,

1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If

so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the

notice(s) and present status of the case.

No litigation against the project

13. A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs.

Done

14 The TORs prescribed shall be valid for a period of

three years for submission of the EIA EMP reports.

Accepted

Additional TOR

1 A plan for implementation of Zero Liquid

Discharge system shall be submitted.

Chapter-2.0 Project description





xxvi

Sl.

No. TORs


Report

2 A layout plan earmarking space for development of

Green belt of at least 10 m width along the

periphery of the plant with three layers of perennial

trees shall be submitted. At least 33 % of the area

shall be developed as green area with trees. Trees

shall be selected as per CPCB norms.

Chapter 8 Environmental Management

Plan

Table 8.4 :Details of Green belt

development plan Pg 380-381; 8.1.2

Guidelines for plantation; Pg 378-379

Greenbelt development enclosed as

annexure-3

3 Certified Compliance report of the existing EC to

be obtained from concerned RO, MoEF&CC and

the same shall be submitted along with EIA/EMP

report.

-Not applicable-


TCD cane crushing and 14 MW/Hr

cogeneration, doesn’t attract EIA

Notification 2006 and further

amendments.

Copy of the CFE enclosed as annexure -1

4 At least 2.5 % of the total project cost may be

earmarked towards Enterprise Social Commitment

(ESC). PP shall submit a five year plan for ESC.


Environment; 3.8.8 Corporate Social

Responsibility; table 3.72 CSR- Budget

estimates; Pg:208-210

5 Public hearing has to be conducted as per the

provisions of EIA Notification, 2006.

Public hearing conducted on 18.07.2018.

Refer 6.5 Environmental Public Hearing

Pg: 342-360





xxvii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ..................................................................................................... 1 ES.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1 ES.2 Project Description ........................................................................................................ 1 ES.3 Description of the Environment .................................................................................... 6 ES.4 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures ..................................... 8 ES.6 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan ....................................................... 13 ES.7 Project Benefits ............................................................................................................ 14 ES.8 Environmental management plan ................................................................................ 14

INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 19 1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 19 1.2 About Promoters of M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd and Promoters Profile .............................. 19 1.3 Purpose of the Report ..................................................................................................... 20 1.4 Need of the project ......................................................................................................... 20 1.5 Scope of Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) .......................................................... 21 1.6 Applicable Environmental Regulations and Standards .................................................. 21

PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 23 2.1 Type of the project ......................................................................................................... 23 2.2 Criteria for site selection ................................................................................................ 23

2.2.1 Project Site Description .......................................................................................... 23 2.3 Road Connectivity .......................................................................................................... 24 2.4 Project site ...................................................................................................................... 25 2.5 Project Details ................................................................................................................ 34 2.6 Raw Materials - Sugar unit ............................................................................................. 37

2.6.1 General .................................................................................................................... 37 2.6.2 About project site Agro Climatic Conditions ......................................................... 37 2.6.3 Sugarcane Availability ............................................................................................ 38 2.6.4 Requirement of Cane Development Programmes ................................................... 40 2.6.5 Raw Material Requirement- Sugar Plant ................................................................ 42 2.6.6 Raw material for cogeneration ................................................................................ 43 2.6.7 Raw material requirement for Distillery section ..................................................... 43

2.7 Resource requirement - Water ........................................................................................ 44 2.7.1 Water balance- Sugar and Cogen unit..................................................................... 44

2.8 Description of Major Systems ........................................................................................ 49 2.8.1 Plant Layout ............................................................................................................ 49 2.8.2 Machinery to be installed in cogeneration unit ....................................................... 50 2.8.3 Buildings ................................................................................................................. 55

2.9 Product, Production Capacity ......................................................................................... 57 2.10 Sugar manufacturing process ....................................................................................... 57

2.10.1 Process of Manufacturing ..................................................................................... 57 2.10.2 Juice Extraction ..................................................................................................... 57 2.10.3 Clarification .......................................................................................................... 58 2.10.4 Evaporation ........................................................................................................... 59 2.10.5 Crystallization ....................................................................................................... 59 2.10.6 Centrifugation ....................................................................................................... 60 2.10.7 Drying ................................................................................................................... 60 2.10.8 Quality Control & Specifications .......................................................................... 61

2.11 Cogeneration Process ................................................................................................... 63





xxviii

2.11.1 Types of Co- generation ........................................................................................ 63 2.11.2 Requirement of Sugar Industries .......................................................................... 64 2.11.3 Raw Material- Bagasse Availability ..................................................................... 65 2.11.4 Process details ....................................................................................................... 66 2.11.5 Characteristics of Bagasse .................................................................................... 67

2.12 Distillery Section .......................................................................................................... 70 2.12.1 Fermentation ......................................................................................................... 70 2.12.2 Multi Pressure Vacuum Distillation ...................................................................... 72 2.12.3 Dehydration of Alcohol ........................................................................................ 73 2.12.4 Mass Balance for distillery section ....................................................................... 79

2.13 Spent wash Treatment and power generation using incineration boiler ...................... 79 2.13.1 Incineration ........................................................................................................... 80 2.13.2 Salient Features of 22 TPH Incineration boiler .................................................... 80 2.13.3 Characteristics of incineration boiler ash .............................................................. 82

2.14 CO2 recovery from fermentation section ..................................................................... 83 2.15 Facilities Provided to Labour ....................................................................................... 83

2.15.1 During construction phase: ................................................................................... 83 2.15.2 During operational phase: ..................................................................................... 83

DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 84 3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 84 3.2 Baseline Data .................................................................................................................. 85 3.3 Land Environment .......................................................................................................... 89

3.3.1 Land use .................................................................................................................. 89 3.3.2 Soil Characteristics ................................................................................................. 91

3.4 Air Environment: Meteorology ...................................................................................... 99 3.4.1 Temperature ............................................................................................................ 99 3.4.2 Rainfall .................................................................................................................. 100 3.4.3 Meteorological data monitored at site for the study period .................................. 101 3.4.4 Ambient Air Quality ............................................................................................. 103 3.4.5 Selection of Sampling Stations ............................................................................. 104 3.4.7 Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring done in a radius of 10 Kms ............. 108 3.4.8 Traffic Study ......................................................................................................... 115

3.5 Noise Levels ................................................................................................................. 125 3.6 Water Environment ...................................................................................................... 128

3.6.1 Water sources in the study area............................................................................. 128 3.6.2 Sources of water pollution in the study area ......................................................... 130 3.6.3 Methodology for collection of samples ................................................................ 131 3.6.4 Surface and Ground water quality ........................................................................ 131 3.6.5 Hydrology Profile ................................................................................................. 141 3.6.6 Geology ................................................................................................................. 141 3.6.7 Hydrogeology, Ground Water & Water Conservation ......................................... 145 3.6.8 Water Quality ........................................................................................................ 149 3.6.9 Historical Data ...................................................................................................... 153 3.6.10 Ground Water Resources .................................................................................... 159

3.7 Biological Environment ............................................................................................... 159 3.7.1 Background of the study area ............................................................................... 159 3.7.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 162 3.7.3 Results & Discussions ........................................................................................... 165 3.7.4 Flora-Project site ................................................................................................... 165





xxix

3.7.5 Study area .............................................................................................................. 171 3.7.6 Fauna-project site .................................................................................................. 179 3.7.7 Study area .............................................................................................................. 180 3.7.8 Conclusion ............................................................................................................ 187

3.8 Social Environment ...................................................................................................... 189 3.8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 189 3.8.2 Scope of the Socio economic studies .................................................................... 189 3.8.3 Baseline Socioeconomic survey and Sampling .................................................... 190 3.8.4 Profile of the Project District ................................................................................ 190 3.8.5 Belagavi District-Highlights ................................................................................. 190 3.8.6 Project Impact Area .............................................................................................. 191 3.8.7 Demographic profile of the impacted villages ...................................................... 191

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

................................................................................................................................................ 207 4.0 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 207 4.1 Land Environment ........................................................................................................ 208

4.1.1 Impact on Land Use .............................................................................................. 208 4.1.2 Mitigation measures .............................................................................................. 208

4.2 Air Environment ........................................................................................................... 209 4.2.1 Impact on Air Environment .................................................................................. 209 4.2.2 Modelling Procedure ............................................................................................. 211 4.2.3 Fugitive Emissions (Particulate matter) ................................................................ 224 4.2.4 Fly ash Management ............................................................................................. 225 4.2.5 Impact due to Odour ............................................................................................. 226 4.2.6 Impact on Traffic .................................................................................................. 226 4.2.7 Mitigation measures .............................................................................................. 228

4.3 Noise Environment ....................................................................................................... 229 4.3.1 Impact during Construction Phase ........................................................................ 229 4.3.2 Impact during Operational Phase .......................................................................... 229 4.3.3 Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................. 231 4.3.4 Mitigation measures for impact on Vibration ....................................................... 232

4.4 Water Environment ...................................................................................................... 232 4.4.1 Impact during Construction Phase ........................................................................ 232 4.4.2 Impact during Operational Phase .......................................................................... 232 4.4.3 Mitigation measures .............................................................................................. 233 4.4.4 Water Conservation Practices ............................................................................... 235 4.4.5 Effluent Treatment Plant ....................................................................................... 236 4.4.6 Effluent treatment plant design report for Distillery section ................................ 240 4.4.7 Storm Water Management .................................................................................... 243 4.4.8 Geology and Hydrology ........................................................................................ 247

4.5 Biological Environment ............................................................................................... 249 4.5.1 Impact due to movement of vehicles .................................................................... 249 4.5.2 Impact due to emissions ........................................................................................ 249 4.5.3 Impact due to noise pollution ................................................................................ 250 4.5.4 Pressure on existing trees ...................................................................................... 250 4.5.5 Impact on RET and Schedule I species ................................................................. 251 4.5.6 Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................. 251 4.5.7 Evaluation of Impacts ........................................................................................... 251

4.6 Socio Economic Environment ...................................................................................... 253





xxx

4.6.1 Impact during Construction .................................................................................. 253 4.6.2 Impact during Operation ....................................................................................... 253 4.6.3 Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................. 254

4.7 Health Environment ..................................................................................................... 255 4.7.1 Impact during Construction Phase ........................................................................ 255 4.7.2 Impact during Operational Phase .......................................................................... 255 4.7.3 Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................. 255

4.8 Solid Waste and Hazardous waste Generation and Management for Disposal ........... 255 4.8.1 Impact due to construction phase .......................................................................... 255 4.8.2 Impact due to operation phase .............................................................................. 255

4.9 Evaluation of Impacts ................................................................................................... 257 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ........................................................ 265

5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 265 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ................................................................................................... 269

6.1 Risk and Hazard Mapping ............................................................................................ 269 6.1.1 Risk Assessment Need and Importance ................................................................ 269 6.1.2 Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment (HIRA) ............................................... 270 6.1.3 Identification of types of Hazards in Sugar, Distillery & Co-Generation Plant

(HAZID) ........................................................................................................................ 270 6.1.4 Proposed Mitigation Measures ............................................................................. 271 6.1.5 Procedure for Extinguishing Fire .......................................................................... 273 6.1.6 Environment Health and Safety Cell .................................................................... 274 6.1.7 Emergency Planning & Procedure ........................................................................ 275 6.1.8 Safety Policy and Regulations .............................................................................. 278 6.1.9 Scope of Work ...................................................................................................... 280 6.1.10 Inventory of Hazardous Material ........................................................................ 281

6.2 Hazard Identification and Visualization of MCA Scenarios ........................................ 281 6.2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 281 6.2.2 Hazard potential: Deciding factor ......................................................................... 282 6.2.3 Identification of Hazards ....................................................................................... 282 6.2.4 Physico – Chemical Properties of Alcohol /ENA/RS/AA .................................... 283 6.2.5 Applicable MSIHC Rules 2000 ............................................................................ 284 6.2.6 Fire Explosion Index (FEI) Analysis .................................................................... 286 6.2.7 Visualization of MCA Scenarios .......................................................................... 287 6.2.8 Models for determining the source strength for the release of hazardous substances

........................................................................................................................................ 291 6.2.9 Model for Evaporation .......................................................................................... 292 6.2.10 Model for Dispersion .......................................................................................... 292 6.2.11 Model for Heat Load and Shock Waves ............................................................. 292 6.2.12 Vulnerability Model ............................................................................................ 293 6.2.13 Impact of Overpressure ....................................................................................... 295 6.2.14 Result of Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCA) .................................. 296 6.2.15 Spilled Product Fire Scenario ............................................................................. 296 6.2.16 Pool Fire Scenario ............................................................................................... 297 6.2.17 Vapour Cloud Explosion Scenario ...................................................................... 301 6.2.18 Design and Installation of Fire fighting: Measures suggested ............................ 302

6.3 Mitigation Measures ..................................................................................................... 303 6.3.1 Safety and Fire Fighting ascribes .......................................................................... 303 6.3.2 Risk Classification Screening Table for Boiler and Turbine ................................ 304





xxxi

6.3.3 Standard Safety Features ....................................................................................... 306 6.4 Disaster Management Plan ........................................................................................... 306

6.4.1 Proposed On–Site Emergency Plan ...................................................................... 307 6.4.2 Disaster control Management system ................................................................... 307 6.4.3 Onsite Disaster Management - Disaster Control Management System ................ 309 6.4.4 Off-Site Emergency Planning ............................................................................... 315 6.4.5 Occupational Health Surveillance ......................................................................... 318 6.4.6 Summary of Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems ......... 320

6.5 Environmental Public Hearing ..................................................................................... 326 6.5.1 Compliance to the points raised in the Public hearing .......................................... 338

PROJECT BENEFITS ........................................................................................................ 346 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................ 347

8.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 347 8.1.1 Environmental Management Cell ......................................................................... 362 8.1.2 Guidelines for plantation ....................................................................................... 365

8.2 Cost of Estimates for implementation of EMP ............................................................ 369 8.2.1 Environmental management cost already incurred ............................................... 369 8.2.2 Environmental management cost for the expansion ............................................. 369

8.3 Conservation of Air, Water and Energy recovery ........................................................ 370 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION .................................................................................... 373 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED WITH RESPECT THE PROJECT

................................................................................................................................................ 374 10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 374 10.2 Quality Policy ............................................................................................................. 374 10.3 Services Offered ......................................................................................................... 374 10.4 Completed Projects .................................................................................................... 374 10.5 Accreditations for Environmental Consultancy Services ........................................... 375

CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY.............................................. 377 REFERENCE ....................................................................................................................... 381

LIST OF TABLE

Table ES.1 Salient features of the proposed Project .................................................................. 1 Table ES.2 Raw Material Statement - Sugar unit ...................................................................... 2 Table ES.3 Raw material requirement - Cogeneration .............................................................. 3 Table ES.4 Raw material requirement – Distillery .................................................................... 3 Table ES.5 Raw material for Incineration Boiler ...................................................................... 3 Table ES.6 Proposed Product Mix ............................................................................................. 6 Table ES.7 Environmental Monitoring Programme during Construction Phase ..................... 11 Table ES.8 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters during operation phase ...... 12 Table ES.9 EMP during operational phase of the project ........................................................ 14 Table 1.1 Management Setup .................................................................................................. 20 Table 2.1 Land Requirement .................................................................................................... 24 Table 2.2 Location features of the proposed project site (10 km radius) ................................ 25 Table 2.3 Salient features of the proposed project ................................................................... 34 Table 2.4 Details of other sugar industries nearby .................................................................. 37 Table 2.5 Varities of Sugar Cane ............................................................................................. 37 Table 2.6 Sugarcane availability in talukas around project ..................................................... 38 Table 2.7 Crushing report of nearby industries ....................................................................... 38





xxxii

Table 2.8 Sugar Cane availability in and around Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi District ............. 39 Table 2.9 Cane Availability in and around Bailhongal Taluk, Belagavi District .................... 39 Table 2.10 List of Raw Materials - Sugar Plant ....................................................................... 42 Table 2.11 Fuel for Cogeneration ............................................................................................ 43 Table 2.12 Raw material requirement – Distillery ................................................................... 43 Table 2.13 Fuel for Incineration boiler .................................................................................... 44 Table 2.14 Resource Requirement during Season ................................................................... 44 Table 2.15 Water requirement for distillery ............................................................................ 47 Table 2.16 Technical features of the plant - List of Equipments and Machinery .................... 49 Table 2.17 Proposed Plant and Machinery at cogen unit ......................................................... 50 Table 2.18 List of machinery to be installed at Distillery unit ................................................ 52 Table 2.19 Description of spent wash boiler ........................................................................... 55 Table 2.20 Proposed Product details ........................................................................................ 57 Table 2.21 Indian Standard Requirements for Different Kinds of Sugar ................................ 62 Table 2.22 Bagasse Balance .................................................................................................... 65 Table 2.23 Details of Boiler ..................................................................................................... 67 Table 2.24 Working details of Boiler ...................................................................................... 67 Table 2.25 Technical features of the plant - Sugar and Cogen ................................................ 68 Table 2.26 Characteristics of Yeast sludge .............................................................................. 71 Table 2.27 Synopsis of fuel ethanol plant operation ................................................................ 74 Table 2.28 Ethanol plant performance parameters .................................................................. 74 Table 2.29 Superfine Extra Neutral Alcohol Specifications .................................................... 75 Table 2.30 Absolute Alcohol (Ethanol) Specification ............................................................. 75 Table 2.31 Impure Spirit .......................................................................................................... 76 Table 2.32 Characteristics of Spent wash ................................................................................ 79 Table 2.33 The proposed 22 TPH Boiler features ................................................................... 80 Table 2.34 Technical parameters considered for design .......................................................... 81 Table 2.35 Turbine design parameters ..................................................................................... 81 Table 2.36 Characteristics of incineration boiler ash ............................................................... 82 Table 3.1 Baseline Environmental Data collection .................................................................. 85 Table 3.2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring ........................................ 86 Table 3.3 Details of the land use of study area ........................................................................ 89 Table 3.4 Details of soil sampling locations ............................................................................ 93 Table 3.5 Soil Quality Analysis ............................................................................................... 94 Table 3.6 Organic carbon percent in soil samples ................................................................... 96 Table 3.7 Rating Chart for Soil Test values and their Nutrient Indices ................................... 98 Table 3.8 Meteorological data from 1995 - 2013 .................................................................. 100 Table 3.9 Meteorological data of Belagavi District, 2014 ..................................................... 100 Table 3.10 Meteorological data collected at site ................................................................... 102 Table 3.11 Details of AAQM parameters with analysis methodology .................................. 104 Table 3.12 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations .......................................... 106 Table 3.13 Ambient Air Quality Status (October 2017 to Dec 2017) ................................... 108 Table 3.14 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results ....................................... 112 Table 3.15 Air quality Index .................................................................................................. 113 Table 3.16 Road Geometric Scenario .................................................................................... 116 Table 3.17 Speed spectrum for the study road (kmph) .......................................................... 118 Table 3.18 Real time traffic scenario along SH-30 (2 lanes undivided) ................................ 118 Table 3.19 Source of Raw material (Sugar Cane) & its Transportation ................................ 121 Table 3.20 Sugar Plant and Cogeneration Plant .................................................................... 122





xxxiii

Table 3.21 Sugar Plant, Cogeneration Plant and Distillery ................................................... 122 Table 3.22 Products Transportation ....................................................................................... 122 Table 3.23 Total traffic generated .......................................................................................... 123 Table 3.24 Modified V/C and LOS after adding generated traffic to existing traffic ........... 123 Table 3.25 Projected traffic for next three years based on individual vehicular growth as per

IRC: 37-2001(Exponential Growth is considered) ................................................................ 124 Table 3.26 Modified V/C and LOS after adding the generated traffic .................................. 124 Table 3.27 Consolidated V/C and level of Service for changed scenarios ............................ 124 Table 3.28 Details of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations ......................................... 126 Table 3.29 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Results ........................................................... 128 Table 3.30 Observations on Water source & Sanitation Status in the Study Area ................ 130 Table 3.31 Details of Water Quality Sampling Stations ........................................................ 132 Table 3.32 Field observations during sampling ..................................................................... 134 Table 3.33 Results of Ground Water Quality ........................................................................ 136 Table 3.34 Results of Surface Water Quality ........................................................................ 137 Table 3.35 Details of Water level monitoring from the existing bore wells (Deep Aquifers) in

study area ............................................................................................................................... 146 Table.3.36 Details of Water Quality monitoring from the existing bore wells (Deep Aquifers)

in the study area ..................................................................................................................... 150 Table. 3.37 NHS data at Mamadapura, Saundatti Taluk ....................................................... 153 Table. 3.38 NHS data at Munavalli, Saundatti Taluk ............................................................ 154 Table 3.39 NHS data at Saundatti, Saundatti Taluk .............................................................. 155 Table 3.40 NHS data at Sapola, Saundatti Taluk ................................................................... 156 Table 3.41 Details of sampling locations ............................................................................... 163 Table 3.42 Diversity of herbs, shrubs and climbers recorded at the project site. .................. 165 Table 3.43 Checklist of trees saplings planted/procured as a part of Green Belt Development

Plan. ....................................................................................................................................... 168 Table 3.44 Checklist of shrub saplings planted/procured as a part of Green Belt Development

Plan ........................................................................................................................................ 169 Table 3.45 Checklist of tree species recorded in the study area with their IUCN/RET status

and uses .................................................................................................................................. 171 Table 3.46 Phyto-sociological parameters of Trees in study area ......................................... 171 Table 3.47 Girth class distribution of trees in the study area ................................................. 172 Table 3.48 Diversity of herbs, shrubs and climbers recorded in the study area. ................... 173 Table 3.49 List of birds recorded at the project site .............................................................. 179 Table 3.50 List of butterflies recorded at the project site ...................................................... 180 Table 3.51 List of birds recorded in the study area ................................................................ 181 Table 3.52 List of butterflies recorded in the study area ....................................................... 185 Table 3.53 List of reptiles and mammals recorded in the study area .................................... 187 Table 3.54 Villages in the Project Influence area (PIA) of 10 km radius .............................. 191 Table 3.55 Area and Households in project Influence villages ............................................. 191 Table 3.56 Population and sex ratio ....................................................................................... 192 Table 3.57 Population and sex ratio of under 6year children ................................................ 193 Table 3.58 SC/ST population ................................................................................................. 193 Table 3.59 Literacy status of PIA villages ............................................................................. 195 Table 3.60 Total illiterates in PIA villages ............................................................................ 195 Table 3.61 Educational facilities in PIA villages ................................................................... 196 Table 3.62 Work participation rate in the PIA villages ......................................................... 197 Table 3.63 Work participation of male and female ............................................................... 198





xxxiv

Table 3.64 Occupational categories among main workers .................................................... 199 Table 3.65 Occupational categories of marginal workers in PIA villages ............................ 200 Table 3.66 Non workers in PIA villages ................................................................................ 201 Table 3.67 Health infrastructure available in PIA villages .................................................... 202 Table 3.68 Water supply and sanitation coverage in the Taluk ............................................. 203 Table 3.69 List of temples in PIA villages ............................................................................ 204 Table 4.1 Boiler Details ......................................................................................................... 210 Table 4.2 Chimney height calculation ................................................................................... 210 Table 4.3 Typical characteristics of bagasse .......................................................................... 211 Table 4.4 Typical characteristics of spent wash concentrate ................................................. 211 Table 4.5 Model Input ............................................................................................................ 212 Table 4.6 Values of PM without mitigation measures ........................................................... 216 Table 4.7 Air quality Index for predicted air quality after expansion- without Mitigation

Measures ................................................................................................................................ 217 Table 4.8 Technical Specification of Electrostatic Precipitator ............................................. 218 Table 4.9 Values for PM with mitigation measures .............................................................. 222 Table 4.10 Air quality Index for the predicted air quality after expansion - with Mitigation

Measures ................................................................................................................................ 223 Table 4.11 List of villages in the impact zone ....................................................................... 223 Table 4.12 Fugitive Emissions control strategy ..................................................................... 224 Table 4.13 Comparison between normal clay bricks and bagasse flyash bricks ................... 225 Table 4.14 Emission from vehicles from the project, g/km ................................................... 227 Table 4.15 Results of Noise prediction model ....................................................................... 230 Table 4.16 Water Conservation Proposal Techniques Considered in the Complex .............. 235 Table 4.17 Characteristics of Raw and Treated Effluent ....................................................... 236 Table 4.18 Details of Trees with >77 cm girth size in the study area.................................... 251 Table 4.19 Ecological index of the study area ....................................................................... 252 Table 4.20 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management details ................................................ 256 Table 4.21 Criteria for evaluation of impacts ........................................................................ 257 Table 4.22 Impact Identification Matrix ................................................................................ 258 Table 4.23 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction Activities ............ 259 Table 4.24 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase .................... 262 Table 5.1 Environmental Monitoring Programme during Construction Phase ..................... 266 Table 5.2 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters during operation phase ....... 267 Table 6.1 Possible Hazardous Locations onsite ..................................................................... 270 Table 6.2 Emergency Team Chart ......................................................................................... 276 Table 6.3 Emergency Task Force Table ................................................................................ 276 Table 6.4 Hazardous material storage Inventory ................................................................... 278 Table 6.5 Maximum Inventories of Harsha Sugar Plant Products (with Flash Points) ......... 281 Table 6.6 Hazardous Properties of Alcohol ........................................................................... 283 Table 6.7 Flammability Classification Criteria ...................................................................... 284 Table 6.8 Applicability of MSIHC Rules .............................................................................. 284 Table 6.9 Fire & Explosion Index & Category ...................................................................... 286 Table 6.10 Fire Explosion Index for Storage Units ............................................................... 287 Table 6.11 Short Listing of MCA Scenarios for Hazardous material .................................... 288 Table 6.12 Mathematical and Analytical Model for Hazard Analysis .................................. 290 Table 6.14 Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads ........................................................ 294 Table 6.15 Relationship between exposure time and heat flux ............................................. 295 Table 6.16 Physiological effect of Threshold Thermal Dose: ............................................... 295





xxxv

Table 6.17 Damage Effects of Blast Overpressure ................................................................ 296 Table 6.18 Damage Criteria for Pool Flare/Jet Fire ............................................................... 296 Table 6.19 Damage Distances Due to Spilled Product Fire Scenario for considered Areas . 297 Table 6.20 Results of Pool Fire Scenario for all Dyke walls ................................................. 297 Table 6.21 Damage Distances Due to Tank on Fire Scenario ............................................... 298 Table 6.22 Risk Classification Screening Table for Boiler and Turbine ............................... 304 Table 6.23 Risk Classification with respect to Above Reference .......................................... 305 Table 6.24 List of Key Persons at Factory ............................................................................. 308 Table 6.25 Disaster Control Management System ................................................................ 308 Table 6.26 Summary of Recommended Personal Protective Equipment According to hazard

onsite ...................................................................................................................................... 313 Table 6.27 Local statutory Government bodies ..................................................................... 315 Table 6.28 Health Evaluation schedule ................................................................................. 319 Table 6.29 Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems ............................. 320 Table 8.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during Construction Phase .................. 348 Table 8.2 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during operation phase ........................ 353 Table 8.3 Waste Minimization and Management Disposal Considered in the Complex ...... 363 Table 8.4 Details of Green belt development plan ................................................................ 367 Table 8.5 Time frame for Green belt development ................................................................ 367 Table 8.6 List of tree species recommended for Greenbelt Development ............................. 368 Table 8.7 Cost estimates for implementation of Environmental Management Plan ............. 369 Table 8.8 Compliance to the CREP guidelines- Sugar industry ............................................ 370 Table 8.9 Compliance to the CREP guidelines - Distillery ................................................... 371 Table 8.10 Compliance to MoEF&CC notification, 14-01-2016 .......................................... 372 Table 11.1 Composition of Environment Management Cell (EMC) ..................................... 377 Table 11.2 CSR- Budget estimates ........................................................................................ 379 Table 11.3 Budgetary allocation for the proposed CSR activities ......................................... 379

List of Figures

Fig ES.1 Process flow diagram - Sugar section ......................................................................... 4 Fig ES.2 Process flow diagram - Cogeneration section ............................................................. 5 Fig ES 3 Process flow diagram- Distillery section .................................................................... 5 Fig 2.1 Location of the Proposed Project ................................................................................. 26 Fig 2.2 Toposheet with 10 Km radius demarcation showing location of the proposed project

site (Topo sheets No: 48 M/1, 48 M/2, 48 I/13, 48 I/14 Scale: 1:50,000) ............................... 27 Fig 2.3 Project Site Photographs .............................................................................................. 29 Fig 2.4 Site Surroundings Photographs ................................................................................... 30 Fig 2.5 Aerial View of the proposed project site showing salient features ............................. 31 Fig 2.6 Aerial view of the Project Site showing 10 Kms radius demarcation ......................... 32 Fig 2.7 Map of Saundatti Taluk with locations of existing sugar/ distillery industry ............. 33 Fig 2.8 Plant layout of Harsha Sugars Ltd ............................................................................... 35 Fig 2.9 Plant Layout for distillery ............................................................................................ 36 Fig 2.10 Water balance chart- During season .......................................................................... 46 Fig 2.11 Water balance chart- During off-season (all values are in KLD) .............................. 46 Fig 2.12 Water balance chart- Distillery .................................................................................. 48 Fig 2.13 Schematic diagram of Integrated Sugar complex ...................................................... 63 Fig 2.14 Process Flow diagram of cogeneration ...................................................................... 66 Fig 2.15 Schematic diagram of Cogeneration process ............................................................. 67





xxxvi

Fig 2.16 Mass balance for 7500 TCD sugar unit and 30 MW/Hr cogeneration unit ............... 69 Fig 2.17 Process flow diagram - Distillery section .................................................................. 77 Fig 2.18 Process flow diagram - Distillery section .................................................................. 78 Fig 2.19 Material Balance- Distillery section .......................................................................... 79 Fig 2.20 Typical Boiler Schematic .......................................................................................... 81 Fig 2.21 Material balance and flow chart of working of Incineration boiler for the generation

of power ................................................................................................................................... 82 Fig 3.1 Route map of the project site ....................................................................................... 84 Fig 3.2 Satellite imagery map of the study area (10Km radius) .............................................. 90 Fig 3.3 Land use map of the study area (10Km radius) ........................................................... 91 Fig 3.4 Photographs showing Soil sampling in the study area ................................................ 92 Fig 3.5 Location of Soil Sampling Stations ............................................................................. 93 Fig 3.6 pH in soil samples ....................................................................................................... 95 Fig 3.7 EC in soil samples ....................................................................................................... 95 Fig 3.8 Organic Carbon in soil samples ................................................................................... 96 Fig 3.9 Available Nitrogen in soil samples .............................................................................. 98 Fig 3.10 Photograph showing Installed Micro Meteorological Station at site ...................... 102 Fig 3.11 Wind rose Diagram for the Period Oct 2017 - Dec 2017 ........................................ 103 Fig 3.12 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations ........................................... 105 Fig 3.13 Photographs showing ambient air quality monitoring (RDS, PM2.5 sampler and

gaseous samplers) at the study area ....................................................................................... 106 Fig 3.14 Flow Chart showing AAQM Methodology ............................................................. 107 Fig 3.15 Google map showing the site connectivity .............................................................. 115 Fig 3.16 Route map showing the connectivity of roads to the site ........................................ 116 Fig 3.17 Photos showing the traffic and existing road scenario ............................................ 117 Fig 3.18 Existing Road Geometry Scenario .......................................................................... 117 Fig 3.19 Vehicle composition along SH-30 ........................................................................... 119 Fig 3.20 Traffic flow distribution along SH30 ...................................................................... 119 Fig 3.22 T-junction of Proposed Approach Road and SH-30 ................................................ 125 Fig 3.23 Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations .......................................... 127 Fig 3.24 View of Noise Monitoring ....................................................................................... 127 Fig 3.25 Photos of water samples .......................................................................................... 131 Fig 3.26 Location of Water Quality Sampling Stations ......................................................... 133 Fig 3.27 Water Sampling Photographs .................................................................................. 134 Fig 3.28 Drainage map of study area (10 Km radius) ............................................................ 143 Fig 3.29 Geological map of study area (10 Km radius) ......................................................... 144 Fig 3.30 Depth to water level map of the study area (10 Km radius) .................................... 147 Fig 3.31 Water table elevation map of the study area (10 Km radius) .................................. 148 Fig 3.32 Electrical Conductivity distribution in the study area (10 Km radius) .................... 151 Fig 3.33 Chloride distribution in the study area (10 Km radius) ........................................... 152 Fig 3.34 Hydrograph at Mamadapur, Saundatti taluk ............................................................ 157 Fig 3.35 Hydrograph at Munavalli, Saundatti taluk .............................................................. 157 Fig 3.36 Hydrograph at Saundatti, Saundatti taluk ................................................................ 158 Fig 3.37 Hydrograph at Sapola, Saundatti taluk .................................................................... 158 Fig 3.38 View of Malaprabha River ...................................................................................... 160 Fig 3.39 View of Yellamma gudda ........................................................................................ 161 Fig 3.40 Study area map showing sampling locations ........................................................... 163 Fig 3.42 Greenery development photographs ........................................................................ 170 Fig 3.47 Birds recorded at the project site ............................................................................. 180





xxxvii

Fig 3.48 Birds recorded in the study area .............................................................................. 185 Fig 3.49 Butterflies recorded in the study area ...................................................................... 186 Fig 3.50 Field visit Photographs ............................................................................................ 189 Fig 3.51 Area and households in the Project Influenced Areas ............................................. 192 Fig 3.52 SC and ST population .............................................................................................. 194 Fig 3.53 Literates and Illiterate Male and Female in PIA villages ........................................ 196 Fig 3.54 Work participation rates and status of main and marginal workers ........................ 197 Fig 3.55 Gender work participation ....................................................................................... 198 Fig 3.56 Occupational categories- main workers .................................................................. 199 Fig 3.57 Occupational categories of marginal workers in PIA villages ................................ 200 Fig 3.59 Non workers and male-female representation ......................................................... 202 Fig 3.60 Photographs of community interactions .................................................................. 206 Fig 4.1 Isopleths drawn for PM without mitigation measures ............................................... 213 Fig 4.2 Isopleths drawn for SO2 without mitigation measures .............................................. 214 Fig 4.3 Isopleths drawn for NO2 without mitigation measures ............................................. 215 Fig 4.4 Isopleths drawn for PM with mitigation measures .................................................... 219 Fig 4.5 Isopleths drawn for SO2 with mitigation measures.................................................... 220 Fig 4.6 Isopleths drawn for NO2 with mitigation measures................................................... 221 Fig 4.7 Photos of existing air pollution management ............................................................ 225 Fig 4.8 Predicted Concentration of Carbon Monoxide due to movement of vehicles ........... 227 Fig 4.9 Photos showing parking area and internal roads ....................................................... 228 Fig 4.10 Isopleths drawn using dhwaniPRO software ........................................................... 230 Fig 4.11 Sequential Mechanism of Anaerobic Waste Treatment .......................................... 239 Fig 4.12 Process Flow Diagrams CPU .................................................................................. 242 Fig 4.13 Flat roof for roof-top rain water harvesting ............................................................. 243 Fig 4.14 Typical Recharge Pit Model .................................................................................... 243 Fig 4.15 Diversion of storm-water to recharge pit ................................................................. 244 Fig 4.16 Desilting chamber to trap silt from the storm water ................................................ 244 Fig 4.17 Recharge Pit - A schematic diagram ..................................................................... 245 Fig 4.18 Recharge Shaft for recharging deeper aquifer - schematic diagram ....................... 245 Fig 4.19 A typical Recharge Trench ...................................................................................... 246 Fig 4.20 A typical Recharge cum Storage Pond – Model ...................................................... 247 Fig 4.21 Schematic diagram showing carbon sequestration trends in the study area ............ 249 Fig 6.1 Safety organizational cell .......................................................................................... 275 Fig 6.2 Event Tree Analysis for Atmospheric Storage of Flammable Liquids ..................... 289 Fig 6.3 Fault Tree Analysis for Top Event of Pool Fire Scenario ......................................... 289 Fig 6.4 Schematic of a Flare/Jet Fire ..................................................................................... 299 Fig 6.5 Schematic of a Pool Fire/Spilled Fire ........................................................................ 299 Fig 6.6 Symbolic representation of pool fire and radiation effect from source at centre

(pool/spill) .............................................................................................................................. 300 Fig 6.7 Onsite Disaster Management - Disaster Control Management System (Block

Diagram) ................................................................................................................................ 309 Fig 6.8 Various Organization Involved During Emergency (Block Diagram) ...................... 316 Fig 8.1 Environmental Management Cell .............................................................................. 362





xxxviii

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Annexure 1 Consent for establishment (CFE) & Consent for operation (CFO) copy

Annexure 2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring date wise data

Annexure 3 Greenbelt development plan

Annexure 4 Plant Layout of Sugar complex

Annexure 5 SE report enclosures

Annexure 6 Proceedings with Attendance list of EPH & Representations for EPH

Annexure 7 Letter received from KNNL (Karnataka Neeravari Nigam Ltd.,

Government of Karnataka





19

INTRODUCTION

1.1 Introduction

M/s Harsha Sugars Limited was incorporated on 8th

August 2014 as a Private Limited

company and on 30th

December 2014 converted as Public Limited Company. Now, the

management has decided to expand its production from the present 4,500 TCD to 7,500 TCD

sugarcane crushing unit, Cogeneration Unit from 14MW/Hr to 30MW/Hr and establishment

of 60 KLPD distillery along with installation of 3 MW/Hr from incineration boiler at Sy

No411/1, 411/2, 413/1, 412, 411/3 Saundatti Village, Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi Dist,

Karnataka. Currently, 51.3 acres of land is in the name of M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd. Total

capital investment on the industry is Rs 307.32 Crores (Out of which, Rs. 62.32 Crores is

reserved for expansion).

1.2 About Promoters of M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd and Promoters

Profile

1. Smt. Laxmi R Hebbalkar, Chairperson and Managing Director

Smt. Laxmi R Hebbalkar is the key person who is instrumental in conceptualization of the

proposed project. She is young energetic entrepreneur. She has completed her M.A (Political

Science) in 2002 from Mysore University and thereafter she has actively involved in the

developmental politics. She is also Director in Bhagyalaxmi Sugars Ltd.,

2. Mr. Channaraj B Hattiholi, Executive Director

Mr. Channaraj B Hattiholi stake holder in the project and he is the key person who is also

instrumental in conceptualisation of the proposed project, is young energetic entrepreneur. He

has completed his BE, Marine Engineering from BIT Ranchi University and worked as

Second Engineer in MNC K- Line shipping Company and have experience in handling

Boilers, compressors, draft fans, diesel engines. Being engineer by profession, he has sound

technical background and his services will be highly useful to the company. He is regularly

engaged in interaction with technical and industrial experts to arrive at project technology

specification.

1.2.1 Organizational Structure

The company's activities are managed by dedicated 'Board of Directors'. The board proposes

to appoint technical persons with hands-on experience in respective fields. The board is

responsible for policy decision, direction and corporate governance. The chairperson and

Directors monitoring day to day functioning of the company and they will be supported by

General Manager. Company's activities are divided into various line functions and back

office functions.

1





20

Table 1.1 Management Setup

Sl. No. Name Designation

1 Smt. Laxmi R Hebbalkar Chairperson and Managing Director

2 Shri. Channaraj B Hattiholi Executive Director

3 Shri. Mrinal R Hebbalkar Director

4 Mr. Sadashiv Thorat GM-Process

1.3 Purpose of the Report

In order to assess potential environmental impacts arising due to the proposed expansion of

Sugar Plant from 4,500 TCD to 7,500 TCD; Co-generation plant from 14 MW/Hr to 30

MW/Hr and establishment of 60 KLPD distillery and installation of incineration boiler for the generation of 3 MW/Hr, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study has been

carried out for the study area of 10 Kms radius around the project site, incorporating baseline

data for various environmental components, viz. air, water, noise, soil, land, socio-economic

and biological environment along with the parameters of human interest and to prepare

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for mitigating adverse impacts along with

delineation of post project environmental monitoring programme. The report presents

baseline data collected during Post-monsoon Season (Oct 2017 to Dec 2017); identification,

prediction and evaluation of impacts and delineation of environmental management plan for

mitigation of adverse impacts due to the proposed expansion project including Environmental

Monitoring Programme & Budgetary provisions of the same to make project Eco-friendly.

1.4 Need of the project

Sugar cane is one of the important cash crops of India. The industries based on sugarcane and

its allied by-products help farmers and provide employment to the rural people. Bagasse,

molasses and press mud are the by-products of sugar industry. These products once thought

to be waste are now being used as raw material in the production of valuable products such as

alcohol, bio-manure and allied products. The sugar is also food commodity required to be

distributed to local marketing and also has a potential to earn foreign exchange by the export.

The demand of electrical power has been ever increasing at a faster pace after country's

economic development pace speeded up. The effective generation of power has not been

meeting the demand and the same trend is expected to continue, especially during the peak

hours and summer seasons. Hence there is a good scope for exporting power to the grid

through power traders.

Indian sugar industry is the country's second largest agro processing industry with a

production capacity of over 27 million ton of white crystal sugar annually. Majority of the

farmers in Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh and Karnataka are dependent on sugarcane cultivation

and sugar industry. Due to increasing irrigation facilities, easy accessibility to modern

technology in cultivation and weather forecasting there exist unlimited potential for

increasing production as the area under sugar cultivation is only 3 % of the total cultivable

area in the country contributing above 7.5 % of the gross values of agricultural production in

the country. Above 50 million farmers depend on sugar cane cultivation for their livelihood

and equal number of agricultural labourers earns their living by working in sugar cane farms.

India requires alcohol for the following three major purposes:

For potable liquor





21

For industrial use

For fuel blending

Thus, alcohol produced from one source i.e., molasses is used for all 3 purposes. There is an

urgent need to bring in above quality consciousness in the industry and appropriate policy

measures by the Government. Indian distillery industry broadly consists of two parts:

Production of alcohol from molasses for industrial alcohol

Production of alcohol from molasses for liquor purposes.

Ethanol demand for fuel blending is a recent phenomenon. For this purpose, alcohol from

molasses is used. The potable distillery producing Indian made Foreign Liquor (IMFL) has

steady but limited demand. The alcohol produced is now being utilised in the ratio of

approximately 52 % for potable purpose and the balance 48 % for industrial purpose.

Apart from the above, direct employment of 100-110 nos and indirect employment of 200

no’s anticipated. Management will support local administration and assist in the development

of public amenities. Greenbelt of 17 acres will create healthy environment.

1.5 Scope of Environment Impact Assessment (EIA)

The study includes detailed characterization of existing status of environment in an area of 10

Kms radius. Under the scope of EIA, it is envisaged:

To assess the present status of air, noise, water, soil/land, biological and socio-

economic components of the environment.

To identify, predict and evaluate various significant impacts that will arise due to the

project development on various environmental components during construction stage

and operational stage.

To propose pollution control measures/mitigations and delineate detailed

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) also outlining additional control measures to

be adopted for mitigation of adverse impacts.

To delineate post-project Environmental Monitoring Programme to be pursued by M/s

Harsha Sugars Ltd., as part of compliance monitoring during the construction and

operational stage of the project including submission of six monthly compliance

reports to various departments as stipulated in the Environmental Clearance

conditions.

1.6 Applicable Environmental Regulations and Standards

With respect to prevention and control of environmental pollution, the following Acts and

Rules govern the proposed project:

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and its subsequent

amendments.

Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and its subsequent amendments

Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 amended in 1991 and Environment (Protection)

rules, 1986 and amendments thereafter.

Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2016, and its subsequent

amendments.





22

The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its subsequent

amendments.

Revised National Ambient Air Quality Standards as per the MoEF Notification dated

16th

November, 2009.

Factories Act, 1948.

The Generic structure given in EIA notification dated 14th

September, 2006 is maintained.

Since, it is an expansion of existing project, Chapter 5 is omitted which describes analysis of

alternatives (Technology and Site). As in the present project, conventional sugar

manufacturing which is well proven technology over a few decades all over the world is

being followed, alternative technology is not suggested and also analysis of alternative site is

not applicable. Similarly, Chapter 9 is also omitted as it is not recommended in the scoping

stage.




M/s. Harsha Sugars Ltd M/s. EHS Consultants Pvt Ltd 23

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Type of the project

M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd is planning to expand sugar cane crushing unit from 4500 TCD to

7500 TCD, Co-generation unit from 14 MW/Hr to 30 MW/Hr and establishment of 60 KLPD

distillery and 3 MW/Hr power by the installation of incineration boiler at Sy Nos 411/1,

411/2,413/1, 412, 411/3 of Saundatti village, Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi District, Karnataka.

According to EIA Notification dated 14th

September 2006, the Project falls under Category

“A” schedule 5(j), 5 (g) and 1(d). Therefore, it is necessary for M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd to

obtain Environmental Clearance from MoEF&CC, New Delhi. Based on the appraisal of the

draft TORs during EAC meeting held on 15-06-2017, TOR for the project from MoEF was

accorded on 19-07-2017. TORs awarded for the project is enclosed in the beginning of this

report.

2.2 Criteria for site selection

This location was ideal because of the following reasons:

Raw material availability at competitive price around the project. The area is amongst

the sugar cane rich belt and the farmers have intensive experience in sugar cane

cultivation. The cane availability and potential in the command area is excellent and

will ensure sustained cane availability.

The project site is located along SH-30 of RoW 15m which connects to Karkatti /

Belagavi on one side and to Saundatti on another side and SH 30 is of 2 lanes with

undivided traffic flow.

Availability of sufficient land to cater to all needs of Sugar Complex.

Availability of skilled man power.

Availability of power near to site.

Availability of perennial water source.

2.2.1 Project Site Description

The industry is located at Sy No 411/1, 411/2,

413/1, 412, 411/3 Saundatti Village, Saundatti

Taluk, Belagavi Dist, along SH-30 at GPS

location of 15 0 42' 58.43" N : 75

0 03' 37.96" E

spread over an area of 51.3 Acres. The site is

surrounded by Agricultural land growing

wheat, bajra, and groundnut. The industry is

located at an RL of 656 m amsl. Renuka Sagar

Reservoir located at a distance of 5 Km in

Northern direction and Malaprabha River

2





located at a distance of 12.2 Km in NW direction. Karikatti Village is the nearest village

situated at a distance of 3.4 Km in NW direction from the industry. Yellamma gudda open

scrub forest is located at a distance of 7.09 Km in NE direction. Ancient Yellamma temple is

situated on the hillock which is at a distance of 10.2Km from industry. Black clay loam soil is

observed at the site. Ground water is available at a depth of 40 m to 60 m (bgl). Acacia

leucophloea, Azadirachta indica, Bixa orellana, Carica papaya, Dypsis lutescens, Ficus

benjamina, Grevillea robusta, Holoptelea integrifolia are the major plant species existing in

the study area. Facilities provided at site to the labours are described in the subsequent

sections.

Construction of 4500 TCD sugar cane crushing and 14 MW/Hr cogeneration unit is in

progress. The said capacity of installation does not attract the provisions of EIA Notification,

2006. However, Consent for Establishment (CFE) was obtained from KSPCB on 30-04-2015.

Copy of CFE is enclosed in Annexure-1. Based on the same, the construction works were

started in January 2016. Recently industry has obtained Consent for Operation (CFO) & copy

of the same is enclosed as annexure-1. Photographs showing the site and its surrounding are

presented in the subsequent sections. Total land required for the industry for various purposes

is detailed below;

Table 2.1 Land Requirement

Sl No Land Description Area (acres)

1 Factory

a Raw material storage yard 5

b Sugar Unit 10

c Distillery 7

d Power plant 7

e Admin, repair shop, lab 2

f Internal Road 2

2 Landscape, garden/greenbelt development 17

3 Officers and workers colony 1.3

Total 51.3

2.3 Road Connectivity

The Project is located along SH-30 of RoW 15m which connects to Karikatti/

Belagavi on one side and to Saundatti on another side. SH-30 is of 2 lanes with

undivided traffic flow.

The Entry/Exit of the project site is provided to SH-30 through an approach road

where there is no traffic at present. After commissioning of the project, the raw

materials carrying Trucks / tractors/ Bullock carts will move along the approach road.

The project can also be accessed from other places such as Kittore, Bailhongal,

Belagavi, Saundatti, Karikatti and other nearby places. However, the traffic from all

these locations will have to join to SH-30 to reach the plant.

The proposed approach road will form a T- junction with SH-30. This junction will

have to be designed in accordance with KSHIP / KRDCL based on IRC/ MORTH

specifications.





2.4 Project site

Table 2.2 Location features of the proposed project site (10 km radius)

Sl.No Items Particulars

1 Project Sugar Complex

2 Total project area 51.3 Acres(Expansion will be within the premises)

3 Latitude : Longitude 15043’13.39 ” N :75

03’39.07 ” E

4 GPS readings of project

site boundary

15 0 43’ 19.25” N : 75

0 03’ 30.99 ” E

15 0 43’ 09.98” N : 75

0 03’ 29.91 ” E

15 0 42’ 58.59” N : 75

0 03’ 28.15 ” E

15 0 42’ 58.43” N : 75

0 03’ 37.96 ” E

15 0 43’ 05.13” N : 75

0 03’ 35.46 ” E

15 0 43’ 04.96” N : 75

0 03’ 46.65 ” E

15 0 43’ 10.46” N : 75

0 03’ 47.22 ” E

15 0 43’ 21.09” N : 75

0 03’ 53.56 ” E

5 Nearest Water Body Renuka Sagar Reservoir – 5Km (N)

6 Nearest river No, Malaprabha River –12.2Km (NW)

7 Nearest Reserved Forest Yellamma gudda open scrub forest- 7.09 Km (NE)

8 Nearest Village Karikatti village –3.4 Km (NW).

9 Nearest Town Saundatti Town- 6.25 Km (NE)

10 Nearest Defence

Installation

Nil

11 Nearest Highway State Highway 30 – 1.58Km (N)

12 Temp., Min and Max 13.9°C to 37.5°C

13 Annual Rainfall 769mm (average of 10 years)

14 Soil Type Black soil with clay loam texture

15 Topography Undulating terrain

16 Nearest religious place Yellamma Temple -10.2 kms (NE)

17 Nearest distilleries Nil in the study area of 10 Km radius. However Renuka

Sugars Ltd., Munoli, Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi having 120

KLPD distillery is located at 15.41Km.

18 Environmental Sensitive

receptor

Yellamma Temple -10.2 kms (NE), Saundatti town -6.25

kms (NE), Karikatti Village -3.4 kms (NW)

19 Archaeologically

important sites

Yellamma Temple -10.2 kms (NE)





Fig 2.1 Location of the Proposed Project





Fig 2.2 Toposheet with 10 Km radius demarcation showing location of the proposed

project site (Topo sheets No: 48 M/1, 48 M/2, 48 I/13, 48 I/14 Scale: 1:50,000)

N





Photographs taken during study period (Oct to Dec, 2017)

Boiling House Chemical storage room





Mill house and Boilng House Mill house

Sugar Godown Cane unloading

Bagasse elevator Molasses tank

Photographs taken during August 2018

Fig 2.3 Project Site Photographs





Fig 2.4 Site Surroundings Photographs





Fig 2.5 Aerial View of the proposed project site showing salient features

N





Fig 2.6 Aerial view of the Project Site showing 10 Kms radius demarcation

N





Source: Atlas of Sugar mills, 2012

Fig 2.7 Map of Saundatti Taluk with locations of existing sugar/ distillery industry





2.5 Project Details

Table 2.3 Salient features of the proposed project

Sl. No Items Particulars

1 Objective of the Project Expansion of sugar cane crushing capacity from 4500 TCD to

7500 TCD, Co-generation unit from 14MW/Hr to 30 MW/Hr

and establishment of 60 KLPD distillery along with the

installation of 3 MW/Hr from incineration boiler.

2 Total capacity of the

industry after expansion

7500 TCD sugar unit,30 MW/Hr cogeneration, 3 MW/Hr

power from incineration boiler and 60 KLPD distillery

3 Promoters M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd

4 Total Investment, Rs 307.32Crores (Expansion : Rs.62.32 Crores)

5 Project location Sy No 411/1, 411/2, 413/1, 412, 411/3 Saundatti Village,

Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi Dist, Karnataka.

6 Latitude & Longitude 15°43'13.39"N: 75° 3'39.07"E

7 Extent of land 51.3 Acres (Expansion will be within the premises)

8 Co-ordinates of the

project site boundary 15

0 43' 19.25"N

75 0 03' 30.99"E

15 0 42' 58.59"N

75 0 03' 28.15"E

150 43' 05.13"N

75 0 03' 35.46"E

15 0 43' 04.96"N

75 0 03' 46.65"E

9 Category of Project 5 (g) Distillery, 5 (j) Sugar, 1(d) Thermal

10 Man Power 370 No's (100 no's for expansion)

11 Water demand and

Source

For Sugar and cogeneration unit:

During season: 388 KLD

During off season: 937 KLD

For Distillery: 480 KLD

Source: Malaprabha River

12 Power supply The total power required for the proposed project will be

500kwh – for construction phase from HESCOM

During Season:

Power Generation: 30 MW/Hr

Power Consumption at Co-Gen Unit: 3.0 MW/Hr (10% on

generation)

Power Consumption for Sugar Unit: 5.2 MW/Hr (24 units/Ton

of Cane)

Power Export :21.8MW/Hr

During Off - Season:

Power Generation: 30 MW/Hr

Power Consumption at Co-Gen Unit: 2.4 MW/Hr (8% on

generation)

Power Consumption for Sugar Unit: 0.5 MW/Hr

Power Export: 27.1 MW/Hr

Distillery unit

Power generation: 3 MW/Hr

Power consumption:1.3 MW/Hr

Power export: 1.7 MW/Hr





Sl. No Items Particulars

13 Number of working

days

Sugar unit: 180 days

Cogeneration:300 days

Distillery: 300 days

14 Project implementation

period

18 months after obtaining EC and CFE

Fig 2.8 Plant layout of Harsha Sugars Ltd





Fig 2.9 Plant Layout for distillery





2.6 Raw Materials - Sugar unit

2.6.1 General

There are two sugar industries with operation in near vicinity and one proposed sugar

industry in 30 Km from the project site. Following table details about the distance from the

nearby sugar industries to the project site.

Table 2.4 Details of other sugar industries nearby

Sl no Particulars Distance, Km

1 Someshwar Sahakari Sakkare Kharkhane Ltd.,

Siddasamudra,Bailhogal Taluk, Belagavi 15.35

2 Renuka Sugars Ltd., Munoli, Saudatti Taluk, Belagavi 15.41

3 Angadi Datta Sugars Pvt Ltd., Hoswal Village, Dharwad

Taluk and district (Proposed) 29.44

2.6.2 About project site Agro Climatic Conditions

2.6.2.1 Water

The water requirement for the proposed project will be drawn from nearby Malaprabha River

which is at 12.2Kmaway from the site. Application is already submitted to the Water

Resources Department (WRD), GoK seeking permission to lift the water from the river.

2.6.2.2 Soil quality analysis

The project site is located in the Northern Dry Zone. Red and black soils are found in

association in small patches in different lands of the surrounding areas and it accounts for 14-

16 % of cultivable area of the zone. The black soils share the majority of land by 60-70 %,

Clayey in texture and typically dark in colour. The physical conditions of these soils are

plastic and sticky and has a tendency to swell and shrink when subjected to wetting and

drying cycles. Soil samples of the study area have high organic carbon content due to the

optimum application of organic manure by farmers.

2.6.2.3 Cropping Pattern

Major crops grown in project area are Sugar Cane, Maize, Wheat, Sun-flower, Groundnut,

Jowar and soybean, which occupy 82 % of area under cultivation. Sugarcane crop alone

occupies about 51 % of area under cultivation. Malaprabha reservoir in the region serves

Irrigation & domestic needs of the region and is under the control of KNNL (Karnataka

Neeravari Nigam Limited, Govt of Karnataka). This shows how intensively sugarcane crop is

grown in area of operation. Sugarcane planting is done in months of October to March.

Farmers also plant crops, intercrops like Soybean and Vegetables like Cauliflower, Chillies,

and Onion are taken between 2 rows of sugarcane which gives maximum profit to growers,

some farmers also take wheat as intercrops like Soybean, and Vegetables like Cauliflower,

Chillies, and Onion are taken between 2 rows of sugarcane which gives maximum profit to

growers. The sugarcane varieties grown in the area are given in following table:

Table 2.5 Varities of Sugar Cane

Sl No Type of Varieties Name of the Varieties %

1 Early Maturing Co -671, Co-92020, Co-85002, Co-890247704 4.32





2 Mid Maturing Co-8014, Co-88028, Co-87025, Co-8371,

Co-86032, Co-89010

39.42

3 Late Maturing Co-740, Co-8011, Co-88121 56.26

From the above table it is observed that the percentage of Early, Mid Late and Late varieties

is 4 %, 39 %, and 56 % respectively. In order to get more average season recovery, the

percentage should be 33:33:34 respectively.

2.6.3 Sugarcane Availability

The standard of sugarcane cultivation of cane growers in nearby villages is very good.

The per Ha yield is estimated to be 125 MT.

No shortage of water was noticed because all the cane area is fully irrigated and

ground water table is good.

No major pests and diseases were noticed on cane crop.

In the cane area of 15 Km radius, fresh cane will be available for crushing leading to

less transportation costs and higher recovery.

The cane report prepared based on the inputs available from the survey of the local area of

the allocated cane area of the industry. The survey covered cane area of Saundatti Taluk and

Bailhongal Taluk of Belagavi District, which is within 30 Km radius from the industry site.

The major aspects of the field study cover the following:

The cropping pattern, cane varieties, cane economics and economics of the

competitive crops.

The existing and future sources of Irrigation.

Cane culture and orientation of farmers in surrounding areas.

Agro- climatic conditions.

Information in relation to existing nearby sugar factories in the taluk.

New sugar projects under implementation or those likely to come in the near future.

As per information collected from Joint Director of Agriculture, Belagavi District, Belagavi,

area under sugarcane in taluks around project is given below:

Table 2.6 Sugarcane availability in talukas around project

Sl No Taluk Sugarcane area, Ha

1 Saundatti 4016

2 Bailhongal 1893

Table 2.7 Crushing report of nearby industries

Sl No Particulars Crushing, MT

in 2013-14

Sugar

produced,

MT

Sugar

Recovery

(%)

1 Someshwar Sahakari Sakkare

Karkhane Ltd., Siddasamudra,

Bailhongal Taluk, Belagavi

208018.30 24155.20 11.61

2 Renuka Sugars Ltd., Munoli,

Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi 1229170 143580 11.64





There is no khandasari unit in the area and hence there is no possibility of diversion of cane.

Cane Availability in and around Saundatti Taluk& Bailahongal Taluk, Belagavi District,

Karnataka as per the certificate issued by Assistant Director of Agriculture, Saundatti vide

letter dated 16th

Feb 2015 is given below:

Table 2.8 Sugar Cane availability in and around Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi District

Sl

no Village

Sugar cane

area, Ha

Productivity

(T/Ha)

Total production

(T)

1 Asundi 515 125 64375

2 Mugali 245 125 30625

3 Shinarakoppa 815 125 101875

4 Sutagatti 180 125 22500

5 Alagi 420 125 52500

6 Hittanagi 228 125 28500

7 Govindakoppa K.Y 62 125 7750

8 Bamagundikoppa 65 125 8125

9 Gurla Hosur 285 125 35625

10 Naduvinahalli 188 125 23500

11 Kenchalarakoppa 110 125 13750

12 Saundatti 780 125 97500

13 Kadehalli 65 125 8125

14 Inamahongala 12 125 1500

15 Kencharamanahala 15 125 1875

16 Yadahalli 18 125 2250

17 Sangreshakoppa 13 125 1625

Total 4016 502000

Table 2.9 Cane Availability in and around Bailhongal Taluk, Belagavi District

Sl

no Village

Sugar cane

area, Ha

Productivity

(T/Ha)

Total production

(T)

1 Amatur 130 125 16250

2 Bevinakoppa 62 125 7750

3 Hiremulakur 10 125 1250

4 Chikkamulakur 22 125 2750

5 Devalapur 6 125 750

6 Garjur 95 125 11875

7 Holinagalapur 115 125 14375

8 Kadatanala 59 125 7375

9 Belwadi 133 125 16625

10 Siddasamudra 69 125 8625

11 Vakkunda 110 125 13750

12 Korikoppa 30 125 3750

13 Anigola 70 125 8750

14 Sangolli 70 125 8750





Sl

no Village

Sugar cane

area, Ha

Productivity

(T/Ha)

Total production

(T)

15 Govanakoppa 35 125 4375

16 Gudikatti 55 125 6875

17 Chikkabelikatti 12 125 1500

18 Dodavada 5 125 625

19 Nanagundikoppa 34 125 4250

20 Udikeri 195 125 24375

21 Budihala 60 125 7500

22 Mugabasava 72 125 9000

23 Bailavada 15 125 1875

24 Chivatagundi 12 125 1500

25 Yadala 8 125 1000

26 Sanikoppa 40 125 5000

27 Budrakatti 60 125 7500

28 Bidaragaddi 45 125 5625

29 Tu. Shigihalli 55 125 6875

30 Kadasagatti 30 125 3750

31 Hirebellikatti 30 125 3750

32 Pattihala (KB) 38 125 4750

33 Savatagi 23 125 2875

34 Kenanura 30 125 3750

35 Jalikoppa 18 125 2250

36 Aravalli 17 125 2125

37 Lingadalli 8 125 1000

38 Bailahongala 15 125 1875

Total 1893 236625

Considering sugar plant capacity of 7,500 TCD with 160-180 seasonal days, with maximum

90% capacity utilization, the sugar cane requirement would be1350000 T. However, the

sugarcane available in cane area as per certificate of Assistant Director of Agriculture will be

more then the company's requirement and therefore cane can be easily made available from

these cane areas. Further, the company will undertake cane development program to increase

the sugar cane cultivation area and its yield in the cane area of the industry.

2.6.4 Requirement of Cane Development Programmes

The plant will take up with the following cane developmental programmes.

2.6.4.1 Seed Nursery cum Demonstration Plots

It is very important to establish seed nurseries cum demonstration plots of about 30 hectares

near plant site on lease or purchase from cane growers. This area will have an Irrigation

facility and utilisation of treated wastewater will also be carried out. The main objectives of

this nursery cum demonstration plots will be as follows:





2.6.4.2 Supply of Seed

The success of the industry depends on the quality of supply of raw material i.e. fresh

sugarcane in sufficient quantities. It is being observed by the DPR consultants that only 2

cane varieties are grown by the growers i.e. Co-671 an early variety and Co-740 a main

season late variety. For getting good recovery, the mill has to plant early Mid and Late

maturing varieties in the nursery and supply them to progressive cane growers for further

multiplication. The seed material for planting on nursery can be done through Agricultural

Research station, Saundatti. This task ensures the increase in the level of sugar recovery. The

promising varieties maturing in early, Mid & Late season of cane crushing are listed below:

Early: Co-671, Co- 92020, Co-85002

Mid: Co- 89014, Co- 89010, and Co 86032, 88028

Late: Co- 740, Co-8011

The supply of cane to mill varieties should be Early - 33%, Mid - 33% and Late - 34%.This

type of supply will increase sugar recovery by 0.5 % to 1.0%. This will require a judicious

planning and execution including computerized harvesting.

2.6.4.3 Supply of Seed & Fertilizers

It is very essential to provide pegs, fertilizer and pesticides as loan to sugarcane growers in

order to save farmers from the clutches of the middlemen as well as moneylenders. Supply of

inputs say seed, fertilizer and pesticides in time and in required quantity would help in a long

run to increase productivity of sugarcane. A well-designed scheme should be worked out with

the help of Nationalized Bank which provide loan to the sugar cane growers.

2.6.4.4 Drip Irrigation

Drip irrigation is a new technique in which maximization of quality of cane is obtained in

least quantity of water. Government also encourages drip irrigation. Whenever drought

conditions exist, drip irrigation shall have to be followed. More than 70 to 80% area is

irrigated by tube wells. It is a technique which helps to overcome the problem of less rainfall

which causes an adverse effect on the recovery of sugarcane. The response from the farmers

to adopt this system is very much encouraging as it saves water to an extent of 50-60%.

Hence, farmers can double the area to grow sugarcane crop. Moreover, it helps to increase the

yield by 30-40% and saves fertilizer by 25-30%. Besides, drip Irrigation also saves weeding

time and labour cost.

2.6.4.5 Tissue Culture

Tissue Culture is an advanced technique of rapid multiplication of higher yielding varieties of

sugar. The old and traditional seed multiplication takes a long time say about 5-6 years for a

good variety to reach farmers. By adopting the technique of tissue culture, seed multiplication

can be gained in about 1-2 years of span. Advantages of Tissue culture established by

Agriculture Universities, laboratories and also by private parties should be considered.

2.6.4.6 Upgrading Technology

There is rapid rate of increase in science and technology. It is very essential to upgrade the

technical knowledge of cane farmers by educating them through technical courses offered at

Agricultural Universities, Sugar Research Institute at Pune or Khanapur and Sugar Breeding

Institute at Coimbatore. Implementation of advanced technology in the plant helps in





increasing the productivity with better quality and there by increases the technical skill

among the working staff. It further leads to the growth of the industry and in turn the

development of the country.

2.6.4.7 Crop Competition

Crop competition among cane growers encourages potentiality of the cane growers for

getting more yield of cane. It is suggested that industry should arrange sugar cane crop

competitions for plant and of early, mid and late varieties to know the potential of cane yield.

Attractive prizes shall be awarded to the winners in order to up-hold their interest. This will

help in a long way in encouraging cane growers for getting more yield of cane.

2.6.4.8 Organic Manure

It is essential to augment the soil with organic manures available from green manuring,

compost, vermi-compost and press mud cake. Incorporation of organic manures will increase

the fertility of soils, thereby increasing the quality and yield of the cane. HSL shall make

arrangements for preparing compost from press mud cake, animal dung from cane yard and

other waste materials.

2.6.4.9 Soil Testing

To know the fertility condition of the soil in the command area, soil samples will be drawn.

Testing for pH, EC, N, P2O5, K2O and micronutrients will be carried out through soil testing

laboratories of Agriculture Department and MoEF recognized laboratory. This will help us to

follow field based approach to recommend right dosages of chemical fertilizers and micro-

nutrients forgetting high yield and to avoid application of excess nutrients in turn to reduce

the cost of cultivation.

2.6.5 Raw Material Requirement- Sugar Plant

Table 2.10 List of Raw Materials - Sugar Plant

Sl.

No Particulars

Quantity,

T/day

Quantity,

T/month Source Transportation Storage

01 Sugar cane 7500 300000

From

nearby

areas

Trucks, tractors

Sugar Cane from

field is

transported to

factory premises

through vehicles,

the vehicles after

reaching the

factory premises

will be parked in

queue at Cane

yard, after

weighing, cane is

directly taken into

milling process.

02 Sulphur 5 150 Mumbai Trucks Stored in Sulphur

godown

03 Lime 16 480 Lokapur, Trucks Stored in Lime





Sl.

No Particulars

Quantity,

T/day

Quantity,

T/month Source Transportation Storage

Yadwad,

Rajasthan

godown

04 Caustic Soda

flakes 0.15 4.5 Mumbai Trucks

Stored in WTP

sub store

05

Lubricants

(Wheel bearing

greases,

lubricating oils

etc.)

0.5 15 Oil

companiesTrucks

Stored in Main

Store

06 HCl 0.66 20 Mumbai Trucks Stored in WTP

sub store

07 OP acid 0.1 3 Mumbai Trucks Stored in Main

Store

2.6.6 Raw material for cogeneration

Table 2.11 Fuel for Cogeneration

Sl No Fuel Quantity Source Transportation Storage

01 Bagasse 1208 T/day Own sugar mill Through

Conveyor belt

Stored in

Bagasse

Yard

The main raw material/ fuel required for the cogeneration plant i.e. bagasse is available from

the sugar mill. The adequate quantity of bagasse shall be supplied to the plant on requirement

basis. The cogeneration plant will work for 300 days (180 days in season & 120 days off-

season) in a year. Bagasse at the rate of 74 T/d is required for incineration boiler. Hence, total

bagasse requirement will be 1282 T/day. Considering the annual availability of 405000 T and

requirement of bagasse during season at 100% capacity utilization is 230760 T, thus leaving a

surplus of 174240T for off-season usage. With the saved bagasse, additional 136 days the

cogeneration and distillery boilers can be operated. The saved bagasse will be stored for

future usage.

2.6.7 Raw material requirement for Distillery section

Table 2.12 Raw material requirement – Distillery

Sl.

No Raw Material

Quantity/60

KLPD Transportation Source Storage

1 Molasses 240 MT Pipeline /

Tankers

Own production

for 225 days plus

from other sugar

factories located

at Belagavi.

Molasses storage

tank

2 Sulphuric Acid 30 lit

Lorry

Mumbai Drums

3 Nutrients N, P 60 Kg Mumbai 50 kg Bags

4 Turkey Red Oil

(TRO) 30 Kg Mumbai Drums

5 Biocides 30 kg Local Drums





Table 2.13 Fuel for Incineration boiler

Sl

No Fuel Quantity Source Transportation Storage

01 Spent wash 146 T/day Own Distillery

unit Pipeline

Spent wash

storage tank

02 Bagasse 74 T/day Own sugar plant Tractor Bagasse yard

2.7 Resource requirement - Water

2.7.1 Water balance- Sugar and Cogen unit

Table 2.14 Resource Requirement during Season

Capacity of sugar plant 7500 TCD

Total

number of

hours

24 hrs

Capacity of cogeneration 30

MW/

Hr

Boiler capacity 140 TPH

Steam production 3360 TPD

Condensate generation 4125 KLD

Requirement Wastewater generation

Imbibition 2400 KLD

Mill Sanitation 165 KLD

Milk of lime preparation 213 KLD

Oliver Filters 375 KLD

Pan movement 165 KLD

Centrifugal Washing 150 KLD 135 KLD

Floor Washing 105 KLD 95 KLD

Cooling tower blow down 360 KLD 360 KLD

Evaporation loss 150 KLD

Line loss 17 KLD

Total condensate 4099 KLD

Excess Condensate 26 KLD

Fresh water requirement

Boiler makeup/blow down 17 KLD 17 KLD

Evaporation (Boiler) 151 KLD

Cooling tower makeup/blow down

(Additional) 84 KLD 84 KLD

Evaporation(Cooling tower) 50 KLD

Colony and domestic 37 KLD 33 KLD

Laboratory 3 KLD 3 KLD

WTP makeup/reject 45 KLD 45 KLD





Total freshwater requirement 388 KLD

Total water requirement 4487 KLD

Total wastewater generation 772 KLD

Effluent to ETP 739 KLD

Sewage to Septic tank and Soak pit 33 KLD

Off- season

Fresh water Wastewater generation

Boiler feed 101 KLD 10 KLD

Cooling tower makeup 645 KLD 445 KLD

WTP makeup/ reject+ Lab 114 KLD 114 KLD

Colony and Domestic 28 KLD 22 KLD

Sugar plant maintenance 50 KLD 50 KLD

Total 937 KLD 641 KLD

Effluent to ETP 619 KLD

Sewage to Septic tank and Soak pit 22 KLD

Hence, total water requirement for the sugar and cogen is 4487 KLD. Out of which, 4099

KLD is from the reuse of condensate water during crushing season. Maximum fresh water

requirement is 937 KLD during off season. Water balance chart is given below:





# represents condensate water, all values in KLD

Fig 2.10 Water balance chart- During season

(all values are in KLD)

Fig 2.11 Water balance chart- During off-season (all values are in KLD)





Fresh water requirement for 7500 TCD sugar cane crushing and 30 MW/Hr cogeneration is:

During season: 388 KLD

During off season: 937 KLD

Table 2.15 Water requirement for distillery

Sl. No. Description Water Quantity m3/day

1. Process 397

2. DM plant 180

3. Cooling Tower 360

4. For washing 8

5. Total 945

Total fresh water requirement 480 KLD

Spent lees 88 KLD

Spent wash 480 KLD

Concentrated spent wash 146 KLD

Condensate 334 KLD

Cooling tower blow down 72 KLD

Boiler Blow down 16 KLD

To Condensate polishing unit 466 KLD

Recycled to the process 465 KLD

Treated water available for gardening 66 KLD

Water utilised for dust suppression 7 KLD

Spent wash will be stored in the impervious storage tank and will be concentrated and used as

fuel in the slop fired boiler. Spentlees along with condensate from MEE, boiler blow down,

cooling tower blow down and washing will be treated in the CPU of 600 KLD capacity and

recycled back in the process. The treatment technology is explained in the subsequent

chapters. Hence, total water requirement for the distillery is 945 KLD. Out of which, 465

KLD will be from the utilization of treated Condensate water. Maximum fresh water

requirement is 480 KLD met from Malaprabha River. Water balance chart for distillery is

given below:





(all values are in KLD)

Fig 2.12 Water balance chart- Distillery





2.8 Description of Major Systems

2.8.1 Plant Layout

The process flow is assumed to be gravity type. The plant layout has been prepared keeping

in view the process flow of intermediaries, approach road, wind directions and process

requirements and future expansion.

2.8.1.1 Technical features of the plant

Main technical features of the integrated expansion project of 7500 TCD and 30MW/Hr.

Approved makes for critical equipments of sugar plant

Table 2.16 Technical features of the plant - List of Equipments and Machinery

Sl.

no Particulars Make

1. Mills Aditya Enterprises

2.

Centrifugal Machines:-

a) Continuous

b) Batch type

Walchandnagar Industries Limited

4. Electric Motor ABB / CROMPTON / KEC /

SIEMENS

5. Vacuum Filter Universal

8. Clarifier UNIVERSAL I Excel

9 a) Electric Motor

b) D.C. Motor

c) Thyristor Panels

CROMPTON

KIRLOSKAR I IEC

KIRLOSKAR only

10. Pumps other than}

Magma & Molasses}

KIRLOSKAR

11. Centralized lubri. For mill,

Mill Hydraulic accumulator

system

Rotary juice screen mill

LlNCON HELLIOUS

BEMCO

Suviron/Excel/Shamaraj

12. Weighing Machines :-

a) Sugar, Juice, Molasses

b) Check Weigh

AVERY

AVERY

13. Stitching Machines STITCHWEL/

14. Magma and Molasses Pumps Risansi Kanpur

15. Cane Unloader Crane and

Mill house & power house crane

Hallmark Technical Services Pvt

Ltd.,

16. Feeder Tables OEM OF MILL VENDOR

17. Planetary gear box with rope coupling

Automatic cane feeding control system

ELECON/OIANAMIC OIL

Yokogowa

18. All VFO in Sugar ABB

19. Air Compressor/ blowers

KIRLOSKAR/ K-

INTERNATIONAL





Sl. no

Particulars Make

20. Diesel Set

a) Engine

b) Alternator

CUMMINS

TDPS

21. Enclosed Worm

Gear boxes

ELECON

22. Electric cables Cell /finolex/ RPG

23. Sulphur Burner VISHAWA

24. C.I. valves (sluice, globe, right angle,

&non return etc) KIRLOSKAR / CALSENS

25. Fibrizer OEM OF MILL VENDOR

26. Pipes TATA

27. MS Plates TATAI SAIL

28. Injection, condenser / Cooling system Spray Engineering / Shamraj

29. Sugar belt conveyor/ Stacker/loader/Mud

belt/ Lime

Automatic electric Weigh M/C

Dust collector

GROUP/Techilk

SUMECH

Approved by Purchaser

30. MCB Siemens

31. Juice stabilization system App. By Purchaser

32. PH control system App. By Purchaser

33. Juice, filtrate clarification App. By Purchaser

34. Vacuum Pumps App. By Purchaser

35. Painting for total plant App. By Purchaser

36. Oils and Lubricants. Indian Oil

2.8.2 Machinery to be installed in cogeneration unit

Table 2.17 Proposed Plant and Machinery at cogen unit

Particulars Make

Boiler HITECH

Turbo Alternator

Turbine

Alternator

SNM Japan

TDPS

Total electrical for Co - generation,

Switch Yard and Transmission line

Approved by Purchaser/ Other/ OM

SAI ELECTIRCALS

Fuel, Ash Handling system TEKNICKIAG Conveyors

DCS system for boiler and turbine ABB/Indpro

DM plant ION EXCHANGE

P.R.D. Station Vishwa/Indpro

HP.LP Piping Approved by purchaser

Cooling Tower with Civil constructions MCT Engineers

Power House Crane, AC, Fire Fighting,

Fire protection, Lab, Compressor Approved by purchaser/CEMANTO





D.G COMMINSITDPS

Electric Motor

D.C. Motor

Thyristor Panels

CROMPTON

KIRLOSKAR I IEC

KIRLOSKAR only

Power house crane CEMANTOIOEM

All VFD in Cogeneration OANFOSS

Air Compressor/ blowers KIRLOSKARI

K-INTERNATIONAL

Diesel Set

Engine Alternator

CUMMINS

TOPS

Enclosed Worm Gear boxes ELECON

H.P Seam valves, Blow down

valves, Safety Valves BHEL/KSB

Electric cables CCII finolex/ RPG

Instruments for Boilers/ Others ABB / YOKOGOWA

Steam Pressure Reducing & De

superheating Station

IN MARSHALL

IINDPRO/OEM/PCENRLI

YOKOGOWA

Switch Fuse Unit SIEMENS

Air circuit Breakers & Contractors SIEMENS

C.I valves ( sluice, globe, right angle, &

non return etc) KIRLOSKAR / CALSENS

Boiler feed water pump KSB/SULZER

Safety Valves Tyco Sanmar / BHEL

Attemperator OEM approved vendor

IDFD fans & SA fans Batiliboi/ AIROCHEM

Refractories ACCI Bhilai Refractory

Insulation Lloyds Insulation /

AFTERWORDS/Finlay

Sample Cooler Thermax

Castings, fabrication of steel work OEM/Purchaser approved vendors

Deaerator OEM approved as Sub-vendors

Control Valves MIL/R.K. Controls/ Forbes Marshall

Blow down valve TYCO AND LEAVCON

VALVES

Valves (IBR) KSB

Valves (Non IBR) BDK/KIRLOSKAR/Cresent

Damper OEM/design ( fabrication by OEM

approved Sub vendors)

Dosing Pumps Positive metering

Motors ( Energy Efficient) Siemens/ CROMPTON

ESP Thermax

Pump KSB /Sulzer

Pressure gauges H.Guru

Temp gauges TIWAC/ HGURU





Transmitters Rosemount/ Yokogawal

l/P Converter Rosemount

Thermocouples/RTDs ABB

Pneumatic Power Cylinder ABB

Pressure/Temp/Flow

Switches

Switer

Level Gauges ABB

Table 2.18 List of machinery to be installed at Distillery unit

A). DISTILLERY SECTION

MOLASSES STORAGE

STATION

Capacity - 7000 MT - 4 Unit or suitable

Molasses Pump: - Gear Pump or Screw

Pump, Capacity - 40 MT/Hr

Unloading Pit Pump - 2 Unit.

Molasses Pump: -Screw Pump or Gear pump,

Capacity - 30 MT/Hr. A) FERMENTATION i) Molasses day tank - capacity - 200 m

3 - 1 No.

ii) Transfer Pump - 2 no. Type- Gear, Cap 2.5 m3 / hr.

iii) Molasses Receiving tank - 1 no. Cap.- 2.5 m3

iv) Molasses Weighing System: - 1 no, Type -Load cell,

Cap. - 3 m3.

v) Molasses Weighing Tank: - 1 no., Cap. - 40 m3.

Transfer Pump - 2 no, Type - Gear. Cap. - 12 m3/hr.

vi) Molasses Diluter for yeast Vessel - 1 no.

Type - Static Mixer.

vii) Culture Vessel with air sparger:- 1 no. Cap.- 0.2 m3

Culture Vessel with air sparger :- 1 no. Cap.- 1.35 m3

viii). Culture Vessel with air sparger :- 1 no.Cap.- 7.2 m3.

ix). Cell mass transfer Pump with Motor , Type-

Centrifugal with Trolley Cap.- 7 m3/hr.

x). Fermenter - Cap.- 330 m3. - 4 No.

Type - Cyl. shell S.S. make. Circulation

Pump - 5 no. Cap.-162 m3/hr, Molasses

broth mixer with Static mixer.

xi). Fermenter Wash Cooler - Type - PHE- 4 no.

xii). Yeast activation Vessel, Type - Cyl. Shell, Cap. -66

m3. S.S. make. with broth mixer, Pump - 2 no. Type-

Centrifugal, Cap- 20 m3.With PHE

xiii).Wash Holding Tank - 1 no. Type- Cyl.Shell , Cap.-

130 m3. Pump- 2 no.Cap.- 34 m3/ hr.

xiv). Air Blower with Filter - 1 no. Type -HEPA. Cap- 280

Nm3/hr.

xv). CO2 Scrubber - 1 no , Praj make .

xvi). Nutrient dosing Tank- 1 no. Cap.- 1 m3 With Pump- 1

no, cap.- 2 m3/hr.

xvii). Acid dosing tank - 1 no. Cap- 1 m3.

Pump - 2 no. cap- 1 m3 /hr.

xviii). Antifoam dosing tank - 1no,cap- 1 m3, Pump- 2 no.





Cap- 1 m3/hr.

xix). CIP Tank -1 no cap- 10 m3, Pump- 2 no, cap- 10

m3/hr.

xx). Sealing water system for air Blower - M.S.tank -1 no,

CI Pump- 1 no. With piping.

xxi). Fermentation all piping - S.S. make 304 Gr., Or

suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery. B). DISTILLATION SECTION

i). ANALYSER COLUMN (Rh grid trays, vacuum):-

Suitable for 60000 LPD All material S.S. make.

ii). DEGASIFING COLUMN (Sieve trays, vacuum):-


iii). PRE - RECTIFIER COLUMN (bubble cap trays,

Pressure):- Suitable for 60000 LPD All material S.S. make.

iv). EXTRACTIVE COLUMN (bubble cap trays,

Vacuum):- Suitable for 60000 LPD All material S.S. make.

v). RECTIFIER COLUMN (bubble cap trays, Pressure):-


vi). SIMMERING COLUMN (bubble cap trays, atm.):-


vii). RECOVERY COLUMN (bubble cap trays, atm)

All material S.S. make.

viii). ALCOHOL SCRUBBER: - 1 Unit, Make- S.S. (304

Gr.)

All material S.S. make.

ix). OTHER :-

a). FO decanters -2 no.

b). Mixing Bottle (For ED / Purifier Column) - 1 no.

c). Vapour bottles :- lot.

d). Manometer bottles :- 2 no.

e). Seal pot :- 1 no.

f). Siphon for recovery column. -1 no.

g). TA mixing Bottle - 1 no.

h). Pipes 7 fitting , Valves and instruments ;- Lot.

OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery. C).INTEGRATED AND STAND

ALONE EVAPORATION

SECTION

I). INTEGRATED TWO EFFECT EVAPORATION:-

i). Falling Film type Evaporator - no. with surface

condenser -1 no and preheater-1 no. Feed tank -1 no - cap-

10 m3. S.S. make. with pump- 2 no. Process condensate

tank - cap- 01 m3. S.S.make . with Pump-2 no.

Recirculation Pump- 2 no. & Transfer Pump- 2 no.

Vacuum Pump -2 no. with Sealing arrangement system.

Suitable for 600 m3/day spent wash. All material S.S.

make.

OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery.

II).STANDALONE EVAPORATION;-

Flubex type evaporator,-2 no.

With transfer pump-2 no. Recirculation pump- 2 no.

Surface condenser - 1 no.





Finisher - 2 no. with recirculation & transfer pump -2 no

Feed tank -1 no - cap- 10 m3. S.S. make. with pump- 2 no.

Process condensate tank - cap- 01 m3. S.S.make with

Pump-2 no.

Steam condensate tank - cap- 01 m3. S.S.make with Pump-

2 no.

CIP condensate tank - cap- 15 m3. S.S.make with Pump-2

no.Or Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery D). EFFLUENT TREATMENT

PLANT & CONDENSET

POLISHING UNIT

i. Buffer tank with pumps.

ii. USAB Tank with Pump.

iii. Extended aeration tank with pumps.

iv. Clarifier EAT & Effluent tank.

v. Tube settler, Flocculator

vi. Ultra violet tube.

vii. Sludge drying bed. With all accessories and Pumps.

viii. OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery. E).STORAGE SECTION i. RS RECEIVER:- cap- 80 m

3 . Make- M.S. - 01 no.

ii. IS RECEIVER:- cap- 15 m3 . Make- M.S. - 02 no.

iii. ENA RECEIVER:- cap- 80 m3 . Make- M.S. - 03 no.

iv. RS Storage Tank:- cap- 1000 m3 . Make- M.S. - 01 no.

v. ENA Storage Tank :- cap- 1000 m3 . Make- M.S. - 03

no.

vi. IS Storage Tank:- cap- 300 m3 . Make- M.S. - 01 no.

vii. FO Storage Tank:- cap- 10 m3 . Make- M.S. - 01 no.

viii. Denatured Storage Tank:- cap- 10 m3 . Make- M.S. -

01 no.

ix. Alcohol Pumps: - Centrifugaltype, Make - Microfinish, - 06 no.

x. Cooling water recirculation pump: - 01 no.

xi. Issue measured PD Flow meter - 03 no.

OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery.

F). UTILITY i. COOLING TOWER: - 01 No. For Fermentation Unit. Cap- 380 m

3/hr. With pump-2 no. cap- 380 m

3/hr.

ii. COOLING TOWER: - 01 No. For Distillation Unit.

Cap- 500 m3/hr. With pump-3 no. cap- 500 m

3/hr.

iii. COOLING TOWER: - 01 No. For Evaporation Unit. Cap- 485 m

3/hr. With pump-2 no. cap- 485 m

3/hr.

iv. AIR COMPRESSOR: - 3 No. OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery.

G). RO Plant i). Distillery Process Ro - 01 no.; Capacity - 20 m3/hr.

ii). Boiler RO: - 01 no. Cap- 20 m3.

OR Suitable for 60000 LPD Distillery

H). BOILER

22 TPH SPENT WASH FIRED BOILER: -This is spent wash

fired boiler in which theBagasse used as 40% & spent wash 60%

by volume and by Calorific Value itis 50:50 % of both fuel.

Steam Pressure: 45 g/cm2;Super Heater Temp:390

o C; Steam Gen

capacity: 22.2 T/Hr

I). Power Turbine 3 MW/Hr

Power Rated – 2000 KW; Inlet Steam Pressure – 42 Kg.cm2;





Exhaust Pressure – 5 Kg.cm2

FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENTS

1. Main Fire Fighting Pumps Electric

Driven

47 lit/sec

2. Main Fire Fighting Pumps Diesel

Driven

47 lit/sec

3. Jockey Pumps 3 lps, at 7 kg/cm2 (g) with Motor 15 HP

4. Pressure Gauges -

5. Fire Hose Box Double -

6. Fire Hose Box Single -

7. Fire Hose Pipe 15 mt Long Binded

With Male Female Coupling

15m Long

8. Fire Hose Pipe 30 mt Long Banded

With Male Female Coupling

30m Long

9. Fire Extinguishers CO2 Type 4.5 Kg Capacity

10. Fire Extinguishers DCP Type 10 Kg Capacity

11. GM Single Hydrant Valve 63 mm dia

12. Gm Hose Nozzle 63 mm dia

Table 2.19 Description of spent wash boiler

Sl. No. Description UOM Value

1) Spent wash concentration % solids 55-60

2) Concentrated Spent wash quantity to the boiler TPD 146

3) GCV of spent wash for given concentration Kcal/kg 1700

4) Approximate Quantity of Support bagasse required Mt/hr 3.1

5) GCV of Bagasse Kcal/kg 2270 kcal/kg

6) Minimum ash content in bagasse % wt / wt 1

7) Gross steam generation @ MSSV outlet Kg/hr 32,000

8) Pressure at MSSV outlet Kg/cm2(g) 40

9) Temperature at MSSV outlet °C 440 +/- 5

10) Air pollution control --- ESP

2.8.3 Buildings

The main industry buildings will be of structural steel-framed structure with galvanized sheet

roofing and side claddings. The sides of building will be having masonry wall up to a height

of 4.0 meters with large steel windows. The main doors of the buildings will be of large size

5.0 m X 4.0 m to permit transport of machinery by trucks. Rain water drain pipes concrete up

to a height of 300 mm above finished floor level.

The factory ground floor will be of RCC construction with proper drainage slope and

drainage gutters. All liquid effluents will be collected through these gutters and led to effluent

treatment plant. The flow will be by gravity.

2.8.3.1 Civil Works

The upper working platforms/floors will be constructed with steel structural supports and

checkered plate flooring. All staircases leading to the upper floors will be of minimum 2.0 m

wide width. The platforms and floors above ground level will have proper handrails and toe

guards. The flooring will be designed for a live load of 500 kgs/Sq.m. Where RCC platforms





are provided the same shall be designed to carry live loads of machinery movement as

required.

Storm water drains will be constructed, suitable for the topography of the site.

Cane yard where Lorries, tractors and trucks are parked will be soiled with stones,

levelled and rolled hard. Proper slope will be provided for rainwater drainage.

The underground pipes will be properly coated with bitumen and protected against

corrosion.

Following standards will be used while designing and executing the building and civil

works

All RCC structures will be as per IS: 456

All steel structures will be as per IS: 800.

Design loads for buildings and structures including wind loads as per IS: 875.

For earthquake effects IS: 1893.

2.8.3.2Storage of Products/ by-products

Sl.No Particulars Photographs

Sugar go-down 23 m X 75m x 10 m

Bagasse 250 m X 80 m X 15 m

(Proposed)

-

Molasses 4 X 5000 MT

(Proposed)

Steel structural tanks wil be established

Press mud,

ETP sludge

and Yeast

sludge

100 m X 80 m HDPE lined area will be established

Water storage 60 Lakhs litre capacity





Chemical

storage room

30m x 6m x 5m

(proposed)

Separate closed chemical storage rooms will

be constructed to store chemicals like sulphur,

lime, caustic soda flakes, lubricants, HCL,

etc.,

2.9 Product, Production Capacity

Table 2.20 Proposed Product details

Sl.No Product Quantity

Products

1 Sugar 900 TPD

2 Power 33 MW/Hr (30 MW/Hr cogeneration + 3

MW/Hr from incineration boiler)

3 Ethanol/ ENA/RS/AA 60 KLPD

By-products

4 Bagasse 2250 TPD

5 Press mud 300 TPD

6 Molasses 300 TPD

2.10 Sugar manufacturing process

2.10.1 Process of Manufacturing

In India, majority of the factories are involved in preparing white direct consumption

sugar, which is 99.8% pure. Some limited quantity of raw or brown sugar (97 - 98

pure) is also made for the purpose of export. Sugar is produced in vacuum pan

evaporators. The major process of manufacture consists of the following steps:-

Extraction of Juice

Clarification

Evaporation

Crystallization

Centrifugation

Drying

Bagging

Store

Market

2.10.2 Juice Extraction

2.10.2.1 Milling

In this method, the cane is passed between heavy rollers to extract the

juice, and the cane is crushed immediately after harvesting as the fresh sugar cane gives a

higher percentage of juice than the dried cane. In both milling and diffusion

processes, the canes are first prepared by breaking the stalk into shorter pieces and

making them into small fragments in order to rupture the cane cells which contain

juice. For this purpose one set of knives and crusher has been in use but now a





large number of factories have installed two sets of knives, one used as a leveller

and the other as cutter. These knives are of an engine or electric motor and rotate

over a mechanical crusher. The crusher consists of three rollers which are similar to

the mills, but equipped with large teeth which are widely spaced, to break the cane

so that it feeds more easily in the mills. Shredders are also being used; they shred the cane

into smaller pieces without extracting much juice.

In milling process, prepared cane is fed by the cane carrier to a series of mills called

milling tandem or train. As the unloaded cane is carried on the cane carrier, the cane

chopper controls the cane for even and uniform feeding to the cane leveller where

the cane is cut in to pieces by the revolving knives of the leveller. Each mill is fitted

with three massive horizontal rollers, with one roller on top and two on the bottom in

a triangular shape. These rollers are grooved to allow the extracted juice to flow into

juice strainer through the rotary screen placed below. A tandem has three to

five such milling units. The juice from the first mill is richer than the juice from the

second, the juice from the second is richer than the juice from the third, and so on.

The fibrous residue of cane that comes out of the last mill is called bagasse. In order

to extract the maximum amount of juice from the cane, a process called maceration

is practiced. This process consists of weighing water and adding/spraying water at

the last mill of the tandem to extract maximum sugar from the bagasse by the

method of compound imbibition where the juice extracted by the last mill is added in

the third mill and so on. The maceration with water and dilute juices helps in

increasing mill efficiency by first diluting the residual juice in the ruptured cane and

then extracting it in the subsequent mill.

The juice as obtained from the mills is turbid, acidic with a pH range of 5.0 - 5.4, and

grey to green in colour. It contains 80-90% water, 10-16% sucrose, 0.5-1.5% reducing

sugars and about 1.5% non sugars. The non sugars comprise of mineral matter,

protein, gums, waxes, tannins, and some pigments in colloidal form.

2.10.3 Clarification

2.10.3.1 Sulphitation Process

The juice is heated to 700C and milk of lime of 15

0 Bx density is added to the extent

of 1.0 to 1.5 percent by volume of the juice. Sulphur-di-oxide (SO2 content of 8 to

11%) is then passed through the juice to such an extent that the alkalinity produced

due to the addition of lime is neutralized. Sulphur-di-oxide gas is produced by

burning sulphur in batch type furnaces. The juice may be heated by utilizing the vapours from

the evaporators.

The juice is now sent to clarifiers where the precipitated impurities are settled as

mud. Clarifiers in use are of continuous type like Dorr clarigester. They contain a

number of trays one above the other, dished either towards the centre or towards

periphery and enclosed in a cylindrical body. On top of clarifier, there is a flocculating

chamber at the entrance. The juice flows from the top and passes over these trays

thus depositing the mud. Revolving scrappers move the mud towards an outlet,

which may be either at the centre or around the periphery of trays depending on the

design of clarifier. Clarifier is divided in to four compartments each having clear juice

draw-offs located at top, while the muddy juice is discharged from the bottom of the tanks.

The latter is filtered through cloth in plate and frame type filter press, or

through rotary vacuum filter. The clear juices from filtration and from the clarifiers are





sent to the evaporators. The rotary vacuum filters, however, gives a turbid juice and

hence it has to be returned to the process either in the weighed mixed juice receiving

tank or the sulphited juice receiving tank. The mud in the filter presses is washed free from

sugar as much as possible, and discarded for use as manure. The washings from filter presses

are also added to the clear juice. The purity rise from the mixed to the clear juice in

sulphitation process factories is of the order of 0.5 to 1.5 units.

2.10.4 Evaporation

Evaporation is carried out in multiple effect evaporators made up of three, four or five

evaporators connected in series. Individual evaporator is called as effects or pans.

Each of the bodies consists of a closed cylindrical vertical vessel provided with a

calenderia or bank of tubes in the annular spaces of which low pressure steam is

admitted for heating the juice. The multiple effect system utilizes the latent heat of

steam as many times as there are bodies in the system. The bodies are arranged in

a series so that each succeeding body has a higher vacuum. The steam enters the

calenderia of the first body and the vapours from the boiling juice pass over to

calandria of the second body, where because of higher vacuum, the juice boils at a

lower temperature, releasing vapours for heating the vapours in the third body and so

on. Vapours from the last body go to the multi jet type condenser. The juice moves

continuously from one body to the next and finally about 75% of the original water is

removed. The thickened juice called syrup contains about 60% or more solids.

The syrup obtained from the evaporators are again sulphited by passing Sulphur

dioxide gas through it in continuous or batch type syrup sulphiter, in order to bleach it

and also to precipitate any lime salt present and thereby improve the quality of

sugar. The syrup with or without filtration is sent for crystallization in vacuum pans.

2.10.5 Crystallization

The syrup is boiled in vacuum pans to crystallize as massecuite, a mixture of sugar

crystals and mother liquor (molasses). Vacuum pans are essentially like a single

body of multiple effect evaporator and work in batch operations at high vacuum (660

mm, 54°C boiling point). In order to produce a uniform grade of sugar i.e. the sugar

which is virtually of the same colour and composition, complex boiling system

comprising two to three stages of boiling scheme is practiced. The number of boiling

and their techniques used depend upon factors such as the purity of syrup, the grade

of sugar desired, and the level of exhaustibility of final molasses required.

Boiling of syrup in vacuum pans is a highly skilled operation and is carried out by

experienced pan boilers. After a vacuum of 635 mm is achieved in the pan, syrup is

drawn in a quantity roughly a quarter of pan. Steam is admitted into the clanderia or

the steam coils of the pan and the syrup is boiled to grain. As soon as syrup

becomes supersaturated (this is determined either by instruments like cuitometer or

from samples drawn by an instrument called proof stick), grain is made to form either

by lowering the temperature or more generally by adding seed crystals of fine sugar.

The grains are grown sufficiently large by continuous admission of syrup into the pan

and progressive boiling under careful manipulation of temperature, steam, and rate

of feed of syrup. Care is taken to see that proper graining is formed as this mars the

uniformity of size of sugar crystals. Examination· of the boiling syrup is done by

drawing samples at regular intervals. In case the false grains appear, these are





dissolved out by drawing in some cold water or preferably clarified fresh juice. When

the pans are fully boiled to the desired size of the grains, the vacuum is released;

and the pan is dropped or struck i.e. the boiling is stopped. The resulting mixture of

the grains, called massecuite, is run out of the pan into crystallizers, where residual

crystallization continues further. The crystallizers are U-shaped or cylindrical vessels,

equipped with cooling and stirring arrangement.

2.10.6 Centrifugation

The partially cooled massecuite from the crystallizer is fed to centrifugal machine

revolving at about 1,000 to 1,500 rpm. The baskets of the centrifuges are perforated

and a copper screen having fine holes is placed inside the baskets. The mother

liquor (molasses) adhering to the crystals goes out of the holes of the screen. A jet of

hot water is sprayed at the crystals to free them from molasses, followed by

steaming to drive out moisture. The hot moist sugar is discharged into the hoppers

fitted below the centrifuges. The sugar from the hoppers is transferred to a long

hopper or a cascade type cooler and from there to hot air drum type drier for drying.

It is finally shifted to obtain crystals of different size and bagged.

The purity of the first massecuite is about 90 percent and that of the molasses

obtained from it is about 70 percent. The molasses obtained from it, some fresh syrup (or

washings from the first massecuite) is again boiled in vacuum pans so as to raise the purity to

76-78%, separated and dried as before. The second molasses with a purity of 53 – 54% is

very viscous and as such it is difficult to grain directly. It is conditioned (by slight dilution

with water and heating by steam) and mixed with a portion of fully grained syrup, and boiled

to form the third massecuite. In this manner the clarified syrup is boiled to three or four

massecuites according to the predetermined system of boiling. The final molasses, which may

fall 5 to 35 percent or lower purity, is conveyed to the reservoirs, and it constitutes a good

source of alcohol.

2.10.7 Drying

After centrifugation from crystallizer, white crystals of sugar with moisture content will be

obtained. To remove the moisture content of the sugar crystals, they are passed through rotary

drier for drying the crystal to obtain the final product.

2.10.7.1 Drying of Sugar

There are two ways by which sugar is dried in practice

Drying sugar in the rotary dryers

Drying sugar in the centrifugal machines.

Of the two, drying sugar in the centrifugal machines is considered superior. This is because in

the rotary dryers, the crystals lose their luster by the rubbing action against each other.

Further, the sugar dust formed means loss of sugar and requires additional equipment to

recover it.

2.10.7.2 Drying of sugars and their importance on keeping quality

All sugars undergo microbiological decomposition under humid conditions and

consequently there is loss of sugar polarization. This applies to both white

consumption sugars as well as raw sugars. The susceptibility for microbiological





growth eventually decreases after drying. But as a consequence of drying,

polarization of raw sugar increases and this in turn increases its value. In the case of

white consumption sugar, its quality lasts longer.

Since the moisture content in sugar is regarded as a characteristic of quality, drying

has a special significance and is of extreme importance. Modern storage methods,

too, such as the introduction of concrete silos, have decisively influenced the

demand of sugar drying.

The spinning speed of the centrifugal as well as the washing is important for drying.

If the moisture of the sugar yielded in the centrifugals is too high, it means that the

heat required for drying the sugar increases as well.

Sugar that has been insufficiently or badly washed will form at its crystal surface a

syrup film with low purity grade. This purity influences to a certain extent the storage

capability of the sugar, since the lower is this purity grade, the lesser is the relative

equilibrium humidity.

The purity of the syrup film also influences the remaining moisture that can be

achieved in the sugar. In cases of absolutely pure sugar solutions the relative

equilibrium air humidity comes to 85 percent. With impure syrup film the relative

equilibrium air humidity amounts to 60% or less. This has been proved by the fact

that white sugar from a three boiling system shows a lower degree of moisture content

under equal conditions than sugar from a two boiling system.

'Ash' also influences this. Higher 'ash' content determines a higher degree of residual

humidity.

Other factors influencing the drying process of sugar are the crystal size as well as

the proportion of conglomerates. The smaller the size of the crystal, relatively greater

will be the adhesiveness of the moisture to such small crystal. For this purpose, drying

of finer crystals requires a greater amount of heat. In the case of conglomerates a

certain amount of moisture is locked in between the crystals, and larger the crystals

the higher the moisture content.

Excessive drying of sugar i.e. reducing the moisture to a point, which is below the

relative equilibrium moisture of sugar storage unnecessarily, increases the cost of

drying. This also leads to the impairment of the sugar quality since the brilliance of

the sugar is subdued. Therefore, drying has to be done extremely carefully so as not to

impair the quality of the product.

2.10.8 Quality Control & Specifications

Till 1935 there were no recognized standard for grading sugar manufactured in the

vacuum pan factories in India. The quality of sugar varied from industry to industry, and

product of each industry was quoted under its own name. The lack of uniformity in the

quality of production resulted in difficulties in the commercial transactions in fixation of

prices. Sugar standards were issued for the first time in 1935 by the Imperial council of

Agricultural Research and later merged with the Indian Institute of Sugar Technology,

Kanpur. There were sets of material standards forming a base for visual comparison of colour

and grain size for the purpose of grading. The first set of sugar standards consisted of 17

combined colour and grain size grades of crystals sugar (sucrose < 99.5; moisture> 0.05), and

3 colour grades for crushed sugar (sucrose> 98.5; moisture < 1.0). These grades were

designated by numbers ranging from 10 to 26 for crystal sugar and 10 0C to 12

0C for crushed

sugar.





In 1936, it was decided to have two separate series of standards - one for grain size and the

other for colour. On this basis, ten grades for colour and five for grain size were decided upon

for crystal sugar, while the number of grades for crushed sugar was increased to four. Since

then these numbers have been varied from time to time as per the need of the industry and

trade. The system of grading the different qualities was reviewed in 1952 by the Indian

Standards Institution for 'Vacuum Pan Sugar'. At present there are 10 grades of crystal sugar,

i.e. five grain size groups A, B, C, D and E having two colours, namely 30 and 29. The bulk

of sugar production at present is of C, D and E grain size and 30 colours specification. Indian

Standard requirements for sugar are given in the following table:

Table 2.21 Indian Standard Requirements for Different Kinds of Sugar

Sr.

No Particulars

Crystal

Refined

Sugar

Icing

Sugar

Cube Sugar

Refined Grade - I

(From Refined

Sugar)

Sugar

1 Moisture by wt., max 0.05 0.80 0.25 0.25 0.05

2 Specific Conductivity

(Reciprocal ohms//Cm3)

X106 of 5% (W/V)

aqueous solution at 35°C

Max.

- - 15.0 - 15.0

3 Sucrose, by wt. Min 99.50 - 99.5 99.2 99.8

4 Reduction Sugars by Wt.

Max - 0.06 0.03 - 0.03

5 Starch (Moisture free),

by wt.Max - 5 - - -

6 Total of starch (moisture

free) and sucrose, by wt.

Min

- 99.1 - - -





Fig 2.13 Schematic diagram of Integrated Sugar complex

2.11 Cogeneration Process

2.11.1 Types of Co- generation

Depending on the quality of process head required, co-generation may be based on topping

cycle or on bottoming cycle. In bottoming cycle systems, heat is required for the process at

high temperature and hence power is generated through a suitable waste heat recovery

system. On the other hand, in the topping cycle system, heat is required for the process at low

temperatures and therefore power generation is taken up first.





2.11.2 Requirement of Sugar Industries

The process of manufacturing crystal sugar requires steam. In existing co-generation

systems steam is generated in low - pressure boilers by using bagasse-the woody

fibrous residue of crushed cane, as fuel. This system was developed when possibility

of exporting power to the grid was not envisaged. Further, since the storage of large

quantities of combustible bagasse in the premises of the sugar mill was not an

advisable option, most of the boilers were designed so as to use almost the entire

quantity of bagasse produced. By upgrading the steam parameters, the sugar

industry can produce electricity far in excess of their own requirement and sell the

surplus power to the grid.

Benefits of adopting Co-generation systems in Sugar Industries

Not depending on external power to all, sugar plants can be located nearer

the sugar nearer the sugar growing areas, thereby saving on transportation cost of

sugarcane.

An efficient and sustained co-generation enables the plant to isolate itself from the

vagaries of power.

Power generation using bagasse is environmentally cleaner as bagasse produces very

little fly ash and no Sulphur.

Net contribution to greenhouse effect from the bagasse based co-generating

plant is zero, since the Carbon-di-oxide absorbed by the sugar cane grown is more

than the one emitted by the co-generating plant.

Low capital investment. Recurring costs are also lower compared to fossil fuel based

power plants.

Use of totally renewable source of energy.

Total saving in the mining, extraction and long distance transportation

expenses of fossil fuels.

Rural location of sugar mills enables co-generated power to be directly fed to

the local substation, consequently minimizing T & D losses and the requirement of

long feeder lines.

Saves the expenditure on safe storage and disposal of bagasse.

A co-generation plant places no financial or administrative burden on the utility as it

is executed and managed by the sugar factory.

Power is generated at a lower cost in co-generating systems and payback

period is shorter.

Provides an initiative to sugar mills to concentrate more on conservation of energy

and reduction of steam consumption thereby improving their profitability of

operation.

Surplus power generation in sugar factory is ideally suited for rural electrification and

for energizing irrigation pumps and industrial and agro- based units in the villages.

Several studies carried out have established that significant potential exists in India

for Bagasse based co-generation. Further, the interest shown by the government of

India, the State Governments and international funding agencies have provided the

necessary thrust to encourage sugar mills to become more and more conscious for

energy conservation and venture into the area of high efficiency cogeneration





leading to export of surplus power. As one of the largest processors of cane sugar,

Indian sugar industry is on the threshold of making a visible penetration in power

generation sector with the potential to generate about 15000 MW/Hr from this source.

Above all, from the proposed 33 MW/hr bagasse based and slop fired cogeneration

plant about 21360 T of CO2/year emission can be reduced from the conventional coal

based power plant (calculated as per carbon content in the fuel). However, as bagasse

is a biomass fuel, the emission from bagasse based power plant is considered to be

‘carbon neutral’.

2.11.3 Raw Material- Bagasse Availability

The critical requirement of co-generation plant is availability of sufficient bagasse from the

attached sugar plant, the detailed calculations of bagasse availability and balance bagasse to

be purchased is as under.

Table 2.22 Bagasse Balance

Sl no Particulars Details

1 Cane Crushing Capacity, TCD 7500

2 Number of Days -Season 180

3 Capacity Utilization, % 85

4 Total Sugar Cane Crushing-Tons 1147500

5 Bagasse Produced @ 30 % of Cane Crushed 344250

6

6.a

Bagasse Consumption

Bagasse required for 140 TPH Boiler during

season and 180 Days of operations

222651

7

Bagasse required for Boiler during off-season

and for 120 days

148440

Sl no C.4. Bagasse / Fuel Balance Value, TPH

1 Crushing rate, TCH 312.5

2 Bagasse generation at 30 % on cane, TPH 93.75

3 Bagacillo/handling loss at 0.8 % on cane,

TPH

2.5

4 Bagasse available as fuel at 30 % on cane,

TPH

93

5 Total Bagasse available, TPH 93

6 Max Bagasse consumed in boilers at

design capacity, TPH

56

7 Bagasse saved for off season/available,

TPH (MT)

37





2.11.4 Process details

Fig 2.14 Process Flow diagram of cogeneration

Cogeneration or Combined Heat and Power (CHP) is the sequential generation of two

different forms of useful energy from a single primary energy source, typically mechanical

energy and thermal energy. Mechanical energy may either be used to drive on alternator for

producing electricity or rotating equipment such as motor, compressor, pump or fan for

delivering various services. Thermal energy can be used either for direct process applications

or for indirectly producing steam, hot water, hot air for dryer of chilled water for process

cooling. Cogeneration provides a wide range of technologies for application in various

domains of economic activities. The overall efficiency of energy use in cogeneration mode

can be up to 85% and above in some cases.

Cogeneration system in a sugar plant employ extraction / back pressure steam turbines. The

two types of steam turbines most widely used are the back pressure and the extraction –

condensing types. The choice between backpressure turbine and extraction – condensing

turbine depends mainly on the quantities of power and heat, quality of heat and economic

factors. The extraction points of steam from the turbine could be more than one, depending

on the temperature levels of heat required by the processes.

In a sugar plant, the fuel (Bagasse) is burnt in a boiler to generate steam. This steam is used

to drive a turbine, which in turn drives the alternator through a high speed gear box to

produce electric power. In a sugar cogeneration plant, some amount of steam is generally

extracted from the turbine, once or twice, at the required pressure and temperature for sugar

manufacturing process. The exhaust steam is generally condensed to water which goes back

to the boiler.

High pressure and high temperature cycle are crucial for increasing the operating efficiency

and the power output from the cogeneration plants. The choice of the level of the pressure

and temperature for the cycle depend on the level of confidence in the plant operators quality

of the feed water and the water treatment systems available and the cost of the high pressure

temperature boiler and Turbo generator systems and the financial benefits realizable from the

cogeneration plant by the way of the sale of the exportable power.





2.11.5 Characteristics of Bagasse

White and light green in colour, odourless solid. Typical specific weight is 250 kg/m3

The main content: 45-50 % moisture, 50 % cellulose

Calorific value is 2270 kCal/kg at 50 % moisture

Source: http://www.kslgroup.com/th/business/electricity

Fig 2.15 Schematic diagram of Cogeneration process

Table 2.23 Details of Boiler

Capacity Pressure Temperature Qty Type

140 TPH 110 kg/cm2 520

0C 1No Multi fuel Travelling Grate boiler

Table 2.24 Working details of Boiler

Type of steam boiler Water tube

Fuel used Bagasse and other bio mass multi-fuel

Calorific value of Bagasse 2270 Kcal/kg.

Moisture in bagasse 50%

Boiler thermal efficiency 70% on GCV

2.11.5.1 Power Evacuation

The power generation from the Turbo-alternator received at 440 V/ 11 KV in the

cogeneration plant after meeting operational and auxiliary requirements will be stepped up to

110 KV at factory switchyard and will be transmitted to KPTCL Sub Station.





Table 2.25 Technical features of the plant - Sugar and Cogen

A. Steam & Power Cycle- Season

Sl.No. Crushing Capacity 7500TCD

A. Season Operation days

1 Cane Crushing TCH 318.18

2 No of hours per day 24.00

3 No of season days 180.00

4 Capacity Utilization, % 80.00

5 Bagasse generation at 30 cane (TPH) 95.45

6 Bagacillo/handling losses cane (TPH) 0.8% 2.55

7 Bagasse available as fuel, cane (TPH) 92.91

8 Total Bagasse available, TPH 92.91

9 Maximum Bagasse consumed by boilers in season per hour 56

10 Bagasse saved for off season, TPH(MT) 37

11 Steam generation, TPH (140 TPH) 140.00

12 Steam consumption, TPH

13 Total HP steam @ 8 kg/cm2g, TPH 13.40

14 LP steam @ 2 kg/cm2, TPH 6.80

- For sugars process from turbine 92.00

Condensate return from sugar mill at around 85 0C 78.20

Steam to deaerator 6.80

Condensate return from hot well -NA-

15 Makeup DM water addition from DM plant 14.80

16 Flow from deaerator 6.80

17 Total steam consumption, TPH 119.00

18 Power generation, MW/Hr 30.00

19 Power consumption, MW/Hr

-For sugar process & boilers 8.2

-Power Export 21.8

B. Off Season Operations

1 No. of days operation 120

2 Steam generation, TPH 140.00

3 Steam consumption TPH

-HP steam for HP Heater TPH 7.00

-LP steam @ 2 kg /cm2 g for Deator TPH 1.60

-LP steam @ 0.1 kg /cm2 for Condenser TPH 63.40

Total Steam consumption 72.00

4 Power generation, MW/Hr 30.00

5 Power consumption, MW/Hr

For sugar mill 0.5

For co gen auxiliaries 2.4

Total 2.9

6 Power export MW/Hr 27.1





C Steam, Water & Condensate, Power & Bagasse Balances

Sr. No.

C.1. Steam Balance Value

Season

1 Steam generation, TPH 140.00

2 Steam consumption TPH

-HP steam to sugar process @ 8 kg/cm2- 13.40

-LP Steam to Deator @ 2 kg/cm2 6.80

-For sugars process form turbine 92.00

-LP steam @ 0.1 kg /cm2 for Condenser TPH 27.80

Total 140.00

Sr.

No. C.2. Water and Condensate Balance

Value, TPH

Season

1 Condensate return from sugar mill at around 85°C 78.20

2 Steam to de - aerator 6.80

3 Condensate return from hot well -NA-

4 Make up DM water addition from DM Plant 14.80

5 Flow from de - aerator 6.80

2.11.5.2 Material balance - Sugar and cogeneration unit

Note: Material balance based on the following

1) Bagasse produced -- 30 % cane crushed

2) Sugar produced -- 12% recovery

3) Press mud produced -- 4% of cane crushed

4) Molasses produced -- 4% of cane crushed

Fig 2.16 Mass balance for 7500 TCD sugar unit and 30 MW/Hr cogeneration unit





2.12 Distillery Section

2.12.1 Fermentation

Molasses, diluted with water to the desired concentration is metered continuously

into a single tank fermenter. Additives like urea (in the form of pellets or prills) and

defoaming oil are also introduced in the fermenter as required. There is an automatic

foam level sensing and dosing system for defoaming oil.

Every Kilogram of alcohol produced, generates about 290 Kcal of heat. This excess

heat is removed by continuous circulation of fermenting wash through an external

plate heat exchanger called the Fermenter Cooler. The fermenter temperature is

always maintained between 32 and 35 deg. C, the range optimum for efficient fermentation.

The yeast for the fermentation is initially (i.e. during start-up of the plant) developed

in the Propagation Section described further on. Once propagated, a viable cell

population of about 500 million cells/ml is maintained by yeast recycling and continuous

aeration of the fermenter. Fluctuations in the yeast count of +/- 20 % have

little effect on the overall fermenter productivity. Yeast cell vitality which is usually

above 70% may, in times of stress, (such as prolonged shut-downs) drop to50%

without affecting the fermentation.

Fermented wash passes through a series of hydro cyclones (one to three or more in

number depending on plant capacity), which remove grit, iron filings and similar

heavy particulate matter. This rejected material along with some wash, is taken to the bottom

portion of the wash column for alcohol recovery. The overflow from the first hydro cyclone

is taken a wash tank, also provided with an arrangement to facilitate removal of heavy

settable particulate matter. Overflow from the wash tank is taken to the yeast separator, which

clarifies the wash. The hydro cyclone and the wash tank protect the separator from erosion

damage by removing grit and similar hard particles.

Yeast Recycling: The yeast in the fermented wash is removed as 45 to 55 v/v slurry, and is

returned to the fermenter. This feature ensures that a high yeast cell concentration is achieved

and maintained in the fermenter. By recirculating grown, active yeast, sugar that would have

otherwise been consumed in yeast growth is made available for ethanol production, ensuring

high process efficiency.

Distillation: Clarified or de-yeasted wash flows by gravity to the propagation vessel no. III,

which during continuous production, operates as an intermediate wash tank. From here,

fermented wash is pumped to the wash preheater, which uses vapours from the rectifying

column to preheat wash. Further heating is done in an exchange of heat with weak wash and

spent wash (see flow sheet for primary distillation). Preheated wash then enters the

degasifying column of the distillation section.

Primary Distillation: The CO2 and the degasifying section help remove the CO2 and other

non-condensable entrained in the wash. The wash column is first column in the distillation

section. It is also called the analyser. Wash is boiled in this column with steam either supplied

as live steam from the boiler (after pressure reduction and desuperheating) or from a reboiler

which generates steam by evaporating effluent wash.

Alcohol in wash vaporizes and is carried, along with water vapour, to the top of the wash

column from where it goes to the rectification column. As wash travels down the analyser, it

is progressively 'stripped' of its alcohol content. At a point in the column, where the alcohol

concentration is 0.5 to 1.0 v/v, a portion of the wash is drawn off. This is called weak wash.





Weak Wash Recycling: Recycling of weak wash helps to maintain the desired level of

dissolved solids in the fermenter, so that an adequately high osmotic pressure is achieved.

Osmotic pressure and the concentration of alcohol in the fermenter, together keep off

infection and minimize sugar losses. Weak wash recycling also reduces the quantity of

effluent spent wash and reduces the process water requirement of the plant.

Spent wash is the wash from which all alcohol has been removed; this emerges from the

bottom of the wash column at about 105 deg C. Some of the heat is recovered to preheat

fermented wash entering the degasifying column. Spent wash may also be passed through a

forced circulation reboiler to generate vapours. This concentrates the effluent and reduces the

volume further.

Propagation: The propagation section is a feeder unit to the fermenter. Yeast, either

Saccharomyeescereviseae or Schizosaccharomyeespombe (the choice being determined by

other process parameters, mainly the downstream effluent treatment system) is grown in 3

stages. The first two stages are designed for aseptic growth. Propagation vessel III develops

the inoculums using pasteurized molasses solution as the medium. This vessel has a dual

function. During propagation, it serves for inoculums build- up. When the fermenter enters

the continuous production mode, Propagation Vessel III is used as an intermediate wash tank.

Propagation is carried out only to start up the process initially or after very long shut-downs

during which the fermenter is emptied.

CO2 Scrubbing and Recovery: The carbon-di-oxide produced during fermentation is

scrubbed with water in packed-bed scrubber, to recover alcohol. The water from the scrubber

is returned to the fermenter. About 1.0 % of the total alcohol production is saved by

scrubbing the fermenter off gas. In plants where it is desired to recover carbon-di-oxide, a

part of the wash is drawn into a separate vessel and is aerated there. This external aeration

allows the recovery of CO2 uncontaminated with air.

Fermentation Parameters (Typical): The pH of the fermenter is maintained between 4.0 &

4.8 usually without addition of any acid. The alcohol concentration is maintained between 7.0

& 7.5 % v/v, unless a highly concentrate effluent is to be produced. To reduce the effluent

volume, the fermenter is operated at a very high dissolved solids level by increasing the

proportion of weak wash recycle. Under these conditions, alcohol concentration is reduced to

between 5.5 to 6.0 % v/v.

Conversion of sugar to ethanol is instantaneous, and the residual sugar concentration is

maintained below 0.2 % w/w as glucose. This usually corresponds to a residual reducing

substances concentration of 2.0 to 2.5 w/w in wash. All the nutrient elements necessary for

yeast growth exist in adequate quantities as impurities in molasses. Occasionally, Nitrogen

may have to be supplemented. Defoaming oil (DFO), say Turkey Red Oil is added to the

fermenter by an automated DFO dosing system, to control foaming. Usually no other

additives are required. Yeast sludge generated from the sludge settling tank will be removed.

Characteristics of yeast sludge are given below;

Table 2.26 Characteristics of Yeast sludge

Sl

no Item

Content

(% by weight)

1 Moisture Content at 100 0 C 4.14

2 Protein Content as 6.25 X N 12.54

3 Acid Insoluble Matter 3.93





Sl

no Item

Content

(% by weight)

4

Mixed Oxide of Iron and

Aluminium as R2O3 1.23

5 Calcium carbonate as CaCO3 8.89

6 Calcium Sulphate as CaSO4 40.02

7 Calcium Phosphate as Ca3(PO4)2 1.1

8 Magnesium salts Traces

9 Sodium Sulphate (Na2SO4) 0.57

10 Potassium Sulphate (K2SO4) 0.61

Source: MoEF Manual

Flexibility: This process accords tremendous flexibility to the operator. Process conditions

and plant design can be varied to suit individual requirements of alcohol quality, effluent

concentration and characteristics. This unit can give spent wash suitable for use in any

effluent treatment process.

2.12.2 Multi Pressure Vacuum Distillation

After fermentation the next stage in the manufacture of alcohol is to separate alcohol from

fermented wash and to concentrate it to 95% alcohol called as rectified spirit. For this

purpose, distillation process is employed.

Distillation step consumes a considerable amount of energy and is also a deciding factor in

the quality of ethanol produced. Hence, in line with the demand of the industry, efforts have

always been to minimize requirement of energy and to improve the basic quality of alcohol

produced. Ease of operation, reliability, lower down time and flexibility of operations are

other parameters considered during the design.

2.12.2.1 Types of plant design

One is to produce primary quality of alcohol, usually referred to as 'Rectified Spirit'

(R.S.) from the fermented wash. Such plants are also referred to as 'Primary

distillation' plants.

Second is to produce fine quality of spirit usually referred to as 'Extra Neutral

Alcohol' (ENA) starting from R.S. Such plants are also referred to as 'secondary

distillation' plants.

Third is to directly produce fine quality alcohol (ENA) from fermented wash.

Such plants are referred to as 'wash (mash) to ENA' plants, where the two steps

of primary and secondary distillation are combined. Such plants usually have

lower consumption of energy than two separate plants.

Multi-pressure vacuum distillation system for production of Rectified Spirit /ENA consists of

following distillation columns namely;

Degasifying cum analyzer column - Operation under vacuum

Pre-rectification column - Operation under vacuum

Rectification cum Exhaust Column - Operated under pressure





Recovery column - Operated under atmospheric

Extractive distillation column - Operated under vacuum

Simmering column - Operated under atmospheric

2.12.2.2 Advantages of Pressure Vacuum Distillation

Since the analyzer column operates under vacuum, the formation of by- products such

as acetyl may minimize there by improvement in quality of alcohol.

Pre-rectification column ensure removal of sulphur compounds/mercaptans and also

reduces load of lower boiling volatile compounds passing on to Rectifier cum exhaust

column.

The chances of scaling due to invert solubility of certain precipitating inorganic salts

are minimized in vacuum distillation.

Vacuum distillation requires low steam consumption with reboiler

2.12.2.3 Integrated Multi-products Concept

It is now possible to install a distillation system, which can produce different products. In the

proposed scheme; the production of fuel ethanol has been considered. This allows flexibility

of operation and various products can be manufactured depending on the market demand.

This integrated multi-product system involves less capital investment as compared to

independent system.

In this type of system, switching over from one product to another is quite easy and there is

no chance of contamination of one product with another. The system can work under multi-

pressure principle with few columns operating under vacuum and few under

pressure/atmospheric.

2.12.3 Dehydration of Alcohol

2.12.3.1 Molecular Sieve

The feed (Rectified Spirit), pumped from the storage tanks, is heated through the heat

exchanger by the dehydrated alcohol, then heated RS of 93% to 96% is

fed to the top of the distillation column.

The liquid passes through the distillation column where ethanol is stripped of.

The alcohol free liquid called spent lees is separated and discharged from the

bottom of the distillation column and the ethanol stream, with strength of about

96% by volume, is removed as vapour, at the top section of the distillation column

and feed to the molecular sieve unit after a super heating about 115°C by steam in the

heat exchanger.

Fuel oils are removed from an intermediate point of the column in order to avoid

any risk of flooding of the column and feed to the static settling device where are

separated from the weak water which are recycled to the column.

The distillation column has an operating pressure of about 160 kPa (A) and is

heated with low pressure steam by means of reboiler. This solution shows following

advantages:





Total recovery of steam condensate which is recycled to the steam boiler at

high temperature with consequent increasing of the efficiency of the reboiler

(higher production of steam per unit of fuel)

Lower cost for softening of demineralization of raw water to be fed to the

boiler as steam condensate does not need any treatment

Lower quantity of still age, potential source of pollution

The super heated ethanol stream removed at the top of the distillation column

feeds one of the two sieve beds is now in regeneration mode.

The second sieve bed when in regeneration mode (under vacuum) and receives

a small amount of vapour from bed working in over pressure. As soon as

regeneration is finished (a regeneration cycle lasts about 5 minutes), an

automatic control system changes the operating conditions of the two sieve beds in

order to have the first sieve bed in regeneration and the second one in dehydration

mode.

The dehydration process releases a vapour ethanol stream with a very small amount of

water (500 p.p.m or less), which is condensed in the condenser cooled in the heat

exchangers and sent to the storage as dehydrated alcohol.

The regeneration process releases a certain amount of absorbed water and

ethanol, which are condensed in the condenser and recycled to the column.

Cooling media of the first cooling step of the dehydrated alcohol (condenser) is

the regeneration stream recycled to the distillation column and cooling media of

the second cooling step of the dehydrated alcohol (condenser) is the fed stock

coming from the storage tanks, which is preheated as herein above described.

Remaining vapours and liquid are condensed and cooled by cooling water in S & T

or P&F heat exchangers. The unit operation is fully automatic and all operations are

governed by logics executed by a PLC Control system.

Table 2.27 Synopsis of fuel ethanol plant operation

Total crushing, lakh MT (average crushing 7500 TCD X 180 days

@100 % capacity)

13.5

Molasses % cane 4.00

Installed capacity of fuel ethanol plant, KLPD 60.00

Working days, Nos 300

Ethanol yield from molasses, Lit/ MT 250

Total molasses required at 100 % capacity utlisation, MT 72000

Own molasses production, MT 54000

Molasses to be procured from outside, MT 18000

Table 2.28 Ethanol plant performance parameters

Sl No Particulars Parameters

1 Plant capacity 60 KLPD of ENA/ RS

2 Alcohol yield

Efficiency depends on- Fermentation efficiency, Distillation

efficiency, Dehydration efficiency

Yield:255-258 lts 96 %v/v alcohol per ton of molasses at 42

% fermentable sugars

261-264 lts 96 %v/v alcohol per ton of molasses at 43 %





fermentable sugars

3 Technology

Semi continuous fermentation, Multi pressure vacuum

distillation, Molecular sieve dehydration,

Raw spent wash evaporation to 58-60 % concentration

4 Steam usage

Distillation process

1.8 kg/lt of RS (4.68 TPH)

2.8 kg/lt of ENA (7.56 TPH)

Dehydration section :

0.5 kg/lt (1.25 TPH)

Evaporation section

2.3 kg/kg of evaporation (6.2 TPH)

5 Electricity usage

200 kW - Fermentation; 100 kW-Distillation; 60 kW -

dehydration; 500 kW- Cooling tower; 320 kW - Evaporator;

100 kW - CPU; 25 kW- Ethanol Storage

6 Spent wash Spent wash generation: 480 KL/d; Spent wash after

evaporation: 6.1 T/hr

2.12.3.2 Specifications of the products

Table 2.29 Superfine Extra Neutral Alcohol Specifications

Sr.

No

Component Unit ENA Grade Limit Offered Performance

(minimum)

1. Ethanol @ 15 deg C % V/V 96.3 Minimum 96.3% V/V

2. Aldehydes as

Acetaldehyde

PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

3. Methanol PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

4. N-Propanol & Iso-

Propanol

PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

5. Butanol PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

6. Acids as Acetic acid PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

7. Esters as Ethyl Acetate PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

8. Diacetyl PPM 0.03 Maximum <=0.03 PPM

9. 2,3 Pentene dione PPM 0.06 Maximum <=0.06 PPM

10. Volatile Nitrogen PPM 1 Maximum <=1 PPM

11. Furfural PPM Nil Nil

12. Lead PPM Nil Nil

13. Copper PPM Nil Nil

14. Dry extract PPM Negligible Not detectable

15. Permanganate Test Time -

ENA

Minutes 40 Min Minimum 40 to 45 Min

16. Permanganate Test Time -

RS

Minutes 30 Min Minimum 30 to 35 Min

Table 2.30 Absolute Alcohol (Ethanol) Specification

Sr.

No Description Contents Method

1. Specific Gravity at 15.60 C / 15.60 C 0.7949

2. Ethanol content at 15.60 C 99.8% by volume





Sr.

No Description Contents Method

3. Miscibility with water Miscible

IS 321 - 1964

4. Alkalinity Nil

5. Acidity as CH3COOH 0.0011% by weight

6. Residue on evaporation 0.003% by weight

7. Aldehyde content as CH3CHO <0.006 g/100Ml

8. Ester content as CH3COOC2H5 0.02 g/100Ml

9. Copper as Cu <0.0004 g/100ml

10. Lead as Pb <0.0001 g/100ml

12. Methanol content Passes the test

13. Fusel oil Content Passes the test

14. Ketones, isopropyl alcohol and tertiary

butyl alcohol

Passes the test

15. SO2 Not detected

16. Water content 0.224% by volume Karl Fisher

titration

Table 2.31 Impure Spirit

1. Specific Gravity at 15.6 Deg. C. Maximum 0.8171

2. Maximum Alcohol Strength 99.6% V/V

3. Percent by Volume at 15.6 Deg.C 95% V/V

4. Degrees over-proof 66

5. Miscibility with water Miscible

6. Alkalinity Nil

7. Acidity as acetic acid, percent by weight 0.01 (100 ppm)

8. Residue on evaporation, percent by weight 0.01 (100 ppm)

9. Aldehydes as acetaldehydes g/ml 0.1 (1000 ppm)

10. Esters as ethyl acetate g/ml --

11. Copper, as Cu, g/ml --

12. Lead, as Pb, g/ml --

13. Methyl Alcohol --

14. Fusel Oil --

15. Furfal --





Fig 2.17 Process flow diagram - Distillery section





Fig 2.18 Process flow diagram - Distillery section





2.12.4 Mass Balance for distillery section

Fig 2.19 Material Balance- Distillery section

2.13 Spent wash Treatment and power generation using

incineration boiler

The generated spent wash of 480 KL/day will be stored in the impervious storage lagoon of

capacity 7500 KL (50 m X 32 m X 4.5 m) (15 day storage). The pond is lined with HDPE

sheet of 250 micron thick and stone soling was carried out to prevent seepage/percolation.

Table 2.32 Characteristics of Spent wash

Sl no Characteristics Range

1 pH 4.3-5.3

2 Total solids, mg/l 60,000-90,000

3 Total suspended solids (TSS) , mg/l 2,000-14,000

4 Total Dissolved so solids(TDS), mg/l 67,000-73,000

5 Total Volatile solids (TVS), mg/l 45000-65000

6 COD, mg/l 70000-98000

7 BOD, mg/l 45000-60000

8 Total nitrogen (N), mg/l 1000-1200

9 Potash as (K2O), mg/l 5000-12000

10 Phosphate as( PO4), mg/l 500-1500

11 Sodium as (Na), mg/l 150-200

12 Chloride as (Cl), mg/l 5000-8000

13 Sulphate as (SO4), mg/l 2000-5000

14 Acidity as (CaCO3), mg/l 8000-16000

15 Temperature (After heat Exchange) 70oC-80

oC

Source: COINDS for Fermentation Industry, CPCB





Spent wash generated from manufacturing process of 60 KLD distillery will be

concentrated using MEE & this concentrated spent wash will be incinerated in

incineration boiler.

Multi Effect Evaporator will be installed

2.13.1 Incineration

The spent wash which is generated after recovery of alcohol from the distillery is a highly

pollutant liquid which will cause great pollution to receiving body like land or water. Hence

this needs to be taken care. The latest technology developed to achieve the zero discharge is

spent wash incineration boiler. This is a specially designed boiler which will burn the

concentrated spent wash along with the bagasse as supporting fuel. The ratio of this spent

wash to bagasse is 60: 40.

In this specially designed boiler after burning the spent wash we can generate the steam

which is required to run the distillery. In turn, we can save bagasse up to some extent. The

calorific value of the concentrated spent wash is 1700 K Cal/ kg. Hence this special

technology helps us in achieving zero discharge of spent wash. The air pollution causing

from this boiler is also very minimum and ESP can be used as air pollution control equipment

to achieve SPM <100µgm/Nm3. The ash collected from the ESP will be utilized as manure.

This technology helps us in generating steam, power and most important is achieving zero

discharge of spent wash.

2.13.2 Salient Features of 22 TPH Incineration boiler

Table 2.33 The proposed 22 TPH Boiler features

Capacity Pressure Temperature Qty Type

22 TPH 40 kg/cm2 440

0C 1

60 % concentrated Spent

wash and 40 % bagasse fired

boiler

The construction of the boiler is such that the fouling potential is minimized through

multi- pass design.

The boiler is designed such that it is easily maintainable.

The convective section of the boiler (consisting of Economizer, Superheater and

Evaporator) are of vertical tubes.

A Steam Coil Air Preheater is provided to preheat combustion air. This is required to

maintain the bed from quenching.

Deep Fluidized bed construction to improve combustion efficiency.

Fluidized bed combustor ensures complete combustion.

Special On-line cleaning devices are provided.

The boiler will need off-line cleaning once in 30 days of operation. The cleaning will

include the water wall, super-heater, evaporator and economizer section. The total

time required will be 2-3 days. The cleaning frequency and duration is an estimated

one, and will be decided based on the actual operating parameters condition.





Fig 2.20 Typical Boiler Schematic

Table 2.34 Technical parameters considered for design

Sl. No. Description UOM Value

1. Spent wash concentration % solids 55

2. Spent wash quantity- concentrated TPH 6.1

3. GCV of spent wash for given concentration Kcal/kg 1700

4. Approximate Quantity of Support bagasse

required Mt/hr 3.1

5. GCV of bagasse Kcal/kg 2270

6. Minimum ash content in bagasse % wt / wt 1

7. Gross steam generation @ MSSV outlet Kg/hr 22,000

8. Pressure at MSSV outlet Kg/cm2(g) 40

9. Temperature at MSSV outlet °C 440 +/- 5

10. Start-up fuel --- Char Coal mixed

with diesel

Table 2.35 Turbine design parameters

Description Capacity

Turbine type Bleed cum Back pressure type

Rating of turbine 3 MW/Hr

Boiler steam parameters

Pressure kg/cm2(g) 42

Temperature (0 C) 400 ±5

0 C

Turbine back pressure 3.5 kg/cm2 (g)

Steam flow at turbine stop valve (max)

During season

100 (Steam required for process house as well as for

deaerator of new boiler will be taken from this exhaust)

Steam pressure at each turbine stop 40





valve (kg/cm2(g))

Steam temperature at turbine stop valve

(0C)

400 ± 5

Power factor 0.8

Generation voltage (V) 440

Turbine exhaust will be @ 3.5kg/cm2 (g) and 150 ±5 deg C which will be used for process

house requirements.

Fig 2.21 Material balance and flow chart of working of Incineration boiler for the

generation of power

2.13.3 Characteristics of incineration boiler ash

Table 2.36 Characteristics of incineration boiler ash

Sl No Parameter Percentage (%)

1 Silica (SiO2) 20-22

2 Iron Oxide (FeO3) 1.5-2.0

3 Calcium Oxide (CaO) 8.0-8.5

4 Magnesium Oxide (MgO) 7.0-6.5

5 Sulphates (SO4) 8.0-8.5

6 Phosphates as P2O5 1.5-1.8





Sl No Parameter Percentage (%)

7 Potassium as K2O 43-44

8 Sodium Oxides (NaO2) 2.5-3.0

9 Aluminium Oxide (Al2O3) 0.06-0.08

10 Titanium Oxide 0.01-0.0168

Chloride (Cl-) 5.5-6.5

2.14 CO2 recovery from fermentation section

CO2 Recovery Plant takes CO2 gas from the fermentation process passes through a series of

purification processes namely - a stainless steel CO2 foam trap to separate the gas, a

deodorizer. At the same time, CO2 with a very high degree of purity is indispensable for the

production process in a modern brewery. With CO2 recovery plants efficient carbon dioxide

treatment: maximum purity with lowest O2 content and maximum yield will be achieved.

In several steps the carbon dioxide gas is purified thoroughly, so that it complies even with

the strict demands of the brewing industry. From the fermentation tanks the CO2 is first led to

the foam separator. In this stage, the foam entrained from the fermentation tanks is separated.

Through low-pressure gas storage balloon the gas flows into the gas scrubber, where it is

cleaned by counter flow of water. In the gas scrubber water-soluble impurities and aerosols

are absorbed from the carbon dioxide.

2.15 Facilities Provided to Labour 2.15.1 During construction phase: First Aid: At work place, first aid facilities will be maintained at a readily accessible place

where necessary appliances including sterilized cotton wool etc. Ambulance will be kept at

the site and made available at workplace to take injured person to the nearest hospital.

Potable Water: Sufficient supply of water fit for drinking will be provided at suitable places.

Sanitary Facility: Sanitary facilities will be provided at accessible place within the work

zone and kept in a good condition. The contractor will conform to requirement of local

medical and health authorities at all times. 10 No's toilets, 5 Bathrooms and sewage treatment

by septic tank (18 KL capacity with 3m X 2 m X 3m) & 1 No's soak pits (1.5m dia X 3 m

depth) will be provided.

Canteen: The canteen will be provided for the benefit of workers.

Security: HSL will provide necessary security to work force in co-ordination with State

authorities.

2.15.2 During operational phase:

Apart from the above company will provide residential facilities to the essential workers and

staff. Most of the workers come from nearby villages. A total of 10 quarters will be provided

for the operation phase. These quarters will be provided with all the civic amenities.

No. of residential quarters: 10

Total number of Persons can reside in quarters: 50

Facilities of truck drivers: Rest rooms, Wash rooms, safe drinking water will be

provided.





DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 Introduction

The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the impact zone

for various components of the environment, viz. air, noise, water, land socio-economic, land

use and biological components. The baseline environmental quality has been assessed during

1stOctober 2017 to 31

stDecember, 2017 in a study area of 10 Km radial distance from the

project site. Route map of the project site is given in Fig 3.1

Fig 3.1 Route map of the project site

Knowledge of baseline environmental status of the study area is useful for Impact

Assessment Process of assessing and predicting the environmental consequences of the

significant actions. Significant action depicts direct adverse changes caused by the action and

its effect on the health of the biota including flora, fauna and human being, socio-economic

conditions, current use of land and resources, physical and cultural heritage properties and

biophysical surroundings. Baseline data generation of the following environmental attributes

is essential in EIA studies.

1. Physical Environment

The components of physical environment discussed in this section includes,

Land Environment

Climate and Meteorology

Ambient Air Quality

Ambient Noise levels

3





Geology, Minerals and Hydrology

Surface and Groundwater quality

2. Biological Environment

3. Social Environment

3.2 Baseline Data

i) Primary data Secondary data collected for various environmental aspects as given

below:

Table 3.1 Baseline Environmental Data collection

Environmental

Parameters Locations Source

Air Quality 8 locations Primary

Meteorology 1 location Primary (site specific)

Water 9 locations Primary

Soil 7 locations Primary

Noise 8 locations Primary

Ecology Study Area Primary and Secondary

Geology and Hydrology Study Area Primary and Secondary

Land use Study area Primary and Secondary

Socio-Economic Study Area Primary and Secondary

ii) Secondary data were collected from published sources and Government agencies

such as Survey of India, National Remote Sensing, Census department, Forest

Department, IMD, Central Groundwater Board reports, etc.,

Expansion of Sugar Complex from 4500 TCD to 7500 TCD, 14 MW/Hr to 30 MW




Table 3.2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring

Sl.No Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring Approach for the study

Physical environment

1. Soil Physico chemical

parameters

Once during the study period at

Seven locations.

Identification of Soil types, soil status using

secondary data

Identification of soil sampling locations

Collection and analysis of soil samples, by

Jakson (1968), Black (1982) and USDA (1972).

Interpretation of results

2 Land use Trend of land use change Satellite imagery of the study

Collection of toposheets and satellite imageries

for the study area

Processing of satellite imageries by using ARC

GIS 9.2 and ERDAS IMAGINE 9.1 tools for

generation of various thematic maps

Interpretation of thematic maps to obtain landuse

land cover statistics

3 Ambient Air

Quality

As per NAAQ Standards,

2009

24 hourly for all the parameters

except CO and O3 which is

monitored hourly basis twice a

week for three month at eight

locations.

Designing of AAQM network as per BIS/CPCB

guidelines

AAQM monitoring as per NAAQ standards -

2009, CPCB, New Delhi

Analysis of the results using CPCB &IS:5182

Interpretation of results as per AQI, CPCB, New

Delhi

4 Meteorology

Solar Radiation (Watt / sq.

m), Relative Humidity (%),

Temperature (°C), Rainfall

(mm), Wind Direction

(Deg), Wind Gust (km/hr),

Wind Speed (km/hr) and

Dew Point (°C).

Continuous monitoring station

for three months.

Collection of secondary IMD data for the nearest

station (Belagavi)

Installation of weather monitoring station at site






5 Noise levels Leq Day time & Leq Night

time

Continuous recording per

minute interval for 24 hours

per location at eight stations

once in the study period.

Selection of Ambient Noise level monitoring

locations as per Ambient Noise Level

Monitoring, CPCB, New Delhi Protocol

Ambient Noise level monitoring

Interpretation of results as per Noise (Regulation

and Control) rules - 2000, MoEF, GoI

6 Water quality Physical, Chemical and

Bacteriological

Once during the study period at

nine locations.

Identification of sampling locations

Collection, preservation and Transportation of

samples as per CPCB guidelines

Analysis of water samples as per BIS, USEPA

and APHA guidelines

Interpretation of results as per BIS and CPCB

7 Geology

Geological study based on

field investigations in the

study area

Once during the study period

Identification of Geology, characteristics and

economic mineral deposits of the study area

8 Hydrology

Drainage area and pattern,

nature of streams, aquifer

characteristics of the area

Based on field studies in

the study area.


Collection of reports from CGWB, GSI and

national Hydrograph

Site investigation for assessment of

Groundwater, resources quality and potential

Delineation of drainage pattern

Conducting hydrogeological surveys, Depth to

water level and Water table elevation surveys

Groundwater quality analysis using BIS

standards

Biological Environment

9 Ecology Flora, Fauna, Avi-fauna

(Terrestrial)

Through field visit during the

Study period once and

substantiated through

secondary sources (Forest

Department).

Collection of forest working plan, Gazetteer,

published literature for the study area

Discussion with forest officials and local people

Identification of sampling locations

Quadrate method for collection of flora






Transact method for collection of fauna and

point count method for collection of avi - fauna

data

Identification of Conservation status of flora and

fauna by using IUCN, BSI and wildlife

schedules

Assessment of Phyto - sociological parameters -

frequency, density, species richness, species

diversity

Interpretation of results

Social Environment

10 Socio economic

aspects

Based on primary data

collected from socio

economic survey done

carried out in the study area

and secondary data

collected from official

websites and also from

District Census Handbook,

Belagavi


Collection on census data and other literatures

Discussion with Project Proponent

Delineation of Demographic profile, Literacy,

Occupation status, infrastructure facilities

available, health status, religion and caste,

cultural properties of the study area

Rapid Rural appraisal method

Questionnaire survey and community

consultations

CSR Budget Estimation





3.3 Land Environment

3.3.1 Land use

These Survey of India (SOI) topographic sheets of 48 M/1, 48 M/2, 48 I/13, 48 I/14of

1:50,000 scale and satellite image IRS LISS III (PAN merged) geocoded data of 1:10,000

scale for the year 2016 has been used for the study. The IRS data was visually and digitally

interpreted by using the image interpretation elements (such as tone, texture, shape, pattern,

association etc.) and Arc GIS software was used for processing, analysis and integration of

spatial data to reach the objectives of the study. Adequate field checks were made before

finalization of the thematic maps. It has been carried out using Arc GIS software.

3.3.1.1 Approach and Methods

High resolution satellite imageries from Karnataka State Remote Sensing Application Centre

(KSRSAC) Bengaluru were obtained and land use maps for 10 km radius showing

settlements, water bodies, vegetation etc were then prepared. Geocoded False Colour

Composite scene of IRS-IC LISS III with PAN merged data on 1:10,000 scale coinciding

with Survey of India (SOI) Toposheet is used to prepare land use and land cover mapping

and to prepare contour mapping to the present study.

For the purpose of study of land use/land cover ARC GIS 9.2 and ERDAS IMAGINE 9.1 are

powerful tools for extracting the land use, land cover layers, from SOI toposheets and

satellite imageries. The land use/land cover classes include agriculture land, aquaculture

tanks, settlements, drains etc. This classification and methodology is performed based on the

standard methodology. Later Change Detection methodology was done for the images to find

out the changes that have taken place in the study area using ERDAS IMAGINE 9.1. The

feature classes were identified based on the visual interpretation of the satellite imagery

coupled with field checks. These datasets were digitized and analyzed to obtain land use/land

cover statistics for the areas under each of these categories. The land use details of the study

area are given below;

Table 3.3 Details of the land use of study area

Sl No LULC Area Sq

Km %

1 Agricultural Plantation 0.02 0.01

2 Built-up 10.31 3.03

3 Crop-Land 296.30 87.01

4 Eucalyptus Plantation 0.30 0.09

5 Land with/without scrub 10.47 3.07

6 Other Forest Plantation 0.10 0.03

7 Scrub Land 0.05 0.01

8 Water body 22.99 6.75

Total 340.53 100.00

3.3.1.2 Inference

Majority of the project buffer area (Outside the industrial premises) is crop land followed by

water body and land with/without scrub area. It also includes small proportion of built-up,





barren rocky and plantations. The ground truth survey revealed that majority of the farmers

cultivates Sugar cane. The land use types as per the satellite data were given above table. The

land use of study area reveals that majority of the area is crop land (87.01 %) followed by

water body (6.75 %).

Fig 3.2 Satellite imagery map of the study area (10Km radius)





Fig 3.3 Land use map of the study area (10Km radius)

3.3.2 Soil Characteristics

3.3.2.1 Soil Resource

The soils of the region can broadly be classified into red soils and black soils. These soils

vary in depth and texture, depending on the parent rock type, physiographic settings and

climatic conditions. By and large, black soils predominates the Deccan Trap terrain and the

red soils are found in the South-Western and South-Eastern part of the district in gneissic

terrain.

3.3.2.2 Soil sampling and analysis methods

A total of seven locations were selected based on geology and soil types for sampling, which

includes three from core (within industrial premises) and four from buffer area (Outside the

industrial premises) respectively. The samples have been analyzed for physico-chemical

parameters. The details of the Soil Sampling, latitudes and longitudes, land use and distance

from the study area are given in table 3.4 and Fig. 3.3





Fig 3.4 Photographs showing Soil sampling in the study area

In each sampling location, two kg of soil samples were collected in polythene bags using

augur and core cutter and sent to the MoEF recognized and NABL accredited EHSRDC

laboratory for analysis. The soil samples were collected over a depth of 10cm that represents

the top soil layer. Soil physical and chemical properties were analyzed using Jackson (1968),

Black (1982) and USDA (1972) methods. Organic carbon is estimated by treating a known

weight of soil with an excess of acid dichromates and monitoring the proportionate blue

green colour of the chromate ions developed. Nitrogen which is readily available to the plants

in the form of ammonium ions, referred to as minerisable nitrogen, is estimated by a direct

Kjeldahl-distillation of the ammonium sulphate formed. Cation exchange capacity is

estimated using ammonium acetate solution as extract.

Available phosphorous is estimated by Bray’s extraction procedure. For particle size analysis,

the soil organic matter is oxidized by treatment with hydrogen peroxide, particles dispersed

with alkaline hexametaphosphate, the medium, fine and very fine sands wet-sieved out on

standard sieves, and silt and clay estimated following their settling rates as per the procedures

recommended by the National Bureau of Soil Survey and Land Use Planning (NBSSLP).





Fig 3.5 Location of Soil Sampling Stations

Table 3.4 Details of soil sampling locations

Sampling

Station Code

Name of the sampling

station

Distance (km) and

Direction Latitude and Longitude

S1 Project site West 15°43'12.31"N

75° 03‘32.62"E

S2 Project site East 15°43'13.21"N

75° 03‘46.42"E

S3 Project site South 15°43‘7.74"N

75° 03'38.28"E

S4 Karikatti 3.45 (NW) 15°43'55.04"N

75° 01'34.97"E

S5 Saundatti 6.25 (NE) 15°45‘48.18"N

75° 06‘20.43"E

S6 Hire Ulligeri 6.14 (SE) 15°40‘07.29"N

75° 05‘18.78"E

S7 Chika Ulligeri 6.10 (SE) 15°39'45.56"N

75° 04'17.98"E





94

Table 3.5 Soil Quality Analysis

Sl. No Parameters Unit Project site

West Project site

East Project site

South Kari katti

Village Saundatti

Village Hire Ulligeri

Chika Ulligeri

1. Colour - Black Black Black Black Black Black Black

2. Texture - Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam

3. Organic Matter Percent 1.44 1.24 1.34 1.65 1.55 1.55 1.44

4. Bulk Density g/cc 1.34 1.35 1.68 1.20 1.40 1.59 1.18

5. Moisture Content Percent 1.35 2.74 1.90 2.74 3.57 4.31 3.0

6. pH - 9.50 9.40 9.50 8.89 9.80 9.50 8.77

7. Electrical Conductivity µS/cm 180.0 82.6 158.4 158.7 207 162.1 138.8

8. Magnesium meq/l 2.4 3.2 2.6 4.8 2.2 6.0 2.8

9. Calcium meq/l 49.8 57.2 57.4 49 58 51.8 54.2

10. Sodium Absorption Ratio - 17.78 17.98 11.66 10.77 22.25 10.21 8.04

11. Chlorides meq/l 3.76 2.82 3.29 3.76 4.23 2.82 4.23

12. Sodium mg/100gm 209.00 227.38 146.99 128.61 229.67 126.32 98.76

13. Organic Carbon Percent 0.84 0.72 0.78 0.96 0.90 0.90 0.84

14. Available Potassium mg/100gm 39.90 47.88 41.90 59.85 49.88 59.85 95.77

15. Available Phosphorus Kg/ha 94.51 71.52 79.19 68.97 84.29 120.06 53.64

16. Sand Percent 36.96 42.96 38.96 34.96 42.96 40.96 38.96

17. Available Nitrogen Kg/ha 220.71 156.73 174.20 147.14 155.04 163.07 151.81

18. Silt Percent 37.28 25.28 33.28 39.28 27.28 31.28 31.28

19. Clay Percent 25.76 31.76 27.76 25.76 29.76 27.76 29.76

20. Soil Salinity µS/cm 189 70.6 161 140 210.6 158.6 120.6

21. Boron mg/100gm BDL 0.47 6.19 BDL 7.33 BDL BDL

22. Sulphate mg/100gm 0.20 0.40 0.26 0.40 1.61 6.38 0.33

23. Zinc mg/kg 31.6 26.2 80.2 35.7 29.3 33.30 23.3

24. Manganese mg/kg 640 560.1 601 519.2 699 644.5 561.6

25. Copper mg/kg 22.8 19.8 21.8 22.4 22.5 23.60 19.7

Note: ND - Not detected





3.3.2.3Inference

3.3.2.3.1 Results of soil quality analysis

a) Soil pH

pH of soil mainly depends on the soil water ratio. It is observed that pH of the soil samples in

the study area ranged between 8.77 and 9.80. The lowest pH value of 8.77 was found at Chikka

Ulligeri village and the maximum pH of 9.80 was observed in Saundatti village. The average

pH value during the study period is 9.33. The soil in the study area is alkaline in nature.

Fig 3.6 pH in soil samples

b) Electrical conductivity (EC)

Electrical Conductivity as the measure of current carrying capacity gives a clear picture of the

amount of soluble salts present in the soil. The EC values of the soil samples varied from

82.6μS/cm to 207 μS/cm. The highest value of EC was observed at Project site east whereas the

lowest EC value of 207μS/cm was observed in the soil sample collected near Saundatti village.

Fig 3.7 EC in soil samples

8.28.48.68.89

9.29.49.69.810

Results

Sampling location

pH

0

50

100

150

200

250

µS

/cm

Electrical Conductivity µS/cm

Electrical Conductivity µS/cm





c) Salinity:

Based on the electrical conductivity of the soil, soil salinity can be classified into four classes:

Water class Electrical conductivity

( µs/cm at 25˚ C)

Approximate salt

concentration

Class - I - Low salinity 0 to 250 <0.16

Class - II - Medium salinity 250 to 750 0.16 to 0.50

Class - III - High salinity 750 to 2250 0.50 to 1.50

Class - IV - Very High salinity 2250 to 5000 1.5 to 3

CI water is considered as safe without any salinity problems.

CII When used for irrigation, moderate leaching is required.

CIII and CIV cannot be used on soils with inadequate drainage, since salinity develops.

In the study area, all the samples are under the category of Class-I, this indicates that the soil

samples are under low salinity. This indicates that the water is considered as safe without any

salinity problems for Sugarcane growers.

d) Organic Carbon (OM)

Organic matter in the soil was oxidized with a mixture of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) and

concentrated H2SO4, in accordance with the standard procedure.

Fig 3.8 Organic Carbon in soil samples

Table 3.6 Organic carbon percent in soil samples

Percentage organic carbon Rating

<0.40 Low

0.4 to 0.75 Medium

>0.75 High

In the study area, it was observed that the percent organic carbon was found in High rating.

Therefore most of the samples in the area appear to possess high content of percent organic

carbon, which indicates that the farmers are maintaining their lands with optimum level of

0.840.72

0.78

0.960.9 0.9

0.84

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

Results (%)

Organic Carbon (%)





nutrients by applying sufficient quantity of green manure and farm yard manure to get higher

yield of crops.

e) Available Phosphorus

Phosphorus is the second most important macronutrient available in the soil of the biological

systems, which covers more than 1% of the dry organic weight. Generally Plants are dependent

on inorganic phosphorus especially in the form of phosphate ions, whereas organic phosphates

are also important sources of phosphorus in almost all types of soils.

Sl. No Grade Concentration

1 Low phosphorus Less than 12.4 Kg/ha

2 Medium phosphorus 12.4 to 22.4 Kg/ha

3 Adequate phosphorus More than 22.4 Kg/ha

4 Abundant phosphorus Still higher

Soil of the study area were observed with abundant of phosphorous in the range of 53.64 –

120.06 Kg/ha.

f) Colour

Soil colour is one of the visual judgment through which the soil type can be classified. The soil

colour may vary from region to region or spatially. Soil derives its colour from the source of

the material. However, the colour may also vary due to,

Soil forming process

Moisture content and drainage

Nature and amount of organic matter

Mineral sources

In the study area, the soil samples have shown similarity in colour. The colour of samples

indicated that majority of the samples were Black. This indicates that, the soils are rich in

organic content.

g) Particle size distribution

The soil particle size is major parameter and a relative proportion of the soil particles of various

sizes are an important physical parameter, which emphasizes the texture of soil of a particular

region. Larger particle size helps in providing the physical support to the plants, while smaller

particles encourage the soil to hold water and availability of nutrients. As per the International

System of Classification, the range of the particle sizes in the soil is as under:

Sl.No. Category Particle Size

1 Coarse sand 0.2 to 2.0 mm

2 Fine sand 0.02 to 0.2 mm

3 Silt 0.002 to 0.02 mm

4 Clay <0.002mm

Based on the above classification, soil in the study area have particle density of <0.002 mm and

have Clay loam texture.

h) Available Nitrogen

Nitrogen is one among the four primary elements essential for the plant tissues. It is the major

component of proteins, nucleic acids and chlorophyll. Nitrogen is having a major role in

maintaining the fertility of the soil and nitrogen content in almost all the soils are observed to





be very low and is found as nitrates, nitrite and ammonium. Plants are more dependent upon

nitrate nitrogen, during the aerobic conditions and ammonia nitrogen during anaerobic

conditions.Nitrogen range was found to be 147.14 Kg/Ha in Karikatti village to 220.71 Kg/Ha

at Project site west. This indicates Nitrogen values were low in the study area.

Sl. No Quantity of nitrogen Rating

1 < 272 Kg/ha Low

2 272 to 554 Kg/ha Medium

3 > 554 Kg/ha High

Fig 3.9 Available Nitrogen in soil samples

i) Soil moisture

Soil moisture content is having a major contribution to vary the process and also one of the

important factors affecting nitrification. In water logged, areas soil suppresses the process of

nitrification because of deficient oxygen. However, it is totally different in the case of dry soils.

As in the case of present study area in the soils, there is enough moisture for the process of

bacterial metabolism and such soils posses’ higher rate of biosynthesis of nitrogen which also

contribute to fertility of the soil. Soil moisture in the study area varies from 1.35% to 4.31%.

Fertility Status of soils: Based on the results and nutrient indices, it is possible to classify

nutrient status of the particular area and classify each nutrient level i.e., low, medium or high

based on a rating chart, which was made use of while rating the soil analysis results, as follows:

Table 3.7 Rating Chart for Soil Test values and their Nutrient Indices

0

50

100

150

200

250

Results (Kg/H

a)

Available Nitrogen (Kg/Ha)

1. Soil pH

Acidity Neutral Alkaline

Range Below 6 6-8 Above 8

Soil Reaction Index I II III

2. Electrical Conductivity

Normal Critical Injurious

Range (µmhos/cm) below 1000 1000-2000 above 2000

Salt index I II III

3. Organic Carbon





The nutrient index values are evaluated for the soil samples analyzed using the following

formula:

Nutrient Index= [(1x No. of samples in low category) + (2 x No. Samples in medium

category) + (3 x No. of samples in high category)] / Total number of samples. The values are:

Characteristics Nutrient index Remarks

Organic carbon (OC) 2.42 High

Available Phosphorus (P) 3 High

Available potash (K) 1 Low

From the overall results of physico-chemical analysis of the soil samples, it is observed that,

the soil pH values range between 8.77 and 9.80 and all values belong to soil reaction index-III,

which shows that the soils of the study area are alkaline range. Whereas, organic carbon

content of soil samples were observed to be in the range from 0.72 to 0.96 percent. As per the

nutrient index, soil samples have high organic carbon content due optimum application of

organic manure by the farmers in the cane area.

3.4 Air Environment: Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is a useful tool for the

interpretation of the baseline condition as well as for the input to predictive models for air

quality modeling and dispersion studies. Historical data on meteorological parameters also

plays an important role in identifying the general meteorological status of the region.

Secondary meteorological data is obtained from IMD for Belagavi.

3.4.1 Temperature

Temperature of Belagavi was ranging from 20°C-24°C during year 1995 - 2013. However,

highest mean temperature in the month recorded in April was 36.4°C in 2014. From November

to January, both day and night temperatures begin to decrease rapidly. January is generally the

coldest month, with mean temperature of 14.2°C. During the post-monsoon season,

temperatures remain between 15.5°C to 29.9°C. In winter season, temperatures remain between

14.2°C to 31.5°C.

Low Medium High

Range (%) Below 0.5 0.5-0.75 Above 0.75

Nutrient index I II III

4. Available Phosphorus

Low Medium High

Range (Kg/ha) Below 22 22-54 Above 54


5. Available Potassium

Low Medium High

Range (Kg/ha) Below 123 123-296 Above 296


6 Nutrient Index

Nutrient Index Range Remarks (OC, N, P, K)

I Below 1.67 Low

II 1.67-2.33 Medium

III Above 2.33 High





3.4.2 Rainfall

The climate of the district is hot and dry. Hot season starts from middle of the February to end

of May. Post monsoon is during October and November. Cold season is from December to

middle of February. The average rainfall in 2014 is 967.5mm

Table 3.8 Meteorological data from 1995 - 2013

Year

Mean station

Pressure

hPa

Mean sea level

pressure,

hPa

Mean Dry bulb

Temperature,

oC

Mean Wet Bulb

temperature,

oC

Mean dew point

temperature,

oC

Mean Relative

Humidity,

%

Mean vapour

pressure,

hPa

Total rainfall

from

03UTC observation

1995 928.3 1011.1 22.6 19.2 17.0 71.8 20.1 6.3

1996 928.0 1010.7 23.0 19.1 16.5 69.4 19.5 11.9

1997 929.1 1012.2 22.1 19.2 17.2 75.3 20.3 0.0

1998 926.8 1009.7 22.0 20.0 18.7 82.1 22.2 0.0

1999 928.1 1011.5 20.5 18.1 16.4 78.6 19.3 0.0

2000 927.4 1010.6 21.0 18.3 16.5 76.4 19.4 0.0

2001 927.9 1011.0 21.7 19.0 17.3 76.8 20.3 0.0

2002 928.7 1011.7 22.1 18.9 16.9 73.1 19.8 0.0

2003 928.3 1011.0 22.9 18.7 15.8 66.7 18.7 0.0

2004 928.6 1011.5 22.3 17.9 14.7 65.3 17.5 8.5

2005 928.9 1011.6 23.3 17.6 13.6 56.7 16.4 0.0

2012 926.8 1009.1 23.6 21.2 20.0 81.0 23.7 10.1

2013 926.3 1008.4 24.4 20.4 18.0 70.5 21.3 52.2

Source: IMD, Pune

Table 3.9 Meteorological data of Belagavi District, 2014

Max, 0C Min, 0C

Avg Wind speed,

kmph RF, cm

Jan 29.7 14.2 7.4 0

Feb 31.5 14.7 6.1 1.1

Mar 34.5 17.3 6.6 18.9

Apr 36.4 20.3 6.5 28.2

May 34 20.7 7.2 169.7

June 30.5 20.9 11 115.5

July 27 20.3 10.7 350.1

Aug 27.2 20.1 7.8 163.5

Sept 28.4 19.6 7.8 68.3

Oct 29.9 18.8 5.1 157.6

Nov 29 15.5 5.8 72.2

Dec 28.4 14.5 5.9 15.9

Source: IMD





Hour: 0300 UTC

September October November December

Hour: 1200 UTC

September October November December

Year: 1971-2000

Place: Belgaum (Sambre Airport)

Source: IMD, Bangalore

Based on the windrose diagram, history data shows maximum windblown during October was

from West, November and December was from East. Hence monitoring stations were selected

at both East and West Directions.

3.4.3 Meteorological data monitored at site for the study period

The meteorological factors affect a range of

atmospheric characteristics and dispersal of

pollutants. These factors and their frequent

changes control the gravity and intensity of air

pollution in an area and cause seasonal variations

in horizontal as well as vertical distribution and

fate of respective pollutants. The essential

meteorological parameters are wind speed, wind

direction, ambient air temperature, relative

humidity, rainfall, atmospheric pressure and

mixing height.





Meteorological monitoring was carried out at project site during October 2017 to December

2017. Watchdog 2900 ET was installed at site which records Solar Radiation (Watt / sq. m),

Relative Humidity (%), Temperature (°C), Rainfall (mm), Wind Direction (Deg), Wind Gust

(Km/hr), Wind Speed (Km/hr) and Dew Point (°C). Monthly average meteorological data are

presented below;

Fig 3.10 Photograph showing Installed Micro Meteorological Station at site

Table 3.10 Meteorological data collected at site

Season

Temp Rel.

Humidity Pressure Speed

Rain

fall Radiation

oC % hPa km/h mm Wh/m2

Oct,

2017

Max 31.5 99.0 937.0 25.9 6.0 114.0

Min 15.7 17.0 926.0 1.9 0.0 0.0

Avg 24.3 47.1 930.9 8.3 0.1 28.1

Nov,

2017

Max 31.4 99.0 937.0 25.9 15.0 104.1

Min 13.2 18.0 928.0 1.9 0.0 0.0

Avg 23.1 63.6 932.7 8.0 0.0 28.5

Dec,

2017

Max 30.2 99.0 943.0 27.8 0.0 95.9

Min 10.8 17.0 929.0 1.9 0.0 0.0

Avg 21.3 61.1 933.9 9.4 0.0 27.8

Period of Record :

Start: 01-Oct-17 01:00

End:31-Dec- 17 24:00

Total Records :2208

Avg. Wind Speed: 2.4m/s

Max. Wind Speed: 7.7 m/s

Calm:24.7%

Orientation: Blowing from E

Period of Record :

Start: 01-Oct-17 01:00

End:31-Dec- 17 24:00

Total Records :744

Avg. Wind Speed:

2.3m/s

Max. Wind Speed:

7.2m/s

Calm:16.4%

Orientation: Blowing

from SE

OCTOBER, 2017 - DECEMBER, 2017 OCTOBER, 2017





Period of Record :

Start: 01-Oct-17 01:00

End:31-Dec- 17 24:00

Total Records :720

Avg. Wind Speed: 2.2m/s

Max. Wind Speed: 7.2m/s

Calm:33.5%

Orientation: Blowing from E

Period of Record :

Start: 01-Oct-17 01:00

End:31-Dec- 17 24:00

Total Records :744

Avg. Wind Speed:

2.6m/s

Max. Wind Speed:

7.7m/s

Calm:24.6%

Orientation: Blowing

from E

NOVEMBER, 2017 DECEMBER, 2017

Fig 3.11 Wind rose Diagram for the Period Oct 2017 - Dec 2017

Wind rose shows that the prevailing wind direction during the study period is East. During the

study period, maximum wind speed of 7.7 m/s was observed. Average wind speed was 2.4 m/s.

3.4.3.1 Mixing height / Inversion

Mixing height is the region between the bottom of the inversion layer and the ground. The

inversion layer is a dynamic region, which changes depending on the atmospheric condition.

The mixing height can be calculated based on the vertical temperature profile of the

atmosphere. Mixing height generated for the study period using AERMET. It shows from the

table that, maximum mixing height of 4000 mt above ground level is observed while the

minimum mixing height observed is 90 mt.

3.4.3.2 Temperature

Temperature during the study period was in the range of 10.8°C-31.5°C.

3.4.4 Ambient Air Quality

The selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques

and frequency of sampling are given below. The study area includes residential and agricultural





environment. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring was carried out at eight locations within 10 Km

radius study area including one AAQMS in downwind direction. The results are tabulated

below. The National Ambient Air Quality standard is given in the following table:

Table 3.11 Details of AAQM parameters with analysis methodology

Pollutants

Frequency

of

Monitoring

NAAQM

Standards,

2009

Unit Method of analysis

Du

st PM10 Particulate Matter

24 Hrs

100 µg/m3 Gravimetric method

PM2.5 Particulate Matter 60 µg/m3 Gravimetric method

Gas

es

SO2 Sulphur dioxide 80 µg/m3 Improved West and

Geake Method

NO2 Nitrogen Di Oxide 80 µg/m3 Jacob & Hochheisser

Modified Na- Arsenate

O3 Ozone

1 Hr

180 µg/m3 Chemiluminescence

(Instrument ) method

CO Carbon monoxide 4 mg/m3 Instrumental method

NH3 Ammonia

24 Hrs

400 µg/m3 Indophenol Blue

C6H6 Benzene 5 µg/m3 GCMS method

(Instrumental)

BaP Benzo(a) pyrene 1 ng/m3 GCMS method

(Instrumental)

Met

als

Pb Lead 1 µg/m3 AAS method

(Instrumental)

As Arsenic 6 ng/m3 AAS method

(Instrumental)Ni Nickel 20 ng/m

3 AAS method

(Instrumental)

3.4.5 Selection of Sampling Stations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of monitoring network in the air

quality surveillance program has been based on the following considerations:

Meteorological conditions.

Topography of the study area.

Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status.

Representatives of likely impact areas.

Field planning.

The budget, minimum monitoring requirements and its objective adequacy criteria was

first established during monitoring network-planning stage.

Principal factors governing the selection of sampling locations were depending on the

historical meteorological data and site conditions.

Recommended Criteria for Siting Monitoring Stations as per: IS: 5182 (Part 14), 2000

was followed.





The stations were selected at a place where interferences are not present or anticipated.

Height of the inlet was maintained at 3 ± 0.5 m above the ground.

The sampler was kept more than 20 m away from trees.

There was unrestricted airflow in three of four quadrants.

The sampling stations selected were away from major pollution sources

In order to establish the baseline air quality status in a study area, 8 ambient air quality stations

were established in and around the 10 Km radius of the proposed expansion project site

including one station in downward direction (A2- Karikatti village). These stations were

selected on the basis of even distribution over the study area taking in to consideration various

factors as detailed above. The details of these Ambient Air quality-sampling stations are given

below.

Fig 3.12 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations





Table 3.12 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Station No. Village Name Distance (km) and

Direction

Latitude and

Longitude

A1 Project site - 15°43‘12.13"N

75°03‘37.97"E

A2 * Karikatti 3.45 (W) 15°43'55.04"N

75°01'34.97"E

A3 Sangreshkop 7.2 (SW) 15°39'18.12"N

75° 01'19.08"E

A4 Saundatti 6.25 (NE) 15°45‘48.18"N

75° 06‘20.43"E

A5# Betsur 8.18 (E)

15°43'41.82"N

75° 08'26.25"E

A6 Hire Ulligeri 6.14 (SE) 15°40‘7.29"N

75° 05‘18.78"E

A7 Asundi 4.24 (NW) 15°44'43.69"N

75° 01'31.36"E

A8 Singarkoppa 5.2(NW) 15°46'12.47"N

75° 03'14.85"E

* Downwind direction; # upwind direction

Fig 3.13 Photographs showing ambient air quality monitoring (RDS, PM2.5 sampler and

gaseous samplers) at the study area





Fig 3.14 Flow Chart showing AAQM Methodology





108

3.4.7 Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring done in a radius of 10 Kms

Table 3.13 Ambient Air Quality Status (October 2017 to Dec 2017)

Average –24 Hours

PM10, g/m3

LOCATION MAX MIN AVG SD GM PERCENTILE

98 85 50 35

A1 80 65.00 73.58 4.40 73.46 80.00 78.55 73.50 72.00

A2 77 61.00 67.92 4.19 67.79 76.08 71.55 68.00 66.05

A3 67 54.00 61.21 3.30 61.12 66.54 64.55 61.00 60.05

A4 68 55.00 60.58 3.48 60.49 67.54 64.00 60.00 59.00

A5 62 51.00 56.79 3.30 56.70 62.00 60.00 57.50 55.00

A6 69 47.00 53.96 5.59 53.70 67.62 58.00 53.50 51.05

A7 72 58.00 65.46 3.40 65.37 71.08 68.55 66.00 65.05

A8 74 56.00 18.83 4.86 67.08 73.54 72.00 68.00 67.05

0.00

20.00

40.00

60.00

80.00

100.00

120.00

A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

µg / m

3

Sample

PM 10

PM10

NAAQ Standard





PM2.5, g/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 24 14.00 21.3 2.29 21.11 23.54 23.00 22.00 22.00

A2 23 17.00 17.0 1.65 19.97 22.54 21.55 20.00 20.00

A3 20 13.00 16.3 1.78 16.16 19.54 18.00 16.00 16.00

A4 18 12.00 15.8 1.64 15.71 18.00 17.55 16.00 15.00

A5 19 13.00 14.9 1.64 14.83 18.08 16.55 15.00 14.05

A6 21 11.00 13.9 2.54 13.72 20.54 15.55 13.50 13.00

A7 23 15.00 18.2 2.32 18.07 22.54 21.00 18.00 17.00

A8 22 14.00 18.83 2.33 18.69 22.00 21.55 18.50 18.00

SO2, g/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 9.57 8.48 8.99 0.30 8.99 9.51 9.32 8.99 8.92

A2 10.20 7.10 8.44 0.70 8.41 9.89 9.11 8.31 8.21

A3 9.46 7.48 8.27 0.54 8.25 9.28 8.74 8.17 7.98

A4 8.31 7.48 8.27 0.60 8.29 9.75 8.75 8.19 8.00

A5 10.06 8.21 8.76 0.50 8.74 9.90 9.03 8.66 8.56

A6 9.68 7.10 8.63 0.73 8.60 9.52 9.33 8.74 8.64

A7 13.87 7.16 8.56 1.40 8.47 12.21 9.25 8.14 7.96

A8 9.12 7.46 8.27 0.48 8.25 9.12 8.97 8.15 7.96

0.00

10.00

20.00

30.00

40.00

50.00

60.00

70.00

A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

µg / m

3

Sample

PM2.5

PM2.5

NAAQ Standards

0.00

20.00

40.00

60.00

80.00

100.00

A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

µg / m

3

Sample

SO2

SO2

NAAQ Standards





NO2, g/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 16.48 14.32 15.46 0.61 15.45 16.42 16.15 15.47 15.21

A2 17.40 15.02 16.14 0.54 16.13 17.22 16.62 16.14 16.02

A3 19.84 15.29 16.40 0.83 16.38 18.50 16.69 16.32 16.22

A4 16.44 14.65 15.71 0.45 15.70 16.43 16.20 15.78 15.48

A5 17.16 15.02 16.18 0.55 16.17 17.16 16.59 16.20 16.10

A6 16.98 14.56 15.88 0.55 15.87 16.89 16.43 15.83 15.69

A7 19.87 16.11 16.71 0.74 16.70 18.64 16.94 16.55 16.39

A8 19.11 15.98 16.65 0.60 16.64 18.12 16.90 16.53 16.44

CO, mg/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 0.99 0.71 0.86 0.08 0.86 0.98 0.93 0.87 0.83

A2 0.97 0.66 0.81 0.08 0.80 0.95 0.89 0.82 0.79

A3 0.91 0.62 0.77 0.07 0.76 0.88 0.83 0.77 0.74

A4 0.83 0.65 0.74 0.05 0.74 0.83 0.80 0.74 0.71

A5 0.93 0.68 0.79 0.07 0.79 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.77

A6 0.92 0.67 0.77 0.07 0.77 0.91 0.85 0.75 0.74

A7 0.93 0.65 0.82 0.08 0.82 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.82

A8 0.94 0.65 0.80 0.08 0.80 0.93 0.89 0.79 0.78

0.00

20.00

40.00

60.00

80.00

100.00

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

µg / m

3

Sample

NO2

NO2

NAAQ Standards

0.00

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

mg / m

3

Sample

CO

CO

NAAQ Standards





NH3, g/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 10.92 9.18 10.12 0.45 10.11 10.86 10.56 10.14 10.07

A2 10.87 9.58 10.22 0.33 10.21 10.83 10.51 10.23 10.12

A3 10.79 9.42 10.15 0.40 10.14 10.79 10.61 10.13 9.88

A4 10.84 9.13 10.03 0.38 10.02 10.75 10.42 9.93 9.89

A5 10.92 9.18 10.13 0.53 10.12 10.89 10.81 10.10 9.79

A6 10.77 9.41 10.28 0.39 10.28 10.77 10.73 10.32 10.15

A7 10.85 9.22 9.80 0.40 9.79 10.80 9.93 9.82 9.65

A8 10.85 9.17 9.99 0.52 9.97 10.74 10.48 10.17 9.65

O3, g/m3


98 85 50 35

A1 1.85 1.26 1.51 0.16 1.50 1.85 1.68 1.47 1.43

A2 1.92 1.24 1.68 0.20 1.67 1.91 1.84 1.77 1.72

A3 1.79 1.25 1.56 0.13 1.56 1.78 1.69 1.55 1.52

A4 1.84 1.14 1.61 0.19 1.60 1.83 1.76 1.69 1.62

A5 1.88 1.26 1.56 0.17 1.55 1.84 1.75 1.56 1.45

A6 2.47 1.52 1.95 0.24 1.93 2.40 2.18 1.92 1.83

A7 2.65 1.49 1.85 0.25 1.83 2.46 1.98 1.81 1.76

A8 2.60 1.94 2.21 0.16 2.13 2.54 2.37 2.18 2.15

0.00

100.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

µg / m

3

Sample

NH3

NH3

NAAQ Standards

0.00

0.50

1.00

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

µg / m

3

Sample

Ozone

Ozone





Table 3.14 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results

LOCATION PM 10,

g/m3 PM2.5,g/m3 SO2,

g/m3

NO2,

g/m3

CO,

mg/m3

NH3,

g/m3

O3,

g/m3

A1 80.00 23.54 9.51 16.42 0.98 10.86 1.85

A2 76.08 22.54 9.89 17.22 0.95 10.83 1.91

A3 66.54 19.54 9.28 18.50 0.88 10.79 1.78

A4 67.54 18.00 9.75 16.43 0.83 10.75 1.83

A5 62.00 18.08 9.90 17.16 0.92 10.89 1.84

A6 67.62 20.54 9.52 16.89 0.91 10.77 2.40

A7 71.08 22.54 12.21 18.64 0.92 10.80 2.46

A8 73.54 22.00 9.12 18.12 0.93 10.74 2.54

Source=EHSRDC, Bangalore

Date wise monitored data has been annexed as Annexure-2.

Calculation of Air Quality Index for the study area

CPCB….

Air Quality Index Formula

Ip = [{(IHI - ILO)/ (BHI -BLO)} * (Cp-BLO)] + ILO

BHI = Breakpoint concentration greater or equal to given conc.

BLO = Breakpoint concentration smaller or equal to given conc.

IHI = AQI value corresponding to BHI

ILO = AQI value corresponding to BLO





Table 3.15 Air quality Index

Location PM10,

g/m3

AQI Remarks PM2.5,

g/m3

AQI RemarksSO2,

g/m3

AQI RemarksNO2,

g/m3

AQI RemarksCO,

mg/m3

AQI Remarks

A1 80.00 80 Satisfactory 23.54 39.31 Good 9.51 11.88 Good 16.42 20.52 Good 0.98 49 Good

A2 76.08 76.08 Satisfactory 22.54 37.64 Good 9.89 12.36 Good 17.22 21.52 Good 0.95 47.5 Good







Location NH3, g/m3 AQI Remarks Location

O3, g/m3

AQI Remarks

A1 10.86 2.71 Good A1 1.85 1.85 Good

A2 10.83 2.70 Good A2 1.91 1.91 Good

A3 10.79 2.69 Good A3 1.78 1.78 Good

A4 10.75 2.68 Good A4 1.83 1.83 Good

A5 10.89 2.72 Good A5 1.84 1.84 Good

A6 10.77 2.69 Good A6 2.40 2.40 Good

A7 10.80 2.70 Good A7 2.46 2.46 Good

A8 10.74 2.68 Good A8 2.54 2.54 Good





As per Air Quality Index, Good and satisfactory ambient air quality can be observed in the

study area. The air quality w.r.t PM10 is Satisfactory at all the locations and SO2, PM 2.5, CO,

NO2, NH3 & O3 is good. The prominent parameter of concern is PM10.

3.4.7.1 Inference

Particulate Matter <2.5µ &<10µ: The NAAQ standard for PM10is 100 µg/m3 and PM2.5 is 60

µg/m3. Excessive exposure to PM can cause lung problems, breathing difficulties.

The minimum and maximum level of Particulate Matter <2.5µ recorded within the study area

were in the range of 11 to 24 µg/m3. The minimum and maximum level of Particulate Matter

<10µ recorded within the study area were in the range of 47 to 80 µg/m3. The 24 hourly

average values of Particulate Matter <2.5µ & Particulate Matter <10µ were compared with the

national ambient air quality standards and found that all sampling stations recorded values

within the applicable limits for all locations in study area. As per AQI, even though the

concentration is within the permissible limits, it may cause minor discomfort to sensitive

people.

Sulphur Dioxide: Sulphur dioxide in atmosphere is significant because of its toxicity. Sulphur

dioxide is capable of producing illness and lung injury. Further, it can combine with water in

the air to form toxic acid aerosols that can corrode metal surfaces, fabrics and the leaves of

plants. Sulphur dioxide is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive exposure to

sulphur dioxide causes bronchial asthma and other breathing related diseases as it affects the

lungs. The minimum and maximum level of SO2 recorded within the study area was in the

range of 7.10 µg/m3 to 13.87 µg/m

3. The 24 hourly average values of SO2 were compared with

the national ambient air quality standards and it was found that all sampling stations recorded

values much lower than the applicable limit of 80µg/m3.

Oxides of Nitrogen: Oxides of Nitrogen are also an inorganic gaseous pollutant like Sulphur

dioxide. Oxides of Nitrogen emissions are expected to be emitted wherever combustion at high

temperatures takes place. Nitrous oxide and nitric acid mist are the other important pollutants

in the inorganic nitrogen group. NO2 has inherent ability to produce deleterious effects by

themselves like toxicity. It acts as an asphyxiate when in concentrations great enough to reduce

the normal oxygen supply from the air. The minimum and maximum level of NO2 recorded

within the study area was in the range of 14.32µg/m3 to 19.87µg/m

3. The 24 hourly average

values of NO2 were compared with the national ambient air quality standards and it was found

that all the sampling stations recorded values much lower than the applicable limit of 80µg/m3

Carbon Monoxide: Carbon monoxide is a colourless, odourless and tasteless gas that is

slightly lighter than air. It can be toxic to humans and animals when encountered in higher

concentrations, although it is also produced in normal animal metabolism in low quantities and

is thought to have some normal biological functions. In the atmosphere however, it is short

lived and spatially variable, since it combines with oxygen to form carbon dioxide.

Worldwide, the largest source of carbon monoxide is natural in origin is due to photochemical

reactions in the troposphere. Other natural sources of CO include volcanoes, forest fires, and

other forms of combustion. The major man-made source is mobile sources (Vehicles on road)

and non-road sources are gasoline and diesel-powered vehicles, engines, and equipment used

for construction, agriculture, recreation, and many other purposes. The minimum and

maximum level of CO recorded within the study area was in the range of 0.62 mg/m3 to 0.99

mg/m3.

NH3: The value of NH3 recorded within the study area was in the range of 9.13 µg/m3 to

10.92 µg/m3.





O3: The minimum and maximum level of O3 recorded within the study area was in the range of

1.14 µg/m3 to 2.65 µg/m

3.

The lead, nickel and Arsenic detected in small quantities in some instances ranging from 0.001-

0.127µg/m3

0.97-8.24 ng/ m3 and 0.73 – 1.99 ng/m

3 respectively in some location of the study

area. Values for Benzene, benzo (a) pyrene were found to be BDL at all point of time during

the study period.

3.4.8 Traffic Study

Fig 3.15 Google map showing the site connectivity

N





Fig 3.16 Route map showing the connectivity of roads to the site

Table 3.16 Road Geometric Scenario

Road

ROW

(m)

Surface

Condition

Street

lights

Drainage

width

(m)

Road

Remarks

CW

(m) Marking

Signs

Lanes

Shoulder

(m)

SH-30

(2 lanes

undivided)

15

Good

NA

NA

NA

NA

Road

Marking

needs to be

marked.

9.8

2

2.6+2.6

Note: A – Available NA – Not Available

3.4.8.1 Road Connectivity

The Project is located along SH-30 of RoW 15m which connects to Karkatti / Belgavi

on one side and to Saundatti on another side. SH 30 is of 2 lanes with undivided traffic

flow.

The Entry/exits of the project site is provided to SH-30 trough an approach road where

there is no traffic at present. After commissioning of the project, the raw materials

carrying Trucks / tractors/ Bullock carts will move along the approach road.

The project can also be accessed from other places such as Kittore, Bailahongal,

Belgavi, Saundatti, Karkatti and other nearby places.However the traffic from all these

locations will have to join to SH-30 to reach the plant.

N





The proposed approach road will form a T- junction with SH-30. This junction will

have to be designed in accordance with KSHIP / KRDCL based on IRC/ MORTH

specifications. The tentative design is also proposed.

Fig 3.17 Photos showing the traffic and existing road scenario

Fig 3.18 Existing Road Geometry Scenario





Table 3.17 Speed spectrum for the study road (kmph)

Road 2 Wh 3 Wh

4 Wh

(C,J,V) B/L/T Tractor

Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min

SH-30

(2 lanes undivided) 48 29 20 16 55 41 48 35 28 20

Note:

The volume of traffic along the highway being low, the vehicular observed speeds are

more. Hence adequate road safety requirements must be provided.

The observed speeds indicate that the vehicles move more than the designated speed of

60 kmph.

Table 3.18 Real time traffic scenario along SH-30 (2 lanes undivided)

Time 2Wh 3Wh 4Wh Tractor B/L/trucksBullock

Cart Total V/C

6:00 -7:00am 79(40) 8(8) 27(27) 0(0) 11(33) 3(24) 128(132) 0.06

7:00-8:00 126(63) 19(19) 53(53) 1(2) 18(54) 7(56) 224(247) 0.11

8:00-9:00 269(135) 49(49) 88(88) 3(5) 25(75) 13(104) 447(455) 0.21

9:00-10:00 305(153) 23(23) 70(70) 2(3) 20(60) 12(96) 432(405) 0.18

10:00-11:00 201(101) 32(32) 62(62) 1(2) 15(45) 8(64) 319(305) 0.14

11:00-12:00 223(112) 29(29) 59(59) 0(0) 26(78) 5(40) 342(318) 0.14

12:00-01:00 pm 94(47) 12(12) 30(30) 0(0) 30(90) 6(48) 172(227) 0.10

01:00-02:00 85(43) 8(8) 43(43) 1(2) 23(69) 2(16) 162(180) 0.08

02:00-03:00 139(70) 30(30) 38(38) 2(3) 17(51) 4(32) 230(224) 0.10

03:00-04:00 155(78) 15(15) 24(24) 0(0) 12(36) 9(72) 215(225) 0.10

04:00-05:00 102(51) 21(21) 48(48) 1(2) 19(57) 11(88) 202(267) 0.12

05:00-06:00 158(79) 25(25) 66(66) 2(3) 24(72) 13(104) 288(349) 0.16

06:00-07:00 237(119) 34(34) 74(74) 2(3) 14(42) 8(64) 369(336) 0.15

07:00-08:00 250(125) 40(40) 81(81) 3(5) 9(27) 4(32) 387(310) 0.14

08:00-09:00 162(81) 27(27) 50(50) 1(2) 13(39) 2(16) 255(215) 0.10

09:00-10:00 80(40) 17(17) 32(32) 0(0) 20(60) 6(48) 155(197) 0.09

10:00-11:00 53(27) 11(11) 20(20) 1(2) 9(27) 3(24) 97(110) 0.05

11:00-12:00 45(23) 4(4) 9(9) 0(0) 5(15) 5(40) 68(91) 0.04

12:00-01:00am 12(6) 1(1) 4(4) 0(0) 15(45) 2(16) 34(72) 0.03

01:00-02:00 8(4) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 8(24) 0(0) 18(30) 0.01

02:00-03:00 3(2) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 11(33) 0(0) 14(35) 0.02

03:00-04:00 0(0) 0(0) 7(7) 0(0) 6(18) 1(8) 14(33) 0.02

04:00-05:00 2(1) 1(1) 2(2) 0(0) 4(12) 1(8) 10(24) 0.01

05:00-06:00 am 15(8) 5(5) 18(18) 1(2) 7(21) 3(24) 49(77) 0.04

Total 2803(1402) 411(411) 907(907) 21(32) 361(1083) 128(1024) 4631(4859)





3.4.8.2 Vehicle Composition and Traffic flow distribution along SH-30 (2 lanes undivided)

Fig 3.19 Vehicle composition along SH-30

Fig 3.20 Traffic flow distribution along SH30

As per IRC:64-1990, “Guidelines for capacity of roads in Rural areas”

Recommended design service volumes for two lane roads

Sl No Terrain Curvature (Degrees per

Kilometre)

Design service volume

in PCU/day

1 Plain Low (0-50) 15,000

High (above 51) 12,500

2 Rolling Low (0-100) 11,000

High (above 101) 10,000

3 Hilly Low (0-200) 7,000

High (above 201) 5,000

Source: IRC:64-1990, PageNo:12

2Wh

60%

3Wh

11%

4Wh

20%

tractor

1%

B/Trucks

5%bullock cart

3%

132

247

455

405

305 318

227180 224

225267

349 336310

215 197

11091 72

30 35 33 24

77

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

PC

U's

/hr

Time





As per IRC:64-1990, “Guidelines for capacity of roads in Rural areas”

Recommended PCU factors for various types of vehicles on rural roads

Sl No Vehicle type Equivalency

Factor

Fast Vehicles

1 Motor cycle or scooter 0.50

2 Passenger car, pick-up van or Auto rickshaw 1.00

3 Agricultural tractor, Light commercial vehicle 1.50

4 Truck or bus 3.00

5 Truck-trailer, Agricultural Tractor- trailer 4.50

Slow Vehicles

6 Cycle 0.50

7 Cycle- rickshaw 2.00

8 Hand Cart 3.00

9 Horse- drawn vehicle 4.00

10 Bullock cart * 8.00

3.4.8.3 Existing Traffic Scenario for Study road

Road V (PCU’s/day) C (PCU’s/day) Existing V/C LOS

SH-30(2 lanes

undivided) 4859 15000 0.32 B

V/C LOS Performance

0.0 - 0.2 A Excellent

0.2 - 0.4 B Very Good

0.4 - 0.6 C Good

0.6 - 0.8 D Fair/Average

0.8 - 1.0 E Poor

1.0& Above F Very Poor

V= Volume in PCU’s/hr & C= Capacity in PCU’s/ hr LOS = Level of Service

Note: IRC is accepting the fact that, in Indian roads the real congestion starts when V/C ratio is

>1, i.e., for forced flow. Till this limit the road is free for traffic movement without any

impediments. Hence it is acceptable as normal up to V/C =1 and the performance will be taken

as good only

3.4.8.4 Real Time Traffic Scenario

The Project is located along proposed approach road, the entry and exit is provided

through the same.





All types of vehicles i.e., 2Wh, 3Wh, 4Wh, Tractors and Buses/Lorries/Trucks move

along the SH-30, which is the main connectivity to the project site through the approach

road yet to be constructed.

Road

As per study (per minute)

2wh 3wh 4wh Tractor B/L/T Bullock Cart

SH-30 (2 lanes undivided)

4 to 5 0 to 1 1 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1

3.4.8.5 Real Time Traffic Scenario

Fig 3.21 Real time traffic scenario

Table 3.19 Source of Raw material (Sugar Cane) & its Transportation

Sl.

No

Name of the

Place

Quantity (to be

procured), MT/d

Road Distance from the proposed

project site

Trucks/day

(Nos.)

1 Kittore 500 48 Km 25

2 Bailahongal 500 40 Km 25

3 Belagavi 200 80 Km 10

4 Bagewadi 800 70 Km 40

5 Itagi cross 700 60 Km 35

6 From other local

Areas

400 80 Km 15

Total 150

3.4.8.6 Number of working days

Sugar unit: 180 days, Cogeneration: 300 days, Distillery: 300 days

3.4.8.7 MODE OF TRANSPORT OF WORK FORCE

Number of Employees =370

Sl. No Raw Material Transportation

1 Personal Vehicles (2wh) 16

2 Company arranged Bus 2

3 Office Vehicles (4 wh) 7





3.4.8.8 EXISTING RAW MATERIAL AND PRODUCT

Table 3.20 Sugar Plant and Cogeneration Plant

Sl.

No. Particulars Quantity Transportation

01 Sugar cane (MT/d) 4500 Approx. 225 trucks/ day with 20 T capacity

02 Bagasse as fuel (MT/d) at 100%) 1098 Conveyor belt

03 Sulphur (MT / month) 90 01 Trucks/day

04 Lime (MT / month) 288

05 Caustic Soda flakes (MT/month) 2.7

06 Lubricants (KL/month) (Wheel bearing

greases, lubricating oils etc.)

9

07 OP acid, KL/month 1.8

3.4.8.9 RAW MATERIAL TRANSPORATION

Table 3.21 Sugar Plant, Cogeneration Plant and Distillery

Sl.

No. Particulars Quantity (T/day) Transportation

01 Sugar cane 7500 Approx. 375 trucks/ day

with 20 T capacity

02 Bagasse as fuel (at 100%) 1098 Conveyor belt

03 Sulphur 5 1 truck/ day

04 Lime 16

05 Caustic Soda flakes 0.15

06 Lubricants 0.5

07 Ortho Phosphoric acid 0.1

08 Sulphuric Acid 30 lit

09 Nutrients N, P 60 Kg

10 Turkey Red Oil (TRO) 30 Kg

11 Molasses 240 MT Closed conduit

Table 3.22 Products Transportation

Products Quantity Transportation

Sugar (MT/d) 900 TPD 45 trucks/ day

Rectified spirit and ENA 60 KLPD 3 tankers/day (20 KL capacity)

Press mud (MT /d) 300 TPD 15 trucks /day





3.4.8.10 Total Vehicles Generated Per Day

Table 3.23 Total traffic generated

Materials 2WH 4WH BUS TRUCKS

Personal Vehicles 16 - - -

Company Bus - - 2 -

Office Vehicles - 7 - -

Sugar cane / Raw materials - - - 376

TOTAL 16 7 2 376

3.4.8.11 Products and by products

Materials 2WH 4WH BUS TRUCKS

Sugar - - - 45

Press mud - - - 15

TOTAL - - - 60

Traffic in PCUs/day = (16x0.5)+(7x1)+(2x3)+(376x3) + (60x3)= 1329 PCUs/day

3.4.8.12 Traffic Flow Logistics

Since the activity is Industries, the vehicles will move from & to the Project between 24

hr.

Total traffic generated from this project =1329 PCU’s/day.

However as per IRC capacity table, the entire traffic generated per day is taken for

impact calculation.

100% of the generated traffic will first exit on to SH-30.

Table 3.24 Modified V/C and LOS after adding generated traffic to existing traffic

Road

Existing

Modified

V C V/C LOS V V/C LOS

SH-30

(2 lanes

undivided)

4859 15000 0.32 B 4859+ 1329=6188 0.41 C





Table 3.25 Projected traffic for next three years based on individual vehicular growth as

per IRC: 37-2001(Exponential Growth is considered)

Road

Vehicle

Type 2Wh 3Wh 4Wh Tractor B/L/T

Bullock

Cart

Total %

Growth 2.5 1 6.8 6 1.5 Nil

Towards

SH-30 3019(1509) 423(423) 1105(1105) 25(38) 377(1132) 128(1024) 5077(5231)

Table 3.26 Modified V/C and LOS after adding the generated traffic

Road

Projected Traffic for next three

year

Modified V/C and LOS after adding the

generated traffic

V C V/C LOS V V/C LOS

SH-30 5231 15000 0.35 B 5231+1329=

6560 0.44 C

Table 3.27 Consolidated V/C and level of Service for changed scenarios

Road

Existing traffic

scenario

considered for

impact studies

Changed V/C and

LOS by adding

generated traffic

Projected traffic

after three years

Modified V/C and LOS by

adding the generated traffic

V/C LOS V/C LOS V/C LOS V/C LOS

SH-30 0.32 B 0.41 C 0.35 B 0.44 C





Fig 3.22 T-junction of Proposed Approach Road and SH-30

3.4.8.13Traffic improvement and Road safety Measures (SH-30)

Road sign &signage’s (No overtaking, drive safely, Major road ahead for the vehicles

coming out from the project before joining to highway), direction boards, Speed limit

boards (30 kmph) shall be installed.

High mast light near the main entry & exit is required.

For an internal approach road, sign boards like speed limit (15 kmph), No horn, drive

slowly boards etc, must be installed.

Bell mouth entry & exit to SH-30 must be provided for safe turning, merging of

vehicles to the main road.

Safe assembly zone / points to be created for emergency.

Loading & unloading points informatory boards needs to be installed

Hand in hand, pedestrian sidewalks also to be developed as a good number of people

will use the T-junction and walk to the project. Merging of vehicles will be performed

only to left traffic from the exit point of the junction to ensure safety.

The internal entry point gate is manned with efficient security who can guide the entry

and exit of vehicles.

All precautionary measures are ensured for the safety of construction labourers while

working at the site during construction.

3.5 Noise Levels

The environmental impact assessment of noise for the proposed expansion project was carried

out by taking various factors into consideration like potential physiological responses,

annoyance and general community responses and also the existing status of noise levels within





the study area. Existing noise levels have been monitored at different places within the study

area. Following methodology was adopted for noise monitoring within the study area.

Google map or aerial view of the study area covering 10 km radius was prepared.

For every one minute interval the readings were obtained using noise level meter

continuously for 24 hours (Day and Night). Using the standard formula, L10, L50, L90

and Leq were calculated.

Graphical representation of noise variation were plotted to understand the variation

indicating maximum and minimum.

Ambient Noise Level Monitoring conducted at 8 locations in and around the proposed project

site within 10Kms radius study area for parameters like Leq Day dB (A) and Leq Night dB (A)

Table 3.28 Details of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Station No Village Name Distance (km) and

Direction

Latitude and

Longitude

N1 Project site -- 15°43'12.13"N

75° 3‘37.97"E

N2 Karikatti 3.45 (NW) 15°43'55.04"N

75° 1'34.97"E

N3 Asundi 4.24 (NW) 15°44'43.69"N

75° 1'31.36"E

N4 Singarkoppa 5.2 (NW) 15°46'14.62"N

75° 3'14.85"E

N5 Saundatti 6.25 (NE) 15°45‘48.18"N

75° 6‘20.43"E

N6 Hire Ulligeri 6.14 (SE) 15°40‘7.29"N

75° 5‘18.78"E

N7 Sangreshkop 7.2 (SW) 15°39 '18.12"N

75° 1'19.01"E

N8 Betsur 8.18 (E) 15°43'41.82"N

75° 8'26.25"E





Fig 3.23 Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Fig 3.24 View of Noise Monitoring





Table 3.29 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Results

Code No Sample Location

Leq

dB(A)

(Day)

CPCB

Standards

Leq

dB(A)

(Night)

CPCB

Standards

N1 Project Site 52.15 75 dB(A) 50.54 70 dB(A)

N2 Karikatti 50.11

55 dB(A)

39.4

45 dB(A)

N3 Asundi 48.66 36.1

N4 Singarkoppa 50.92 37.88

N5 Saundatti 47.26 38.58

N6 Hire Ulligeri 46.28 43.34

N7 Sangreshkop 49.29 42.62

N8 Betsur 51.01 37.62

3.5.1.2Inference

Noise monitored results at all the locations were found to be within the CPCB standards.

3.6 Water Environment

3.6.1 Water sources in the study area

Surface water source: The study area is characterized by the presence of perennial river

namely Malaprabha River which traverses in the North West direction at 12.2 Kms distance

and forms as Renuka Sagar Reservoir (also known as Malaprabha Reservoir) near Saundatti

Town which is the main source of surface water in the study area. This reservoir serves for

irrigation & domestic needs in the region and is under the control of KNNL (Karnataka

Neeravari Nigam Limited, Govt of Karnataka). Apart from these, there are number of major

seasonal drains/nalla/halla viz., Kalla Halla, Chikka Halla, Tupari Halla located at southern part

of the study area & were observed to be dry during the study period

As per the discussions with the villagers, water availability in these drains/nala can be observed

only during monsoon period/rainy days & farmers make utilize of this monsoon flow water for

their irrigation needs based on the availability especially in the villages of Yadihalli,

Sangreshkopp, Chik Ulligeri, Kabbenur, Hongal & Betsur. Drainage pattern of the area is

observed to be Dendritic type and majority of catchment was observed in the southern direction

of the study area.

Further, the area also comprises of tanks located in the villages namely Karikatti, Chik Ulligeri,

Hire Ulligeri & Sangreshkopp. All these tanks except Karikkati Lake were dry during the study

and water presence can be observed during the monsoon period/rainy days only. Karikatti lake

water sample was not drawn in view of its non suitability. Above lakes also serve for irrigation

needs in the neighbourhood lands of the village settlements during the monsoon season/rainy

days. Govt of Karnataka through RDPR Dept (GO dated 02-01-2017 vide 2016-17) have

planned to implement Lake Rejuvenation Programme in the name of “Kere Sanjeevini-2” and

accordingly Saundatti Taluk under Belagavi District is one among the drought hit taluks

considered for the same.

Ground water source: The study area comprises of Bore wells/Tube wells located at all the

village settlements. Additionally, farmers with their own tube wells/bore wells in their fields





were using the water for irrigation purpose & domestic needs.. OHTs & Cisterns infrastructure

for distributing water are available at majority of the villages. Bore wells are under the control

of Gram Panchayat and RDPR Dept, Govt. of Karnataka. Further, it was also observed that, RO

Units were installed at majority of villages in the study area from RDPR Dept to cater the

needs of the villages for potable applications (coin system based) during the period 2015-17.

As per CGWB Notification dated 27-11-2012, Saundatti Taluk (Belagavi Dist) is not a notified

area towards Control & Regulation of Groundwater.

Irrigation schemes: The study area is partly irrigated from the Malaprabha Reservoir Project

implemented by KNNL.

Sources of Water Pollution: As such no major pollution sources observed within the study

area viz., industrial discharge except sullage being discharged into the open drains from the

village habitation areas as observed near Asundi, Hittangi & Sutgatti. Open defecation

activities observed around the lakes especially around Hire Ulligeri Lake and Sangreshkopp

Lake. Toilet facilities available at few houses as observed in few villages in the study area.

Community Latrine Pits were also observed which was meagerly used. Awareness on Swachh

Bharat Abhiyaan was known among the majority of the villagers discussed during the study.

Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental Impact

Assessment and to identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation

measures for implementation. The purpose of this study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics.

Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions, recreational

resources and aesthetics in the vicinity.

Predict impact on water quality due to this project and related activities.

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based

on;

Location of watercourses.

Location of residential areas representing different activity/ likely impact areas.

Likely areas that can represent baseline conditions.





3.6.2 Sources of water pollution in the study area

Table 3.30 Observations on Water source & Sanitation Status in the Study Area

Sl.No Name of the

village

Source of water

availability

Existing

Sanitation

facilities/Sewage

treatment

Rain water

Harvesting

&

Recharging

facilities

Existing

Sewerage

network

Storm

water drain

network

1. Karikatti Drains & Bore

wells

Soak Pit, Open

drains Poor No Moderate

2. Asundi

Drains & Bore

wells including

OHT and Cistern

infrastructure

Septic Tank, Soak

Pits, Open drains Poor Moderate Good

3. Sutgatti Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak

Pits, Open drains Poor No Moderate

4. Hittangi Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


5. Singarkoppa Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


6. Saundatti

Town

Malaprabha Dam,

Bore wells

Septic Tank, Soak

Pits, Open drains Poor Moderate Good

7. Yadravi Bore wells Soak Pit, Open

drains Poor No Poor

8. Betsur Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak

Pits, Open drains Poor No Poor

9. Hire Ulligeri Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak






Sl.No Name of the

village

Source of water

availability

Existing

Sanitation

facilities/Sewage

treatment

Rain water

Harvesting

&

Recharging

facilities

Existing

Sewerage

network

Storm

water drain

network

10. Chik Ulligeri Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


11. Hongal Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


12. Kabbenur Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


13. Kalle Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


14. Sangreshkop

p

Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


15. Yadihalli Drains & Bore

wells

Septic Tank, Soak


3.6.3 Methodology for collection of samples

Surface and ground water samples (grab sampling) were collected at each location by

following CPCB guidelines. Climate influenced physical parameters such as Temperature and

pH were recorded at site itself. Surface water samples were collected from well-mixed section

of the water body 30 cm below the water surface. Ground water samples from the production

tube wells were collected after running the well for about 5 minutes. Adequate parameter wise

preservatives were added to the samples and collected samples were brought to the laboratory

by maintaining 40C in the insulated ice boxes. Separate sterilized bottles were used for

collection of water samples for microbial analysis.

Fig 3.25 Photos of water samples

3.6.4 Surface and Ground water quality

The study area is having its source of water supply from drains/ bore wells from where the

samples were collected. Ground water samples were collected from 6 locations.





3.6.4.1 Criteria for selection of sampling locations

Land use/topography of the area.

Upstream & downstream of the river/ reservoir.

Nearby probable effluent disposal sources from Industrial areas & households/village

settlements.

Accessibility to the sampling station with undisturbed flow of water/stagnant water.

Availability of platform/bridges/support structures for sampling.

3.6.4.2 Details of sampling locations

The baseline water quality sampling network was established at 9 locations (6 ground water

samples and 3 surface water samples). Only 3 surface water samples were collected out of 8

locations mentioned in the TOR due to non availability of surface water. Also, due to the non

existence of functional bore well at site, sample of tanker water is collected and analyzed,

which in turn is from surface water source. The details of the sampling locations are as follows;

Table 3.31 Details of Water Quality Sampling Stations

Station

No Station name

Distance

(km) and

direction

Source Latitude and

Longitude

W1 Project site - Surface water

15°43'12.13"N

75° 3'37.97"E

W2 Karikatti 3.45 (NW) Ground water

15°43'55.04"N

75° 1'34.97"E

W3 Saundatti 6.25 (NE) Ground water

15°45‘48.18"N

75° 6‘20.43"E

W4 Renuka Sagar

Reservoir water near

Saundatti

8.5 (NE) Surface water

15°47‘6.79"N

75° 6‘16.03"E

W5 Chika Ulligeri 6.10 (SE) Ground water

15°39‘45.56"N

75° 4'17.98"E

W6 Sangreshkop 7.2 (SW) Ground water

15°39'18.12"N

75° 1'19.08"E

W7 Betsur 8.18 (NE) Ground water

15°43'41.82"N

75° 8'26.25"E

W8 Near Singarkoppa

(Reservoir water ) 5.2 (N) Surface water

15°46‘59.38"N

75° 3‘31.20"E

W9 Asundi 4.24(NW) Ground water

15°44'43.69"N

75° 01'31.36"E





Fig 3.26 Location of Water Quality Sampling Stations





Fig 3.27 Water Sampling Photographs

Selected water quality parameters of surface and ground water resources within 10 km radius

of the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluate anticipated

impact of the proposed project.

3.6.4.3 Observations made during sampling

Table 3.32 Field observations during sampling

Sampling Station

Code

Name of the sampling

station

Source Field Observations

W1

Project Site

(Industry

Tank/Reservoir)

Surface

water

This water being used by the industry (for

construction).

W2 Karikatti Village Ground

water

This water being used for domestic applications

including for drinking by the villagers

W3 Saundatti Town Ground

water


including for drinking by the residents of the area.

W4

Renuka Sagar

Reservoir, Near

Saundatti (d/s)

Surface

water


including for drinking by the residents and also for

irrigation needs of the lands situated near

Reservoir.

W5 Chikka Ulligeri

Village

Surface

water


including for drinking by the villagers.

W6 Sangreshkopp

Village

Ground

water


including for drinking by the villagers





Sampling

Station

Code

Name of the

sampling

station

Source Field Observations

W7 Betsur Village Ground

water



W8

Renuka Sagar

Reservoir, Near

Singarkoppa

Village (u/s)

Surface

water


including for drinking by the villagers and also for

irrigation needs of the lands situated near

Reservoir.

W9 Asundi Village Ground

water







136

Table 3.33 Results of Ground Water Quality

Sl. No Parameters Unit

Std. IS 10500:2012

(Second Revision) W2 W3 W5 W6 W7 W9

Acceptable

limit

Permissible

limit

1. pH - 6.5-8.5 7.52 7.7 7.59 7.24 7.60 7.32

2. Temperature oC -- 26 26 26 26 26 26

3. Colour Hazen 5 15 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1

4. Turbidity NTU 1 5 0.17 0.37 7.61 0.51 0.13 0.40

5. Conductivity µS/cm - 2410 2410 3710 1193 615 1902

6. Total Suspended Solids mg/L - ND ND 140 14 6 ND

7. Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 500 2000 1524 1780 1852 727 452 965

8. Total Hardness mg/L 200 600 340 650 310 264 174 316

9. Alkalinity mg/L 200 600 500 420 280 280 190 280

10. Anionic Detergents mg/L 0.2 1.0 ND ND ND ND ND ND

11. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/L - 1.49 3.36 4.85 1.68 1.49 1.86

12. Nitrate as NO3 mg/L 45 5.39 2.84 2.48 5.27 5.34 2.75

13. Phosphate Total mg/L - ND 0.02 ND ND ND ND

14. Chloride as Cl mg/L 250 1000 283.74 649.67 494.10 180.02 62.61 234.82

15. Sulphate as SO4 mg/L 200 400 305.46 156.64 324.90 61.54 35.33 77.07

16. Total Nitrogen mg/L - 9.78 11.52 13.47 9.44 9.97 8.25

17. Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen mg/L - 3.73 7.46 9.89 4.10 3.54 4.10

18. Sodium mg/L - 420 410 448 130 50 150

19. Potassium mg/L - 2.4 4.4 4.4 2 2.0 0.8

20. Calcium as Ca mg/L 75 200 84 164 72 56 36.8 67.2

21. Magnesium as Mg mg/L 30 100 31.59 58.32 31.59 30.13 19.92 35.96

22. Fluoride as F mg/L 1.0 1.5 0.24 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.70 0.20

23. Manganese as Mn mg/L 0.1 0.3 0.003 0.031 0.177 0.004 0.016 0.048

24. Residual Sodium Carbonate meq/L - ND ND ND ND ND ND

25. Silver as Ag mg/L 0.1 ND ND ND ND ND ND





137

Sl. No Parameters Unit Std. IS 10500:2012

(Second Revision) W2 W3 W5 W6 W7 W9

26. Lead as Pb mg/L 0.01 ND ND ND ND ND ND

27. Arsenic as As mg/L 0.01 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

28. Cadmium as Cd mg/L 0.003 ND ND ND ND ND ND

29. Chromium Hexavalent mg/L - ND ND ND ND ND ND

30. Copper as Cu mg/L 0.05 1.5 ND ND ND 0.013 0.007 0.007

31. Zinc as Zn mg/L 5 15 0.121 0.06 0.012 0.027 0.045 0.551

32. Iron as Fe mg/L 0.3 0.04 0.14 0.023 0.15 ND 0.18

33. Salinity* mg/L - 512.59 1173.66 892.61 325.21 113.10 424.21

34. Nitrite mg/L - ND ND ND 0.40 0.019 0.39

35. Carbonate mg/L - 120 280 60 ND 28 ND

36. Bicarbonate mg/L - 380 340 220 280 162 280

37. Sodium Absorption Ratio - - 9.91 12.11 11.07 3.48 1.65 3.67

38. E-Coli MPN/100ml - <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8

39. Total Coliform MPN/100ml - 1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 <1.8

40. Pesticides µg/L - Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

Table 3.34 Results of Surface Water Quality

Sl.

No

Parameters Unit Water Quality Criteria Results

A B C D E W1 W4 W8

01 pH - 6.5-8.5 7.8 7.9 8.1

02 Temperature oC - - - - - 26 26 26

03 Colour Hazen 10 300 300 - - <1 <1 <1

04 Dissolve Oxygen mg/l 6 5 4 4 - 5.2 5.4 5.6

05 BOD(3 days @27oC) mg/l 2 3 3 - - 6.0 6 4

06 Chemical Oxygen

Demand

mg/l - - - - - 24 19.2 16

07 Turbidity NTU - - - - - 1.93 2.69 1.68

08 Electrical Conductivity µS/cm - - - 1000 2250 1010 254 1045

09 Total Suspended mg/l - - - - - 9 8.0 34





138

Solids

10 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 50 - 1500 - 2100 720 214 938

11 Total Hardness mg/l - - - - - 208 76 176

12 Oil & Grease mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

13 Alkalinity mg/l - - - - - 328 96 360

14 Anionic Detergents mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

15 Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l - - - - - 1.12 0.74 4.48

16 Nitrate as No3 mg/l 20 - 50 - - 6.28 5.29 7.07

17 Chloride as Cl mg/l 250 - 600 - 600 101.75 25.43 48.92

18 Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 400 - 400 - 1000 70.91 21.22 305.93

19 Total Nitrogen mg/l - - - - - 10.67 8.64 18.11

20 Total Kjeldahl

Nitrogen

mg/l - - - - - 2.98 2.24 9.70

21 Potassium mg/l - - - - - 14.8 2 0.4

22 Calcium as Ca mg/l - - - - - 33.6 17.6 38.4

23 Magnesium as Mg mg/l - - - - - 30.13 7.77 19.44

24 Fluoride as F mg/l 1.5 1.5 1.5 - - 0.92 0.07 ND

25 Phenolic Compounds mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

26 Manganese as Mn mg/l - - - - - 0.004 0.029 0.025

27 Percent Sodium mg/l - - - - - 54.3 45.4 71.9

28 Residual Free Chlorine mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

29 Silver as Ag mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

30 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 - 0.1 - - ND ND ND

31 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.05 0.2 0.2 - - ND ND ND

32 cadmium as Cd mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

33 Hexavalent Chromium mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

34 Copper as Cu mg/l 1.5 - 1.5 - - 0.004 0.016 0.004

35 Zinc mg/l 15 - 15 - - 0.011 0.019 0.008

36 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3 50 - - - 0.05 0.38 0.49

37 Salinity mg/l - - - - - 183.81 45.94 88.37

38 Sodium Absorption Ratio - - - - - 26 3.74 1.50 6.82





139

39 Nitrite mg/l - - - - - 0.06 0.02 0.06

40 Carbonate mg/l - - - - - 96 24 88

41 Bicarbonate mg/l - - - - - 232 72 272

42 Sodium mg/l - - - - - 124 30 208

43 Total Pesticide µg/L - - - - - Absent Absent Absent

44 Total phosphate mg/l - - - - - ND ND ND

45 Poly Aromatic

Hydrocarbon (PAH)

mg/l - - - - - ND 84 ND

46 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 50 500 5000 - - 13 84 120

47 Fecal Coliform MPN/100ml - - - - - <1.8 6 12

48 E-Coli MPN/100ml - - - - - <1.8 <1.8 1.8

A- Drinking water surface without conventional treatment but after disinfection

B-Outdoor Bathing (Organized)

C-Drinking water source with conventional treatment followed by disinfection

D- Propagation of wild life, fisheries

E-Irrigation, Industrial, Cooling controlled waste disposal





3.6.4.4 Inference

Protocol adopted for testing were as specified under APHA, 23nd

Edition, various IS

methods and USEPA. The measured results/values of the samples tested were compared

with IS 10500:2012 (Second Revision) standards for groundwater samples and CPCB

water quality class criteria for surface water samples.

Sampling

Station

Code

Name of the

sampling

station

Source Results and Discussions

W1

Project Site

(Factory

Tank/Reservoir)

Surface

water

The measured values for the parameters for

those standards have been specified were

observed to be within the said standards.

Most of the heavy metals were not detected.

Pesticides were absent.

W2 Karikatti Village Ground

water






W3 Saundatti Town Ground

water



observed to be within the said standards except,

Total Hardness.



W4

Renuka Sagar

Reservoir, Near

Saundatti (d/s)

Surface

water

Conforms to Class D. Most of the heavy metals

were not detected. Pesticides were absent.

W5 Chikka Ulligeri

Village

Ground

water






W6 Sangreshkopp

Village

Ground

water






W7 Betsur Village Ground

water






W8

Renuka Sagar

Reservoir, Near

Singarkoppa

Village (u/s)

Surface

water

Conforms to Class E. Most of the heavy metals

were not detected. Pesticides were absent.





Sampling

Station

Code

Name of the

sampling

station

Source Results and Discussions

W9 Asundi Village Ground

water






3.6.5 Hydrology Profile

Drainage prevailing in the Harsha Sugars study area is shown in Fig. 3.27. Saundatti taluk

falls in Krishna River Basin. The main drainage in the area is drained by Malaprabha Sub

Basin. Kalla Halla passes at a distance of 3.5 km west of the project location. Kalla Halla

is the tributary of Tupar Halla flowing south of the project. Malaprabha Right Bank canal

is passing at a distance of 9 Km East of the Harsha Sugar Factory. The drainage of the

study area is shown in Fig 3.28

3.6.6 Geology

Major part of the study area is occupied with pink and grey granites. Argillite, Quartzite

and Conglomerate occupy a small patch in the Eastern part of the study area. The geology

is shown Fig.3.29.

The area under study is underlined by Peninsular Gneissic complex consisting of granites,

gneisses and migmatites of Achaean age. Dolerite dykes and laterites are also the main

rock formation in the study area. The gneisses at places are exposed as mounds and

hillocks ranging from 3 to 5 m. above ground level. The granites and gneisses are

extensively quarried around the area for use as road metal and construction purposes. The

geology of the area is shown in Fig.3.29. The area is almost a flat terrain and devoid of

worth mentioning hillocks. Granites exposed as quarries are medium to coarse grained,

hard, compact and massive gneisses are distinctively banded and are in various shades of

grey. The strike of foliation is generally NNW – SSE. Major set of joints prevailing in the

area are strike essentially ENE and dip easterly at steep angles. The granites and gneisses

have undergone alteration and decomposition resulting in thick weathered mantle.

The over burden to the granites and gneisses at places are laterites. Laterites are also

found as outcrop in the study area as isolated patches. Thickness of laterite capping vary

from 3 to 15 m. Alluvial soils are found along the nala courses consisting of silty and

clayey soil. These are essentially occurring as slope wash material (colluvial) and water

borne deposits in the topographic depressions.

Conglomerates forms the basal component of Kaladgi sequence and rests on weathered

edges of older gneisses. The conglomerate is composed of angular to subrounded cobble-

sized clasts of quartzite, vein quartz, and cherts. Irregular fragments of haematite jasper

are abundant at places. Compared to quartzite they are less abundant and their place is

taken over by grits.

Argillites are the immediate following the quartzites, are a well-developed sequence

brown to purple in colour with prominent bedding planes. Other argillite horizons also

appear higher up in the sequence. They are locally rich in carbonate.





3.6.6.1 Mineral wealth

Granite may be used in the form of rough blocks of varying dimensions in building

construction as well as in the form of rectangular slabs and tiles, sawn and polished,

varying in thickness from 20 to 200 mm. These are mostly used for exterior finishing of

important buildings, while panels are used both for exterior and interior decoration.

Granite tiles are usually supplied in sizes from 5 x 10 cm up to 60 x 60 cm. Granite

Quarries of ordinary and ornamental type are located in the taluk. The prominent bed of

quartzite forming the Saundatti and Yallamma hill can be a major source of silica. The

quartzite is white and analyses 96 % to 98.5% of silica. The material is considered

suitable for manufacture of silica refractories. Reserves are estimated at 170 million tons.





143

Fig 3.28 Drainage map of study area (10 Km radius)





144

Fig 3.29 Geological map of study area (10 Km radius)





3.6.7 Hydrogeology, Ground Water & Water Conservation

Groundwater in the Granitic formation and quartzites occurs under water table condition

in phreatic zone and semi-confined to confined conditions in the fractures at depth. Water

levels will be shallow in most of the wells both in Dug wells and Bore wells. The area

receives ground water source from seepage of the Malaprabha canals in the area in

addition to the rain water precipitation. The phenomenon of shallow water of less than 3m

indicates seepage of canal water to ground water is evident. In such cases there will not be

any conservation structures for recharge to ground water body. Withdrawal of ground

water should be encouraged so as to restrict rise of ground water levels and avoid water

logging conditions.

Monitoring of the existing bore wells in the study area for water levels and water quality

were taken up covering 9 villages in and around Harsha Sugar Industry. Depth to water

level varied from 28.0 m below ground level to 47.0 m below ground level during post

monsoon season. At few places water levels are more than 60 m below ground level. In

few villages bore wells are totally absent since these are covered with Malaprabha River

water supply source.

3.6.7.1 Hydro geological Surveys

Hydro geological surveys were carried out in study area during Post monsoon in 2017. In

all monitored 8 bore wells for water levels and the details are given in Table 3.35. Water

samples were collected from 4 select bore wells and the details are given in Table 3.36.

3.6.7.2 Depth to Water Level

The monitored water levels in and around the Harsha Sugar Industry is presented in

below. Depth to water level map ( Fig.3.30) depicts, shallow water levels of less than 40

m below ground level is seen in and around Chikka Huligere, Sutagatti, Hongal and

Betsur; 40 – 60 m below ground level in and around Harsha Sugars industry area,

Singarakoppa and Karikatte. Water levels of more than 60 m below ground level is

noticed in and around Saundatti.

3.6.7.3 Water table Elevation

Water table elevation with reference to the mean sea level is presented in Fig.3.31. Water

table elevation ranges from less than 600 m above sea level to more than 620 m above

mean sea level. Water table elevation of less than 610 m above mean sea level is seen in

and around Hiresuligere and Hanagal; between 600 and 610 m above mean sea level, in

and around Chikka Huligere, Karikatte, Harsha Sugar Industry area and Singarakoppa;

between 610 and 620 m above mean sea level, in and around Saundatti and Betsur; water

table elevation of more than 620 m above mean sea level in and around Sutgatti. The flow

direction follows the topography.





146

Table 3.35 Details of Water level monitoring from the existing bore wells (Deep Aquifers) in study area

Sl.No Village WL

(m.bgl) Location

1 Betsur 38.0 Panchayath- Opp. Government School

2 Hiresulligere - No BW in the village

3 Hongal 32.0 Gurappa Chikkumbi- Agri lands

4 Chikka Huligere 28.0 Mallappa residence

5 Harsha Sugars - No BW in the industry

6 Sutgatti 40.0 Dariyappa residence

7 Singarkoppa 47.0 Panchayath – WS Bore towards Saundatti road opposite to agri. lands of Tavanappa Sadri

8 Saundatti >60.0 Panchayath –Opp. Urdu High School





147

Fig 3.30 Depth to water level map of the study area (10 Km radius)





148

Fig 3.31 Water table elevation map of the study area (10 Km radius)





3.6.8 Water Quality

Selected water samples were collected during the Hydrogeological Surveys and the same is

presented below. Electrical Conductivity and chloride distribution is shown in Fig. 3.32 and

3.33. Electrical conductivity varies from 212 to 1907 micro mhos per cm at 250 C. Chloride

in ground water in the study area ranges from 80 to 287 ppm. Ground water in the study area

is potable. Constituents like Nitrate, Fluoride and Iron are within the maximum permissible

limit for ground water as per BIS standards for drinking water.

3.6.8.1 Conductivity

Conductivity in water samples in the study area ranges from 651 micro mhos / cm at 250 C to

3340 micro mhos / cm at 250 C. Conductivity having more than 3000 micro mhos / cm at

250C may be considered as either brackish or saline and is found occurring in and around

Hongal village. The distribution of conductivity in ground water for the study area is shown

in Fig.3.32.

3.6.8.2 Chloride

Chloride in water samples in the study area ranges from 45 ppm to 494.1 ppm. Chloride

constituent in ground water is within the permissible limits. The distribution of chloride in

ground water for the study area is shown in Fig.3.33. Water quality with reference to

desirable and maximum permissible limits with reference to Bureau of Indian Standards

(BIS) for drinking water is presented.





150

Table.3.36 Details of Water Quality monitoring from the existing bore wells (Deep Aquifers) in the study area

Sl.

No.

Well.

No. Location pH

Specific

Conduct

ance

µ mhos / cm

Ca Mg Na K Fe CO3

HC

O3Cl F NO3 SO4 TDS

Total

Hardness

mg / L

Acceptable limit (mg/l) 6.5-8.5 - 75 30 - - 0.3 - - 250 1.00 45 200 500 300

Permissible limit (mg/l) 6.5-8.5 - 200 100 - - 0.3 - - 1000 1.5 45 400 2000 600

1 Saundatti 7.34 1549 99.2 48.6 164 2.0 BDL 72 316 107.62 0.19 17.70 72.33 988 448

2 Betsur 6.86 651 44.8 19.44 68 0.8 BDL Nil 168 45 0.52 5.53 16.95 411 192

3 Hongal 7.77 3340 76 43.74 468 2 BDL 60 250 494.1 0.75 13.13 564.44 2140 370

4 Sutgatti 7.31 1446 64 24.3 212 0.8 0.08 80 292 101.75 0.46 20.47 112.17 910 260





151

Fig 3.32 Electrical Conductivity distribution in the study area (10 Km radius)





152

Fig 3.33 Chloride distribution in the study area (10 Km radius)





153

3.6.9 Historical Data

3.6.9.1 Ground Water Development

In the limestone and sand stone areas, ground water occurs in the weathered zones / bedding

Groundwater in the Granitic formation and quartzites occurs under water table condition in

phreatic zone and semi-confined to confined conditions in the fractures at depth. Water

levels will be shallow in most of the wells both in Dug wells and Bore wells. The area

receives ground water source from seepage of the Malaprabha canals in the area in addition

to the rain water precipitation. The phenomenon of shallow water of less than 3 m indicates

seepage of canal water to ground water is evident. In such cases there will not be any

conservation structures for recharge to ground water body. Withdrawal of ground water

should be encouraged so as to restrict rise of ground water levels and avoid water logging

conditions.

Monitoring of the existing bore wells in the study area for water levels and water quality were

taken up covering 9 villages in and around Harsha Sugar industry. Depth to water level varied

from 28.0 m below ground level to 47.0 m below ground level during post monsoon season.

At few places water levels are more than 60 m below ground level. In few villages bore wells

are totally absent since these are covered with Malaprabha River water supply source.

3.6.9.2 National Hydrograph Stations monitored by Central Ground Water Board

Central Ground Water Board, Government of India has established 4 National Hydrograph

Stations in Saundatti taluk for water level and water quality monitoring 5 times a year.

Monitoring data for more than 10 years is given in Table. 3.37 to 3.40 and the Hydrographs

are shown in Fig.3.34 to 3.37. The Hydrographs depict rise in water level in 3 hydrographs

and decline in one station.

Table. 3.37 NHS data at Mamadapura, Saundatti Taluk

25-01-1983 12.41 25-05-1994 13.39 25-05-2005 9.49

25-04-1983 18.7 25-08-1994 10.39 25-08-2005 5.49

25-06-1983 2.67 25-11-1994 7.93 05-11-2005 5.32

25-08-1983 8.22 25-01-1995 10.91 05-01-2006 5.15

25-11-1983 11.82 25-05-1995 12.1 25-05-2006 9

25-01-1984 13.85 25-08-1995 9.84 25-08-2006 5.95

25-04-1984 16.55 25-11-1995 6.77 05-11-2006 4.98

25-06-1984 19.25 25-01-1996 11.1 05-01-2007 5.89

25-08-1984 17.98 25-05-1996 16.8 25-05-2007 9.55

25-11-1984 9.86 25-08-1996 9.2 25-08-2007 2.19

25-01-1985 12.78 25-11-1996 2.21 05-11-2007 5.75

25-05-1985 21.36 25-01-1997 8.24 05-01-2008 6.14

25-08-1985 10.72 25-05-1997 13.13 25-05-2008 9.6

25-11-1985 14.55 25-08-1997 8.19 25-08-2008 7.98

25-01-1986 18.8 05-11-1997 8.15 05-11-2008 5.58

25-05-1986 19.23 05-01-1998 10.9 05-01-2009 5.05

25-08-1986 18.7 25-05-1998 12.93 25-05-2009 4.61

25-11-1986 8.61 25-08-1998 3.87 25-08-2009 6.62

25-01-1987 16.05 05-11-1998 5.37 25-11-2009 3.93





154

25-05-1987 18.57 05-01-1999 6.35 05-01-2010 4.51

25-08-1987 14.58 25-05-1999 8.54 25-05-2010 8.42

25-11-1987 12.86 25-08-1999 7.68 25-08-2010 6.52

25-01-1988 10.51 05-11-1999 1.97 05-11-2010 4.71

25-05-1988 18.71 05-01-2000 8.86 05-01-2011 4.79

25-08-1988 10.15 25-05-2000 10.24 25-05-2011 9.07

25-11-1988 11.83 25-08-2000 11.52 25-08-2011 6.29

25-01-1989 14.18 05-11-2000 7.05 05-01-2012 5.48

25-05-1989 18.33 05-01-2001 7.63 25-05-2012 9.91

25-08-1989 18.87 25-05-2001 11.22 25-08-2012 8.12

25-11-1989 9.49 25-08-2001 9.94 05-11-2012 7.45

25-01-1990 12.65 05-11-2001 10.04 05-01-2013 6.15

25-05-1990 15.56 05-01-2002 11.86 25-05-2013 7.06

25-11-1990 9.43 25-05-2002 7.63 25-08-2013 5.7

25-05-1991 10.2 25-08-2002 17.08 05-11-2013 6.33

25-11-1991 9.69 05-11-2002 13.8 05-01-2014 5.89

25-05-1992 10.21 05-01-2003 14.28 25-05-2014 9.87

25-08-1992 10 25-05-2003 14.62 25-08-2014 5.6

25-11-1992 5.55 05-11-2003 15.14 05-11-2014 5.63

25-01-1993 9.28 05-01-2004 13.54 05-01-2015 5.12

25-05-1993 12.3 25-05-2004 11.06 25-05-2015 5.17

25-08-1993 9.39 25-08-2004 7.47 25-08-2015 6.01

25-11-1993 5.12 05-11-2004 7.6 05-11-2015 8.05

25-01-1994 8.41 05-01-2005 6.35 05-01-2016 8.97

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Table. 3.38 NHS data at Munavalli, Saundatti Taluk

25-01-1988 2.65 05-01-1999 2.07 25-05-2007 8.66

25-08-1988 4.08 25-05-1999 4.87 25-08-2007 1.21

25-11-1988 2.86 25-08-1999 3.31 05-11-2007 2.78

25-01-1989 2.58 05-11-1999 1.6 05-01-2008 2.36

25-05-1989 2.98 14-12-1999 2.2 25-05-2008 6.37

25-08-1989 2.2 05-01-2000 1.37 25-08-2008 6.97

25-11-1989 2.02 25-05-2000 5.22 05-11-2008 3.87

25-01-1990 2.61 25-08-2000 3.36 05-01-2009 2.72

25-05-1990 3.27 05-11-2000 3.17 25-05-2009 8.27

25-11-1990 1.94 05-01-2001 1.53 25-08-2009 4.51

25-11-1991 1.81 25-05-2001 7.55 25-11-2009 2.2

25-05-1992 3.6 25-08-2001 7.16 05-01-2010 1.8

25-01-1993 2.03 05-11-2001 3.31 25-05-2010 7.14

25-05-1993 3.28 05-01-2002 2.84 25-08-2010 6.35

25-11-1993 2 25-05-2002 8.15 05-11-2010 2.55

25-05-1994 4.91 25-08-2002 7.79 05-01-2011 3.09

25-08-1994 3.17 05-11-2002 5.24 25-05-2011 6.87

25-11-1994 2.4 05-01-2003 3.39 25-08-2011 4.66

25-01-1995 2.17 25-05-2003 7.67 05-01-2012 2.45





155

25-05-1995 3.62 25-08-2003 7.54 25-05-2012 7.2

25-08-1995 5.22 05-11-2003 7.11 25-08-2012 7.55

25-11-1995 2.56 05-01-2004 4.1 05-11-2013 7.07

25-05-1996 6.8 25-05-2004 8.25 05-01-2014 4.52

25-08-1996 4.02 25-08-2004 8.03 25-08-2014 8.77

25-11-1996 1.48 05-11-2004 5.67 05-11-2014 7.41

25-01-1997 2.38 05-01-2005 2.35 05-01-2015 3.49

25-05-1997 4.15 25-08-2005 7.67 05-01-2016 9.05

25-08-1997 4.55 05-11-2005 4.56 25-05.2016 9.25

05-11-1997 0.72 05-01-2006 2.15 25-08-2017 6.77

05-01-1998 1.97 25-05-2006 5.04 05-11-2017 5.41

25-05-1998 3.82 25-08-2006 6.07

25-08-1998 2.73 05-11-2006 3.06

05-11-1998 1.8 05-01-2007 2.03 Source: cgwb.gov.in

Table 3.39 NHS data at Saundatti, Saundatti Taluk

25-04-1981 9.73 25-11-1992 8.88 25-08-2004 3.15

25-06-1981 12.17 25-01-1993 7.54 05-11-2004 2.77

25-08-1981 8.06 25-05-1993 8.36 05-01-2005 3.48

25-11-1981 7.52 25-08-1993 6.39 25-05-2005 5.25

25-01-1982 9.92 25-11-1993 8.36 25-08-2005 3.82

25-04-1982 9.4 25-05-1994 8.87 05-11-2005 3.35

25-06-1982 9.02 25-08-1994 8.29 05-01-2006 4.35

25-08-1982 8.75 25-11-1994 6.5 25-05-2006 5.26

25-11-1982 7.79 25-01-1995 7.4 25-08-2006 3.52

25-01-1983 8.53 25-05-1995 8.82 05-11-2006 2.62

25-04-1983 8.93 25-08-1995 8.12 05-01-2007 3.35

25-06-1983 9.58 25-11-1995 7.34 25-05-2007 5.16

25-08-1983 8.32 25-01-1996 8.2 25-08-2007 1.5

25-11-1983 8.44 25-05-1996 9.1 05-11-2007 2.31

25-01-1984 8.8 25-08-1996 8.19 05-01-2008 3.45

25-04-1984 9.75 25-11-1996 4.45 25-05-2008 3.72

25-06-1984 9.81 25-01-1997 5.73 25-08-2008 3.37

25-08-1984 9.3 25-05-1997 7.6 05-11-2008 3.84

25-11-1984 8.82 25-08-1997 7.03 05-01-2009 3.62

25-01-1985 7.02 05-11-1997 5.32 25-05-2009 5.07

25-08-1985 9.84 05-01-1998 4.82 25-08-2009 3.92

25-11-1985 6.85 25-05-1998 4.29 25-11-2009 1.96

25-01-1986 9.57 25-08-1998 4.4 05-01-2010 2.88

25-05-1986 10.22 05-11-1998 3.09 25-05-2010 3.81

25-08-1986 9.75 05-01-1999 3.57 25-08-2010 2.99

25-11-1986 8.59 25-05-1999 8.9 05-11-2010 2.09

25-01-1987 9.02 25-08-1999 3.38 05-01-2011 2.71

25-05-1987 10.3 05-11-1999 4.05 25-05-2011 4.22

25-08-1987 9.7 14-12-1999 3.92 25-08-2011 4

25-11-1987 9.52 05-01-2000 3.72 05-01-2012 4.66

25-01-1988 9.42 25-05-2000 5.18 25-05-2012 6

25-05-1988 10.58 25-08-2000 1.84 25-08-2012 6.47





156

25-08-1988 9.25 05-11-2000 2.92 05-11-2012 5.36

25-11-1988 9.3 05-01-2001 3.24 05-01-2013 6.08

25-01-1989 4.85 25-05-2001 4.8 25-05-2013 7.36

25-05-1989 9.52 25-08-2001 4.57 25-08-2013 6.58

25-08-1989 9.25 05-11-2001 3.46 05-11-2013 5.62

25-11-1989 8.58 05-01-2002 3.84 05-01-2014 5.74

25-01-1990 9.02 25-05-2002 4.47 25-05-2014 6.23

25-05-1990 8.84 25-08-2002 3.86 25-08-2014 6.26

25-11-1990 8.78 05-11-2002 3.35 05-11-2014 5.32

25-01-1991 8.57 05-01-2003 3.58 05-01-2015 5.54

25-05-1991 9.25 25-05-2003 4.02 25-05-2015 6.42

25-11-1991 6.8 25-08-2003 3.99 25-08-2015 6.78

25-01-1992 7.62 05-11-2003 3.3 05-11-2015 5.36

25-05-1992 8.91 05-01-2004 3.72 05-01-2016 6.22

25-08-1992 8.01 25-05-2004 5.08

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Table 3.40 NHS data at Sapola, Saundatti Taluk

25-05-1992 14.66 25-08-2000 7.62 25-05-2008 5.25

25-08-1992 7.15 05-11-2000 0.91 25-08-2008 7.39

25-11-1992 8.04 05-01-2001 1.84 05-11-2008 5.1

25-05-1993 15.72 25-05-2001 7.84 05-01-2009 5.16

25-11-1993 5.36 25-08-2001 10.09 05-01-2010 0.34

25-05-1994 17.21 05-11-2001 5.42 25-05-2010 4

25-11-1994 4.73 05-01-2002 9.84 25-08-2010 3.39

25-01-1995 6.02 25-05-2002 6.47 05-11-2010 1.61

25-05-1995 13 25-08-2002 17.71 05-01-2011 3.64

25-11-1995 16.65 05-11-2002 16.19 25-05-2011 7.02

25-01-1996 12.26 05-01-2003 18.91 25-08-2011 1.34

25-05-1996 17.7 25-05-2003 10.06 05-01-2012 2.75

25-08-1996 15.18 25-08-2003 11.12 25-05-2012 10.21

25-11-1996 1.84 05-11-2003 11.22 25-08-2012 10.19

25-01-1997 2.46 05-01-2004 18.78 05-11-2012 9.74

25-05-1997 9.58 25-08-2004 12.91 05-01-2013 8.07

25-08-1997 7.63 05-11-2004 8.14 25-05-2013 12.54

05-11-1997 7.71 05-01-2005 7.23 25-08-2013 15.01

05-01-1998 8.36 25-08-2005 4.38 05-11-2013 9.54

25-05-1998 17.09 05-11-2005 5.56 05-01-2014 11.7

25-08-1998 3.64 05-01-2006 10.16 25-05-2014 3.49

05-11-1998 1.25 25-05-2006 11.36 25-08-2014 2.05

05-01-1999 1.41 25-08-2006 10.46 05-11-2014 1.62

25-05-1999 7.46 05-11-2006 8.29 05-01-2015 3.48

25-08-1999 8.27 05-01-2007 7.87 25-05-2015 7.76

05-11-1999 2.21 25-05-2007 4.22 25-08-2015 12.96

14-12-1999 3.22 25-08-2007 1.07 05-11-2015 11.61

05-01-2000 4.07 05-11-2007 2.39 05-01-2016 17.27

25-05-2000 8.83 05-01-2008 4.46





157

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Fig 3.34 Hydrograph at Mamadapur, Saundatti taluk

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Fig 3.35 Hydrograph at Munavalli, Saundatti taluk

y = ‐0.000x + 36.53

0

5

10

15

20

25

01/01/1983

01/09/1983

01/05/1984

01/01/1985

01/09/1985

01/05/1986

01/01/1987

01/09/1987

01/05/1988

01/01/1989

01/09/1989

01/05/1990

01/01/1991

01/09/1991

01/05/1992

01/01/1993

01/09/1993

01/05/1994

01/01/1995

01/09/1995

01/05/1996

01/01/1997

01/09/1997

01/05/1998

01/01/1999

01/09/1999

01/05/2000

01/01/2001

01/09/2001

01/05/2002

01/01/2003

01/09/2003

01/05/2004

01/01/2005

01/09/2005

01/05/2006

01/01/2007

01/09/2007

01/05/2008

01/01/2009

01/09/2009

01/05/2010

01/01/2011

01/09/2011

01/05/2012

01/01/2013

01/09/2013

01/05/2014

01/01/2015

01/09/2015

Water level (mbgl)

Date

Water LevelWL Trend

y = 0.000x ‐ 9.805

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/1…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

25/01/2…

Water level (mbgl)

Date

Water LevelWL Trend





158

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Fig 3.36 Hydrograph at Saundatti, Saundatti taluk

Source: cgwb.gov.in

Fig 3.37 Hydrograph at Sapola, Saundatti taluk

y = ‐0.000x + 23.93

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

25/04/1981

25/04/1982

25/04/1983

25/04/1984

25/04/1985

25/04/1986

25/04/1987

25/04/1988

25/04/1989

25/04/1990

25/04/1991

25/04/1992

25/04/1993

25/04/1994

25/04/1995

25/04/1996

25/04/1997

25/04/1998

25/04/1999

25/04/2000

25/04/2001

25/04/2002

25/04/2003

25/04/2004

25/04/2005

25/04/2006

25/04/2007

25/04/2008

25/04/2009

25/04/2010

25/04/2011

25/04/2012

25/04/2013

25/04/2014

25/04/2015

Water level (mbgl)

Date

Water Level

WL Trend

y = ‐0.000x + 19.99

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

25/05/1992

25/12/1992

25/07/1993

25/02/1994

25/09/1994

25/04/1995

25/11/1995

25/06/1996

25/01/1997

25/08/1997

25/03/1998

25/10/1998

25/05/1999

25/12/1999

25/07/2000

25/02/2001

25/09/2001

25/04/2002

25/11/2002

25/06/2003

25/01/2004

25/08/2004

25/03/2005

25/10/2005

25/05/2006

25/12/2006

25/07/2007

25/02/2008

25/09/2008

25/04/2009

25/11/2009

25/06/2010

25/01/2011

25/08/2011

25/03/2012

25/10/2012

25/05/2013

25/12/2013

25/07/2014

25/02/2015

25/09/2015

Water level (mbgl)

Date

Water LevelWL Trend





159

3.6.10 Ground Water Resources

The Ground Water Resources for the assessment unit as “Taluk” for Saundatti Taluk of

Belagavi District of Karnataka State as per the Ground Water Estimation Committee

methodology (GEM) - 1997, as on 31st March 2009 show the Dynamic Ground Water

Resources of Saundatti with 10087 Ham as total ground water recharge, 9311Ham is net

ground water availability, allocation for domestic and industrial use till 2025 will be 619

Ham. The stage of ground water development is 108%. The taluk is categorized as Over-

exploited.

It is noted from the above table that Saundatti taluk as a whole experience Over Exploited

nature in ground water development point of view. This indicates ground water extraction is

more than the ground water recharge.

3.7 Biological Environment

3.7.1 Background of the study area

3.7.1.1 Description of Project Site & Study Area

A. Project Site

Location Saundatti Village, Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi District

Area 51.3 acres (20.76 Ha)

Soil type Black soil and red soil

Previous land-use Agricultural land

Existing plant species

available within the

project site

Acacia leucophloea, Azadirachta indica, Bixa orellana, Carica

papaya, Dypsis lutescens, Ficus benjamina, Grevillea robusta,

Holoptelea integrifolia, etc

B. Study area

Climate & Rainfall Semi-arid dry zone, Hot and humid climate with scanty rain fall

in the range between 550-650 mm

Soil type Clay, Red and Black cotton soils

Crops grown in the study

area

Wheat, Jowar, Maize, Bajra, Groundnut, Sunflower, Sugarcane,

Mango, Sapota, Papaya, Guava, etc.

Protected areas and

ecologically sensitive

areas within 10 km radius

from the project site

Nil

Reserve Forest within the

study area Nil

Open scrub vegetation

within the study area Yellamma gudda

Diversion of forest land Nil

Rivers and streams

Malaprabha River -12.2 km; NW Direction

Kalla Halla - 3.5 Km; S Direction

Tupari Halla- 9 Km; S Direction

Chikka Halla- 7.8 Km; SW Direction





160

3.7.1.2 River Malaprabha/ Renukasagar Reservoir

The Malaprabha River originates from Chorla Ghats, which is a part of Western Ghats. It is a

tributary river to the Krishna River and it flows through the Dharwad district. The

Malaprabha River is an important river in north Karnataka. Renuka Sagara, also known as

Malaprabha reservoir and Navilutheertha reservoir, is a dam and impounding reservoir

constructed across the Malaprabha River in the Krishna River basin. It is situated at

Naviluthreertha village in Saundatti Taluk of Belagavi district in North Karnataka, India.

Renuka sagara Reservoir is located at a distance of 5 Km from the project site.

Fig 3.38 View of Malaprabha River

3.7.1.3Yellamma gudda (open scrub vegetation)

In the study area, Yellamma gudda is located at a distance of 7.09 Km from the project site

which involves open scrub vegetation. As per Champion and Seth’s (1968) classification, this

open scrub is composed of tropical thorn forests. The floral composition involves Alangium

salviifolium, Azadirachta indica, Acacia concinna, Annona squamosa, Euphorbia neriifolia,

Kirganelia reticulate, Phoenix sylvestris, Ziziphus oenoplia, Feronia elephantum, etc.





161

Fig 3.39 View of Yellamma gudda





162

3.7.2 Methodology

In order to understand the ecological status of the study area, the entire study area is divided into four quartiles i.e. NW, NE, SE and SW. In each

of the quartile, 2 sampling locations will be selected depending upon prevailing land use and topography. Phyto-sociological parameters such as

dominance, IVI, density will be calculated and to understand the species diversity, Shanon - Wiener index will be calculated. Based on the above

parameters, carbon sinking potential of the study area will be calculated. Methodology adopted for collection of primary data is detailed below;

3.7.2.1 Primary data - Flora

Sl. No. Habitat Method Size of the quadrate (m) Number of quadrates

Time and duration of sampling

1 Trees Quadrate

method

100 x 100 8 November 2017, Post-monsoon,

One time data collection 2 Shrubs 50 x 50 8

3 Herbs and Grass 5 x 5 8

3.7.2.2 Primary data - Fauna

Sl. No. Habitat Method Length (m) Number Time and duration of sampling

1 Fauna Transect method 1000 8 November 2017, Post-monsoon,

One time data collection 2 Butterflies Transect method 1000 8

3 Avi-fauna Point count method -- 8

3.7.2.3 Secondary data

Forest working plan of Belagavi Forest Division (2012-22), Botanical Survey of India, Zoological Survey of India, IUCN Red Data Book,

Wildlife Schedules from Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, Book of Indian Birds(Salim Ali, 1983 & 2012), ENVIS, FRLHT, Butterflies of India

(Singh, 2011), Reptiles of India (Daniel, 2002), Handbook on Weed identification (Dr. Naidu, 2012) and Common Dry land Trees of Karnataka

(Kavitha, 2012) will be used for the identification and validation of species and published literature will be referred for calculation of carbon

sinking potential. Consultation with local people and respective Forest Divisions will also be carried out during the site visit to understand the

distribution and seasonality of herbs, shrubs and fauna in the region. The unidentified species were photographed and the specimens were

collected and verified by using BSI, FRLHT and Digital Flora of IISc data base and will be cross checked with experts.





163

Fig 3.40 Study area map showing sampling locations

Table 3.41 Details of sampling locations

Sl.No Quartile Sampling location Geographical co-ordinates Criteria

1

NW

Near Asundi

(Malaprabha River)

15o46’10.1”N, 75

o01’29.4”E Near Reservoir near

primary drainage

2 Near Karikatti 15o43’54.3”N, 75

o01’45.3”E Agricultural land use and

water tank

3

NE

Along SH 30 15o44’38.1”N, 75

o04’13.0”E Agricultural land use

4 Near Saundatti

(Malaprabha River)

15o48’26.7”N, 75

o06’46.7”E Near Reservoir

5 Yellamma gudda 15°45'13.51"N, 75°08'31.91"E Scrub Forest

6

SE

Behind industry 15o42’40.6”N, 75

o03’45.8”E Agricultural land use and

water tank

7 Hire Hulligere 15o39’56.4”N, 75

o05’14.9”E Agricultural land use near





164

secondary drainage

8

SW

Near Kallahalla 15o42’47.3”N, 75


secondary drainage

9 Near Yadahalli 15o39’36”N, 74


secondary drainage





165

3.7.3 Results & Discussions

3.7.4 Flora-Project site

3.7.4.1 Shrubs and Herbs Community

There are no trees at project site. A total of 54 species of herbs belonging to 16 families and 42 genera, 2 species of shrubs belonging to 2 families and 2

genera and 7 species of climbers belonging to 4 families and 7 genera were recorded during the survey. Of which, 4 species of herbs belongs to Least

Concern category as per IUCN conservation status, 2017 and remaining are common to the region. Poaceae and Fabaceae are the dominant families

consisting of 11 and 10 species respectively, followed by Malvaceae (n=6), Amaranthaceae (n=5) and Solanaceae (n=5). Abutilon hirtum, Hibiscus

panduriformis, Eragrostis tenella, Cassia tora and Parthenium hysterophorus are the predominant species recorded at the project site. Agave sisalana and

Calotropis proceraare the two important medicinal shrubs noted during the study. The check list of shrubs, herbs and climbers recorded at the project site

along with their IUCN/RET status, uses and family-wise number of shrubs, herbs and climbers are tabulated below;

Table 3.42 Diversity of herbs, shrubs and climbers recorded at the project site.

Sl.No. Scientific name Common name Family

IUCN

conservation

status, 2017

RETstatus Uses

Herbs

1 Abelmoschus esculents Bendekayi Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Edible

2 Abelmoschus moschatus Kasturi bende Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

3 Abutilon hirtum Tutti Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

4 Abutilon indicum Gidutingi Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

5 Achyranthes aspera Utrani-gida Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

6 Alternanthera Bettzickiana Honganne soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental, Edible

7 Alternanthera sessilis Honganne soppu Amaranthaceae Least concern Common Medicinal, Folk

8 Alysicarpus longifolius Naamada soppu Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Folk

9 Alysicarpus ovalifolius Naamada soppu Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

10 Amaranthus viridis Cheakeerae soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

11 Argemone mexicana Datthoori Papavaraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

12 Eragrostis ciliaris -- Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

13 Eragrostis tenella -- Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal





166


IUCN

conservation

status, 2017

RETstatus Uses

14 Aristida personata Porke Poaceae Not Assessed Common Erosion control

15 Boerhavia erecta Komme Nyctaginaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

16 Brachiaria ramosa Bennakki hullu Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

17 Cassia tora Chagate Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

18 Chrozophoraplicata Nilkanthi Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

19 Coix barbata Manjutti Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

20 Commelina forskaolii Gubbachi bale Commelinaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

21 Corchorus fascicularis Chunchali soppu Tiliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

22 Corchorustrilocularis Ennepundi Tiliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

23 Coronopus didymus Gabbu kothambari Brassicaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

24 Crotalaria juncea Sanabu gida Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

25 Crotalaria medicaginea Guluguluppahalli Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

26 Crotalaria retusa Guluguluppahalli Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal

27 Croton bonplandianum Alpabedhi soppu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

28 Cynodondactylon Ambate hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

29 Dactyloctenium aegyptium Kadu ragi hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

30 Datura stramonium Umbe Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

31 Desmodium laxiflorum Otte gida Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

32 Digera arvensis Sanchila soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

33 Dinebra retroflexa Halgyan hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Fodder grass

34 Echinochloa colona Kaadu haaraka Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

35 Eragrostis unioloides Dharbe hullu Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

36 Euphorbia thymifolia Bilechitra phala Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

37 Heteropogon contortus Kaarda hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

38 Hibiscus panduriformis Kadu dasavala Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Twine preparation

39 Hibiscus vitifolius Kaadu pindi soppu Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

40 Indigofera linnaei Channe gida Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

41 Justicia procumbens Nela bevu Acanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal





167


IUCN

conservation

status, 2017

RETstatus Uses

42 Lycopersiconesculentum Tomaato Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

43 Parthenium hysterophorus Congress gida Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

44 Phyllanthus maderaspatensis Madaraas neli Phyllanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

45 Phyllanthus niruri Kirunelli Phyllanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

46 Physalis minima Bandula Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

47 Prosopis juliflora Bellari jali Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Fuel wood

48 Senna uniflora Nelavarike Caesalpiniaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

49 Solanum viarum Nelagulle Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

50 Solanum xanthocarpum Chikkasonde Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

51 Sonchus arvensis Kadu sevanthi Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

52 Tridaxprocumbens Nettagabbu Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

53 Triumfettarhomboidea Kaadu bende Tiliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

54 Waltheria indica Kari bende Sterculiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Shrubs

1 Agave sisalana Boodu kathaale Asparagaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Folk

2 Calotropis procera Bili aekka Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Climbers

1 Atylosia scarabaeoides Kadu togari Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

2 Cardiospermum halicacabum Agniballi Sapindaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

3 Cucumis maderaspatanus Chitrati Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

4 Coccinia grandis Kaage thonde Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

5 Convolvulus sepium Niru hambu Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

6 Cucurbitaceae pepo Bileegumbala Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Vegetable

7 Merremia emarginata Tigade balli Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Edible and medicinal Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team





168

3.7.4.2 Saplings procured for the proposed green belt plantation

The industry is in construction phase and no tree species with a girth size > 30 cm were recorded at the project site. However, several saplings were planted

and procured for green belt development inside the industrial premises. Therefore, the checklist of the tree saplings procured as a part of green belt

development plan along with their family, uses and IUCN/RET conservation status is given below. A total of 16 species belonging to 14 families were

procured as a part of green belt development plan for the existing year 2017-18. Dypsis lutescens and Platycladus orientalis are the tree species belonging

to Near Threatened category as per IUCN conservation status, 2017. Species like Bixa orellana, Ficus benjamina, Grevillea robusta, Plumeria alba,

Sterculia Foetida, Tabebuia rosea, Platycladus orientalis and Trewia nudiflora are the predominant ornamental tree saplings recorded in the industrial

premises.

Table 3.43 Checklist of trees saplings planted/procured as a part of Green Belt Development Plan.

Scientific name Local name Family IUCN conservation

status, 2017 RETstatus Uses

Acacia leucophloea Bili-jali Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Edible,medicinal and agro forestry

Azadirachta indica Bevu Meliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal,timber and traditional

Bixa orellana Rangamali Bixaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal and Ornamental edges

Carica papaya Papaya Caricaceae Not Assessed Common Data Deficient

Dypsis lutescens Adake Arecaceae Near Threatened Common Ornamental and windbreak

Ficus benjamina Jaavaatthi Moraceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental

Grevillea robusta Silver mara Proteaceae Not Assessed Common Timber and edge planting

Holoptelea integrifolia Kaladri Ulmaceae Not Assessed Common Timber and medicinal

Plumeria alba Devaganagilu Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental and medicinal

Pongamia pinnata Honge Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Timber and bio fuel

Prosopis cineraria Banni mara Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Timber and traditional

Sterculia Foetida Bhatala penari Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal and gum

Tabebuia rosea Tabubia Bignoniaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental edges

Terminalia catappa Kadubadami Combertaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal and windbreak

Platycladus orientalis - Cupressaceae Near Threatened Common Ornamental and windbreak

Trewia nudiflora Kaadugumbala Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team





169

A total of 7 shrub saplings belonging to 5 families were recorded at the industrial premises which were procured as a part of Green Belt Development Plan.

All the recorded shrubs possess ornamental importance and are commonly used for edge plantations. The checklist of the shrub saplings procured/planted

in the industrial premises along with their family, uses and IUCN/RET conservation status is given below.

Table 3.44 Checklist of shrub saplings planted/procured as a part of Green Belt Development Plan

Scientific name Local name Family IUCN conservation status,

2017 RETstatus Uses

Acalypha wilkesiana Kuppugida Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal and Ornamental edges

Allamanda cathartica Arasinhu Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal and Ornamental edges

Duranta goldiana Nilkanta Verbenaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental

Hibiscus rosa sinensis Dasavala Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental

Plumaria pudica Kadusampage Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental and medicinal

Rhapis excelsa Thale Arecaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental and rope making

Tabernaemontana divaricata Kottu haale Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team





170

Green belt plantation in the industrial premises

Saplings procured for green belt plantation

Fig 3.42 Greenery development photographs





171

3.7.5 Study area

3.7.5.1 Tree Community

A total of 5 species belonging to 3 families and 4 genera were recorded, among them Azadirachta

indica (n=24) is the most dominant tree species recorded followed by Acacia nilotica (n=5) and

Acacia chundra (n=4). All the recorded species were common to the region and no RET species

were recorded in the study area. Species like Acacia nilotica, Acacia chundra, Azadirachta indica

and Leucaena leucocephala are the important tree species in agri-silvipastoral system of agro

forestry.

The importance value index is used to determine the overall importance of the each species in the

community structure, Trees with greater IVI values includes Azadirachta indica (IVI -198.58)

followed by Acacia chundra (IVI -33.60) and Acacia nilotica (IVI -29.71) with the least one being

Leucaena leucocephala with IVI of 12.21. The dominant tree species, Azadirachta indica

contributed basal area of 0.3192m2/ha followed by Acacia nilotica basal area of 0.0249 m2/ha. In

addition to this diversity indices such as Shannon-Weiner diversity index and Simpson diversity

index were estimated to be 1.049 and 0.535. Azadirachta indica is the only species having highest

frequency of 62.5% (5 plots), followed by Acacia chundra and Holoptelea integrifolia with a

frequency of 25% each (2 plots each). The girth class distribution shows that maximum number of

stems falls under 60-90 cm girth class (14 trees) which contributes to 38.89% of the total

individuals followed by 30-60 cm girth class (13 trees) which contributes to 36.11% of the total

individuals. The checklist of trees with their IUCN/RET status, uses, phyto-sociological

parameters and girth class distributions recorded in the study area are tabulated below:

Table 3.45 Checklist of tree species recorded in the study area with their IUCN/RET status

and uses

Scientific name Common

name Family

IUCN

conservation

status, 2017

RETstatus Uses

Acacia chundra Kaggali Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Timber, medicinal

Acacia nilotica Karijali Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Agricultural

implements, timber

Azadirachta indica Bevu Meliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, pesticide,

traditional

Holoptelea integrifolia Kaladri Ulmaceae Not Assessed Common Timber, medicinal

Leucaena leucocephala Chiguru Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Fodder, fuel wood,

medicinal Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team

Table 3.46 Phyto-sociological parameters of Trees in study area

Sl.No. Scientific name n OC FR RD RF RDo IVI BA (m2/ha)

1 Acacia chundra 4 2 25 11.11 18.18 4.31 33.60 0.0159

2 Acacia nilotica 5 1 12.5 13.88 9.09 6.73 29.71 0.0249

3 Azadirachta indica 24 5 62.5 66.66 45.45 86.46 198.58 0.3192

4 Holoptelea integrifolia 2 2 25 5.55 18.18 2.13 25.87 0.0079

5 Leucaena leucocephala 1 1 12.5 2.77 9.09 0.34 12.21 0.0013 Note: n= number, OC= occurrence, FR=Frequency, RD=Relative Density, RF= Relative Frequency, RDo= Relative

dominance, IVI= Importance value index, BA= Basal area





172

Table 3.47 Girth class distribution of trees in the study area

Sl. No. Girth class Number Percentage (%)

1 0-30 0 0.00

2 30-60 13 36.11

3 60-90 14 38.89

4 90-120 4 11.11

5 120-150 2 5.56

6 150-180 1 2.78

7 180-210 0 0.00

8 210-240 0 0.00

9 240-270 1 2.78

10 270-300 1 2.78





173

3.7.5.2 Shrubs and Herbs Community

In the study area, a total of 70 species of herbs belonging to 19 families and 53 genera, 8 species of shrubs belonging to 5 families and 7 genera and 9

species of climbers belonging to 3 families and 7 genera were recorded during the survey. Of which, 14 species of herbs belongs to Least Concern category

as per IUCN conservation status, 2017 and remaining are common to the region. Poaceae and Fabaceae are the most dominant families which consists of

12 species each, followed by Euphorbiaceae (n=7) and Asteraceae (n=7). Alysicarpus longifolius, Brachiaria ramosa, Cassia tora and Parthenium

hysterophorus are the species distributed all over the study area. Vitex negundo, Catharanthus roseus, Calotropis procera and Calotropis gigantean are the

important medicinal shrubs noted during the study. The checklist of shrubs, herbs and climbers recorded in study area with their IUCN/RET status, uses

and family-wise number of shrubs, herbs and climbers are tabulated below;

Table 3.48 Diversity of herbs, shrubs and climbers recorded in the study area.


2017 RETstatus Uses

Herbs

Abutilon hirtum Tutti Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal

Abutilon indicum Gidutingi Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal

Acalypha indica Chal maari Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Folk

Achyranthes aspera Utrani-gida Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Adhatoda zeylanica Aadumuttada gida Acanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Alternanthera Bettzickiana Honganne soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Ornamental, Edible

Alternanthera sessilis Honganne soppu Amaranthaceae Least concern Common Medicinal, Folk

Alysicarpus bupleurifolius - Fabaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Alysicarpus longifolius - Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Folk

Alysicarpus vaginalis Naamada soppu Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Amaranthus viridis Cheakeerae soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Argemone mexicana Datthoori Papavaraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Aristida adscenscionis Kaadu nose hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Atylosia scarabaeoides Kadu togari Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Brachiaria eruciformis Antu garike hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Brachiaria ramosa Bennakki hullu Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Brachiaria reptans Thappare hullu Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal





174


2017 RETstatus Uses

Cassia tora Chagate Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Celosia argentea Khadakatheera Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Chrozophoraplicata Lingamenasu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Coix barbata Manjutti Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Commelina benghalensis Kanne soppu Commelinaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Corchorustrilocularis Ennepundi Tiliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Crotalaria hebecarpa Guluguluppahalli Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Crotalaria juncea Sanabu gida Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Crotalaria medicaginea Guluguluppahalli Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Crotalaria retusa Guluguluppahalli Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Edible, medicinal

Croton bonplandianum Alpabedhi soppu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Cyanotis axillaris Negalukanne Commelinaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Cyanotis cristata Bettada kanne Commelinaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Cynodon dactylon Ambate hullu Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Cyperus difformis Tunge hullu Cyperaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Cyperus kyllingia Kornarigadde Cyperaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Cyperus rotundus Abda hullu Cyperaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Datura metel Dhatura Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Digera arvensis Sanchila soppu Amaranthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Echinochloa colona Kaadu haaraka Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Eclipta Alba Garagadasappu Asteraceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Eleusine indica Kaadu raagi Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Eragrostis ciliaris - Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Eriocaulonsieboldianum - Eriocaulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Euphorbia hirta Achhe soppu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Euphorbia pulcherrima Halu soppu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Euphorbia thymifolia Bilechitra phala Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Evolvulus nummularius Kuppe gida Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Fimbristylisdichotoma Neeru sabsige Cyperaceae Least concern Common Medicinal





175


2017 RETstatus Uses

Fimbristylismiliacea - Cyperaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Hibiscus panduriformis Kadu dasavala Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Twines

Hibiscus vitifolius Kaadu pindi soppu Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Leptochloachinensis - Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Lycopersiconesculentum Tomato Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Mollugopentaphylla Jaradsi Molluginaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Parthenium hysterophorus Congress gida Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Phyllanthus niruri Kirunelli Phyllanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Phyllanthus simplex Kila nelly Phyllanthaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Portulacaoleracea Doddagonisoppu Portulacaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Saccharumspontaneum Darbhe hullu Poaceae Least concern Common Medicinal

Setaria viridis Navanakki Poaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Sidaacuta Bheemanakaddi Malvaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Solanum nigrum Ganike Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Solanum viarum Kasibadane Solanaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Sonchus arvensis Kadu sevanthi Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Sonchusoleraceus Naayihakkarike Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Tephrosiapurpurea Kogge Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Tribulusterrestris Govinamullu Zygophyllaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Tridaxprocumbens Nettagabbu Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Triumfettarhomboidea Kaadu bende Tiliaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Volutarella divaricata Visha-phale Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Waltheria indica Kari bende Sterculiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Xanthium strumarium Maruluummatti Asteraceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Shrubs

Caesalpinia sappan Sappange Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Calotropis gigantea Yakkeda-gida Asclepiadaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Calotropis procera Bili aekka Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Catharanthus roseus Thuruku mallige Apocynaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal





176


2017 RETstatus Uses

Jatropha curcas Bettada-haralu Euphorbiaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Lantana camara Kadugulabi Verbenaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Prosopis juliflora Bellari jali Fabaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal, Fuel wood

Vitex negundo Bile-nekki Verbenaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Climbers

Cardiospermum halicacabum Agniballi Sapindaceae Not Assessed Common Edible and medicinal

Coccinia grandis Kaage thonde Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Convolvulus arvensis Baalike palya Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Convolvulus Pluricaulis Bilikantisoppu Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Cucumis maderaspatanus Chitrati Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Ipomoea carnea - Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Ipomoea obscura Bilichita bogari Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Luffa acutangula Heere kaayi Cucurbitaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal

Merremia emarginata Tigade Convolvulaceae Not Assessed Common Medicinal Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team





179

3.7.6 Fauna-project site

A total of 10 avifaunal species (n=72) were recorded at the project site. Out of which, Barn

swallow (n=50), House sparrow (n=8) and Black drongo (n=5) are the predominant species

recorded at the project site. As per IUCN status 2017, all the avifaunal species recorded at the

project site belongs to Least Concern category and belongs to Schedule IV of Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972. All the recorded species are common to the region. The list of

commonly observed birds, butterflies, reptiles and mammals in the project site is given below.

Table 3.49 List of birds recorded at the project site

Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence

IUCN

Conservation

Status (2017)

WL(P)A,

1972

schedule

Ashy crowned sparrow lark Eremopterix griseus 2 LC IV

Barn swallow Hirundo rustica 50 LC -

Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus 5 LC IV

Blue throat Cyanecula svecica 1 LC IV

Chestnut munia Lonchura atricapilla 1 LC IV

House sparrow Passer domesticus 8 LC IV

Little green bee-eater Merops orientalis 1 LC -

Rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri 2 LC IV

White browed wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis 1 LC IV

White wagtail Motacilla alba 1 LC IV Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team; LC-Least Concern.

Blue throat Black drongo

Barn swallow Rose ringed parakeet





180

Fig 3.47 Birds recorded at the project site

A total of 6 butterfly species (n= 11) were recorded at the project site which are common to the

region. Out of which, Papilio machaon (n=1) belongs to Schedule II of Wildlife (Protection)

Act, 1972. Atrophaneura aristolochiae (n=3) and Pieris rapae (n=3) are the predominant

species recorded at the project site.

Table 3.50 List of butterflies recorded at the project site

Common Name Scientific Name OccurrenceIUCN

Conservation

Status (2017)

WL(P)A, 1972

schedule

Cabbage white Pieris rapae 3 NA -

Common grass yellow Eurema hecabe 1 NA -

Common rose Atrophaneura aristolochiae 3 NA -

Common yellow swallowtail Papilio machaon 1 NA II

Danaid eggfly Hypolimnas misippus 1 NA -

Plain tiger Danaus chrysippus 2 NA - Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team; NA-Not Assessed.

3.7.7 Study area

There are no protected areas, eco-sensitive areas around and no specific wildlife habitat has

been observed in the study area. A total of 46 avifaunal species (n=224) were recorded in the

study area. Out of which, Barn swallow (n=32), House sparrow (n=17), Little egret (n=13) and

Red wattled lapwing (n=13) are the predominant species recorded in the study area. As per

IUCN status 2017, Steppe eagle (n=2) belongs to the Endangered category, Woolly necked

stork (n=6) belongs to Vulnerable category, River tern (n=2) and Black headed ibis (n=8)

belongs to Near Threatened category. Steppe eagle and Crested serpent eagle are the only

avifaunal species belonging to Schedule I of Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. All the other

avifaunal species recorded in the study area are common to the region. The list of commonly

observed birds, butterflies, reptiles and mammals in the study area is given below.

Ashy crowned sparrow lark Chestnut munia





181

Table 3.51 List of birds recorded in the study area


IUCN

Conservation

Status, 2017

WL(P)A,

1972

schedule

Ashy crowned sparrow lark Eremopterix griseus 3 LC IV

Ashy drongo Dicrurus leucophaeus 6 LC IV

Ashy prinia Prinia socialis 1 LC IV

Asian openbill stork Anastomus oscitans 1 LC IV

Barn swallow Hirundo rustica 32 LC -

Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus 8 LC IV

Black headed ibis Threskiornis melanocephalus 8 NT IV

Black ibis Pseudibis papillosa 2 LC IV

Black winged stilt Himantopus himantopus 8 LC IV

Blue tailed bee-eater Merops philippinus 2 LC -

Brahminy starling Sturnia pagodarum 1 LC IV

Comb duck Sarkidiornis melanotos 5 LC IV

Common greenshank Tringa nebularia 3 LC IV

Common myna Acridotheres tristis 6 NA IV

Common stonechat Saxicola torquatus 4 NA IV

Crested serpent eagle Spilornis cheela 1 LC I

Eurasian collared dove Streptopelia decaocto 1 NA IV

Eurasian kingfisher Alcedo atthis 5 LC IV

Green sandpiper Tringa ochropus 1 LC IV

Grey heron Ardea cinerea 1 LC IV

Hill myna Gracula religiosa 1 LC IV

House crow Corvus brachyrhynchos 10 LC V

House sparrow Passer domesticus 17 LC IV

Indian bushlark Mirafra erythroptera 4 LC IV

Indian Swiftlet Aerodramus unicolor 2 LC -

Intermediate egret Ardea intermedia 4 LC IV

Laughing dove Spilopelia senegalensis 1 LC IV

Lesser whistling duck Dendrocygna javanica 8 LC IV

Little cormorant Microcarbo niger 8 LC IV

Little egret Egretta garzetta 13 LC IV

Little green bee-eater Merops orientalis 8 LC -

Little stint Calidris minuta 2 LC IV

Pond heron Ardeola grayii 1 LC IV

Purple sunbird Nectarinia asiaticus 3 LC IV

Red collared dove Streptopelia tranquebarica 2 LC IV

Red wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus 13 LC IV

River tern Sterna aurantia 2 NT IV





182


IUCN

Conservation

Status, 2017

WL(P)A,

1972

schedule

Rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri 5 LC IV

Scaly breasted munia Lonchura punctulata 1 LC IV

Steppe eagle Aquila nipalensis 2 EN I

Streaked weaver Ploceus manyar 1 LC IV

White browed wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis 1 LC IV

White throated kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis 5 LC IV

Woolly necked stork Ciconia episcopus 6 VU IV

Yellow wagtail Motacilla flava 2 LC IV

Yellow wattled lapwing Vanellus malabaricus 3 NA IV

Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team; LC-Least Concern, VU- Vulnerable, EN- Endangered, NT-

Near Threatened and NA - Not Assessed.

Common greenshank Grey heron

Black winged stilt Green sandpiper





183

White browed wagtail Little egret

Black headed ibis

Red wattled lapwing

White throated kingfisher Indian bushlark





184

Yellow wagtail Ashy drongo

Little cormorant Laughing dove

Ashy crowned sparrow lark

Woolly necked stork





185

Crested serpent eagle Common myna

River tern Eurasian kingfisher

Fig 3.48 Birds recorded in the study area

A total of 19 butterfly species (n= 61) were recorded from the study area which are common to

the region. Out of which, Eurema hecabe (n=8), Pieris rapae (n=6), Everes lacturnus (n=6),

Lampides boeticus (n=6) and Eurema blanda (n=6) are the predominant species recorded in the

study area. Lampides boeticus (n=6) and Euploea core (n=7) are the only species belonging to

Schedule II and Schedule IV of Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. As per IUCN conservation

status, Euploea core (n=7) is the only recorded species belonging to Least Concern category.

Table 3.52 List of butterflies recorded in the study area


IUCN

Conservation

Status (2017)

WL(P)A,

1972

schedule

Baronet Symphaedra nais 1 NA -

Blue pancy Junonia orithya 1 NA -

Cabbage white Pieris rapae 6 NA -

Common bush brown Mycalesis perseus 1 NA -

Common crow Euploea core 7 LC IV

Common emigrant Catopsilia pomona 1 NA -

Common grass yellow Eurema hecabe 8 NA -

Common leopard Phalanta phalantha 2 NA -

Common rose Atrophaneura aristolochiae 5 NA -

Danaid eggfly Hypolimnas misippus 1 NA -





186

Great eggfly Hypolimnas bolina 1 NA -

Grey pansy Junonia atlites 1 NA -

Indian cupid Everes lacturnus 6 NA -

Mottled emigrant Catopsilia pyranthe 3 NA -

Pea blue butterfly Lampides boeticus 6 NA II

Plain tiger Danaus chrysippus 1 NA -

Striped tiger Danaus genutia 1 NA -

Three spotted grass yellow Eurema blanda 6 NA -

White orange tip Ixias marianne 3 NA -

Note: Species identified by EHSCPL team; LC-Least Concern and NA-Not Assessed

Three spotted grass yellow Blue pansy

Mottled emigrant Indian cupid

Fig 3.49 Butterflies recorded in the study area

Many local people expressed that, fox, wolf, mongoose are the commonly found species in the

study area. The list of reptiles and mammals recorded in the study area are as given below. Of

which, Canis indica belongs to Schedule - I, Naja naja, Semnopithecus entellus and Vulpes

bengalensis belongs to Schedule - II of Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. As per IUCN

Conservation status, all the species belongs to Least Concern category and are common to the

region.





187

Table 3.53 List of reptiles and mammals recorded in the study area

Sl.

No. Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence

IUCN

Conservation

Status, 2017

WL(P)A,

1972

schedule

Reptiles

1 Common Garden Lizard* Calotes versicolor -- NA -

2 Fan throated Lizard* Sitana ponticeriana -- LC -

3 Indian Cobra+ Naja naja -- -- II

4 Oriental Garden Lizard* Calotes versicolor 1 NA --

5 Viper+ Daboia russelii -- LC --

Mammals

1 Barking Deer# Muntiacus muntjak -- LC III

2 Black naped hare+ Lepus nigricollis -- LC IV

3 Grey Mangoose# Herpestes edwardsii -- LC IV

4 Hanuman langur* Semnopithecus entellus 7 LC II

5 Indian Fox+ Vulpes bengalensis -- LC II

6 Indian Palm Squirrel* Funambulus palmarum 1 LC --

7 Indian Wolf+ Canis indica -- NA I

8 Wild Boar+ Sus scrofa -- LC III

Note: * - Species identified by EHSCPL team, + - Secondary information from local people, # - Belagavi

Forest Working Plan; LC-Least Concern and NA-Not Assessed

Hanuman langurs Fan throated lizard

3.7.8 Conclusion

Proposed project is an expansion and no trees were recorded at the project site. However,

sapling were procured for green belt plantations. The project area and the study area supports a

fair amount of floral and faunal species. About 2 species of shrubs belonging to 2 families, 54

species of herbs belonging to 16 families and 7 species of climbers belonging to 3 families

were recorded at the project site. Abutilon hirtum, Hibiscus panduriformis, Eragrostis tenella,

Cassia tora and Parthenium hysterophorus are the predominant recorded at the project site. Of

which 4 species of herbs belongs to Least Concern category as per IUCN conservation status,

2017 and remaining are common to the region.

A total of 16 saplings belonging to 14 families and 7 shrub saplings belonging to 5 families

were recorded which were procured as a part of green belt development plan. Of which, Dypsis





188

lutescensand Platycladus orientalisare the tree species belonging to Near Threatened category

as per IUCN conservation status, 2017.Bixa orellana, Ficus benjamina, Grevillea robusta,

Plumeria alba, Sterculia Foetida, Tabebuia rosea, Platycladus orientalis and Trewia nudiflora

are the predominant ornamental tree saplings recorded in the industrial premises.

A total of 10 avifaunal species (n=72) and 6 butterfly species (n= 11) were recorded at the

project site. Barn swallow and House sparrow are the predominant bird species recorded at the

project site. Rest of the avifaunal species are common to the region Atrophaneura aristolochiae

and Pieris rapae are the predominant butterfly species recorded at the project site. Of which,

Papilio machaon is the only butterfly species belonging to Schedule II of Wildlife (Protection)

Act, 1972.

About 5 tree species (n=36) belonging to 3 families along with 8 species of shrubs belonging to

5 families, 70 species of herbs belonging to 19 families and 9 species of climbers belonging to

3 families were recorded in the study area. No RET species were recorded in the study area.

Fourteen species of herbs belongs to Least Concern category as per IUCN conservation status,

2017 and remaining are common to the region. Species like Acacia nilotica, Acacia chundra,

Azadirachta indica, Alysicarpus longifolius, Brachiaria ramosa, Cassia tora, Parthenium

hysterophorus and Leucaena leucocephala are the predominant species recorded in the study

area. Shannon-Weiner diversity index and Simpson diversity index of herbs, shrubs and

climbers in the study area were estimated to be 1.049 and 0.535.

A total of 46 avifaunal species (n=224) and 19 butterfly species (n= 61) were recorded in the

study area. Barn swallow, House sparrow, Little egret and Red wattled lapwing are the

predominantly recorded avifaunal species in the study area. As per IUCN status 2017, Steppe

eagle (n=2) belongs to the Endangered category, Woolly necked stork belongs to Vulnerable

category, River tern and Black headed ibis belongs to Near Threatened category. Steppe eagle

and Crested serpent eagle are the only avifaunal species belonging to Schedule I of Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972. All the other avifaunal species recorded in the study area are common

to the region. Eurema hecabe, Pieris rapae, Everes lacturnus, Lampides boeticus and Eurema

blanda are the predominant species recorded in the study area. Lampides boeticus and Euploea

core are the only species belonging to Schedule II and Schedule IV of Wildlife (Protection)

Act, 1972. As per IUCN conservation status, Euploea core is the only recorded species

belonging to Least Concern category





189

Fig 3.50 Field visit Photographs

3.8 Social Environment

3.8.1 Introduction

The proposed industry at Sy No. 411/1, 411/2, 411/3, 413/1, 412, Saundatti Village, Belagavi

District, located in the hub of exhaustive sugar cane cultivation. This will also contribute to

develop the overall economy of the area, providing better employment opportunities to the

local people. The farmers who sell their produce to the neighbouring factories in adjacent

taluks can now benefit selling sugarcane directly to this company, avoiding delay in disposal

and get better price.

3.8.2 Scope of the Socio economic studies

As detailed in the ToR and various references on the sugar plants and distilleries projects, the

scope of the socio economic studies includes the following:





190

To conduct Baseline socio-economic studies within 10 km radius of the project

boundary to understand the socio economic and demographic profile of the impacted

area.

To assess the Land requirement for the project including its optimization, break up of

land requirement and its availability.

To identify the impacts of the project on community as a whole.

To assess the Socio-economic impacts on communities livelihood, socio economic

status, and prepare an action plan to address the expressed needs by communities.

Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) earmarking 2.5 percent of the Project cost

Enterprise. Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues and item-wise details

along with time bound action plan shall be included elaborating the socio economic

development activities.

3.8.3 Baseline Socioeconomic survey and Sampling

In order to collect the information of the desired objective, it is necessary to collect the

authenticate information about the village through personal interaction with people. Hence,

village visits, Social surveys were conducted and Rapid Rural Appraisal (RRA) methods were

used to obtain the baseline information of the area. Interaction with other stakeholders such as

management of the Company, Key officials, employees, NGOs and elected representatives of

the area etc. were also attempted.

To collect socio-economic and demographic details of influenced villages within the radius of

10 Km from the project site was done mainly through analysis of the census, 2011 report of the

villages. Official reports of Belagavi district published by various Government departments

were also analyzed.

3.8.4 Profile of the Project District

The Project is in Saundatti Village, Saundatti taluk in Belagavi District, Karnataka. Belagavi

district has several places of historical importance and a few which are identified with places

mentioned in Hindu mythological accounts. The district comprises of ten taluks viz. Chikodi,

Athni, Raybag, Gokak, Hukeri, Belagavi, Khanapur, Sampgaon, and Ramdurg. Belagavi is the

district head quarters.

The local languages spoken in this city are Kannada and Marathi language and official

language is Kannada. There is also minority number of Urdu, Konkani speakers. Hindi

and English are also understood by the people of the city.

3.8.5 Belagavi District-Highlights

Belagavi with a total population of 47, 79,661 with a Sex ratio of 973 for adults and sex

ratio of 934 among the age-group 0-6 children.

District literacy rate is 73.5 % with male literacy rate of 82.2 percent and female

literacy rate of 64.6 %. The male – female literacy gap in the district is 17.6 percentage

points, which is higher than that registered by the State (14.4 % points).

The Scheduled Caste population is 12.1 percent and the Scheduled Tribe population is

6.2 %.

Work participation rate is 44.1% with male - female work participation rates as 56.6%

and 31.1% respectively.





191

Among the workers, 82.4 % are Main workers and 17.6 % are Marginal workers.

64.6% of the workers are engaged in Agricultural sector as Cultivators (33.8 %) and

Agricultural Labourers (30.8 %). 2.9 % of the total workers are engaged in Household

Industry and 32.5 % are ‘other workers’. About 55.9 % are non-workers.

Belagavi is the largest district in the state with the total area of 13433 Sq. Km. The

district has a density of 356 and is placed at 8th rank in the State.

Belagavi District has the 1,275 number of villages, 18 Statutory Towns and 13 Census

3.8.6 Project Impact Area

The Project site is well accessed by SH – 30, Malaprabha River from Renukasagar Reservoir

flows at a distance 5 Km away from the project site. The following villages are located in the

study area of 10 Km radius of the project:

Table 3.54 Villages in the Project Influence area (PIA) of 10 km radius

SI. No Villages Distance

(Km) Direction

1 Karikatti 3.45 NW

2 Saundatti 6.25 NE

3 Asundi 4.24 NW

4 Kenchalarkop 5.5 NE

5 Shingarkop 5.2 N

6 Sangreshkoppa 7.82 SW

7 Hireulligeri 6.14 SE

8 Chikkulligeri 6.10 SE

9 Sutagatti 8.34 NW

10 Yadahalli 8.86 NW

11 Yadravi 6.74 NE

12 Betasur 8.18 NE

13 Kencharamanahal 9.2 SW

14 Kabbenur 9.1 SW

3.8.7 Demographic profile of the impacted villages

Demographic profiles of the Project Impacted Villages were analyzed based on the Census

Reports 2011 as discussed below:

3.8.7.1 Land area and households

Total land area of the villages falling within 10 Km radius of the project is 20697 Ha and there

are 14550 households there as detailed in table -3.57 below.

Table 3.55 Area and Households in project Influence villages

Taluk Name of the village Area in Hectares

Total

Households

Saundatti

Karikatti 2352.73 976

Asundi 2071.55 1074

Yadravi 1987.39 615





192

Betasur 2681.43 782

Hireulligeri 627.81 362

Chikulligeri 449.05 313

Sangreshkoppa 1136.58 432

Saundatti 5855.21 8552

Kencharlarkop 394.8 16

Shingarkoppa 859.47 346

Sutagatti 852.67 532

Yadahalli 686.83 308

Kencharamanahal 741.91 242

Total 20697.43 14550 Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.51 Area and households in the Project Influenced Areas

Kencharlarkop village is the smallest village in area and have only 16 households there. While

Saundatti which is the taluk headquarters, have an area of 5855 Ha with 8552 households.

3.8.7.2 Population

Total population in the PIA villages is 71501 persons with 36043 male and 35458 female.

Average sex ratio is 984. Population and sex ratio of individual villages varies as shown in

Table No 3.58

Table 3.56 Population and sex ratio

0200040006000800010000120001400016000

Karikatti

Asundi

Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkoppa

Saundatti

Kencharlarkop

Shingarkoppa

Sutagatti

Yadahalli

Kencharamana…

Total Households

Area in Hectares

Name of the village Total

Population Total male Total female

Sex

ratio

Karikatti 4835 2437 2398 984

Asundi 5161 2636 2525 958

Yadravi 3258 1666 1592 956

Betasur 4004 2028 1976 974

Hireulligeri 1960 1000 960 960

Chikulligeri 1603 824 779 945





193

Source: Census, 2011

Children under- 6 years comprise 12.5 percent of the population as detailed in Table no 3.59

below. Average sex ratio among them is 939 only.

Table 3.57 Population and sex ratio of under 6year children

Name of the

village Child (0-6) Male Female Sex ratio

Karikatti 644 327 317 969

Asundi 643 342 301 880

Yadravi 474 250 224 896

Betasur 563 282 281 996

Hireulligeri 241 125 116 928

Chikulligeri 250 139 111 799

Sangreshkoppa 259 120 139 1158

Saundatti 4945 2497 2448 980

Kencharlarkop 16 3 13 -

Shingarkoppa 250 134 16 119

Sutagatti 344 171 173 1012

Yadahalli 176 86 90 1047

Kencharamanahal 148 90 58 644

Total 8953 4566 4287 939 Source: Census, 2011

3.8.7.3 Scheduled caste and Scheduled tribe population

SC and ST population in the PIA villages are detailed in Table 3.60 below. On an average, 5.71

% of the population is Scheduled caste communities and 3.41 % are scheduled tribe

communities in the PIA villages. SC and ST communities are not reported from

Kencharamanahal village.

Table 3.58 SC/ST population

Name of the

village

SC Population ST Population

Persons % Male Female Persons % Male Female

Karikatti 135 2.79 62 73 102 2.11 49 53

Sangreshkoppa 2081 1044 1037 993

Saundatti 41215 20592 20623 1002

Kencharlarkop 78 36 42 1167

Shingarkoppa 1931 1007 924 918

Sutagatti 2856 1459 1397 958

Yadahalli 1385 729 656 900

Kencharamanahal 1134 585 549 938

Total 71501 36043 35458 984





194

Name of the

village

SC Population ST Population

Persons % Male Female Persons % Male Female

Asundi 172 3.33 81 91 65 1.26 35 30

Yadravi 226 6.94 114 112 181 5.56 88 93

Betasur 242 6.04 132 110 120 3.00 66 54

Hireulligeri 48 2.45 21 27 325 16.58 173 152

Chikulligeri 42 2.62 19 23 38 2.37 19 19

Sangreshkoppa 135 6.49 67 68 34 1.63 16 18

Saundatti 2655 6.44 1298 1357 1230 2.98 597 633

Kencharlarkop 2 2.56 1 1 8 10.26 5 3

Shingarkoppa 105 5.44 54 51 182 9.43 95 87

Sutagatti 224 7.84 123 101 85 2.98 43 42

Yadahalli 94 6.79 49 45 66 4.77 37 29

Kencharamanahal 0 0.00 0 0 0 0.00 0 0

Total 4080 5.71 2021 2059 2436 3.41 1223 1213 Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.52 SC and ST population

In Hireulligeri village 16.58 % of the populations belong to scheduled tribe communities and in

Kencharlarkop village 10.26 % are STs. Sutagatti village reports the maximum percentage of

scheduled caste communities which is 7.84 % only.

3.8.7.4 Literacy status

Only 65.65 % of the persons in the PIA villages are literate with 56.48 % males and 43.52 %

female literates. These PIA villages are far behind the District literacy rate (73.5 %) with male

literacy rate of 56.48% and female literacy rate of 43.52% and hence is a backward area. Table-

3.61 gives the literacy status of each village.

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

ST %

SC %





195

Table 3.59 Literacy status of PIA villages

Name of the

village

Total Literates

Persons % Male % Female %

Karikatti 3074 63.58 1744 56.73 1330 43.27

Asundi 3428 66.42 1985 57.91 1443 42.09

Yadravi 1887 57.92 1123 59.51 764 40.49

Betasur 2394 59.79 1396 58.31 998 41.69

Hireulligeri 1371 69.95 777 56.67 594 43.33

Chikulligeri 991 61.82 599 60.44 392 39.56

Sangreshkoppa 1309 62.90 762 58.21 547 41.79

Saundatti 27950 67.82 15407 55.12 12543 44.88

Kencharlarkop 41 52.56 24 58.54 17 41.46

Shingarkoppa 1121 58.05 692 61.73 429 38.27

Sutagatti 1871 65.51 1088 58.15 783 41.85

Yadahalli 857 61.88 533 62.19 324 37.81

Kencharamanahal 644 56.79 379 58.85 265 41.15

Total 46938 65.65 26509 56.48 20429 43.52 Source: Census, 2011

Table 3.60 Total illiterates in PIA villages

Name of the

village

Total

Illiterates % Male % Female %

Karikatti 1761 36.42 693 39.35 1068 60.65

Asundi 1733 33.58 651 37.56 1082 62.44

Yadravi 1371 42.08 543 39.61 828 60.39

Betasur 1610 40.21 632 39.25 978 60.75

Hireulligeri 589 30.05 223 37.86 366 62.14

Chikulligeri 612 38.18 225 36.76 387 63.24

Sangreshkoppa 772 37.10 282 36.53 490 63.47

Saundatti 13265 32.18 5185 39.09 8080 60.91

Kencharlarkop 37 47.44 12 32.43 25 67.57

Shingarkoppa 810 41.95 315 38.89 495 61.11

Sutagatti 985 34.49 371 37.66 614 62.34

Yadahalli 528 38.12 196 37.12 332 62.88







196

Fig 3.53 Literates and Illiterate Male and Female in PIA villages

As shown above34.35 % of the population in PIA villages are illiterates and among them 61.36

% are females which clarify their backward status. Village level literacy status also does not

show much variation.

3.8.7.5 Educational profile

The number of Educational institutions available in the Government and Private sector in the

PIA villages were collected as noted in Table no 3.63, during the primary surveys in the area.

Table 3.61 Educational facilities in PIA villages

Villages Government schools Private schools

Saundatti Govt Primary& High school

PU College

Government First Grade

College

KLE School

Sri Kumareshwar English

medium School

Renuka Yallamma Educational

Society

Deepak Chauhan School

Kencharlarkop Government Primary school

Yadravi Government Primary school

Betasur Government Primary school

Hireulligeri Government Primary school

Chikulligeri Government Primary school

Sangreshkoppa Government Primary school

& Government High School

Sai Nikethan English Medium Primary

school

Karikatti Government Primary and High

school Jnana Jyothi convent school

Asundi Government Primary school

Government High school

Government PU college

Veerabadreshwara English medium

school

Shingarkoppa Government primary school

Yadahalli Government primary school

Kencharamanahal Government primary school

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

Karikatti

Asundi

Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkoppa

Saundatti

Kencharlarkop

Shingarkoppa

Sutagatti

Yadahalli

Kencharamanahal

female illiterates %

male illiterates%

illiterates %

Female literates %

male literates%

Literates%





197

Government Primary Schools are available in all the villages but High schools and other

education facilities are very limited. Private Management schools are mostly English medium

schools focused in certain pockets which provide facilities for children from families who can

afford to pay fees. For higher education they have to traverse outside the 10 Km radius is

obvious from this data.

3.8.7.6 Occupational status

Work participation rate is 42.87 % which is more or less in tune with the district average of

44.1 % .Among the workers, 82.28 % are Main workers and 17.72 % are Marginal workers.

Individual status of the PIA villages varies as shown in Table – 3.64below:

Table 3.62 Work participation rate in the PIA villages

Village Name Total

Population

Working

Population Main workers

Marginal

workers

Persons %

Persons % Persons %

Karikatti 4835 1891 39.11 1772 93.71 119 6.29

Asundi 5161 2605 50.47 2180 83.69 425 16.31

Yadravi 3258 1328 40.76 954 71.84 374 28.16

Betasur 4004 1901 47.48 1326 69.75 575 30.25

Hireulligeri 1960 759 38.72 477 62.85 282 37.15

Chikulligeri 1603 892 55.65 874 97.98 18 2.02

Sangreshkoppa 2081 1165 55.98 754 64.72 411 35.28

Saundatti 41215 16340 39.65 13509 82.67 2831 17.33

Kencharlarkop 78 37 47.44 24 64.86 13 35.14

Shingarkoppa 1931 1108 57.38 970 87.55 138 12.45

Sutagatti 2856 1250 43.77 1110 88.80 140 11.20

Yadahalli 1385 735 53.07 639 86.94 96 13.06

Kencharamanahal 1134 654 57.67 642 98.17 12 1.83

Total 71501 30665 42.89 25231 82.28 5434 17.72 Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.54 Work participation rates and status of main and marginal workers

Work participation rate among male and female is 50.15 and 49.85 % respectively. There is not

much variation in the male-female work participation rate as per these averages. However, the

individual villages shows much variation as detailed in Table no 3.65 and Fig – 3.55 below:

050100150200

Karikatti

Asundi

Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkop…

Saundatti

Kencharlarkop

Shingarkoppa

Sutagatti

Yadahalli

Kencharama…

Marginal workers

Main workers

Total workers





198

Table 3.63 Work participation of male and female

Village Name

Total Worker Population

Total

workers Male % Female %

Karikatti 1891 1403 74.19 488 25.81

Asundi 2605 1506 57.81 1099 42.19

Yadravi 1328 1017 76.58 311 23.42

Betasur 1901 1269 66.75 632 33.25

Hireulligeri 759 544 71.67 215 28.33

Chikulligeri 892 497 55.72 395 44.28

Sangreshkoppa 1165 658 56.48 507 43.52

Saundatti 16340 11813 72.29 4527 27.71

Kencharlarkop 37 21 56.76 16 43.24

Shingarkoppa 1108 618 55.78 490 44.22

Sutagatti 1250 766 61.28 484 38.72

Yadahalli 735 458 62.31 277 37.69

Kencharamanahal 654 328 50.15 326 49.85 Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.55 Gender work participation

3.8.7.7 Main workers- Occupational groups

Occupational groups among the main workers are analyzed further in Table no 3.66 and Fig-

3.56 below:

0 50 100

Village Name

Karikatti

Asundi

Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkoppa

Saundatti

Kencharlarkop

Shingarkoppa

Sutagatti

Yadahalli

Kencharamanahal

74.19

57.81

76.58

66.75

71.67

55.72

56.48

72.29

56.76

55.78

61.28

62.31

50.15

25.81

42.19

23.42

33.25

28.33

44.28

43.52

27.71

43.24

44.22

38.72

37.69

49.85

male workers

female workers





199

Table 3.64 Occupational categories among main workers

Village Name Main

workers

Cultivators Agricultural

Labourers

Household

Industries

Other

Workers

Nos % Nos % Nos % Nos %

Karikatti 1772 933 52.65 626 35.33 18 1.02 195 11.00

Asundi 2180 858 39.36 860 39.45 18 0.83 444 20.37

Yadravi 954 569 59.64 92 9.64 2 0.21 291 30.50

Betasur 1326 626 47.21 547 41.25 4 0.30 149 11.24

Hireulligeri 477 236 49.48 103 21.59 5 1.05 133 27.88

Chikulligeri 874 573 65.56 181 20.71 2 0.23 118 13.50

Sangreshkoppa 754 193 25.60 403 53.45 10 1.33 148 19.63

Saundatti 13509 2082 15.41 2696 19.96 229 1.70 8502 62.94

Kencharlarkop 24 5 20.83 11 45.83 0 0.00 8 33.33

Shingarkoppa 970 389 40.10 516 53.20 3 0.31 62 6.39

Sutagatti 1110 292 26.31 707 63.69 12 1.08 99 8.92

Yadahalli 639 531 83.10 25 3.91 4 0.63 79 12.36

Kencharamanahal 642 620 96.57 12 1.87 0 0.00 10 1.56

Total 25231 7907 31.34 6779 26.87 307 1.22 10238 40.58 Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.56 Occupational categories- main workers

As shown above 58.21 % of the workers are engaged in Agricultural sector as Cultivators

(31.34 %) and Agricultural Labourers (26.87 %). 1.22 percent of the main workers are engaged

in Household Industry and 40.58 % are ‘other workers’. Individual status of the various PIA

villages however shows vide variations as shown in the Table above.

0 20 40 60 80 100

Karikatti

Asundi

Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkoppa

Saundatti

Kencharlarkop

Shingarkoppa

Sutagatti

Yadahalli

Kencharamanahal

Main Other Workers Population

Main Household Industries Population

Main Agricultural Labourers Population

Main Cultivator Population





200

3.8.7.8 Occupational categories among Marginal workers

Marginal workers constitute 17.72 % of the working population and 65.88 % among them

works in the agricultural sector as cultivators (5.08 %) and as agricultural labourers

(60.8percent) 2.01 % works in household industries and remaining 32.48 % works as other

workers. Village wise details are furnished in Table – 3.67 and Fig no 3.57 below which shows

variations.

Table 3.65 Occupational categories of marginal workers in PIA villages

Source: Census, 2011

Fig 3.57 Occupational categories of marginal workers in PIA villages

Among marginal workers, women workers are more as it is mostly seasonal and unskilled

labour. As shown in Fig -3.58below, 70.7 % of the agricultural labourers and 59.42 % of the

020406080100120

other wks

HH wks

agri

cultivators

Village name Marginal

workers

Cultivators Agri-labourersHH

workers

Other

workers

Nos % No

%

Nos %

Nos %

Karikatti 119 15 12.61 79 66.39 4 3.36 21 17.65

Asundi 425 18 4.24 360 84.71 2 0.47 45 10.59

Yadravi 374 21 5.61 274 73.26 6 1.6 73 19.52

Betasur 575 14 2.43 531 92.35 3 0.52 27 4.7

Hireulligeri 282 19 6.74 249 88.3 7 2.48 7 2.48

Chikulligeri 18 11 61.11 2 11.11 1 5.56 4 22.22

Sangreshkoppa 411 11 2.68 355 86.37 5 1.22 60 14.6

Saundatti 2831 149 5.26 1109 39.17 77 2.72 1496 52.84

Kencharlarkop 13 0 0 13 100 0 0 0 0

Shingarkoppa 138 8 5.8 129 93.48 0 0 1 0.72

Sutagatti 140 3 2.14 129 92.14 0 0 8 5.71

Yadahalli 96 6 6.25 67 69.79 3 3.13 20 20.83

Kencharamana

hal 12 1 8.33 7 58.33 1 8.33 3 25

Total 5434 276 5.08 3304 60.8 109 2.01 1765 32.48





201

cultivators among marginal workers are women. 57.8 % of the other workers and 38.92 % of

the household workers too are women in this category.

Fig 3.58 Women participation among marginal occupational categories

3.8.7.8 Non workers

Non workers are those without any employment represented mostly by children, students,

women, and aged, disabled and those with illness who have to depend on the working

population for their subsistence. 55.6 % of the population in these PIA villages belong to non-

working category and among them 36.75 % are men and 63.25 % are women. Details are

furnished in Table 3.68 and Fig 3.59 below

Table 3.66 Non workers in PIA villages

Villages Non-Working Population

Persons % Male % Female %

Karikatti 2944 60.89 1034 35.12 1910 64.88

Asundi 2556 49.53 1130 44.21 1426 55.79

Yadravi 1930 59.24 649 33.63 1281 66.37

Betasur 2103 52.52 759 36.09 1344 63.91

Hireulligeri 1201 61.28 456 37.97 745 62.03

Chikulligeri 711 44.35 327 45.99 384 54.01

Sangreshkoppa 916 44.02 386 42.14 530 57.86

Saundatti 24875 60.35 8779 35.29 16096 64.71

Kencharlarkop 41 52.56 15 36.59 26 63.41

Shingarkoppa 823 42.62 389 47.27 434 52.73

Sutagatti 136 4.76 15 11.03 121 88.97

Yadahalli 650 46.93 271 41.69 379 58.31


59.42

70.7

57.8

38.92

Women workers

marginal cultivators

agri labourers

HH workers

other workers





202


Fig 3.59 Non workers and male-female representation

3.8.7.9 Health Infrastructure

Health facilities available in the PIA villages are summarized in Table -3.69 below. Three

Primary Health Centres and one Community Health Centre form the main support system

available in the area, besides three Private hospitals in Saundatti village.

Table 3.67 Health infrastructure available in PIA villages

PIA villages Government Private

Saundatti Government taluk hospital

(Community Health Centre)

Navadagi Hospital

Fakeerashetty clinic

Sri Renuka Hospital

Kencharlarkop

Nil

Nil Yadravi

Betasur

Hireulligeri

Chikulligeri

Sangreshkoppa

Karikatti Primary Health Centre

Asundi Primary Health Centre

Sutagatti Primary Health Centre

Shingarkoppa

Yadahalli

Kencharamanahal

3.8.7.10 Water supply and sanitation facilities

The main source of water in the rural villages is tube wells/ bore wells and hand pumps.

Canals/ river, spring, tank/pond /lakes etc are available to a limited extent. An analysis of the

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

female

male

Non working persons





203

water sources in the rural areas of the project influence taluks as per 2011 census report are

furnished in Table No 3.70 below

Table 3.68 Water supply and sanitation coverage in the Taluk

Details of water supply-

Saundatti Taluk Total Rural Urban

Total number of Households 67984 59580 8404

Tap water from treated sources 43.12% 37.56% 82.50%

Tap water from untreated sources 19.76% 21.24% 9.33%

Covered well 0.40% 0.44% 0.18%

Uncovered well 4.48% 5.10% 0.05%

Hand pump 6.85% 7.74% 0.55%

Tube well/bore hole 20.77% 23.33% 2.58%

Spring 0.06% 0.07% 0.05%

River/canal 1.23% 0.77% 4.47%

Tank/pond/lake 2.77% 3.16% 0%

Other sources 0.55% 0.59% 0.30%

Latrine facilities Total Rural Urban

With Latrine facilities 25.04% 20.99% 53.75%

Without Latrine facilities 74.96% 79.01% 46.25% Source: Census, 2011

Overall, 62.78 % of the water supply is affected through tap water (treated as well as

untreated) followed by Tube wells and bore wells (20.77 %).When rural water supply

considered tap water is used by 58.8 % and 23.33 % uses bore well /tube well. 91.83 % of

urban water supply tap water and 82.50 % of it is water from treated sources.

As per the Census data (2011) sanitation facilities in the villages in Parasgad (now called as

Saundatti) taluk is limited to 25.04 % only, out of which rural coverage is just 20.99 %.

Remaining 79 percent of the rural families depend on open defecation. But this picture has

changed now with the focus on sanitation by Swatch Bharath Abhiyan programmes. Due to

intensive IEC focus on sanitation the awareness of people has gone up and many are keen to

construct latrines in their premises. Institutional sanitation, especially in schools and such other

institutions also are improving in which CSR funds of corporate companies are channelled.

3.8.7.11 Religious Institutions

Saundatti reminds us of the beautiful and ancient temple of Goddess Renuka (also known as

the Yellamma) situated at a distance of 10.2 Km from the project site. It is at a distance of

70Km from Belagavi and the place can be reached from all the other places by road. Ata

distance of 5 km from the Saundatti town, there is a big hill on which the temple is situated.

The hill was earlier known as Siddhachal Parvat. The temple is built in the Chalukya and

Rashtrakuta style and the Carvings reflect the Jain architecture. The temple was constructed by

Bomappa Naik of Raybag in the year 1514. There are temples of Lord Ganesh, Mallikarjun,

Parshuram, Eknath, Siddeshwar etc., in the temple premises. Devotees from Maharastra, Goa

and Andhra Pradesh also come here, apart from Karnataka, especially during the time of Jatras

which are held twice in a year. The management of the temple has been handed over to the

Government in 1975 and the government has made provisions such as Dharmashalas, Health

centres and other facilities to make the devotees feel at home.





204

Hindus being the main religion in the area, there are a number of temples in each and every

village as listed during the primary survey. Worshipping in these temples is a routine affair of

the families. Religious festivals and ceremonies form the major entertainment of the villages.

Table 3.69 List of temples in PIA villages

Village Religious institutions

Saundatti 1)Vittal Mandir

2) Shiridi Sai Baba Temple

3) Basaveshwara Temple

4) Hanuman Temple

5) Sri Venkateshwara Temple

Kencharlarkop 1) Hanuman Temple

2) Vitobha Temple

3) Sri Durgadevi Temple


Yadravi 1)Hanuman Temple

2) Vitobha Temple

3) Sri DurgadeviTemple


Betasur 1)Biralingeshwara Temple

2) Kalmeshwar Temple

3) Hanumana Temple

4) Vittal Temple

Hireulligeri 1)Basaveshwara Temple

2) Veerabadreshwara Temple

3) Kariyamma Temple

4) Mylar Temple

Chikulligeri 1)Sangameshwara Temple

2) Hanuman Temple

3) Beerappa Temple

4) Mylarappa Temple

Sangreshkoppa 1)Hanuman Temple

2) Dyamavva Temple

3) Kalmeshwara Temple

4) Basavanna Temple

Karikatti 1)Basaveshwara Temple

2) Beereshwara Temple

3) Gramaevi Temple

4) Hanuman Temple

Asundi 1)Siddalingeshwara Temple

2) Mylarlingeshwar Temple

3) Kurubad Temple

4) Dyamavva Temple

5) Basavanna Temple

6) Hanuman Temple

Shingarkoppa 1)Basavanna Temple

2) Hanuman Temple

3) Vitobha Temple

4) Bireshwara Temple





205

Sutagatti 1)Basaveshwara Temple

2) Holi Ajjannana Matha

Yadahalli 1) Hanuman Temple

2) Vithobha Temple

3) Durga Devi Temple

4) Basavehwara Temple

Kencharamanahal 1)Beeralingeshwara Temple

2) Hanuman Temple

Archaeologically important places

Srine of Goddess Yellamma located at 10.2 kms from the project site

3.8.7.12 Social Infrastructure

The Project site is well accessed by SH – 30 which is at a distance of 1.85 Km to the project

site. The nearest airport is situated at 39.43 Km from the factory at Hubli. The nearest township

with residential areas is at Karikatti- at 3.45 Km away from the plant.

Within 10 Km influence zone, there is no tropical forest, biosphere reserve, national park, wild

life sanctuary and coral formation reserve. The Renukasagar Reservoir is at a distance 5 Km

away from the project site.

3.8.7.13 Land form, land use and land ownership.

The project site is situated at Sy No 411/1, 411/2, 413/1, 412, 411/3, Saundatti Village,

Saundatti Taluk, Belagavi Dist, Karnataka in a total land area of 51.3 Acres owned by Harsha

Sugars Ltd. The proposed expansion project is on the existing Industry site of about 51.3 acres

and hence there is no additional land required to be purchased/acquired.

3.8.7.14 Community Consultations

Focus group discussions and structured interactions with stakeholders were organized in all the

14 villages surrounding 10 Km radius of the project. The participants include villagers from all

walks of life as detailed in the list Appended. Structured questionnaires were used for the

interactions and information to be collected. The general feed backs of the villagers are

summarized below:

The overall impression of the villagers about the sugar factory is good. The company

provides them employment and several local developments in the area are steered by

them. This includes provision for drinking water, improved facilities in schools, better

roads, and supports for festivals in temples etc.

But there are some health issues too due to the company. Often the foul smell and black

dust from the chimney troubles them. This need to be plugged through appropriate

measures and save their health.

Cane farmers in the area find this company very helpful as they can sell their product to

the company. They also get regular employment. So the factory generally contributes to

the development and wellbeing of the farmers and villagers.

When the preference of the villagers for local development with CSR funds of the

company a good majority of them demanded medical care supports, since the health

facilities in the villages are very limited. The varies priorities are listed below





206

Health facilities /health camps

Drinking water supply

Developing infrastructure facilities in the schools

Better roads

Supports for developing the temples and such other common properties

Supports for the development of Youth

More local employment

Fig 3.60 Photographs of community interactions





207

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.0 Introduction

This section identifies and predicts the potential impacts on different environmental components

due to the construction and operation of the proposed project. It details all the potential impacts

on biophysical and socio-economic components of the local environment due to the proposed

activities and sub-activities.

Prediction of impacts is the most important component in the Environmental Impact Assessment

studies. Several qualitative and quantitative techniques and methodologies are used to conduct

analysis of the potential impacts likely to occur as a result of the proposed developmental

activities on physical, ecological and socio-economic environment. Such predictions are

superimposed over the baseline (pre-project) status of the environmental quality to derive at the

ultimate (post-project) scenario of environmental conditions. The prediction of impacts helps to

minimize the adverse impacts and maximize the beneficial impacts on environmental quality

during pre and post project execution.

The proposed project would create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:

During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short – term

During the operation phase which would have long term effects.

The environmental impact assessment approach used to evaluate the proposed project comprises

of three sequential elements. These are impacts identification, prediction and evaluation/

mitigation measures.

The first step of the impact assessment process involves identifying the key issues associated

with the construction and operation phases of the project. Issues and concerns of the proposed

project are scoped based on the knowledge and experience w.r.t environmental setting and

project elements. Accordingly, the existing environmental system is described and the

components of the projects are determined.

The second step involves identification of the environmental modification that may be

significant, forecasting of the quality and spatial dimension of change in the environment

identified and estimation of the probability that the impact will occur. The third step involves

determination of project benefits.

The sugar unit will work 160-180 days, Co-generation unit and Distillery unit will work

300 days in a year.

Installation of Air pollution control equipments and ETP and CPU will be done before

the operational phase of the expansion project.

4





208

4.1 Land Environment

4.1.1 Impact on Land Use

An incremental load in the pollution is anticipated due to expansion activities of the project.

4.1.1.1 Impact on the natural drainage system and soil erosion

There will not be any impacts in the core or buffer area either on the drainage or on the water

regime of the area. However, it is proposed to construct check dams with gully plugs, retaining

walls against slope towards Kalla & Tupara halla situated at 1 & 9 Km respectively from the

proposed project site.

4.1.1.2 Impact on soil fertility

Spent-wash (480 KLD) if disposed to land, will inhibit seed germination, reduce soil fertility

and manganese availability and damage the agricultural crops, thereby economy of the farmers

will get affected.

4.1.2 Mitigation measures

Extensive plantation activities (around 10,000 saplings for 5 years) will be taken up in

project site and also in buffer area around the project site to compensate the pollution

load.

A total of 35000 cum of top soil will be stored in a designated place and it will be reused

for green belt and landscaping works within12 months.

The following section illustrate the protocol for top soil preservation and reuse.

4.1.2.1 Protocol for top soil preservation and reuse

Top soil patches are scattered with thickness varying from 5cm to 50 cm. This soil will

be removed in advance and staked separately at designated area with a height not

exceeding 2m.

Select soil stockpile location to avoid slopes, natural drainage ways and approach road

points.

Temporary seeding - protect topsoil stockpiles by temporarily seeding preferably grass

and legume species as soon as possible, within 30 days after the formation of the

stockpile.

Permanent vegetation - if stockpiles will not be used within 12 months they should be

stabilized with permanent vegetation to control erosion and weeds.

Before spreading topsoil, establish erosion and sedimentation control structures such as

diversions, dikes, waterways and sediment basins.

Maintain grades on the areas to be top soiled according to the approved plan.

Roughening - Immediately prior to spreading the topsoil, loosen the sub grade by disking

or scarifying to a depth of at least 100 mm to ensure bonding of the topsoil and subsoil.

Ensure that soil horizons are replaced in the same order that they were removed.

4.1.2.2 Details of soil erosion prevention plan





209

The proposed project layout indicates that, there is no chance for soil erosion after the

completion of project. Detailed green belt development plan and rain water harvesting plan has

been proposed. Details on top soil conservation are summarized herewith.

Drains will be constructed to collect rain water and divert the same to the green belt area

and then to the nearby Kalla & Tupara halla situated at 1Km & 9 Km respectively.

Check dams and ground water percolation pits will be constructed against the streams,

which drain to Kalla & Tupara halla situated at 1Km& 9 Km respectively.

Water collected in check dams will be reused for green belt and landscape maintenance.

Gully plugs will be constructed to arrest the velocity of the flow of water from the

elevated place to downstream area of nallas, in the buffer area of the project.

4.2 Air Environment

4.2.1 Impact on Air Environment

4.2.1.1 Impact during Construction phase

Particulate Matter (PM) would be the predominant pollutant generated from construction

activities. The gaseous emissions such as SO2, NOx, CO would be generated from the

construction equipments from movement of vehicles.

Impact of construction activities on air quality is a cause of concern mainly in the dry

months due to settling of dust particles. The main sources of emission during the

construction period are the movement of equipments at site and dust emitted during the

levelling, grading, earthworks, foundation works and other construction related activities.

The dust emitted during the above mentioned activities depend upon the type of soil

being excavated and the ambient humidity levels.

The impact is likely to be for short duration and confined locally to the construction site

itself. The composition of dust in this kind of operation is however mostly coarse

particles, inorganic and non-toxic in nature. These are not expected to travel long

distance before settling.

The impact will, however, be reversible, marginal, and temporary in nature and levels

decreases gradually as project progresses.

The impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to the construction

phase. The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to be

negligible outside the project boundaries.

Since the proposed project site is away from human settlement, impact on air during

construction phase will be minimum.

4.2.1.1.1 Mitigation measures suggested during construction phase of the project

Any vehicle not meeting the vehicular pollution standards will not be allowed within the

construction activity and emission certificate will be made mandatory & enforced to

contractor to maintain.

Water will be sprayed through water sprinklers/water tankers during dust generating

activities like site clearing, levelling, excavation, material handling etc to suppress the

dust.

Vehicles delivering loose and fine materials like sand and fine aggregates will be

covered by tarpaulin sheets to reduce spills on roads and to reduce fugitive emissions.





210

The height from which excavated materials are dropped shall be controlled to a

minimum practical height to limit fugitive dust generation from unloading.

Monthly Ambient Air Quality Monitoring will be carried out to ensure for compliance to

NAAQ, 2009 standards.

4.2.1.2 Impacts during Operational phase

The main sources of Air Pollution in the proposed project are the operation of Boilers.

Fly ash deposition on the crops situated in the neighbouring agricultural land affects

yield/ productivity.

CO2 release (44 TPD) from the fermentation process will affect the surrounding ambient

air environment causing regional Green House gas effect in the long term. Not only the

fermentation process and all the activities will contribute towards increase in greenhouse

gases.

Fugitive emission from handling of bagasse storage area will deposit on the neighbouring

agricultural lands and affect the crop productivity.

The capacity of the Boiler installed is as per the following table. However emission from the

boiler will be taken care by providing adequate stack height as per the CPCB guidelines. The

details regarding the boiler are given below:

Table 4.1 Boiler Details

Capacity Pressure Temperature Qty Type Chimney Air Pollution

control device

Existing

140 TPH 126

Kg/cm2

545°C 1Nos

Multi fuel

Travelling

Grate boiler

Ø 3.5 m

effective dia.

85 m height

Electro Static

Precipitator

Proposed

22 TPH 40

kg/cm2

440°C 1Nos

40 % bagasse60

% concentrated

spent wash

fired boiler

Ø 2.8 m

effective dia.

70 m height

Electro Static

Precipitator

Even though DG sets (325 KVA - existing and 2 X 1250 KVA - proposed) will be used at site,

for the prediction of air pollution from the project, it is not included as the same will be only

used during power failure during initial stages and rest of the time, power will be utilized from

cogeneration unit.

Table 4.2 Chimney height calculation

140 TPH Boiler 22 TPH spent wash

boiler

A B

Total bagasse required, T/hr 50.3 3.1

Total spent wash required, T/hr - 6.1

Ash generated, T/hr 0.45 0.21

Stack height based on ash content, m

(H=74(Q) 0.27

) 59.75 48.65





211

SO2 in kg/hr 16.10 74.59

Stack height based on sulphur content,

m

(H= 14(Q)0.3

)

32.23 51.04

Proposed stack height, m 85 (already

provided) 70

A: 100 % bagasse

B: 60 % concentrated spent wash + 40 % bagasse

Characteristics of fuels used in the boiler

Table 4.3 Typical characteristics of bagasse

Sl No Parameter Composition, % by weight

1 H2 2.8-3.25

2 C 23.4-23.5

3 S 0-0.016

4 N2 0-0.1

5 O2 20-21.75

5 Moisture 50-52

6 Ash 0.9

7 GCV 2270 kcal/kg

Table 4.4 Typical characteristics of spent wash concentrate

Sl No Parameter Composition, % by weight

1 H2 2.59

2 C 19.92

3 S 0.6

4 N2 1.35

5 Moisture 47

5 Ash 3

6 GCV 1700 kcal/kg

4.2.2 Modelling Procedure

4.2.2.1 Methodology:

Prediction of ground level concentrations (GLC’s) due to proposed Sugar complex has been

made by AERMODcloud model. AERMOD is an US-EPA approved model to predict the air

quality. The model uses rural dispersion and regulatory defaults options as per guidelines on air

quality models. The model assumes receptors on flat terrain. Meteorological inputs required are

hourly wind speed and direction, ambient temperature, stability class and mixing height and

wind exponents.

4.2.2.2 Plan and Frame Work of Computations

a) Selection of Locations:

The locations have been selected around the proposed sugar complex covering an area of 10 km

radius from the centre of proposed project. The entire area has been put on grid network and grid

spacing has been taken as 500 m.





212

b) Plan of Computation:

It was planned to compute the following:

The 24 hourly averaged incremental concentration with hourly data.

The identification of grid point having peak concentration for the incremental values.

Preparation of isopleths of various pollutants.

Emission rate of each pollutant’s is based on their composition in the fuel used.

Model is run for the operation of all the boilers (existing and expansion) to know the

maximum impact due to the project with and without the air pollution control measures.

Table 4.5 Model Input

140 TPH (Existing) 22 TPH (proposed)

Stack height 85 m 70 m

Velocity, m/s 10 10

Stack dia 3.5 2.8

Emission rate without APC , g/sec

PM 125.8 58.5

SO2 4.47 20.62

NO2 22.93 48.4





213

Fig 4.1 Isopleths drawn for PM without mitigation measures

Maximum Incremental Particulate matter load due to the project: 38.2 µg/m3 at a distance of 500 m towards ENE direction





214

Fig 4.2 Isopleths drawn for SO2 without mitigation measures

Maximum Incremental SO2 load due to the proposed project is: 2.5µg/m3 at a distance of 500 m towards ENE direction





215

Fig 4.3 Isopleths drawn for NO2 without mitigation measures

Maximum Incremental NO2 load due to the proposed project is 19.1 µg/m3 at a distance of 500m towards ENE direction





216

Following table depicts predicted concentration of above parameters without APC in the study area villages

Table 4.6 Values of PM without mitigation measures

Sl

No

Villages

Predicted Values

PM NO2 SO2

01 Singarkoppa 3.786 1.649 0.218

02 Asundi 3.955 1.706 0.225

03 Karikatti 3.955 1.706 0.225

04 Sutagatti 3.955 1.706 0.225

05 Hittangi 3.786 1.649 0.218

06 Saundatti 5.452 2.312 0.304

07 Yadravi 7.642 3.813 0.490

08 Betsur 3.736 1.64 0.218

09 Chikka Ulligeri 3.481 1.543 0.199

10 Hire Ulligeri 3.481 1.543 0.199

11 Yadihalli 3.013 1.421 0.185

12 Sangreshkoppa 3.013 1.421 0.185

13 Kenchamanahal 3.013 1.421 0.185

14 Kabbenur 3.013 1.421 0.185





217

Table 4.7 Air quality Index for predicted air quality after expansion- without Mitigation Measures

Location

PM10,

g/m3

98

Percentile

PM10,

g/m3

Modeling

values

Total

AQI Remarks

SO2,

g/m3

98

Percentile

SO2,

g/m3

Modeling

values

Total AQI Remarks

NO2,

g/m3

98

Percentile

NO2,

g/m3

Modeling

values

Total AQI Remarks

A1 80.00 10.868 90.868 90.868 Satisfactory 9.51 0.772 10.282 13.525 Good 16.42 5.656 22.076 27.595 Good








It is clear from the above table, Emission of particulate matter from 140 TPH and proposed 22 TPH boilers is estimated to be 38.2 μg/Nm3.

Further, it is inferred from the above table that, the total baseline concentration of particulate matter at the site is 90.868 g/m3which indicates

closer to the NAAQ standards and prolonged exposure of such concentration breathing discomfort to the population of nearby areas. Particulate

emission results in breathing discomfort to the people near the source and villagers of the NE and W side of the project site. Apart from humans,

particulate emission causes damage to the vegetation of the area. Hence, Electrostatic precipitator (ESP) is suggested to install as a mitigation

measure. The air quality w.r.t SO2, NO2, is good.





218

4.2.2.3 Air Pollution Control Equipment

4.2.2.3.1 Technical Specification of Electrostatic Precipitator

Table 4.8 Technical Specification of Electrostatic Precipitator

Design volume 419400 cum/hr

Design temperature 1300 C

Inlet dust concentration 6 gm/nm3

Efficiency 99.0 %

No of gas passages 18

Velocity through ESP 0.48 m/s

Treatment time 21.3 sec

No of fields 3

Outlet dust concentration > 150 mg/m3





219

Fig 4.4 Isopleths drawn for PM with mitigation measures

Installation of Electrostatic precipitator to boiler chimney will decrease the Maximum concentration of PM from the project to 2.491 μg/Nm3 (at a

distance of 500 m towards ENE direction) and Installation of dust catchers, Closed conveyor belts for bagasse will also reduce the particulate

matter emission from the bagasse handling area.





220

Fig 4.5 Isopleths drawn for SO2 with mitigation measures

Maximum concentration of SO2 from the project will be 0.5 µg/Nm3 at a distance of 500 m towards ENE direction





221

Fig 4.6 Isopleths drawn for NO2 with mitigation measures

Maximum concentration of NO2 from the project will be 1.2 µg/Nm3at a distance of 500m towards ENE direction





222

Table 4.9 Values for PM with mitigation measures

SI No

Villages

Predicted Values

PM NO2 SO2

01 Shingarakoppa 0.218 0.093 0.034

02 Asundi 0.225 0.096 0.035

03 Hittangi 0.218 0.093 0.034

04 Sutagatti 0.225 0.096 0.035

05 Karikatti 0.225 0.096 0.035

06 Saundatti 0.304 0.13 0.047

07 Yadravi 0.490 0.239 0.092

08 Betsur 0.218 0.097 0.036

09 Hire Uliigeri 0.199 0.087 0.032

10 Chikka Ulligeri 0.199 0.087 0.032

11 Yadihalli 0.185 0.083 0.031

12 Sangreshakoppa 0.185 0.083 0.031

13 Kenchamanahal 0.185 0.083 0.031

14 Kabbenur 0.185 0.083 0.031





223

Table 4.10 Air quality Index for the predicted air quality after expansion - with Mitigation Measures

Location

PM,

g/m3

PM,

g/m3

predicted

values

Total PM after

expansion,g/m3 AQI Remarks

SO2,

g/m3

SO2,

g/m3

predicted

values

Total SO2 after


NO2,

g/m3

NO2,

g/m3

predicted

values

Total NO2 after










From the above table it is clear that air quality in the study area is found to be satisfactory and good level will be continued during the operational

phase of the project with Air Pollution Control device. Following are the list of villages in the impact zone:

Table 4.11 List of villages in the impact zone

Name of the Village Distance from project site in Km Total Population

Saundatti 6.25 (NE) 41215

Yadravi 7.15 (NE) 3258





224

4.2.2.4 Mitigation measures

Following measures will be taken to reduce the impact on the air quality:

Stacks/chimneys will be/are provided to Boiler and D.G.Sets as per KSPCB Norms.

ESPs will be provided to the boilers of 140 TPH and 22 TPH with stack height of 85m

and 70 m respectively.

Restriction of use of DG sets and well paved roads will reduce the impact

The released CO2 will be converted to liquid CO2 and dry ice. Proper optimization of

use of fuels and transportation system along with plantation in buffer area will reduce

the emission of green house gases.

Bagasse will be stored in the covered yard. Closed conveyor belts for bagasse will also

reduce the particulate matter emission from the bagasse handling area.

33% Greenbelt development will create aesthetic environment and also acts as a

pollution sink for dust emissions.

Continuous online monitoring of stack will be installed to know the emission level. The

same will be connected to KSPCB/CPCB server.

4.2.3 Fugitive Emissions (Particulate matter)

The presence of fugitive emissions would be visible if not controlled and would cause

significant adverse impact in working zone. A number of mitigation measures shall be

implemented to control fugitive emissions and reviewed continuously such as:

Designing the plant layout in such a way so as to virtually eliminate need of using

heavy equipment for material handling in the main plant.

Internal roads paved and levelled without undulations as well as sharp curves, maintain

slow speed of vehicular movements.

No open storage of raw materials/ chemicals.

Tree plantation on periphery of the project site.

Table 4.12 Fugitive Emissions control strategy

Sl.

No.

Item Control Strategy

1) Transportation Water sprinklers will be provided to reduce dust.

2) Cane handling Water spraying for dedusting. Plantation around source

3) Bagasse storage Design stockpiles to reduce exposure to prevailing winds

Minimising the distance that bagasse falls during movement

Fully enclosing bagasse handling conveyors, particularly transfer

points

Installing belt cleaning systems so that bagasse is not carried

back on the underside of conveyor belts

Implementing a bagasse dust management plan that prescribes

mitigation measures for unfavourable weather conditions

Installing a water spray system to reduce dust emissions around,

and from the site.

4) Greenery Greenbelt development (33 % of total plot area)





225

Electrostatic Precipitator Closed conveyor belts and 85 mt Chimney

Fig 4.7 Photos of existing air pollution management

4.2.4 Fly ash Management

Flyash from bagasse boilers is primarily unburnt bagasse particles. Bagasse fly ash can be

utilised for the production of bricks. After conditioning, bottom ash and flyash will be

conveyed in a common conveyor and collected in Ash silo. Following shows the comparison

between normal clay bricks and bagasse flyash bricks.

Table 4.13 Comparison between normal clay bricks and bagasse flyash bricks

Sl. No. Description Clay Bricks Bagasse Ash Fly ash

Bricks

1. Size, mm 215 X 100 X 70 230 X 100 X 75

2. Volume, cm3 1505 1725

3. Bricks in 1 Cum Masonry 664 500

4. Density, Kg/m3 1600 1668

5. Cost in Rupees 4000/1000 2420/1000

6. Compressive Strength,

Kg/cm2

30-50 30-50

7. Water Absorption, % 20-25 8-12

The incineration boiler ash will also be sent to nearby brick manufacturers.





226

4.2.5 Impact due to Odour

4.2.5.1 Sugar section

Typical compounds generating odour in sugar industry are bacterial decomposition of

organic matter (stale cane smell) & bacterial decomposition of sulphur compounds

(H2S).

Causes of odour are stale cane, bad mill sanitation, bacterial growth in the

interconnecting pipes & unattended drains etc.

Improper management of press mud (300 TPD), boiler ash (20.25 TPD), ETP sludge(50

TPD) will lead to odour pollution affecting the working population by inducing head

ache, nausea, annoyance, etc., Also affects the ground water and soil if used as manure

unscientifically leading to reduced crop yield, health problems to neighbouring

villagers.

4.2.5.2 Mitigation Measures

Use of mill sanitation bio-cides to minimize the growth of aerobic / anaerobic micro–

organisms.

Steaming of major pipe lines.

Proper cleaning of drains.

Regular use of bleaching powder in the drains to avoid growth of sulphur decomposing

micro-organisms to control H2S generation.

Good quality manure will be manufactured by mixing of proper proportions of Press

mud, ETP sludge and boiler ash (5 %)

4.2.5.3 Distillery section

Typical odour compounds in distillery are alcohol, iso amyl & iso butyl alcohol (fusel

oils), acetic acid.

Causes of odour are bad management of fermentation house, long retention of

fermented wash, unattended drains.

4.2.5.4 Mitigation Measures

Better housekeeping by regular steaming of all fermentation equipments.

Regular steaming of all fermentation equipment.

Use of efficient bio-cides to control bacterial contamination.

Control of temperature during fermentation to avoid in-activation / killing of yeast.

Avoiding staling of fermented wash.

Regular use of bleaching powder in the drains to avoid generation of putrefying micro-

organisms.

4.2.6 Impact on Traffic

The raw material and finished products of the proposed plant will be transported by road.

Since the activity is Industries, the vehicles will move from & to the Project between

24hr.





227

Total traffic generated from this project =1329 PCU’s/day.

However as per IRC capacity table, the entire traffic generated per day is taken for

impact calculation.

100% of the generated traffic will first exit on to SH-30.

4.2.6.1 Traffic flow - emission rate:

By considering the CPCB vehicular emission standards for Bharat Stage III, emission from the

vehicular exhaust is calculated.

By traffic study report, a typical day traffic flow pattern is as detailed in the Table 3.18; due to

the movement of trucks/ vehicles (1329 PCU’s) carrying sugar cane will increase the

concentration of CO and particulate matter in the roads will cause dust allergy, eye and nose

irritation, breathing difficulties, head ache to humans and wilting of plants in the sides of the

roads and also inhibit growth of the plants. Based on the same, emission of CO from different

types of the vehicles are presented below:

Table 4.14 Emission from vehicles from the project, g/km

Vehicles CO

Cars 2.0

Heavy vehicles 2.1

2/3 wheelers 2.0

Using CALINEpro model developed by M/s Envitrans model has been run for predecting the

concentration of CO from the movement of vehicles during the season.

Fig 4.8 Predicted Concentration of Carbon Monoxide due to movement of vehicles

From the above it is clear that, due to movement of vehicles to and from the project will

increase the concentration of CO in the ambient air. The maximum predicted concentration of





228

Carbon monoxide will be 0.86 mg/Nm3 (or 860 µg/Nm

3) due to movement of trucks, which is

very below the NAAQ, 2009 standard for CO.

4.2.6.2 Internal Transportation

Cane is transported to mill house by cane conveyors. All the materials in the sugar section

transported using inter carriers, Sugar carriers. Impact on traffic is negligible as the existing

traffic around the villages is very minimum.

Wide Approach and internal roads

Fig 4.9 Photos showing parking area and internal roads


Road sign &signage’s (No overtaking, drive safely, Major road ahead for the vehicles

coming out from the project before joining to highway), direction boards, Speed limit

boards (30 kmph) shall be installed.

High mast light near the main entry & exit is required.

For an internal approach road, sign boards like speed limit (15 kmph), No horn, drive

slowly boards etc, must be installed.

Bell mouth entry & exit to SH-30 must be provided for safe turning, merging of

vehicles to the main road.

Providing large parking yard and que system followed within the industry. Training/

guidance imparted to truck drivers on the following

Avoid idling — idling exhaust contains more pollutants than running exhaust

Keeping the vehicle well-tuned and tires inflated properly to reduce exhaust

emissions

Avoiding mixing of fuels

Loading & unloading points informatory boards needs to be installed.

Hand in hand, pedestrian sidewalks also to be developed as a good number of people

will use the T-junction and walk to the project. Merging of vehicles will be performed

only to left traffic from the exit point of the junction to ensure safety.

The internal entry point gate is manned with efficient security who can guide the entry

and exit of vehicles.

All precautionary measures are ensured for the safety of construction labourers while

working at the site during construction.





229

Road side plantation is already present. Industry will take measures for the additional

plantation in the buffer area.

4.3 Noise Environment

4.3.1 Impact during Construction Phase

Various sources of noise pollution will be from the operation of machineries like compactors,

concrete plant, cranes etc. Other sources of noise pollution during construction period includes

movement of vehicles for unloading of construction materials, fabrication, handling of

equipment and materials, operation of batching plants. Overall, the impact of noise generated

on the Environment is likely to be insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and mainly

confined to the day time. Labourers exposed to continuous noise levels due to various

construction activities will be affected viz. mental stress, irritation, discomfort.

4.3.2 Impact during Operational Phase

Noise generating machinery operations at Sugar unit are sugarcane cutting, crushing, sugar

separation, steam production, noise making equipments such as cutters, crushers, mixers,

pumps, boilers etc.

During operation phase, various industrial activities viz., movement of vehicles, cane carriers,

turbine operations will result in increase of Ambient Noise levels to 90 dB (A) (Baseline value:

52.15 dB (A)-during day) thereby affecting the Fauna.

All connecting roads to sugar mill complex will be metalled one. Cane loading will be

restricted to the capacity. Vehicle maintenance, proper lubrication to machinery will be

arranged. Tree plantation on the campus and on the connecting roads is initiated and

will be done each year.

4.3.2.1 Noise from cogeneration unit

Steam turbines : 85-90 dB (A )

Diesel Generators : 75-80 dB (A)

Fans, blowers and compressors : 80-85 dB (A)

The sound intensity appears to be at moderate level in co-gen power. In general at the locations

of turbines, compressors, fans etc., the sound intensity generally exceeds the limit. Control

measures will be adopted to reduce noise level within the permissible limits at the source itself.

These machineries are installed on vibration proof foundation and base. Steam turbine and

diesel generators are located in isolated and acoustic building. The workers engaged in such

locations are provided with earmuffs to have additional safety against noise nuisance. These

units will be manufactured to meet the noise levels as per MOEF/ CPCB guidelines.

Additional DG sets (2 X 1250 KVA) will be provided with acoustics measures. Also ambient

noise levels will be ensured within the ambient standards by inbuilt design of mechanical

equipment and building apart from vegetation (tree plantations) along the periphery and at

various locations within the industry premises. Source of noise will be various components of

industrial operations like crushing, operation of the boiler, power plant, D G Sets and vehicular

movement.





230

4.3.2.2 dhwaniPRO Noise model

dhwaniPRO noise model is developed to undertake construction, industrial and traffic noise

propagation. The model is used to predict the impact of noise on receptors from the noise

generation source. It is also used to predict impact due to group noise sources in the industrial

complex (multiple sound sources) and traffic. Various noise receptors were considered within

10 Km radius of study area.

Table 4.15 Results of Noise prediction model

Sl.

No.

Name of the

location

Model noise

level in

dB(A)

Distance

in km

Baseline noise

levels in dB(A)

CPCB

standards in

dB(A) for day

time 1 Project site 59.07 -- 52.15 75

2 Karikatti village 31.34 3.45 50.11

55

3 Asundi village 29.61 4.24 48.66

4 Singarkoppa village 26.27 5.2 50.92

5 Saundatti village 22.34 6.25 47.26

6 Hire Ulligeri village 24.88 6.14 46.28

7 Sangreshkop village 23.88 7.2 49.29

8 Betsur village 21.75 8.18 51.01

Based on the model results, the noise levels during operation period noise will increase slightly.

However, by implementation of mitigation measures at site, the noise levels will be reduced.

The predicted noise level at project site is 59.07 dB (A) which is very much within the

standards.

Fig 4.10 Isopleths drawn using dhwaniPRO software





231

4.3.3 Mitigation Measures

Provision of insulating caps at the exit of noise source on the machinery;

Construction equipment generating minimum noise and vibration will be chosen.

The use of damping materials such as thin rubber / lead sheet for wrapping the work

places line compressors, generators sets.

Shock absorbing techniques will be adopted to reduce impact;

PPE's like Ear plugs/ ear muffs provided to the workers exposed to high noise prone

activity and enforced to be used by the workers;

Monthly Ambient noise level monitoring will conducted during construction phase and

operation phase to conform to the stipulated standards both during day and night time as

per KSPCB/ CPCB.

Construction activities will be restricted only during day time.

D.G.Sets with acoustic enclosures provided.

Due to the activities at the site and also in the vicinity of the sugar production, it is

strongly advised to use DG sets wherever there is no power.

DG sets will be placed on the rubber cushion padding, enclosed and maintained well

and in good condition. It is encased and barricaded this reduces the noise level in and

around the source by 4 dB (A).

It is strongly recommended and advised to plant number of layers of tall grown trees

with good canopy to absorb the noise. This also helps to reduce the noise levels

considerably.

As a large number of trucks will enter for loading and unloading may result in possible

queue formation particularly during peak season.

Drivers will be instructed with sign boards and not to use shrill horns for any purpose.

In all the places where queue formation occurs (during peak seasons), the entire Parking

or queue area, wherever available must be planted with series of trees.

To prevent noise, which is likely to develop between pavement and vehicle tyres during

nights while in movement, the flexible pavement must be constructed using Crumb

Rubber (CRMB) and the discretion of the same is left to the government authorities.

However the roads with the plant can consider this necessary requirement.

Silent Zone boards will be installed at all places where human activities are there along

with proper training to them to handle various equipments, tools and other related

items.

Personal protective equipments like ear plugs etc must be distributed to all and

compulsorily employees will be made to use the same.

Acoustic hoods, silencers will be used at these locations and noise generating sources

will be kept under enclosures.

Security will be deployed at the entry/ exit gates to regulate the movement of vehicles.

Further, speed limit will be ensured maintaining 15-20 kmph.

Though the measured noise levels and computed Leq in dB (A), are well within

prescribed standards from CPCB, separately for day and night, still all the above said

measures will be practiced strictly.





232

Turbine room will be acoustically designed. Cane carrier movement will be regulated

by following queue system by security.

The standards prescribed under Environment (Protection), act 1986 rules 1989 viz.,

75dB(A) day time and 70 dB (A) during night time will be followed.

Supervisory staff must check and monitor to ensure the workers to follow all the above

said measures while at work.

4.3.4 Mitigation measures for impact on Vibration

Various equipments are identified which will create vibration along with Noise.

While installing new machinery for the plant, if required, care will be taken to use

machine foundation to arrest the vibrations and possibly with spring technology.

Rubber padding’s and proper support to the ground with thick blankets (min. 10 mm

thick) of rubber mats are preferred before bolting to absorb vibration. This will prevent

noise as well as vibration to a great extent.

Various machines and machine parts will be kept under well greased condition

especially during its operation & also when not in operation.

Maintenance guide lines of the machinery will be adhered strictly.

4.4 Water Environment


4.4.1.1 Surface water

Impact on the surface water is not likely anticipated since there are no nearby (<500m

radius)/adjacent surface water sources. No impact on Renuka Sagar Reservoir

anticipated as the same is located at 5 Km from the site in the northern direction.

Unscientific disposal of sewage from the labour camps, impacts on the neighbouring

agricultural fields due to seepage/draining affecting the crops yield.

Stagnated water in construction sites will result in creation of mosquitoes breeding sites

and impact on health of the workforce.

4.4.1.2 Ground water

Improper treatment of sewage from labour camps leads to infiltration into the

subsurface soil and finally affects the ground water quality of the region. This will

create unaesthetic conditions in the site, attracts mosquitoes/flies, thereby chances of

deteriorating the health of the workers in unhygienic conditions will arise.

Extraction of ground water will result in depletion of ground water levels.


4.4.2.1 Surface water Environment

The highly colored nature of the spent wash (480 KLD) and sugar unit effluent (max

739 KLD) if disposed to water body leads to the reduction of sunlight penetration

which, in turn, reduces DO level and becomes detrimental to aquatic life. Since there





233

are no immediate surface water sources around the site, impact on the surface water

environment is insignificant.

The proposal doesn’t involve discharge of treated effluent to any surface water

bodies/drains & as such impact on Renuka Sagar Reservoir and also on nearby lake at

0.75 Km is not anticipated.

If treated effluent from the ETP (1000 KLD) is not treated to KSPCB discharge

standards, in case if the same is discharged onto the land for irrigation/greenbelt

development/gardening, impact on the neighbouring agricultural fields is anticipated

through seepage/infiltration by affecting the crop yield including contaminating sub soil

surface.

Impact on the competitive users on the downstream of the Malaprabha River doesn’t

arise since the irrigation department (KNNL), after due diligence on downstream water

requirements, has granted water allocation to the industry, which will be complied

timely.

Improper management of storm water from the site premises will likely flood the

neighbouring agricultural fields.

4.4.2.2 Ground water

Impacts such as decrease in the water levels/ground water potential will not arise since

the project proposal doesn’t involve any groundwater tapping/extraction.

If the effluent is not treated to the discharge norms of KSPCB and further if discharged

on to the ground for greenery development/on-land for irrigation or due to over

application, it will create filthy/unaesthetic/odour nuisance conditions and indirectly

affects sub surface soil and ground water of the region due to seepage/infiltration.

If spent wash/molasses is not handled & stored scientifically, this will affect the ground

water of the region on long term, including subsurface soil.

Improper handling & storage of chemicals & hazardous waste (used oil from DG sets)

will have likely impact on the sub-surface soil & ground water environment of the

region.

Soil/Land & Ground water pollution due to disposal of untreated/ semi treated effluent

due to seepage/ infiltration.

Impact on groundwater/sub-soil due to disposal of spent wash (480 KLD).


4.4.3.1 During construction phase

During construction stage, the construction workers colony will be provided with drinking

water and sanitation arrangements by providing 10 No's toilets, 5 Bathrooms and sewage

treatment by septic tank (18 KL capacity with 3m X 2 m X 3m) & 1 No's soak pits (1.5m dia X

3 m depth).

Surface water Environment

As part of expansion, Septic Tank & Soak Pits will be designed & implemented as per

IS 2470 Part-I & Part-II at the site for disposal of sewage generated from labour camps

area to ensure scientific disposal of sewage.





234

Temporary drainage arrangements will be made to avoid stagnation of water/pool areas.

Ground Water environment

Septic Tank & Soak Pits will be implemented at the construction labour camps for

treating sewage. This will avoid anticipated impacts on the ground water quality of the

region.

As such the proposal doesn’t involve any ground water extraction; no impact on the

ground water level of the region is anticipated from the project. Further rainwater

recharging measures (surface run-off) will improve the groundwater regime of the area

positively.

4.4.3.2 During operational phase

Surface water

Mitigation Measures

Effluent from the sugar complex will be treated in ETP of 1000 KLD (upgraded from

500KLD) capacity based on UASB technology and planned for Up-gradation and the

treated effluent only after conforming to KSPCB discharge standards will be re-used for

on land for irrigation/gardening/greenbelt development. This will also be ensured

through implementation of Online effluent monitoring as mandated under CPCB

directions for parameters viz.,pH, BOD, TSS, COD. This will ensure to take remedial

action immediately for effective treatment. Further, this will also help in minimizing the

residual impacts on the water environment of the region.

Additionally, monthly checks of quality of the treated effluent (from ETP outlet) will be

ensured from MoEF&CC and NABL recognized Labs for understanding the

trends/variations in the discharge quality parameters (stipulated by KSPCB) before

subjected to discharge for various reuse purposes.

Rainwater Harvesting & Recharging measures will be undertaken within the premises

of the industry. Storm water drain (0.8m x 0.6m) arrangements will be done all along

the periphery of the site boundary including on either side of internal roads, to carry

surface run-off that will lead to Rainwater Harvesting cum Recharge Pond 500 KL

capacity. Roof top water harvesting will be undertaken from the admin

buildings/storage buildings/covered shed areas and channelizing the same to Rainwater

Harvesting cum Recharge Pond. These measures will help in reducing internal &

external flooding of the area.

Good Housekeeping practices will also helps in reducing the likely leakages from the

process areas and channelizing the same to ETP area for onward treatment.

Ground Water

Effluent from the sugar complex will be treated in ETP of 1000 KLD capacity and the

treated effluent only after conforming to KSPCB discharge standards will be re-used for

on land for irrigation/gardening/greenbelt development. This will also be ensured

through implementation of Online effluent monitoring as mandated under CPCB

directions for parameters viz., pH, BOD, TSS, COD. This will ensure to take remedial





235

action immediately for effective treatment. Further, this will also help in minimizing the

residual impacts on the water environment of the region.

Spent wash will be treated through liquid concentration by evaporation and incineration

to ensure ZLD (Zero Liquid Discharge) thereby likely impacts will avoid.

Sewage from the domestic activities will be treated in Septic Tank & Soak Pits.

Spent wash will be stored in lagoon that will be lined with HDPE sheets of 250 micron

thick with stone soling to prevent seepage/percolation.

Spent wash treatment proposed using evaporation, concentration & incineration (Boiler

22 TPH) mechanism to ensure Zero Liquid discharge.

Molasses will be stored in MS Tanks of each 6000 MT capacity. Dyke walls will be

provided around the Molasses storage tanks as a preventive measure to avoid onward

impacts.

All storage areas will be on impervious flooring with covered arrangements including

Hazardous Waste Storage area.

Monthly checks of quality of the treated effluent (from ETP outlet) will be undertaken

from MoEF & CC and NABL recognized Labs for understanding the trends/variations

in the discharge quality parameters (stipulated by KSPCB) & accordingly to take

remedial action to avoid any residual impacts on the ground water environment of the

region.

Rainwater recharging measures will be undertaken in the premises which will positively

benefit the region in improving the groundwater table. This will be ensured through

installation of piezometers (one on 50 m upstream of proposed spent wash holding

lagoon area & another at 100 m downstream).

4.4.4 Water Conservation Practices

Recycling of spentlees and condensate and use of condensate in the sugar plant will result in

fresh water conservation. Following methods can be used to minimise water usage

Table 4.16 Water Conservation Proposal Techniques Considered in the Complex

Sl No Stations Conservation Proposals /Techniques

1 Milling Plant

Hot Condensate generated from juice evaporation is

used for milling plant as imbibition water and for

sanitation. The same will be followed in the expansion

project also. No fresh water will be used for milling

plant.

2 Boiler feed water

Steam given to process from co-generation power

plant being condensed at first evaporator and the

condensate generated is recycled back to boiler as feed

water. Other than this there is no steam will be

provided to the process. The losses due to gland

leakage, vents, samplings, blow down and steam used

for sooth blowings are being supplemented from DM

Plant.





236

Sl No Stations Conservation Proposals /Techniques

3

Clarification House

Compressors

Sulphur Burner

Condensate generated from juice evaporation is

brought down to atmospheric temperature using mini

cooling towers, cold water generated is being used as

cooling water for these machineries. This is

recirculated back with no additional requirement of

fresh water.

4 Boiling and Centrifuge

section

Condensate generated from juice evaporation is

brought down to atmospheric temperature using mini

cooling towers, cold water generated is being used as

cooling water for these machineries. This is

recirculated back with no additional requirement of

fresh water.

5 Preparation of seed and

mixture

Hot water is being used and continued instead of fresh

water

6 Cooling waters

Mill drive, mill bearing, power house turbines,

fiberiser, compressor, cooling waters and vertical

crystallizers

4.4.5 Effluent Treatment Plant

Effluent treatment plant of 1000 KLD will be constructed to treat the sugar and cogeneration

effluent. The plant is designed to treat raw wastewater generated from Sugar processing having

following characteristics.

Flow 1000 m3/day

Operating Period 22-24 hrs /day

Table 4.17 Characteristics of Raw and Treated Effluent

A ] RAW EFFLUENT PARAMETER

pH 4.0-5.0

Temperature Ambient

COD 5000-6000 mg/lit

BOD ( 3 days @ 27 0 C ) 2000-3000 mg/lit

Oil & Grease 50-100 mg/lit

Suspended Solids 800-1000 mg/lit

B ] TREATED WATER PARAMETER

pH 6.5 to 7.5

Temperature Ambient

COD < 250 mg/lit

BOD ( 3 days @ 27 0 C ) < 30 mg/lit

Oil & Grease < 10 mg/lit

Suspended Solids < 50 mg/lit

4.4.5.1 Assumptions

The plant is designed to operate at +/- 10 % variation in raw wastewater parameter.





237

No other parameters other than mentioned above is present in the raw waste water

which is beyond Pollution Control Norms and hazardous to micro organisms.

Treated water quality will be achieved if the inlet raw water quality is as per the raw

water quality mentioned as well as no other pollutant than the mentioned, is present or

exceeds the limits or which is hazardous in nature, which otherwise may affect the

biological treatment process.

The temperature required at ETP collection tank from the effluent should not be more

than 35 oC

4.4.5.2 Treatment Scheme

To have eco-friendly & natural treatment, this plant is designed based on the biological

treatment concept. This means microbes removes or degrade the organic matter present in the

effluent & at the end clean water is available for the non potable usage or to dispose safely in

the drainage or river bodies as per the norms.

4.4.5.3 Pre – Treatment

1. Screening: This is the first units of the plant in which large or floating materials in the

effluent gets arrested and blockage or choking of the downstream equipments can be avoided.

This arrested material will be removed manually and then will be disposed off suitably

2. Oil & Grease trap: Sugar effluent contains oil & grease. This oil & grease if not removed

then creates the problem of scum accumulation and affect the functioning of microbes in

aeration tank.

To avoid this, oil & Grease chamber is provided after the bar screen, where oil & grease is

arrested prior to entry in the plant. Accumulated oil will be removed and disposed of properly.

4. Equalization: To absorb variation in quantity and quality of effluent and to provide

uniform flow at the downstream treatment process, a collection or equalization tank is

provided. This will avoid shock loading and process upsets of the treatment plant.

5. Neutralization: Neutralization system is provided to neutralize the effluent using lime

slurry (10 %)

6. Settling: the neutralized effluent will be passed through tube settler to remove the suspended

solids.

4.4.5.4 Secondary Treatment

1. UP-Flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor (UASBR)

Wastewater from intermediate tank would be pumped into each UASB reactor through a

specially designed distribution pipes. The multiple distributions ensures uniform distribution of

flow throughout the sludge blanket making maximum rises to the top of Anaerobic reactor

along with bio-gas generated and also some sludge particles. A unique three-phase gas – solid

– liquid separator would be provided at the top to separate out the gas, liquid and the sludge

particles.

The wastewater flows upward through a sludge blanket composed of biologically formed

granules or particles. Treatment occurs as the wastewater comes in contact with the granules.

The gases produced under anaerobic conditions (principally methane and carbon dioxide) cause

internal circulation, which helps in the formation and maintenance of the biological granules.





238

Some of the gas produced within the sludge blanket becomes attached to the biological

granules. The free gas and the particles with the attached gas rise to the top of the reactor. The

particles that rise to the surface, strike the bottom of the degassing baffles, which causes the

attached gas bubbles to release. The degassed granules typically drop back to the surface of the

sludge blanket. The free gas and the gas released from the granules are captured in the gas

collection domes located in the top of the reactor. Liquid containing some residual solids and

biological granules passes into settling chamber, where the residual solids are separated from

the liquid. The separated solids fall back through the baffle system to the top of the sludge

blanket.

Gas will be collected in the domes provided at the top. The liquid overflows through the

gutters and suspended solids then separated are allowed to settle down in the sludge blanket

thereby retaining valuable bacterial population.

The gas will be carried through a gas line equipped with safety devices to the flare stack and

would be burnt subsequently.

2. Anaerobic Treatment

The anaerobic waste treatment process is an effective method for the treatment of many organic

wastes. The treatment has a number of advantages over aerobic treatment process, namely,

The energy input of the system is low as no energy is required for oxygenation,

Lower production of excess sludge( biological synthesis) per unit mass of substrate

utilized,

Lower nutrient requirement due to lower biological synthesis, and

Degradation leads to production of biogas which is a valuable source of energy.

3. Fundamental Microbiology

The anaerobic treatment of organic wastes resulting in the production of carbon dioxide and

methane, involves two distinct stages. In the first stage, complex waste components, including

fats, proteins, and polysaccharides are first hydrolyzed by a heterogeneous group of facultative

and anaerobic bacteria. These bacteria then subject the products of hydrolysis to fermentations,

oxidations, and other metabolic processes leading to the formation of simple organic

compounds, mainly short-chain (volatile) acids and alcohols. The first stage is commonly

referred to as “acid fermentation”. However in the second stage the end products of the first

stage are converted to gases (mainly methane and carbon dioxide) by several different species

of strictly anaerobic bacteria. This stage is generally referred to as “methane fermentation”.





239

Fig 4.11 Sequential Mechanism of Anaerobic Waste Treatment

The primary acids produced during acid fermentation are propionic and acetic acid. It is

reported that only one group of methane bacteria is necessary for methane fermentation of

acetic acid, whereas propionic acid, which is fermented through acetic acid requires two

different groups of methane bacteria.

The bacteria responsible for acid fermentation are relatively tolerant to changes in Ph and

temperature and have a much higher rate of growth than the bacteria responsible for methane

fermentation. As a result, methane fermentation is generally assumed to be the rate limiting

step in anaerobic wastewater treatment.

4. ASP – Activated Sludge Process (Aeration):

This is the main section of the plant where degradation of organic pollutants with the help of

aerobic micro-organism takes place

In aeration tank activated biomass is developed in such a way that certain MLSS is maintained

for continuous effluent flow which comes to aeration basin. Effluent is degraded in given

retention time and activated sludge is further passed to clarifier and recycled as per

requirement. The sludge, which is not required after recirculation, is passed to sludge drying

bed

To maintain the aerobic condition in the bioreactor, air supply arrangement is provided by

means of aeration equipment which has high oxygen transfer efficiency.

a) Secondary Clarifier : In secondary clarifier, effluent passed from aeration tank along

with biomass (MLSS) gets settled here. The settled biomass recycled back to aeration tank as

per requirement and excess biomass transfer to sludge drying bed.

b) Disinfection: Supernatant from secondary clarifier, flow by gravity to the chlorine contact

tank. To disinfect the harmful bacteria in the treated water as well as to remove the refractory

organics from treated water, in this tank hypo chlorite solution is dosed with the help of dosing

system.

c) Sludge disposal system: Settled sludge from tube settler will be removed by pumping to the

sludge drying bed or sludge drying beds.





240

4.4.5.5 Tertiary treatment

Secondary treated water will be further passed through sand media filter followed by activated

carbon filter. Filtered water will be collected in the Irrigation water tank from where it will be

for desired non potable application. Backwashed water from filters will return back to

equalization tank.

4.4.5.6 Advantages of treatment scheme

This plant will produce the treated water which can be recycled back.

This plant is based on biological principle hence no need use of any excessive

hazardous chemicals for the main degradation process.

Due to efficient aeration system, electrical power requirement is very low.

Due to user friendly equipment, plant maintenance is very less.

Due to inbuilt automation, plant machinery life is high & ensures trouble free operation

All process rotating electromechanical equipment is provided with standby equipment

to ensure the uninterrupted operation.

Detailed description of units of ETP are enclosed in the annexure-6

4.4.6 Effluent treatment plant design report for Distillery section

4.4.6.1 Liquid concentration by evaporation

The raw spentwash produced from distillery will be treated using multi effect evaporator. In

this case there are 5 evaporators each one heating the next line. The steam used is a low

pressure steam with a minimum pressure of 1.5 bars (g). The evaporators are a combination of

tabular falling film type evaporators, forced circulation type tubular evaporator. The liquid

condensate is distilled water and after further treatment in the condensate polishing section can

be used in the other areas in the plant. The pressure in each successive evaporator will have a

temperature higher than the liquid circulating in the next. This will cause the vapours

condensate and so transfer heat to the circulating liquid. The heat received by liquid will cause

some boiling and so produce more vapour for the next stage. Boiling of the water will at the

same time cause the liquid to condensate. This is performed in a total of five units with the

liquid being passed from one to another becoming more concentrated in each stage. The

vapours produced from the last stage are then condensed in each stage. The vapours produced

from the last stage are then condensed in a condenser.

In order to reach the desired concentrated of 58 to 45 Bx the concentrate undergoes a final

drying process using a vertical wiped film drier using medium pressure steam as the heat

source. Periodic chemical cleaning has to be performed on the evaporators and to allow a

continuous operation a buffer tank is supplied to allow time for the cleaning cycles.

4.4.6.2 Bio condensate treatment or condensate polishing unit

Proposed condensate treatment or condensate polishing unit to treat process condensate and

spent lees from the plant to reuse as makeup water in cooling tower are as follows:

a) Primary Treatment

Equalisation tank

Plate heat exchanger





241

Lime preparation tank

Neutralisation tank

Lamella Clarifier

b) Secondary Treatment

Buffer tank

UASB reactor

Aeration tank

Secondary Clarifier

Sludge drying beds

c) Tertiary Treatment

Flash mixer

Flocculator

Lamella Clarifier- II

Chlorine contact Chamber

Pressure Sand filter

Activated Carbon filter

1. Design Basis:

Distillery Condensate Treatment Plant:

a) Plant Capacity : 600 KLD

b) Hourly Flow (Feed to CPU) : 30 m3 /hr.

c) Mode of Operation : Manual.

d) Type of project : EPC project.

e) Scheme of Treatment : Anaerobic Aerobic Process.

4.4.6.3 Characteristics of effluent:

Sl No Parameter Range

1 pH 3.6-4.5

2 COD 5000-6000 mg/L

3 BOD 200-300 mg/L

4 Total Solids

Dissolved Solids 5000-6000 mg/ L

Suspended Solids 500-1000 mg/L

5 Chlorides 50-100 mg/L Source: MoEF manual

The characteristics of the raw effluent to CPU assumed are given below (spent lees mixed with

condensate):

Sl.No Parameter Unit Value

1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) mg/l 2000-2500

2 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l 3000-3500

3 pH -- 3.9-4.2





242

4.4.6.4 Treated Condensate Quality (After Tertiary Treatment):

The required characteristics of treated condensate are given below:

Sl.No Parameter Unit Value

1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand

(BOD)

mg/l <=30

2 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l <=250

3 pH -- 7.5-8.5

4 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l <=10

4.4.6.5 Scheme of Treatment:

The Condensate treatment plant will be designed for a capacity of 30 m3 /hr. Condensate

treatment plant scheme will be based on Anaerobic-Aerobic Process.

Pre-treatment: This will be consisting of Equalization.

Secondary / Biological Treatment: This will be consisting of Up flow Anaerobic

Sludge Blanket Reactor (UASB Reactor) followed by Biological Aeration and

Secondary Settling Tank.

Tertiary Treatment: Tertiary treatment process will consist of Multi Media and

Activated Carbon Filtration.

Sludge Treatment: Sludge treatment process will consist of Sludge Drying Beds.

4.4.6.6 Process Flow Diagram CPU:

Fig 4.12 Process Flow Diagrams CPU

Detailed description of units of ETP are enclosed in the annexure-6





243

4.4.7 Storm Water Management

Proposal involves for harvesting and recharging the storm water. Harvested rainwater will be

utilized for dust suppression, greenery development/gardening, washing/cleaning purposes

within the premises. Further to increase the groundwater potential of the region, recharge shafts

will also be implemented along the internal storm water drain network for recharging purposes

and also helps in arresting the floods. Details of the same can be referred below.

4.4.7.1 Rain Water Harvesting For Project Area

a) Roof-Top Rain Water Harvesting

Roof top rainwater harvesting is one of the appropriate options for augmenting ground water

recharge or supplements the domestic requirements. Rainwater is free from bacteriological

contamination, safe, free from organic matter and is soft in nature. The recharge to ground

water through rain water harvesting improves the quality of ground water through dilution. The

geogenic contamination of ground water due to the presence of fluoride or iron, etc., beyond

permissible limits of chemical quality standards, shall be reduced. The flat roofs can be utilised

to harvest rain-water and recharge ground water. The typical roof from which rain water can be

utilised is shown in Fig. 4.13.

Fig 4.13 Flat roof for roof-top rain water harvesting

The structures required for harvesting rainwater are simple, economical and eco-friendly. Roof

catchments are relatively cleaner and free from contamination compared to the ground level

catchments. Generally, the components of the roof top rainwater harvesting are roof catchment,

drain pipe, gutters, down pipe, first flush pipe, filter unit and storage tank / collection sump.

b) Recharge Pit

Recharging ground water body through recharge pits is a simple, efficient and cost-effective

technique. Rain water, harvested from roof-tops can be directly sent to the recharge pits (Fig

4.14). Recharge pits of 2 m diameter will be constructed

Fig 4.14 Typical Recharge Pit Model





244

Depth of the pits in this region may be maintained at 3 m. so as to pierce the weathered zone.

Good recharging conditions in the area should enhance the water recharge process and increase

ground water potential considerably. In the top 1 m part of the pit, brick wall may be

constructed to avoid the collapse of the top loose soil. Bottom part of the pit, in the weathered

zone may be kept naked / unlined for easy percolation of rain water. The pit is to be back-filled

with 40 mm stones at the bottom, for 1 m height, and then by 20 mm stones to the top. The pit

is to be covered with proper arrangement with a view to avoid waste material falling into the

pit and clog the open spaces in the stone gravel.

Recharge pit, to be constructed near nearer to the existing bore well. Rain-water, from the roof-

top of is to be diverted through drain pipes to be directly emptied into the recharge pit.

Recharge pits may also be constructed near the storm-water drains, constructed across the

project premises. The storm water that flows along the storm-water drains is to be diverted to

the recharge pits through diverting channels (Fig 4.15).

Fig 4.15 Diversion of storm-water to recharge pit

The storm water should be allowed to pass through desilting chambers (Fig.16) before entering

the recharge pits. The silt-traps should have at least two to three chambers to make the silt and

other suspended material settle and only clear water enters the recharge pit

Fig 4.16 Desilting chamber to trap silt from the storm water

The recharge pits should have three layers of screening material (Fig 4.17). First, the pit has to

be filled with 40 mm stones, then by 20 mm stones. Over the layer of 20 mm stones, a mesh





245

has to be provided before filling the rest of the pit with coarse sand up to the top of the pit

leaving 30 cm from ground surface. Near the water inlet into the recharge pit, a cement or stone

slab has to be provided to avoid scoring effect and keep the sand layer intact. The sand layer

while filtering the silt and other suspended particles gets clogged and becomes less permeable.

The sand layer has to be changed once in a year to keep the recharge pit effective in recharging

the ground water system.

Fig 4.17 Recharge Pit - A schematic diagram

c) Recharge Pit with shaft

Fig 4.18 Recharge Shaft for recharging deeper aquifer - schematic diagram

Ground water levels in this region are very deep. In the project premises, it is observed to be

deeper than 50 m bgl. In order to enhance the recharge process from the recharge pit, a bore

hole of 156 mm may be drilled down to 40 m in the recharge pit. A PVC pipe (high density), of

102 mm, is to be lowered into this borehole with slots provided from the depth level of 25 to 35

m. At the top, slots are to be provided in the PVC pipe (length of 1 m) against the 40 mm

gravel in the recharge pit for directing the water collected at the bottom of the recharge pit

directly into the bore well bottom recharging the zone between 25 to 35 m (Fig 4.18). The

annular space between the PVC pipe and the borehole surface is to be filled with pea-size





246

gravel, particularly against the slotted length. Against the blank pipe, either pea-size gravel or

drill cuttings can be filled.

Recharge pit of this recharge structure, near the existing bore well and the proposed new bore

well, may be of rectangular shape, 6 m x 1 m, with the recharge bore hole on one side.

Harvested rain water from the roof-top of MCR building and nearby storm-water drain may be

diverted to this recharge pit. Roof-top water can be diverted directly into the recharge pit

whereas the storm-water may be allowed to enter on one end of the rectangular pit through a

desilting chamber.

d) Recharge Trenches

Recharge trenches are simple and effective ground water recharge structures over a wide area.

These trenches may be constructed across the slope of the ground surface. These trenches help

in slowing down and retaining the sheet-flow of rain water and enhance recharge. The trenches

can be continuous or discontinuous. Discontinuous trenches, Fig.4.19 are preferable. Trenches

of 1 m width with 0.75 to 1 m depth may be constructed.

Two or three lines of trenches may be constructed in the central and northern parts of the

project area. The trenches are to be back-filled with 40 mm stones at the bottom (0.5 m height)

overlain by 20 mm stones (0.2 m height) capped by coarse sand / granite chips.

These trenches are effective structures which not only help in enhancing recharge process and

also protect the soil erosion and formation of gullies in the open areas. It is an effective long

term environment protective measure.

Fig 4.19 A typical Recharge Trench

e) Recharge / Storage Ponds

The harvested rain-water, run-off from the storm water drains can be stored in Storage Ponds in

the southern part of the project premises. These storage ponds, Fig 4.20, also act as recharge

ponds. The open space available in the southern part of the project area can be used to construct

500 KL capacity. The depth of 2 m may have to be decided based on the thickness of soil

cover. Since soil cover in the southern part is thick, the pond may be dug to the bottom of the

soil cover. An outlet has to be provided to the pond at an appropriate level so that a column of

1 to 1.5 m water is stored in the pond and the excess water flows out of the pond. Sides of the

pond have to be provided with gentle slopes covered with open stone cribbing. The pond water

can also be utilised for watering the vegetation in green cover area which may be developed in

the unutilized part of the project land or along the fencing line of the premises.





247

Fig 4.20 A typical Recharge cum Storage Pond – Model

4.4.8 Geology and Hydrology

4.4.8.1 Potential Impacts

The project involves no deep excavation and blasting, hence no impact on Geology.

No impact on hydrology as effluent is treated to KSPCB norms and utilized within the

premises for greenbelt development.

Improper handling of spent wash/ molasses results in ground water contamination

through seepage/ infiltration affecting the local population dependency on groundwater.

Effect on structural stability

Improper management of press mud, boiler ash and yeast sludge will lead to soil and

ground water pollution.

4.4.8.2 Mitigation Measures for Minimizing the Impacts

The proposed project doesn't abstract any ground water; the impact due to the project is

minimum.

Dyke walls will be provided for molasses storage tank and HDPE lining will be

provided for storage lagoons.

Geo-technical investigations will be carried out prior to construction activities and

accordingly foundation design will be undertaken on the basis of relevant IS standards.

Press mud and yeast sludge will be mixed and used as manure.

Boiler ash will be sold to nearby brick manufacturers.

In the study area following methods can be encouraged to people, to increase the ground water

table of the region.

Ground water monitored data of the piezometers will be analysed and proper remedial

measures taken from time to time.

2 No's of Piezometers will be located for the proposed spent wash holding tank and

compositing yard should be monitored and remedial measures taken once in a month

during 1st to 10

th of the month.

The water management plan will ensure no negative impact on ground water regime in the

area. The ground water recharge plan proposal will ensure a positive impact on ground water

levels, yield of bore wells and chemical quality of ground water in the area. But, monitoring of

ground water regime only record and show such a positive impact. The withdrawal and the





248

recharge have to be accounted for while declaring that the area has not affected the existing

ground water regime in the area. Monitoring and recording ground water development and

recharge are simple exercises that protect and improve the micro environment over a period of

time. Developing a database on water is important aspect where surface water and ground

water resources play an important role.

4.4.8.3 Monitoring mechanism

The impact of withdrawing and recharging ground water resource in the project area can be

assessed by monitoring the ground water levels and chemical quality on a regular basis. A

Piezometer, a bore well exclusively constructed for measuring ground water potential and

chemical quality of a specific aquifer, within the project premises shall help in the monitoring

mechanism.

4.4.8.4 Construction of Piezometer

A bore well may be constructed in the mid-southern part of the project premises for the

monitoring impact on the ground water regime. A bore hole of 156 mm may be drilled down to

90 m bgl. And the entire hole has to be cased with a blank PVC pipe of 101.6 mm (4"). Slots /

holes are to be provided on the casing pipe for a length of 6 m against the major aquifer zone

encountered in the bore hole. The major aquifer zone is expected to be in the depth range of 60

to 80 m bgl. Annular space between the PVC casing pipe and the bore hole surface should be

filled with pea-size gravel (around the slotted pipe segment) and drill cuttings (against the

blank pipe segment). The pipe should be protected on the top with a suitable cap arrangement

for frequent measurement of water level and collection of water sample.

4.4.8.5 Data recording

Following activities are recommended to be followed to conduct an impact assessment.

Pumping of ground water from the bore wells has to be monitored on a continuous basis

for recording the quantum of withdrawal with time. The outlets of the bore wells may

be fixed with digital flow meters for recording the volume of ground water withdrawn

on a daily basis.

Ground water levels are to be measured from the Piezometer at least once in a month.

Ground water sample from each bore well is to be collected, preferably twice in a year

during the months of May (pre-monsoon) and November (post-monsoon) for chemical

analysis.

Monitoring has to be continued for 5 years before a review of the hydro geological

conditions is done.

Based on the yearly review of data collected, corrective measures are too implemented

in withdrawing ground water and recharging the aquifer system.

The recorded data on ground water levels and chemical quality has to be sent to the Karnataka

State Ground Water Authority (KGWA) / Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA), once in a

year for their record and review. Periodical technical guidance for the development and

management of the water resources has to be taken from the experienced personnel in

groundwater sector.





249

4.5 Biological Environment

4.5.1 Impact due to movement of vehicles

Studies on effects of air pollutants on plants reveal that, air pollutants cause changes in

morphological features, reproductive morphology, micro morphological characters, physiology

of the plants (Ramasammy, 2005). During construction phase, movement of vehicles carrying

construction materials to site emit gases such as NOx, CO, Particulate Matter and HC.

The air quality modelling reveal that, the maximum concentrations of CO from vehicular

emission is about 0.86mg/Nm3

(CPCB standard - 4 mg/m3) in the study area. Hence, the

movement of vehicles will have significant impact temporarily on physiology and morphology

of the flora in the study area.

4.5.2 Impact due to emissions

The maximum concentrations of Particulate matter are 80.77 μg/m3 (CPCB standards -100

μg/m3) and NO2 is 16.80 μg/m

3 (CPCB standards - 80 μg/m

3) from the operation of boilers.

Industrial emissions also contribute to Green House Gases in the atmosphere. Forests and trees

shall have the capacity of accumulating atmospheric CO2. Study area comprises of agricultural

landscape. Emission of dust during operation phase from the stack would reduce the

photosynthetic activity of trees located in an area of 1,597 Ha (4 Km radius) from the project

site in the NE and W directions by its deposition on the foliage. A total of 36 trees were

recorded during the studies and the trees shall have the capacity of sequestering 157153 tonnes

of CO2/year. Some of the predominant trees contributing in carbon sequestration includes

Azadirachta indica (9.74 tonnes/tree/Yr), Acacia nilotica (4.15 tonnes/tree/Yr), and Acacia

chundra (3.67 tonnes/tree/Yr). Since no trees were recorded at the riparian stretch of River

Malaprabha near Asundi (NW) and Saundatti (NE), the carbon sequestration capacity is shown

as nil. However, the carbon sequestration will be seen in the locations (NW and NE directions)

due to the presence of other trees species in the villages away from the riparian stretch of River

Malaprabha. CO2 sequestration capacity of different locations in the study area is given below;

Fig 4.21 Schematic diagram showing carbon sequestration trends in the study area





250

A total of 27.250 t/tree/Yr shall be sequestered by the core zone (<4 Km) of the study area.

Similarly, the buffer zone (>4Km) shall have the capacity of sequestering an amount of 15.178

t/tree/yr CO2. Therefore, the core zone of the study area has a greater tendency to sequester

higher capacity of CO2 when compared to the buffer zone. However, the trees species recorded

in the SE direction (18.48 t/tree/yr) and SW direction (15.16 t/tree/yr) has a greater carbon

sequestration capacity compared to the other directions (5.52 t/tree/yr -NE and 3.25 t/tree/yr -

NW directions). As stated above, no tree species were recorded at the riparian stretch of River

Malaprabha; however, the agricultural lands in the nearby villages were rich in various tree

species which also contribute in carbon sequestration. Since, the study area comprises of rich

drainage system involving Renukasagar Reservoir of River Malaprabha, well irrigated

agricultural lands supporting fair amount of carbon sequestration in the absence of industrial

growth is seen.

Air quality modelling studies of the area reveal that, movement of emission levels is towards

NE direction. The CO2 sequestration capacity in these directions are higher in core zone and it

reduces towards the buffer zone. Similarly, prevailing wind direction during the study period

was W. Studies of Costa et.al (2014) on human and controlled animals reveal that, continuous

exposure to air pollution cause neurotoxicity, behavioural abnormalities, oxidative stress and

neuro-inflammation. However, assuming these concentrations are moving in this direction, it

will not have significant impact. Further, buffer zone plantation activities will be undertaken to

sequester the GHGs.

4.5.3 Impact due to noise pollution

Secondary information reveals that study area is having fairly good number of different avian

species. But the movement of these species are unknown in the study area. Birds are the more

sensitive group of animals that are vulnerable to increasing noise levels, as mega faunal species

tend to move away with the increasing human activities near project site (Slabbekoorn, 2007).

However, a good number (10 species; n= 72) of birds were recorded at the project site

indicating that the birds eventually gets adapted to the noisy conditions seen at the project site.

Noisy conditions have negative consequences on the behavioural activities of the birds such as

feeding, nesting and breeding. However, there are exceptions where the birds get adapted to the

noisy conditions over a period of time (Slabbekoorn, 2007).

Baseline noise level in the project site was 52.15 d (B) A during day time and 50.54 d (B) A

during night time. Noise levels are within the CPCB standards. However, during construction

and operation phase, the noise levels may reach 75 d (B) A. This would impact avifauna and

movement of other wild animals near project site and surrounding areas.

4.5.4 Pressure on existing trees

Researchers found that trees with >77 cm diameter remove approximately 70 times more air

pollution annually than small trees (Nowak, 2002). A total of 36 trees (individuals) were

recorded in the entire study area with no trees/ minimal number of trees recorded in some

quadrates. However, the results of the survey revealed that, trees with >77 cm girth size are low

in number (Avg.51.94 %) and hence pressure on trees with larger diameter may be expected in

the upcoming days depending on various local demands. This trend will be disadvantageous for

pollution mitigation in the study area.





251

Table 4.18 Details of Trees with >77 cm girth size in the study area

Sl.No Quartile Sampling location % of trees with GBH >77 cm

1 NW

Near Asundi (Malaprabha River) Nil

2 Near Karikatti 37.5%

3 NE

Along SH 30 50%

4 Near Saundatti (Malaprabha River) Nil

5 SE

Behind industry Nil

6 Hire Hulligere 100%

7 SW

Near Kallahalla 22.2%

8 Near Yadahalli 50%

Average 51.94%

4.5.5 Impact on RET and Schedule I species

Two avifaunal species and one mammal namely Crested serpent eagle (n=1), Steppe eagle

(n=2) and Indian Wolf were recorded during the study at the Renukasagar reservoir -6.7

Km(Near Asundi village) and near Karikatti village -3.6 Km respectively which belongs to

Schedule I of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972. Similarly, avifaunal species such as Black

headed ibis (n=8; Near Threatened), River tern (n=2; Near Threatened), Woolly necked stork

(n=6; Vulnerable) and Steppe eagle (n=2; Endangered) were also recorded which belongs to

RET category as per IUCN Conservation status, 2017. However, no disturbances will be

created to these species as there is no lifting or intake structures proposed in the upstream areas

of River Malaprabha (Renukasagar reservoir) and the backwaters of River Malaprabha which

has created a habitat for several avifaunal species located in the surrounding areas.


Replanting of vegetation will be undertaken within the project site.

Larger plantation activities (2,000 saplings/yr) will be taken up in the buffer area with

the help of NGOs, Agriculture and horticulture departments to reduce higher GHGs.

Pressure on existing trees will be reduced by taking up awareness activities for use of

alternative methods for fuel wood, timber, fodder, etc.

Barricades will be erected during construction phase along the periphery of the project

site to reduce noise levels. Similarly, during operation phase green belt will be

developed all along the periphery of the project site to reduce operation noise levels.

Conservation Plan for schedule I and RET species will be carried out (Chapter-8).

4.5.7 Evaluation of Impacts

4.5.7.1 Ecological Index

Parameter based ecological Index of the study area is given below and from the table it can be

concluded that ecological sensitivity is low (12.6%) in the study area and doesn't have

significant impact on available flora and fauna of the region.





252

Table 4.19 Ecological index of the study area

Parameter Importance scale Weightage Impact

Flora and

Fauna

(Threatened

species)

Number of Schedule-I & II

(> 20 numbers) 100 0


(10-20 numbers) 50 0


(<10 numbers) 25 25

Flora and

Fauna -

Endemism

High(>10 species) 100 0

Medium(5-10 species) 50 0

Low(<5 species) 25 0

Vulnerable

flora & fauna

High(>10 species) 100 0

Medium(5-10 species) 50 0

Low(<5 species) 25 25

State of

terrestrial

vegetation

Relatively undisturbed forest

( Govt/private) 100 0

Totally managed estate with three

type of vegetation 25 0

Totally managed estate such as

coffee and cardamom 25 0

Agricultural land with crops 25 25

State of

wetland

vegetation

Relatively undisturbed wetland

visited by migratory waterfowl 100 0

Relatively undisturbed wetland not

known to be visited by migratory

waterfowl

50 0

Other wetlands with frequent human

activity 50 50

Legal status National Park 100 0

Wildlife sanctuary 50 0

Reserve forest 25 0

Ecologically sensitive area 25 0

Conservation

importance

Location unique in terms of habitat

(world heritage site) or species 100 0

Habitat although present elsewhere

is under threat in those places 75 0

Habitat present elsewhere and is not

under any serious threat 50 0

Habitat is very common elsewhere 25 25

Overall

Impact on

ecology &

biodiversity

Change in land use land cover 25 0

Species diversity, Habitat

fragmentation, Breeding & nesting

grounds

50 0

Soil erosion 25 0

Changes in drainage pattern 25 0

Removal of species 25 0

Introduction of exotic species 25 0





253

Parameter Importance scale Weightage Impact

Emission & discharge from the

project 25 25

Noise pollution due to project 25 25

Total 1575 200

4.6 Socio Economic Environment

4.6.1 Impact during Construction

4.6.1.1 Impact on Demography

The peak workforce strength during construction would rise-up to hundred persons.

Though the technical persons and skilled labours would by and large, be hired from

outside the study area, bulk of the labour force would comprise of unskilled and semi-

skilled workers, a substantial number of whom would presumably be recruited from the

surrounding areas itself. Since majority of the unskilled workforce would be from

surrounding areas, they would settle in the villages.

Therefore, the demographic scenario including population, sex-ratio, literacy level etc.

would undergo certain local changes within a limited peripheral zone. The overall

impact over the study area would be marginal.

4.6.1.2 Impact on Socio-economic

Construction of any major industrial project invariably results in socio-economic

changes. The influx of material and money lends to change the economic status of the

community. Markets, workshops and commercial centres would develop in the area.

Construction of the project will involve a substantial unskilled labour force.

Since most of the unskilled labour force will be from nearby village, unplanned and

haphazard development of slums would not be significant. However, labour camps with

provision of basic amenities of water supply and sanitation etc. would be provided

which would go long way in curbing the degradation of the physical and aesthetic

environment.

Unemployment and underemployment among the villagers of surrounding area who

depends on the erratic agricultural activities.

Health concerns to agricultural labourers working in surrounding agricultural lands due

to fly ash and bagasse. Fly ash and bagasse dust deposition on the neighbouring

agricultural lands will affect the productivity

4.6.2 Impact during Operation

4.6.2.1 Impact on Demographic Pattern

Operation of the unit will require an appreciable quantum of skilled and semi-skilled

workforce which, would have to be imported from outside the study area.

Moreover, a sizeable number of service class people who are directly connected with

the operating personnel of the plant, e.g. house servants, washer man, shopkeepers etc.

will flow in from the neighbouring areas. As the plant and its ancillary facilities act as





254

an active nucleus of activity, a shift of population towards this centre will also occur

within the study area.

The migration of people will marginally increase the total population in the study area

particularly in the peripheral zone. This would result in an alteration of the local

demographic pattern. The high literacy level of people and their families involved in the

operation of the plant would certainly enhance the overall literacy rate within the study

area. The population density in the peripheral zone will also tend to rise, though very

marginally.

4.6.2.2 Impact on Socioeconomic profile

As there will be a large flow of financial and material resources, there remains a large

possibility of growth of population in the business, trade, commerce and service sector.

The large inflow of financial and material resources accompanied with the urban culture

complete with technological inputs as modern housing, water closets, radio, television,

synthetic fibers, use of steel and aluminium, use of LPG/electricity for domestic

cooking would all contribute towards changing the socioeconomic environment of the

areas as this would introduce a mixed culture emphasizing urban traits in place of

traditional, prevalent rural customs. The economic, cultural and technological changes

are likely to induce social stress and ethical changes. All these would change the local

life style.

Thus, a simple backward community may be transformed into a semi-urban complex

within a short time frame. Such impacts are inevitable, that could also be felt in case of

the present project; however, these would be attempted to be controlled and minimized

by ensuring suitable human management, stable working conditions, security and the

provision of adequate compensation.

At the same time, however, farmers may be induced to adopt more intensive

agricultural and animal husbandry practices, resulting in higher production and boosting

up of the area economy.

Unscientific disposal of spent wash through infiltration and seepage factors affects the

crop lands and yield.

It has been observed that people always have a propensity to settle at locations where

civic amenities as transportation, postal service, educational institutions, drinking water,

market, medical treatment, electricity etc. are easily available within a short distance, as

well as the working place being within a reasonable distance.


Employment opportunity to 75 No's from local villagers for expansion activities.

Villages benefitted includes viz., Karikatthi, Asundi, Hireulligeri, Chikkahuligeri,

Yadravi, Sangreshkop, Yedihalli and Singarkoppa.

Installation of ESP, covered bagasse storage yard, designing of stock piles, minimizing

the distance that bagasse falls during the movement, enclosed bagasse handling

conveyors, belt cleaning system and water spray system will be installed to minimise

the impact.

Proposal involves implementation of evaporation, concentration and incineration

mechanism to scientifically treat the spent wash and ensuring ZLD (Zero liquid

discharge).





255

4.7 Health Environment


Impacts on health of the construction workers/labours/personnel deployed in the site can be

anticipated through poor quality of water supply, creation of mosquito breeding sites, improper

hygienic condition and lack of safety items (PPE’s)/instructions/guidelines/practices.


Impact on health of the workers is generally anticipated from inadequate provisions of PPEs,

mosquito breeding sites, inadequate provision of first aid facilities & improper handling of

solid waste such as press mud, ETP sludge & effluent.


Potable water supply to the construction workers/labourers/personnel is ensured

conforming to IS 10500:2012 (Second Revision) drinking water quality standards.

PPE's will be provided to the workforce based on the type of work assigned during the

both stages.

First Aid Centre with its facilities will be provided.

Stagnation of water will be avoided by providing drains during the operation phases and

pumping out the same and utilizing it for other secondary purposes during the

construction stage.

Solid wastes will be scientifically handled and disposed by utilizing the same within the

premises in the compost production or sold to member's farmers as manure.

4.8 Solid Waste and Hazardous waste Generation and Management

for Disposal

4.8.1 Impact due to construction phase

During construction phase, solid waste such as excavated soil, debris, some metal

waste, municipal waste and oil & grease from construction machines will be generated.

Domestic solid wastes from the labour sheds (75 Kgs) if not properly disposed might

impact in the health of the workers, also creates unaesthetic environment and intern

affect the soil environment.

4.8.2 Impact due to operation phase

Improper management of solid waste (press mud and yeast sludge) leading to

deterioration of soil/land environment & in turn ground water pollution (100 mt radius

around the industry) affecting crop yield and health respectively.

Improper handling and storage of used oil generated during O & M of DG set, oil and

grease generated from various plant and machineries will have impact on the soil

environment affecting its inherent fertility.

Improper management of press mud (9000 TPM) in the sugar unit and yeast sludge

(180 TPM), ETP sludge(1 TPM) in distillery section and boiler ash (455 TPM) in

cogeneration will lead to soil, ground water and air pollution posing health hazard to





256

humans and ecosystem in the form of low economy, health problems viz., breathing/

lung diseases.

Table 4.20 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management details

Sl

No Solid waste

Quantity

TPM

Method of

collection

Mitigation measures

Method of Storage Mode of disposal

Solid waste

1 Bagasse 67500 Mechanical

conveyor

Bagasse storage yard Sent to cogeneration

unit to use as fuel as

boiler

2

Boiler- Ash 300 Mechanical

conveyor into

common silo

for further

disposal

Ash storage yard

Fly ash brick

manufacturing

3 Incineration

Boiler Ash

155 Mechanical

conveyor into

common silo

for further

disposal

Ash storage yard

3 Press mud 9000 Mechanical

conveyor

Storage yard

Mixed in required

proportions and used as

manure.

4 Sludge from

ETP and CPU

1.0 Sludge drying

beds

Storage yard

5 Yeast sludge 180 Mechanical

conveyor

Storage yard

6 Lime Grit 9 Mechanical

screw

conveyor

Storage yard Used in low lying areas/

construction purpose

7 Domestic

solid waste

2.8 Collection bins Segregated.

Domestic organic

solid waste will be

composted, while the

inorganic solid waste

will be handed over

to nearby Gram

Panchayat.

Nearby municipal

agencies & recyclers.

Hazardous waste

8 Used oil from

DG sets

50 lts Stored in leak

proof sealed

barrels

Hazardous waste

storage area

Used as lubricants

within the industry

9 Steam turbine

oil waste

30 Lts

10 Waste oil

residue from

ETP

40 Lts Stored in leak

proof sealed

barrels

Hazardous waste

storage area





257

4.9 Evaluation of Impacts

Matrix method was used to identify interactions between various project activities and

environmental parameters and components. Later, a weightage of 1-10 shall be given to the

impacts based on the significance of the impacts. The impacts are quantified “with” and

“without” EMP. The criteria adopted for weigtages are given below;

Table 4.21 Criteria for evaluation of impacts

Sl.No Criteria Score

1 Minor impact 1-2

2 Medium impact 3-4

3 Significant impact 5-8

4 Major impact 9-10





258

Table 4.22 Impact Identification Matrix

Sl.No ACTIVITIES

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES

Air Noise Surface

Water

Ground

water Climate

Land

/soil Ecology

Socio

Economics Aesthetics Health

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

1. Site Clearing/levelling

2. Excavation activities

3. Transportation of

Construction materials

4. Construction activities

on land

5. Laying of roads

6. Labour camps

7. Movement of Vehicles

8. Construction Debris

9. Excavated Earth

10. Disposal of Sewage

11. Disposal of Solid waste

12. Stagnation of water

13. Storm Water

OPERATION PHASE

1. Process areas

Operation of D.G.Sets

2. Solid waste Disposal

3. Effluent /Sewage

Disposal spent wash

handling

5. D.G. Maintenance

6. Runoff

7. Vehicular Traffic





259

Sl.No ACTIVITIES

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES

Air Noise Surface

Water

Ground

water Climate

Land

/soil Ecology

Socio

Economics Aesthetics Health

8. Greenery Development

9. Quality of Life

Table 4.23 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction Activities

Activity Environmental

Attributes Cause

Impact characteristics Impact Evaluation

Nature Duration Reversibility Significance Without

EMP

With

EMP

Site clearing/

Levelling/

Excavation

activities

Air Environment Dislodging of particles

from the ground

Direct,

Negative

Short-

Term Reversible High

Noise Environment

Noise generation from

earth excavating

equipment

Direct,

Negative

Short-

Term Reversible Medium

Land use/Soil

Environment Excavation

Direct,

Negative Long Term Irreversible High

Ecology

Loss of vegetative

cover such as herbs and

shrubs

Direct

Negative

Short-


Health Dislodging of particles

from the ground

Direct,

Negative

Short-


Transportation

of construction

materials

Air Environment

Transport of

construction material in

trucks & Exhaust

emission from vehicles

Direct,

Negative

Short-


Noise Environment Noise generation from

vehicles

Direct,

Negative

Short-

Term Reversible Low

Health Risk of accidents

during transit

Direct,

Negative

Short-






260


Attributes Cause



EMP

With

EMP

Ecology

Impact of noise on

birds, butterflies and

nocturnal animals

Direct

Negative

Long-

Term Irreversible Medium

Construction

activities on

Land

Air Environment

Operation of

construction machinery,

welding activities and

others

Direct,

Negative

Short-



use of machinery

Direct,

Negative

Short-


Land use/Soil

Environment Setting up of Project

Direct,

Negative Long Term Irreversible High

Ecology Loss of vegetation Direct,

Negative Short -Tem Reversible Medium

Health Various construction

activities

Direct,


Laying of Roads

Air Environment

Operation of

construction machinery,

Movement of Vehicles

Direct,

Negative

Short-


Noise Environment

Noise generation from

use of machinery,

Vehicular movement

Direct,

Negative

Short-


Land use/Soil

Environment Development of Roads

Direct,

Negative Long Term Irreversible Medium

Ecology Loss of vegetation Direct,

Negative

Short -


Labour Camps Air Environment Burning of Fuels Direct,

Negative

Short -






261


Attributes Cause



EMP

With

EMP

Water Environment

(Ground) Disposal of Sewage

Direct,

Negative

Short -


Land/Soil

Environment Disposal of Sewage

In Direct,


Socio-Economic

Employment

Opportunities, Influx of

people

In Direct,

Positive

Short -


Health Disposal of

Sewage/Solid wastes

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Movement of

Vehicles

Air Environment Transportation of

Construction Materials

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Noise Environment Vehicular movement Direct,

Negative

Short –


Ecology Impact on flora and

fauna

Direct

Negative Short- term Reversible High

Excavated

Earth/Muck

Land/Soil

Environment Foundation works

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Disposal of

Sewage

Water Environment

(Ground)

Domestic activities

from Labour camps/

site office

Direct,

Negative

Short -


Aesthetics Odour nuisance In Direct,

Negative

Short -


Health Disposal of Sewage Direct,

Negative

Short –


Disposal of

Solid wastes

Land/Soil

Environment

Solid waste generation,

Land contamination

Direct,

Negative

Short –



Negative

Short -






262


Attributes Cause



EMP

With

EMP

Health Degradation of Solid

waste, attraction of flies

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Stagnation of

Water Health Mosquito breeding sites

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Storm water

Run-off

Water Environment

(Surface) Construction site areas

Direct,

Negative

Short -


Land/Soil

Environment Flooding

Direct,

Negative

Short –


Table 4.24 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase


Attributes Cause



EMP

With EMP

Operation of the

sugar mill,

cogeneration unit

and distillery

unit

Air Environment Operation of boilers,

sugar production

Direct,

Negative

Long -



the industrial operations

Direct,

Negative

Long -


Water Environment

(Ground)

Generation of

wastewater

Direct,

Negative

Long –


Ecology

Impact to due to

emission and noise on

flora and fauna

Direct

Negative

Long

term Irreversible High

D.G Set

operation

Air Environment Operation of D.G Set

during power failure

Direct,

Negative

Long -

Term Reversible Low

Noise Environment Noise generation

D.G Set

Direct,

Negative

Long -

Term Reversible Low





263


Attributes Cause



EMP

With EMP

Greenery

Development Ecology

Improvement of local

flora and fauna,

movement of species

Indirect

Positive

Long –

Term Irreversible High

Solid Waste

generation

Land/Soil

Environment

Solid waste generation,

Land contamination

Direct,

Negative

Long –


Water Environment

(Ground)

Leachate generation,

Land contamination

Direct,

Negative

Long –



Negative

Long -


Health Degradation of Solid

waste, attraction of flies

Direct,

Negative

Long –


Effluent/Sewage

Generation &

disposal

Water Environment

(Ground) Domestic activities

Direct,

Negative

Short -


Aesthetics

Odour

nuisance/Improper

treatment

In Direct,

Negative

Short –


Health Disposal of Sewage Direct,

Negative

Short –


D.G/ machinery

maintenance

Land/Soil

Environment Used oil generation

Direct,

Negative Short –


Vehicular traffic

Air Environment Vehicle operation and

fuel combustion

Direct,

Negative

Short -



vehicles

Direct,

Negative

Short-

term Reversible Medium





264


Attributes Cause



EMP

With EMP

Quality of Life Socio- Economic

Employment

generation, Quality of

life, In-flow of funds in

the region, Increase in

housing

accommodation

In Direct,

Positive

Long -

Term Irreversible Medium

Storm water

Run-off Land Environment Flooding

Direct,

Negative

Long

term Reversible Medium





265

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

5.1 Introduction

Environmental Monitoring is important parameter to assess the status of environment during

construction and operation phases of the project. With the knowledge of baseline conditions,

the monitoring program can serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environmental

conditions due to construction and operation of the proposed project and suitable

mitigation/measures/steps could be taken in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is

as important as control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can only be

determined by monitoring.

The objectives of monitoring are:

To verify the results of the impact assessment study in particular with regard to new

development.

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical.

To check or assess the efficiency of the pollution control measures;

To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact assessment

study, do not become critical through the operation of new development.

To establish a database for future impact assessment studies for new projects.

This environmental monitoring plan (EMP) has been developed in order to ensure the

mitigation measures recommended are delivered at each stage of the project development,

covering the construction phase (apprx. 18 months) and operational phase. Monitoring falls

into two general groups; qualitative assessment and quantitative assessment. Qualitative

monitoring activities include audits and inspection of works during the construction phase.

Quantitative monitoring techniques will include consideration of:

Concentrations of pollutants from the project;

Waste water quality, including site drainage;

Waste management, including recording the type and amount of wastes generated and

reuse/recycling/disposal route;

Energy and water management

Responsibility / Implementation of Environmental Monitoring lies with M/s Harsha Sugars

Ltd., both during construction and operational phase of the project.

5





266

Table 5.1 Environmental Monitoring Programme during Construction Phase

Sl.

No

Particulars of the

Monitoring

No. and Place of

Monitoring

Monitoring

frequency

Parameters for

Monitoring

Monthly

Budget

(Rs.)

1 Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring

- 24 Hrs

5 Nos

Near main gate

Construction area-

sugar

Construction area-

cogen

Construction area-

distillery

Labour camp

Monthly PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NO2

12,500/-

2 Ambient Noise

Level Monitoring -

24 hrs

5 Nos

Near main gate

Construction area-

sugar

Construction area-

cogen

Construction area-

distillery

Labour camp

Monthly Leq Day dB(A)

and Leq Night

dB(A)

6250/-

3 Ground Water

Quality

1 Nos

Near Labour camp

Monthly pH, Colour, Odour,

Turbidity, Total

Dissolved Solids,

Total Hardness, Ca,

Mg, SO4, F, NO3,

DO, Cl, Fe,

Coliform Count.

1800/-

4 Soil quality 1 Nos

Near Labour camp

Once in

season

Colour, pH,

Conductivity,

Moisture Content,

Calcium,

magnesium,

Nitrogen

Phosphorous,

Potassium, Organic

Matter, Sulphate,

Chloride.

1850/-

(616/- per

month)

Total 21,166/-

M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd will implement various productivity management programs in the

plant to improve the work environment, effective housekeeping and environment quality. All

the necessary steps will be taken in the plant to meet standards prescribed by the Karnataka

State Pollution Control Board and Central Pollution Control Board.





267

Table 5.2 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters during operation phase

Sl.

No. Particulars

Monitoring

frequency

Duration/

type of

monitoring

Important

parameters for

monitoring

Monthly

Budget

(Rs.)

I Air Quality

1 Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring within

premises - 5 locations

Near main gate

Sugar mill house

Near Boiler house

Distillery unit

Near ETP

Once in a

month

24 hrly

sample

PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NO2

12500/-

2 Stack/Chimney

Monitoring for Boilers,

D.G sets - 4 samples

140 TPH - 85 m

chimney

22 TPH boiler - 70 m

chimney

Once in a

month

Grab SO2, PM, NMHC &

CO

12,800/-

II Water Quality

1 Ground water analysis

within the premises and

in nearby villages - 2

samples

Once in a

month

Grab As per drinking water

quality standards

(IS10500:2012)

5,400/-

2 Effluent - ETP inlet&

outlet

Once in a

fortnight

Grab BOD, COD, pH, TSS,

oil and grease

800/-

(1600/- per

month)

3 Effluent- CPU inlet &

outlet

Once in a

fortnight

Grab pH, BOD, COD, TSS,

Oil & Grease

800/-

(1600/- per

month)

III Soil Quality

1 Soil quality analysis

(landscape area where

treated water is being

utilised)

Once in

season

Grab pH, C, Organic

matter, N, K, P.

1,000/-

(333/- per

month)

IV Ambient Noise level

monitoring :- near

Main Gate/Boundary

Mill house section,

Co-generation Plant,

Distillery section

D.G Set Room,

Crushing Areas,

Godowns, Parking bay,

Loading and Unloading

areas. (10 locations)

Once in a

Month

24Hrs

Monitoring

Noise levels in dB (A)

both during day &

night time.

12500/-

V Greenbelt development Seasonal Visual Survival rate 5,000/-





268

Sl.

No. Particulars

Monitoring

frequency

Duration/

type of

monitoring

Important

parameters for

monitoring

Monthly

Budget

(Rs.)

observations

Total 51,733/-

Continuous online monitoring of emission and effluent will also be provided and the same

will be connected to CPCB server.





269

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

6.1 Risk and Hazard Mapping

M/s HSL has proposal for expansion of sugar cane crushing from 4500 TCD to 7500 TCD,

14 MW/Hr to 30 MW/Hr cogeneration and establishment of 60KLPD distillery within the

existing facility. As per TOR prescribed by MOEF and guidelines for sugar plant we here-by

appraise associated risk within project and also due to expansion. Apropos risk therefore need

to be responded and hence will be the Disaster Management Plan towards preparedness. This

is also statutory requirement as per MSIHC rule 1989 having hazardous material in process as

well as in stock exceeding prescribe threshold limit. While preparing this concise text with

respect to appraise risk and hazard being associated, we acclimatize with plant operation; lay

out, storage, process particularly with respect to hazard and likely impact. It is duly

composed on the basis of plant site visit, discussion with stake holders about operations and

their understanding with respect to hazard and approach toward mitigation, preparedness as

well as planning with to deal with any disaster or untoward incidence.

In our approach for Risk assessment we need to identify the hazards associated within plant

and their potential which might result into disaster or any untoward incidence. Hence the

criteria for assisting risk within plant quantity of hazardous material due to its intrinsic

properties which may result into fire, explosion or may be toxic or in combo. Other risk areas

are pressure equipment, high temp /pressure processes, pipeline, heavy movements etc.

Though they are susceptible to potential risk but such systems are customized and equipped

with safety gears and has safe operation as well as maintenance operational practices. Hence

this assessment may be not appropriate. We therefore assess the associated risk with the

Hazardous material quantification.

The raw materials, which will be required to run the plant, are discussed in detail in Chapter-

2.0. Bagasse is by product after crushing operation. This is considered as main fuel

supplement for power generation in co-gen mode. Apart some chemicals such as Lime,

Caustic Soda, Sulphur etc which will be stored in isolation with due care for storage with

instruction and written manual for handling. MSDS for all major chemicals are in place with

appropriate person to deal with emergent situation.

6.1.1 Risk Assessment Need and Importance

Industrial accident results in great personal & financial loss. Managing these accidental risks

in today’s environment is the concern of every industry including distillery also, because

either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial viability of a business.

Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that have the potential for accidents

which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force and environment or public. The main

objective of the risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive but simple approach to

carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies for industries and planning &

management of industrial prototype hazard analysis in Indian context.

6





270

6.1.2 Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment (HIRA)

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various hazards (unsafe

condition) that exist in the plant. On the other hand, risk analysis deals with the identification

and quantification of the risk, the plant equipment and Personnel are exposed to accidents

resulting from the hazards present in the plant.

Risk analysis involves the identification and assessment of risks to the population is exposed

to as a result of hazards present. This requires an assessment of failure probability credible

accident scenario, vulnerability of population etc. Much of this information is difficult to get

or generate consequently, the risk analysis in present case is confined to maximum credible

accident studies and safety and risk aspect related to Molasses based Distillery and power

plant.

Activities requiring assessment of risk due to occurrence of most probable instances of

hazard and accident are both onsite and off-site.

6.1.2.1 On-site

Exposure to fugitive dust, noise and other emissions will pose health hazards to employees in

the work zone. Good Housekeeping practices requiring contact with solid and liquid wastes

Emission/spillage etc. from storage & handling will be implemented.

6.1.2.2 Off-site

Exposure to pollutants released from offsite/ storage/related activities Contamination due to

accidental releases or normal release in combination with natural hazard Deposition of toxic

pollutants in vegetation / other sinks and possible sudden releases due to accidental

occurrences

6.1.3 Identification of types of Hazards in Sugar, Distillery & Co-

Generation Plant (HAZID)

Disaster at Sugar Mill, distillery and Co-generation plants may occur due to following

hazards:

Fire Electric Panels, Oil room and alcohol storage

Explosion in Boiler house etc

Electrocution

Cleaning of barrels, which have held chemical substances

Fall of material etc

The potential hazardous areas and the likely accidents with the concerned area have been

enlisted below

Table 6.1 Possible Hazardous Locations onsite

Sl. No. Hazardous Area Likely Accident

1 Boiler Area Explosion

2 Turbine room Explosion

3 Electrocution Lose fitting

4 Electrical rooms Fire and electrocution

5 Transformer Area Fire and electrocution





271

6 Cable tunnel Fire and electrocution

9 Distillery (Alcohol storage

tank)

Fire

10 Chimney Air pollution

11 Lagoon Storage Overflow, flooding

12 Bagasse storage Fire

6.1.3.1 Fire

Fire can be observed in the boiler area, Fuel spillage, Electrical rooms, Transformer area etc

due to accidental failure scenario. Fire from bagasse storage area will cause fatality.

6.1.3.2 Explosion

Explosion may lead to release of heat energy & Pressure waves. Boiler (140TPH and 22TPH

proposed incineration boiler) explosion causing fatality and property damage.

Fatal and property damage from alcohol storage tank in the event of spillage and leakage/

electrocution. Fatal Accident due to carelessness during working hours may lead to

electrocution.

6.1.4 Proposed Mitigation Measures

6.1.4.1 Preventive Measures for Electricity Hazard

All electrical equipment is to be provided with proper earthing.

Earthed electrode are periodically tested and maintained

Emergency lighting is to be available at all critical locations including the

operator’s room to carry out safe shut down of the plant

Easy accessibility of fire fighting facilities such as fire water pumps and fire alarm

stations is considered All electrical equipment are to be free from carbon dust, oil

deposits, and grease

Use of approved insulated tools, rubber mats, shockproof gloves and boots, tester,

fuse tongs, discharge rod, safety belt, hand lamp, wooden or insulated ladder and

not wearing metal ring and chain.

Flame and shock detectors and central fire announcement system for fire safety

are to be provided.

Temperature sensitive alarm and protective relays to make alert and disconnect

equipment before overheating is to be considered

Danger from excess current due to overload or short circuit is to be prevented by

providing fuses, circuit breakers, thermal protection

Routine maintenance checks for boiler on pressure and temperature including

valves, regular inspection from boiler inspectorate.

6.1.4.2 Preventive Measures/Precautionary Measures for Falling material

Safety helmets to be used to protect workers below against falling Material

Barriers like a toe boards or mesh guards is to be provided to prevent items from

slipping or being knocked off the edge of a structure

An exclusion zone is to be created beneath areas where work is taking place.





272

Danger areas are to be clearly marked with suitable safety signs indicating that

access is restricted to essential personnel wearing hard hats while the work is in

progress.

6.1.4.3 Preventive Measures for and safety Measures for Storage & Handling of Alcohol

Handling and storage of alcohol is done as per prescribed norms.

Proposed Safety measures for storage and handling of alcohol

Providing flame arrestors on the top of all the storage tanks.

Flame proof fitting to all the systems which handles the alcohol.

Transfer of alcohol is by pipes only.

All the lightings are of flame proof and Foam Extinguishers inside the warehouse

Removal of all ignition sources and maintaining sterile conditions in and around all

areas

Hydrocarbon sensors will be provided to detect alcohol vapour release

In case of spill, mobile foam dispending system will be utilized.

Alcohol storage and handling area fire fighting facility as per OISD 117 norms

Type of foam compound used will be protein or fluro-protein of AFFF

Fire water mains, hydrants and monitor stand posts, raisers of water spray system will

be painted with “ fire Red” paint as per IS: 5

Hose boxes, water monitors and hydrant outlets will be painted with “Luminous

Yellow” paint as per IS:5

Double headed hydrants with two separate landing valves or monitor on suitably sized

stand post will be used

Fire water ring main will be provided all around perimeter of the installation

Spray nozzles will be directed radially to the tank at a distance not exceeding 0.6 m

from the tank surface. Only one type and size of spray nozzle will be used in a

particular facility.

6.1.4.4 Accidental Release Measures

For Spill Cleanup well Ventilation, Shutting off or removal of all possible sources of ignition,

absorbance of small quantities with paper towels and evaporate in safe place like fume hood

and burning of these towels in a safe manner, Use of respiratory and/or liquid-contact

protection by the Cleanup personnel will be promoted.

6.1.4.5 Need of Establishing a Fire Fighting Group

A small spark of fire may result into loss of lives, machines and the damage by fire may

result in high economic losses. This type of losses can be avoided by preventing and

controlling the fire instantly for which fire–fighting group will be established. The fire

fighting group would house and keep in readiness, the following types of equipment and

arrangements.

CO2 extinguishers

Dry powder chemical extinguishers





273

Foam extinguishers

80 mm. spray hoses

Fire brigade

Fire hydrant

Protocol (chemical to combat oil fires).

In order to avoid fire in cable galleries, all the power and control cables of FRLS

type (Fire Resistant Low Smoke) will be used.

6.1.4.6 Inspection

Fire alarm panel (electrical) will cover the entire plant. The inspection group will periodically

inspect fire extinguishers in fire stations and machines and other places. The groups will

display emergency telephone number boards at vital points. The group will regularly carry

out general inspection for fire.

6.1.5 Procedure for Extinguishing Fire

The following steps will be taken during a fire accident in the system: As soon as the

message is received about fire, one of the systems will be diverted to the place of the fire

accident along with a staff member. Simultaneously plant fire station will be informed by

phone walkie for fire brigades and fire stations of nearby area. In the meanwhile, the pipe

system will be operated to obtain maximum pressure on output. In case cables are within the

reach of fire, power supply will be tripped and the cables shifted.

6.1.5.1 Fire Fighting with Water

Adequate and reliable arrangement is required for fighting the fire with water such as:

Provision for Fire brigade and Fire hydrant.

Arrangement of pipelines along and around all vulnerable areas.

Provision of valves at appropriate points to enable supply of water at the required

place/area or divert the same to another direction/pipe line.

Provision of overhead tanks which will be providing water during power failure

and it would work by the gravitational force.

6.1.5.2 Sources of Water for Fire Fighting

The following two sources of water have been considered for fire fighting:

Overhead Tank

Raw Water Reservoir

6.1.5.3Fire Fighting with Fire Extinguishers

To deal with fire other than carbonaceous fires, which can be deal with by water suitable fire

extinguishers are required to do the job effectively. It is therefore necessary to keep adequate

number of extinguishers in readiness at easily approachable places. Adequate number of fire

stations would be provided.

Further, other spray groups from the system will be diverted to the spot. In case of fire in the

belt, it will be cut near the burning portion to save the remaining parts. After extinguishing

the fire, the area will be well prepared for reuse. Foam System for fire fighting will be





274

provided to control fire from the alcohol storage tank. The foam thus produced will suppress

fire by separating the fuel from the air (oxygen) and hence avoiding the fire & explosion to

occur in the tank. Foam would blanket the fuel surface smothering the fire. The fuel will also

be cooled by the water content of the foam. The foam blanket suppresses the release of

flammable vapours that can mix with the air.

6.1.6 Environment Health and Safety Cell

This plant has fully fledged EHS cell (Environment Health & Safety Cell). Main function of

EHS cell is to assess the potential risks/hazards to environment, health of employees &

society and safety within the plant. Installation of fire fighting system, fire alarm, provision

of safety/protective equipment to workers and regular medical check-ups has been taken up.

Plant is maintained at zero discharge so no likely impact is likely to occur on environment

and society. Also regular monitoring of different parameters is being carried out to ensure

safety of environment and society. Trainings and Mock drills are also carried out in regular

intervals for workers to ensure the safety in case of any accident or natural hazard.

6.1.6.1 HSE Policy of this unit

Policy Statement on Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) assist in:

Protecting the health and safety of employees, their contractors, customers and

neighbours.

Maintaining the security of people and assets

Protecting the environment

6.1.6.2 In addition to compliance with laws and regulatory requirements, Company will

pursue the following objectives:

Ensure that all activities are conducted in a manner which is consistent with this

plants Health, Safety, and Environment Standards

Ensure that business activities are conducted to prevent harm to employees,

contractors, the public, other stakeholders and the environment.

Develop, manufacture and market our products with full regard for HSE aspects.

6.1.6.3 Targets set to achieve objectives

To ensure continuous progress improvement in HSE performance

Provide safe and healthy workplaces for our employees and contractors.

Provide information, instruction and training to enable employees to meet their

responsibility to contribute to compliance with the Policy.

Provide appropriate HSE information for all contractors and others who work for

them.

Protect the environment by preventing or minimizing the environmental impact

due to plant activities and products through appropriate design, manufacturing,

distribution and by promoting responsible use and disposal practices.

Develop products and processes that help preserve resources and the environment





275

6.1.6.4 Safety Organizational Cell

Fig 6.1 Safety organizational cell

6.1.7 Emergency Planning & Procedure

6.1.7.1 Emergency Control Centre

Emergency Control Centre (ECC) is cell from which emergency operations are directed and

coordinated. This centre activates as soon as on–site emergency is declared.

6.1.7.2 General Description of ECC

The ECC is located in an area that offers minimal risk being directly exposed to possible

accidents. During an emergency, the Emergency Management Staff, including the site

controller shall gather in the ECC. Therefore, the ECC shall be equipped with adequate

communication systems in the form of telephones and other equipment to allow unhampered

organisations and other nearby facility personnel.

The ECC provides shelter to its occupants against the most common accidents; in addition,

the ECC’s communication systems are protected from possible shutdown. ECC has its own

emergency lighting arrangement and electric communication systems operation. Table 6.2

shows Team involved in Emergency planning & Table 6.3 names, details and contact

numbers of Emergency Task Force.

Only a limited and prearranged number of people are admitted to the ECC, when in use. This

eliminates unnecessary interference and reduces confusion. The ECC is always ready for

operation and provided with the equipment and supplies necessary during the emergency

such as:

Updated copies of the on–site Disaster Management Plan.

Emergency telephone numbers.

The names, phone number, and address of external agencies, response

organizations and neighbouring facilities.





276

The adequate number of telephone (more than two).

Emergency lights, Clocks, Personal protective equipment.

List of fire extinguishers with their type no. and location, capacity, etc.

Safety helmets – List of quantity & location.

Status boards/message board.

Material safety data sheets for chemicals handled at the facility.

Several maps of the facility including drainage system for surrounding area

showing:

Areas where hazardous materials are stored.

Plot plans of storage tanks, routes of pipelines, all water permanent

lines etc.

The locations where personal protective equipment are stored.

The position of pumping stations and other water sources.

Roads and plant entrances.

Assembly areas & layout of Hydrant line

Table 6.2 Emergency Team Chart

Emergency Task Force

Core Team Support Team

Coordinator Coordinator

1 Fir service 1 Finance

2 Safety 2 Accounting

3 Environmental cell 3 Material

4 Security 4 Transport

5 OHC 5 Welfare

6 Engineering service department 6 Purchase

7 HR 7 Computer system

8 Communication

9 Technology

Onsite Chief Controller-President/Sr. VP

Site Incident Controller(Senior most functionary)

Deputy Site Incident Controller(Shift In charge Process)

Table 6.3 Emergency Task Force Table

Sl.

No. NAME Contact phone

Core Team Coordinator

1 Safety Services Santhosh Patil 9108709976

2 Emergency cell Vishwanath S Patil 9606951171

3 Security services Nagarchi 9741448381

4 OHS V B Dhundare 9606951183

5 Engineering Service Dept Abhay M Sale 9822622693

6 HR U C Choukimath 9448341808

7 Communication Vinayak Nayak 9972136544





277

8 Technical services Suresh Adagimani 8105969193

9 Environmental Cell Katigeri 9686850132

SUPPORT TEAM COORDINATOR

1 Finance Sujay Jadav 9844304000

2 Material N S Mangsule 9606951172

3 Stores B K Shintre 9902706923

4 Transport Muttappa Hosur 7795738631

5 Purchase Samir Attar 9606951173

6 Computer /IT M A Bagwan 9606951177

6.1.7.3 Emergency Planning for Disaster due to Fire

Cable rooms, transformer, unit, auxiliary transformers, oil tanks, etc. within the plant are the

likely areas for which disaster management plan is to be made to deal with any eventuality of

fire. Stores, workshop, canteen and administrative building will be included.

6.1.7.4 The main hazard potentials in the proposed Harsha Sugar Plant are as under

Material hazards of Bagasse for boiler unit. Mainly prone to fire due to store in open

yard.

Process hazards due to loss of containment during handling of hazardous materials or

processes resulting in fire, explosion, toxicity etc.

Mechanical hazards –due to mechanical operation such as welding, maintenance,

falling objects etc. basically those NOT connected to hazardous material.

Electrical hazards: electrocution, high voltage levels, short circuit, etc.

Out of these, the material and process hazards are the one with a much wider damage

potential as compared to the mechanical and electrical hazards, which are by and large

limited to small pockets local pockets.

6.1.7.5Nature of Disaster

Disaster can occur as on site or off-site variety i.e. disaster on campus or disaster in

nearby area causing indirect damage to site area & the complex. Disaster may occur

due to 2 categories, natural and manmade calamities

Natural calamities cover Flood, Storm / typhoon, Earthquake, Tsunami, Heavy mist,

fog, hail storm, Land slide.

Manmade calamities involve Fire & Explosion, All types of leakages & spillage,

Electrocution, excavation, construction, erection, Sabotage, rail & road accidents,

mass agitation, Looting, Morcha, war.

6.1.7.6 The identified hazardous areas in the process are

Boiler area � Explosion

Oil tanks � Fire and spillage

Turbine section � Explosion

Electrical rooms � Fire and electrocution

Transformer area � Fire and electrocution

Cable � Fire and electrocution





278

Storage facilities – Fire / spillage for fuel and alcohol

Considering various probabilities, the management & safety department has to create

awareness & preparedness in all employees and people in vicinity area in case of any sort of

emergency to occur & a chalked out attempt to surely overcome the disaster in time. This

includes preparation of onsite and offsite disaster control plans, mock drills at least 2 times

calendar year, reports for the same to DISH & due amendments for the perfect

implementation.

6.1.7.7 Level of Accident

If there is any disaster in any part of plant/work place due to any reason the level of accidents

from damage point of view may vary. Accordingly, safety program will have to be initiated

by safety department simultaneously.

6.1.7.8 Critical Targets during Emergency

6.1.7.8.1 Level I Accidents

Under this level disaster may happen due to electrocution, fire explosion, oil spillage and

spontaneous ignition of combustible material. This level has probability of occurrence

affecting persons inside the plant. Various hazardous areas identified above are to be affected

due to level I accidents.

6.1.7.8.2 Level II Accidents

Disaster of this level can occur in case of sabotage and complete failure of all automatic

control/warning systems, and also if the fuel oil stored in tank and covered by tank bunds

leaks out. However, probability of occurrence of this is very low due to the proposed

adequate security training, and education level of plant personnel for the captive power plant.

Hazardous inventory as per project data will be as under

Table 6.4 Hazardous material storage Inventory

Sl

No

Hazardous Materials Quantity

1 RS 1000m3

2 ENA 1000m3

3 IS storage 1000m3

4 Day tank RS 80m3

5 Day tank ENA 80m3

6 Day tank IS 15m3

7 Sulphur 5 TPD or 150TPM

8 Bagasse 2250TPD

6.1.8 Safety Policy and Regulations

Keeping in view of the safety requirement during construction, operation and maintenance

phase Harsha Sugar Plant has safety policy in place.

6.1.8.1 Harsha Sugar Plant has formulated safety policy with the following regulations.

To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy policy at work place





279

To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken in to account in the

design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and equipment.

To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employee

To provide wherever necessary, protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing

and to ensure their proper use.

To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their work area

known to be potentially hazardous to health and safety

To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making

necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up to

date knowledge.

To provide appropriate instruction, training and supervision in health and safety, first

aid and ensure that adequate publicity is given to these matters.

To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention and appropriate fire fighting

services together with training facilities for personnel involved in this service.

To ensure that professional advice is made available wherever potentially hazardous

situations exit or might arise.

To organize collection, analysis & presentation of data on accident, sickness &

incident involving personal injury to health with a view of taking corrective, remedial

and preventive action

To promote through the establishment machinery, joint consultation in health & safety

matters to ensure effective participation by all employees.

To publish/ notify regulation, instruction and notice in the common language of

employee.

To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/process involved in a

project.

To ensure regular safety inspection by a component person at suitable intervals of all

buildings equipment, work places and operation.

6.1.8.2An Approach to Risk Assessment

The objectives of Risk assessment are to control, prevent or reduce loss of life, illness, or

injury, damage to property and consequential loss and environmental impact.

Before risk can be effectively managed, it must be analyzed. The analysis of risk is a useful

tool for:

Identifying risks and approaches to their solution

Facilitating objective decisions on the acceptability of risk

Meeting regulatory requirement

The results of risk assessment can be used by a decision-maker to help to judge the

tolerability of risk and aid in choosing between potential risk reduction and avoidance

measures. From the decision-makers perspective some of the principal benefits of risk

assessment include:

Systematic identification of potential hazards

Systematic identification of potential failure modes

Quantitative risk statements or ranking





280

Evaluation of possible modifications to reduce risk or achieve better dependability

levels

Identification of the important contributors to risk and weak links in a system

Better Understanding of the system and its installation

Comparison of risks to those of alternative systems or technologies

Identification and communication of risks and uncertainties

Help in establishing priorities for improved health and safety

A basis for preventive maintenance and inspection to be rationalized

Post-accident investigation and prevention

Selection between alternatives such as different risk-reduction measures and

technologies

Prevention of economic loss, etc

All these play an important role in effective risk management.

6.1.9 Scope of Work

a) Hazard Identification:

Study of ongoing operations being carried out at facility and Engineering information,

Piping and Instrumentation diagrams (P&ID), plot and layout plans.

Identification of fire, explosion & other health hazards;

Analysis of inventories in storage and handling units with recourse to Manufacture,

Storage & Import Of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 2000 and Fire- Explosion &

Toxicity Index (FE& TI);

Identification of accident sequences and consequences with recourse to Event Tree

Analysis (ETA) and to evaluate propensity of occurrence of the top event through

Fault Tree Analysis (FTA);

Past accident data/information analysis in similar installations to develop the

credibility of worst come worst accident scenarios; and

Visualization of Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) scenarios.

(B) Analysis of MCA Scenarios:

Analysis of identified MCA scenarios and quantification of primary effects and to evaluate

the domino effects with recourse to computerized mathematical models pertaining to cases

of:

Alcohol/ENA/RS outflow and its release

Spilled Product fire

Tank on fire and Pool Fire

Vapour cloud explosion (VCE)

Fire in bagasse stock piles

Fire/explosion in Sulphur storage

Application of damage criteria for heat radiation with recourse to health criteria, dose-

response relations and vulnerability models.





281

(C) Recommendations based on:

Observations on the operational practices & Installation hardware

Findings of the Risk Analysis & safety review Check-list

Fire fighting& other emergency facilities available

Observations during the Mock Drill

Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 2000

Relevant OIL Industries Safety Directorate (OISD) Guidelines/PESO guidelines

6.1.10 Inventory of Hazardous Material

Inventory and type of flammable products plays the important role in analysis of risk, hazards

and their consequences. To analyze Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) Scenarios,

maximum inventory of the Stock material at the along with the road tank trucks present in the

vicinity of the site for loading/unloading have been considered. As well as, leakage through

pipeline/bursting of line containing in transit.

Maximum storage capacity of Hazardous material according to Flammability class is

tabulated as under:

Table 6.5 Maximum Inventories of Harsha Sugar Plant Products (with Flash Points)

Flammability

Class Flash Point Range

oC Products Total Capacity

A FP < 23 Ethanol/RS/ENA 60 KLPD

6.2 Hazard Identification and Visualization of MCA Scenarios

6.2.1 Introduction

“Risk” is loss per unit time and is the product of the consequence of an event and the

frequency of its occurrence. All activities involve some risk. In our everyday life, people

engaged in an activity frequently perform their own risk assessment often intuitively. The

level of risk deemed to be acceptable is highly subjective, varies from person to person, and

depends on many factors. Total avoidance of risk (zero risk) is an unattainable goal. Risk can,

however, be reduced through the implementation of control measures, engineering design and

good management practices.

The starting point of the risk analysis study is the identification of hazards and selection of

scenarios which are then addressed for further analysis.

"Hazard" is a characteristic of a system, Installation or processes that present potential for an

accident. It is defined as a chemical or physical condition that has the potential for causing

damage to people, property or the environment. Therefore, all the relevant aspects of

hazardous material storage and handling process have been thoroughly examined to assess

their potential for initiating or propagating an unintentional event or sequence of events,

which can lead to an accident or disaster. Type, quantity, location & conditions of release of

the hazardous material under various scenarios have been examined in order to estimate its

damage potential, area affected, and based on that, the precautionary measures needed to be

taken are suggested in Independent Heading – “RECOMMENDATIONS”





282

6.2.2 Hazard potential: Deciding factor

Factors considered to identify and analyze the hazard potential are:

Flash point & Boiling point of the alcohol /flammable Products as well as intrinsic

chemical properties of bagasse and sulphur

Inventory of the alcohol /flammable, bagasse and sulphur.

Potential for loss from containment/fire in stock

Pool size & dyke capacity

Potential for availability of ignition sources in the vicinity of leakage or spillage

Apart from the characteristics and process of its handling, size & layout of the sugar plant are

also analyzed in order to assess the hazard potential.

6.2.3 Identification of Hazards

Identification of hazards is of primary significance in the analysis, quantification and cost-

effective control of accidents involving hazardous stock of material and their operations.

Alcohol/ flammable, bagasse, sulphur require sufficient interaction with air or oxygen for

their mixture to form in presence of ignition source and then for occurrence of their hazards

associated with them. Under certain circumstances, vapours of the products when mixed with

air may be explosive especially in confined spaces. Following methods of hazard

identification have been employed in this study:

All hazardous materials present on the site, and or transported to and from the site are

identified

The properties of these hazardous materials are reviewed in order to categories the

possible hazards

Characterization of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and Import

of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, Government of India, 2000; referred here as MSIHC

Rules.

Identification of hazardous installations based on relative ranking technique, viz.

Dow's Fire Explosion Index and Mond's Toxicity Index (FE & TI)

The site facilities and transport systems are examined to identify where the hazardous

materials are present and the conditions under which they are contained

The major hazards in petrochemical, chemical plants and installations are due to substances

within the Installations that can be released to cause either:

Fire

Explosion

Toxic effect (Poisoning)

At Harsha Sugar Plant, Fire and Explosion are the major hazards due to handling and storage

of products. At Harsha Sugar Plant, Alcohol is the main HZ flammable material having

potential threat to fire and explosion. We therefore consider all possible MCA with respect to

these inventories. The credible accident scenarios with these materials can be –

Pool fire

Jet fire





283

Spill fire

Tank on fire

VCE

BLEVE

Pressure waves

Stock pile fire and other incidental conducive conditions

However, each scenario can cause potential damage under favourable conditions. But

obvious chances for incidences are remote as all safety gears are in place with due practice.

More over all scenarios have been visualized vis-à-vis most credible one. IT can be

quantified to assess possible damage and hence planning for preventive as well as protective

arrangement also being designed, reviewed. Most of them are not credible scenarios under

normal conditions. Their probability of occurrence has been rated lesser then 1 in million

years as per standard prescribe text (TNO GREEN BOOK). Accordingly, such scenarios have

been considered as acceptable risk. We therefore restricted our estimation of damage

potential for spill fire/tank on fire cases for sake of symbolic risk assessment. OISD also

prescribe safety measures towards mitigation measures and suggested control as well as fire

fighting gears to be in place. Accordingly, hydrant lining monitors, cooling water, water

storage static tank, ROV, automation etc. have been integrated.

For estimation of damage potential, we need to understand intrinsic properties of Hazardous

stock. By simulating scenario and thus applying modeling software we can assess extent of

damage potential as well as quantum. In our further collation, we are compiling those

attributes and evaluate the different cases for risk mapping.

6.2.4 Physico – Chemical Properties of Alcohol /ENA/RS/AA

We use generic work Alcohol (similar almost RS/ENA/AA) is highly inflammable in their

basic character (depending on Flammability class). They are dangerous because of their

intrinsic properties, i.e. flash point, ignition energy required, heat of combustion,

flammability limits, etc. In addition to such intrinsic properties, extrinsic factors like quantity

of storage, Type of storage (A/G or U/G) and operating conditions are also considered for

hazard identification. Physico-chemical properties of the Alcohol products, to be stored

during operation phase of Harsha Sugars Ltd., are given in Table 6.6

Table 6.6 Hazardous Properties of Alcohol

SN Properties Ethanol

1 Physical State Highly Volatile

2 ALCOHOL Act/OISD

Flammability Class

A

3 Specific Gravity 0.79

4 Reactive to -

5 Flash point ºC (Range) < 23

6 Boiling point ºC 78.32

7 Auto – Ignition Temperature ºC 422

8 Specific Heat (KJ/Kg °K) 2.13





284

9 Heat of Evaporation (KJ/Kg) 85.38

10 Heat of Combustion (KJ/Kg) 30624

Table 6.7 Flammability Classification Criteria

SN Flammability Class Flash point (°C)

1 Class A Flammable Liquid FP < 23

2 Class B Flammable Liquid 23 > FP <65

3 Class C Flammable Liquid 65 > FP < 93

4 Excluded ALCOHOL More than 93

6.2.5 Applicable MSIHC Rules 2000

Major hazard installations in the country have been identified & characterized by MSIHC

(Manufacturing, storage and Identification of Hazardous Chemicals) Rules, amended in 2000.

The rules employ certain criteria based on flammable, explosive & toxic properties and

quantity of the chemicals. Indicative criteria adopted in the MSIHC Rules, 2000 and

description of applicable provisions of the rules is given in Appendix I.

As per provisions of the MSIHC Rules, 2000 quantity of alcohol Product Storage at the

Installations has been analyzed and the applicable rules are identified based on the type of

alcohol products, quantity of storage and the threshold quantity given in the rules. Applicable

regulations of MSIHC Rules, 2000 to the Installations are identified in the following Table

6.9

All alcohol products marketing locations fall under the category of isolated storage, which

comes under schedule 2 of MSIHC Rules. Threshold quantities and applicability of various

rules are as follows:

Table 6.8 Applicability of MSIHC Rules

SN

Product Storage Capacity Threshold Quantity (MT) as

per MSIHC Rules* Applicable Rules

Class In m3

For Rules 4,5,7

to 9 & 13 to 15

For Rules

10 to 12

1 Class A

1000 m3

(Bulk storage for each product at

distillery)

7000 7000

2(e)(i) & (ii), 2(h)(i),

4,5,7 to 9, 10 to 12

& 13 to 15

Rule 2: Identification for Existence of "Hazardous Chemicals”

"Hazardous chemicals" are existing in the HPCL, Installation as per rule 2(e)(i) &

2(e)(ii), alcohol products existing at the Depot are covered under Schedule I(b)(ii)

"Industrial Activity" carried out in the Depot involves operation / processes having

hazardous chemicals and includes their on-site storage & transportation as per Rule

2(h) (i). “Isolated storage” of alcohol products is covered in schedule 2.

Rule 3: Duties of the Government Authorities

Duties of the Government Authorities as per schedule V.





285

Rule 4: General Responsibility of Occupier

As "hazardous chemicals" exist in the Depot the occupier has to provide evidence to show

that he has:

Identified the major accident hazards &

Taken adequate steps to:

Prevent such major accidents and to limit their consequences to persons &

environment.

Provide information, training and safety equipments, including antidotes to the

persons working on site to ensure their safety

Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents

Notification of "Major Accidents" in the format given in Schedule 6 to Chief

Inspector of factories and to other authorities as listed in Schedule V.

Rule 7: Notification of Site

Notification of site and updated information of the modifications to the competent

authority as per Schedule VII.

Rule 8: Updating of the Site Notification Following Changes in the Threshold Quantity

Any change in the “threshold quantity” (storage quantity) is to be notified to the

competent authority.

Rule 9: Transitional Provision

Transitional Provision for the existing activity

Rule 10: Safety Reports

Preparation of Safety report by the occupier & to carry out an independent safety

audit once in a year.

Rule 11: Updating of report under rule 10

Updating of safety reports based on modification.

Rule 12: Requirement for further information to be sent to the authority

Further information on safety reports to the authority.

Rule 13: Preparation to On-sire emergency plan by the occupier

Preparation of onsite emergency plan by the occupier & to conduct mock drill once in

every 6 months.

Rule 14: Preparation of Off-sire emergency plan by the occupier

Preparation of offsite emergency plan by the occupier & to conduct mock drill once in

every Year.

Rule 15: Information to be given to persons liable to be affected by a major accident





286

Rule 17: Collection, Development and Dissemination of Information on "Hazardous

Chemicals" Employed by the Occupier

Material Safety Data Sheet is to be prepared as per Schedule IX

Every container of hazardous chemical should be labelled or marked to identify

Contents of the container

The name and the address of the manufacturer

Physical, Chemical and Toxicological data as per the criteria given in Schedule I

: Part I

Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals

The rule is applicable as “hazardous chemicals” as per Schedule 1 Part I (b) (ii) exist

in the Installation.

To provide timely information to various Govt. Authorities listed in Schedule V

Name & address of the company receiving the consignment in India

The port of entry in India

Mode of transport from exporting country to India

The quantity of chemicals being imported

Complete product safety information

6.2.6 Fire Explosion Index (FEI) Analysis

Introduction & Objectives

The most widely used relative ranking hazard indices are Dow chemical Company's Fire

Explosion Index (FEI) and Mond's Toxicity Index (TI). They are commonly together

referred to as Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FEI & TI).

FEI and TI involve objective evaluation of the realistic fire, explosion, toxicity and

reactivity potential of process or storage units. The quantitative methodology relies on the

analysis based on historic loss data, the energy content of the chemical under study and the

extent to which loss prevention measures are already incorporated. FEI are primarily

designed for operations involving storage, handling and processing of flammable,

combustible and reactive chemicals.

Table 6.9 Fire & Explosion Index & Category

SN Fire & Explosion Index (FEI) Category

1 FEI <60 Light

2 61> FEI <96 Moderate

3 97>FEI <127 Intermediate

4 128 >FEI <158 Heavy

5 159 and more Severe

Computations of FEI for storage units of sugar plant are computed in the following Table.

Here only FEI is computed, because alcohol is inflammable in nature and not toxic. Toxic





287

effect is left just momentary and hence not dangerous as other real toxic chemicals e.g.

Chlorine.

Table 6.10 Fire Explosion Index for Storage Units

SN Product Product

Capacity

Material Factor Penalties Fire & Explosion

NH NF NR MF GPH SPH Index Category

1 Ethanol 60 KLPD 0 3 0 16 0.5 1.67 64.14 Moderate

Ethanol Storage Tanks (Coming under Moderate), all other Storage Tanks falls under light

category

6.2.7 Visualization of MCA Scenarios

6.2.7.1 Introduction

A Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) can be characterized as an accident with a maximum

damage potential, which is believed to be credible. For selection of a MCA scenario

following factors have been taken into account.

Flammability of the alcohol Products

Quantity of Products present in the tank

Process or storage conditions such as temperature, pressure, flow, mixing and

presence of incompatible materials

In addition to the above factors, location of the unit with respect to adjacent establishment has

been taken into consideration to account for the potential of escalation of an accident. This

phenomenon is known as the domino or secondary effect. In order to visualize MCA

scenarios Chemical Inventory Analysis, Event Tree Analysis and Past Accident Review have

been employed.

6.2.7.2 Chemical Inventory Analysis

Maximum inventory of ALCOHOL Products, bagasse, sulphur, in pipeline/transit sections,

storage units and handling equipments has been considered.

6.2.7.3 Identification of Chemical Release & Accident Scenarios

Credible accident scenarios for the Depot have been divided into following categories

according to the mode of release of alcohol products, physical effects and the resulting

damages:

Jet fire (leakage of alcohol products from a tank/pipe/pump/joints and the products

stream catching fire in case of Ethanol)

Spilled product Fire (Release of alcohol products from valve joints, loose

connections, etc.)

Pool fire (release of alcohol products from a tank, rupture of pipeline sections, etc.

forming a pool within the area thereafter catching fire)

Tank on Fire (due to external heat, joints of roof of tank get loose and it get thrown

outside and if the surface of tank catches fire, it is termed as tank on fire)

Unconfined Vapour Cloud Explosion (UVCE) as a secondary effect of above

mentioned scenarios





288

Fire in stock pile of bagasse, sulphur under favourable conditions

6.2.7.4 Even Tree Analysis (ETA) to define outcome of release

Different outcomes of a leakage or catastrophic failure are possible depending on if and when

ignition occurs and the consequences thereupon. ETA considers various possibilities such as

immediate or delayed ignition for the different outcomes to occur.

ETA diagram for various modes of failures of storage tank/ pump/ pipe/ joints for

atmospheric storage of alcohol products have been developed for conditions such as

overfilling, over-pressure and remote incidents like missile, lightening or bomb attack and

earthquake. The resultant ruptures of vessels or leak incidents have been identified with

possible outcomes of such incidents. Even tree Analysis for Harsha Sugars Ltd., is shown in

Figure 6.2. Scenarios pertaining to leakage & spillage are most credible in such Installation.

6.2.7.5 Fault Tree Analysis to Explore Propensity for Occurrence of the Top Event

In ALCOHOL Installations, it is important to analyze the possible mechanisms of failure and

to perform probabilistic analysis for the expected rate of such failures. A technique like Fault

Tree Analysis (FTA) can suitably be used for this purpose. Any system represented by a fault

tree has components that operate in series or parallel, with the contribution of the two being

most frequent. These components are studied for their failure and the possible causes are

linked together through logical gates. Thus, a complete network is formed using logical gates

for different causes and consequences. This network represents a system for which propensity

towards top event is examined.

To construct a fault tree for a present case, Pool fire scenario is designated as the "top event”.

Tracing backward, exactly opposite to the forward approach followed in Event Tree Analysis

(ETA), all failures that could lead to the top event are found. Then all failures leading to each

of those events are identified. The word `event' means conditions, which are deviations from

the normal or planned state of operation of a system.

The evaluation of fault tree may be qualitative or quantitative or both depending on the scope

of analysis and requirement. The aim of fault tree evaluation is to determine whether an

acceptable level of safety has been incorporated in the design of the system or not. Suitable

design improvements to minimize the probability of occurrence of top event are found out.

The system safety is upgraded by evaluating the critical events that significantly contribute to

the top event and the measures provided to cope with such eventualities.

6.2.7.6 Short Listing of MCA Scenarios

Based on the hazard identification and comparing the nature of installation with that from

past accidents in similar units, a final list of MCA scenarios for the Depot has been made,

which is tabulated below. These are the maximum credible accidents, which may occur, in

the respective unit.

Table 6.11 Short Listing of MCA Scenarios for Hazardous material

SI.No Tank No/stock piles. Hazardous

Product

MCA Scenario

1 Bulk Storage Ethanol/ ENA/

RS/AA

Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Tank on

Fire& VCE

2 Stock Bagasse/sulphur Stock pile fire/dust explosion





289

The above foreseen accident scenarios will have certain adverse effects on the nearby

units/structures in the Depot which may lead to escalation of the accident further.

Consequences of the entire above maximum credible accident scenarios have been analyzed

in detail in the section: Consequence Analysis.

Fig 6.2 Event Tree Analysis for Atmospheric Storage of Flammable Liquids

Fig 6.3 Fault Tree Analysis for Top Event of Pool Fire Scenario





290

6.2.7.7 Consequence analysis

6.2.7.7.1 Introduction

This chapter deals with the quantification of various effects of release of

ALCOHOL/hazardous material products on the surrounding area by means of mathematical

models and internationally recognized Safety software.

It is intended to give an insight into how the physical effects resulting from the release of

hazardous substances can be calculated by means of computerized models and how the

vulnerability models can be used to translate the physical effects in terms of injuries and

damage to exposed population & environment.

Table 6.12 Mathematical and Analytical Model for Hazard Analysis

SN Phenomenon Applicable Models

1 Outflows:

Liquid, Two phase

Mixtures, Gas/vapour

Bernoulli flow equation; phase equilibrium; multiphase

flow models; orifice/nozzle flow equations; gas laws;

critical flow criteria

2 Discharges:

Spreading liquid

Vapour jets

Flashing liquids

Evaporation of liquids on land

& water

Spreading rate equation for non-penetrable surfaces

based on cylindrical liquid pools

Turbulent free jet model

Two zone flash vaporization models

Spreading, boiling & moving boundary heat transfer

models; Film & meta-stable boiling phenomenon;

cooling of semi-infinite medium

3 Dispersion:

Heavy Gas

Natural Gas

Atmospheric stability

Boundary dominated, stable stratified &

positive dispersion models (similarity)

3D Models based on momentum, mass &

energy conservation

Gaussian Dispersion models for naturally

buoyant plumes

Boundary layer theory (turbulence), Gauss Ian

distribution models

4 Heat Radiation:

Liquid pool fires

Jet fires

Fire balls

Stock pile fire

Burning rate, heat radiation & incident heat correlation

(semi imperial); Flame propagation behaviour models

Fire jet dispersion model

API fire ball models relating surface heat flux of flame,

geometric view factor & transmission coefficients

5 Vulnerability:

Likely damage

Probit functions; Non-Stochastic vulnerability models

First, attention is paid to the factors, which are decisive for the selection of the models to be

used in a particular situation, after which the various effect models are discussed.





291

6.2.7.7.2 Factors which Influence the use of Physical Effect Model

In order to calculate the physical effects of the incidental release of hazardous substances the

following steps have been carried out in succession:

Understanding of the form in which the hazardous substance is in existence (i.e. liquid

of highly volatile nature in case of alcohol Product)

Determination of the various ways in which the release can take place

Determination of the outflow volume or quantity (as a function of time) i.e. estimating

rate of evaporation from the pool of liquid;

Solid hazardous stock like bagasse as well as sulphur

In the case of ALCOHOL Product, quantity of leaked or spilled Product along with pool size

has been calculated. Finally, the analysis results in computation of heat radiation intensity

(KW/m2) with respect to distance for various MCA scenarios. In this analysis, final effect

calculations have been made for pool fire for heat radiation intensity effects with respect to

distance from dyke wall. However, for stock pile fire black body radiation strength can be

computed.

6.2.8 Models for determining the source strength for the release of

hazardous substances

Source strength of a release means the quantity of the substance released with respect to time.

The release may be instantaneous or continuous. In case of instantaneous release, the strength

of the source is given in Kg whereas in continuous release source strength depends on the

outflow time and expressed in Kg/s. In order to find the source strength, it is first necessary to

determine the state of a substance in a vessel or pipe along with physical properties, viz.

vapour pressure & minimum ignition energy required. Phase of alcohol Product at the time of

accidental release is also to be determined. This may be gas, gas condensed to liquid or liquid

in equilibrium with its vapour.

6.2.8.1 Instantaneous Release

In the event of the instantaneous release of a liquid a pool of liquid will form. The

evaporation can be calculated on the basis of pool size, volatile nature of the product (i.e.

vapour pressure) and meteorological conditions.

6.2.8.2 Semi – Continuous Outflow

In the case of a semi continuous outflow, it is again first of all necessary to determine

whether it is gas, a gas condensed to liquid or liquid that is flowing out. The following

situations can occur here.

a) Gas Outflow:

The model with which the source strength is determined in the event of a gas outflow

is based on the assumption that there is no liquid in the system.

b) Liquid Outflow:

In case of liquid outflow, discharge due to overall head difference takes place.





292

6.2.9 Model for Evaporation

In application of evaporation models, alcohol product is a case of volatile liquid. From the

pool, which has formed, evaporation will take place as a result of the heat flow from the

ground and solar radiation. The evaporation model only takes account of the heat flow from

the ground since the heat resulting from solar radiation is negligibly small compared with the

former. The evaporation rate depends on the kind of liquid and the kind of subsoil.

6.2.10 Model for Dispersion

The gas or vapour released either instantaneously or continuously will be spread in the

surrounding area under the influence of the atmospheric turbulence. In the case of gas

dispersion, a distinction is required to be made between neutral gas dispersion and heavy gas

dispersion. The concentrations of the gas released in the surrounding area can be calculated

by means of these dispersion models. These concentrations are important for determining the

nature of accidents for example an explosive gas cloud formation injuries will occur in the

case of toxic gases.

6.2.10.1 Heavy Gas Dispersion Model

If the gas density is higher than that of air due to higher molecular weight or marked cooling,

it will tend to spread in a radial direction because of gravity. This results in a "gas pool" of a

particular height and diameter. As a result of this, in contrast to a neutral gas, the gas released

may spread against the direction of the wind.

6.2.11 Model for Heat Load and Shock Waves

6.2.11.1 Model for flare

If an out-flowing vapour (in case of class A Products) forms a cloud with concentrations

between the lower and upper explosion limit and ignition takes place,

momentary/instantaneous/luminous fire film may occur for fraction of seconds. A model with

which the length of a torch and the thermal load for the surrounding area can be calculated,

assumes an elliptic shaped torch. The volume of the flare in this model is proportional to the

outflow. In order to calculate the thermal load, flare is regarded as a point source located at

the centre of the flare. This centre is taken as being half a flare length from the point of

outflow.

6.2.11.2 Model for jet fire

In this event, if out-going stream is due to small opening / hole in the storage tank / valve

joints having sufficient liquid head may result in jet fire if it catches ignition source.

6.2.11.3 Model for Spilled/Pool fire/Tank on Fire

The schematic of a pool fire is depicted in fig. The heat load on objects outside a burning

pool of liquid can be calculated with the heat radiation model. This model uses average

radiation intensity, which is dependent on the liquid. Account is also taken of the diameter-to-

height ratio of the fire, which depends on the burning liquid. In addition, the heat load is also

influenced by the following factors:

Distance from the fire

Relative humidity (water vapour has relatively high heat absorbing capacity)





293

The orientation i.e. horizontal/vertical of the object irradiated with respect to the fire

6.2.12 Vulnerability Model

Vulnerability models or dose response relations, which, are used in order to determine how

people are injured by exposure to heat load or a toxic dose. Such models are designed on the

basis of animal experiments or on the basis of the analysis of injuries resulting from

accidents, which have occurred. Vulnerability models often make use of a Probit function. In

a Probit function a link is made between the load and the percentage of people exposed who

suffer a particular type of injury. The Probit function is represented as follows:

Pr = k1 + k2 ln V in which,

P = Probit, a measure for the percentage of people exposed who incur a particular

injury (relation between percentages & Probit is given in Table 6.13.

k1 = A constant depending on the type of injury and type of load

k2 = A constant depending on the type of load

V = Load or dose

Table 6.13 Relationship between Percentage and Probit

Percentage Probit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 - 2.67 2.95 3.12 3.25 3.36 3.45 3.52 3.59 3.66

10 3.72 3.77 3.82 3.87 3.92 3.96 4.01 4.05 4.08 4.12

20 4.16 4.19 4.23 4.26 4.29 4.33 4.36 4.39 4.42 4.45

30 4.48 4.50 4.53 4.56 4.59 4.61 4.64 4.67 4.69 4.72

40 4.75 4.77 4.80 4.83 4.85 4.87 4.90 4.92 4.95 4.97

50 5.00 5.03 5.05 5.08 5.10 5.13 5.15 5.18 5.20 5.23

60 5.25 5.28 5.31 5.33 5.36 5.39 5.41 5.44 5.45 5.50

70 5.52 5.55 5.58 5.61 5.64 5.67 5.71 5.74 5.77 5.81

80 5.84 5.88 5.92 5.95 5.99 6.04 6.08 6.13 6.18 6.23

90 6.28 6.34 6.41 6.48 6.55 6.64 6.75 6.88 7.05 7.33

- 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

99 7.33 7.37 7.41 7.46 7.51 7.58 7.65 7.75 7.88 8.09

6.2.12.1 Injuries resulting from flammable liquids and gases

In the case of flammable liquids and gases and immediate ignition a pool fire or a flare will

occur depending on the conditions. The injuries in this case are mainly caused by heat

radiation.

6.2.12.2 Damage Models for Heat Radiation

It is assumed that everyone inside the area covered by the fire ball, a torch, a burning pool or

gas cloud will be burned to death or will asphyxiate. The following Probit functions are an

example of a method, which can be used to calculate the percentage of lethality, and first-





294

degree burns that will occur at a particular thermal load and period of exposure of an

unprotected body.

Lethality: Pr = -36.83 + 2.56 ln (t.q4/3)

First degree burn symptoms: Pr = -39.83 + 3.0186 in (t.q4/3)

In which, t = exposure time in seconds and;

q = thermal load W/m2

Two values have been chosen for the exposure time to heat radiation:

10 seconds: for exposed persons in populated area it is assumed that they will

have found protection from the heat radiation e.g. from a wall, within 10 seconds

30 seconds: this pessimistic assumption applies if people do not run away

immediately or when no protection is available

Thermal radiations for particular Heat Radiation Intensity (KW/m2) give different impacts. It

depends on Intensity of Heat Radiation and surrounding facilities. Following table describes

the damage due to particular Heat Intensity.

Table 6.14 Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads

Incident Radiation intensity,

KW/m2

Type of damage Intensity

Damage to Equipment Damage to People

62.0 Spontaneous Ignition of

Wood Table 6.14

100% Lethality (severe damage)

37.5 Sufficient to cause damage to

process equipment

100% lethality in 1 min. and 1%

lethality in 10 sec.

25.0

Minimum energy required to

ignite wood, at infinitely long

exposure (non-piloted)

50% Lethality in 1 min. and

Significant injury in 10 sec.

19.0

Maximum thermal radiation

intensity allowed on thermally

unprotected equipment

-

12.5

Minimum energy required for

piloted ignition of wood,

melting plastic tubing etc.

1% lethality in 1 min.

9.5 - Pain threshold reached after 15

seconds

6.4

- Pain threshold reached after 8

seconds. Second Degree burns after

20 seconds.

4.5

- Sufficient to cause pain to

personnel if unable to reach cover

within 20 seconds, however

blistering of skin (first degree

burns) is likely

2.0 PVC insulated cables

damaged

-





295

1.6

- Will cause no discomfort to long

exposure. Pain threshold reached

after 60 seconds

0.7

- Equivalent to solar radiation.

Exposed skin reddens and burns on

prolonged exposure

Source: Reference Green book “Methods for Determination of Possible Damage”, TNO,

Netherlands; World Bank (1988); Technical Report No. 55: Techniques for Assessing

Industrial Hazards; D.C.: The World Bank

The level of damage caused is a function of duration of exposure as well as heat flux. This is

true both for the effects on buildings and Installation equipment as well as personnel.

However, the variation in likely exposure time is much more marked with personnel due to

possibility of findings shelter.

The following table gives the relationship between exposure time and heat flux against the

fatality probability factors. Fatality Probability due to thermal radiation:

Table 6.15 Relationship between exposure time and heat flux

Percentage of Fatality 10% 50% 99%

Heat Flux (KW/m2) Times in Seconds

1.6 500 1300 3200

4.0 150 370 930

12.5 30 80 200

37.5 8 20 50

In general, it might be possible to take to a “shelter” within 30-60 seconds. As can be seen

from above table, the change between very low to very high fatality probabilities occurs

between flux levels of 12.5 kw/m2 and 37.5 kw/m

2. For transient fires like fire ball, the steady

state heat flux levels cannot be used to estimate the damage. The degree of thermal radiation

in terms of total incident thermal energy dose levels are relevant as shown in table below:

Table 6.16 Physiological effect of Threshold Thermal Dose:

Thermal Threshold Dose (KJ/m2) Effects

37.5 3rd

Degree Burns

25.0 2nd

Degree Burns

12.5 1st Degree Burns

6.5 Threshold of Pain or blistering of skin

6.2.13 Impact of Overpressure

Pressure wave’s results due to catastrophic failure or rupture of storage tank/pipeline etc. it

results in generation of high pressure waves which have potential to cause damage to

property/personnel/equipments/neighbouring areas. A peak over pressure of 0.1 bar is taken

as the limit for fatal injury and 0.03 bar as the limit for the occurrence of wounds as the result

of flying fragments of glass. Following inferences are used to translate an explosion in terms

of damage to the surrounding area:

Everyone within the contours of the exploding gas cloud will die as a result of burns or

asphyxiation. Establishments in this zone will be fully destroyed.





296

In houses with serious damage it is assumed that one in eight persons present will be

killed as a result of the building collapsing. Within the zone with a peak over pressure

of 0.3 bar the risk of death in houses is 0.0125, i.e. one in eighty people will be killed.

Table 6.17 Damage Effects of Blast Overpressure

Peak Overpressure (Bar) Damage Level

5.0 – 8.0 Major structural damage (assumed fatal to people

inside building or within other structures)

100% Lethality

3.5 – 3.0 Oil storage tank failure

50% Lethality

2.0 – 3.0 Eardrum rupture

Threshold Lethality

1.33 - 2.0 Repairable damage. Pressure vessels intact; light

structures collapse

Severe lung Damage

1.0 – 1.33 Window breakage, possibly causing some injuries

50% eardrum Rupture

0.3 Heavy (90% Damage)

0.1 Repairable (10% Damage)

0.03 Damage of glass

0.01 Crack of windows

6.2.13.1 Summary of Damage Criteria

The summary of damage criteria adopted in the study based on vulnerability models and

published health criteria for arriving at damage distances for the identified effects are:

Table 6.18 Damage Criteria for Pool Flare/Jet Fire

SN Damage

Exposure Time = 10s Exposure Time = 3s

With

Protection

Without

Protection

With

Protection

Without

Protection

1 100% lethality & severe damage

to life & property

Within

pool

Within

pool

Within pool Within

pool

2 1% Lethal Injury (kW/M2) 21.1 16.5 9.3 7.3

3 1% First Degree Burns (KW/m2) 8.5 6.9 4.5 3.0

6.2.14 Result of Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCA)

The maximum credible accident scenarios for the Harsha Sugars Ltd. have been identified

and listed in Table below. Results of those identified scenarios are tabulated in subsequent

headings as under.

6.2.15 Spilled Product Fire Scenario

In Harsha Sugar Plant, handling of Alcohol products (here, Ethanol,) for any leakage or

spillage from Pipelines at Receipt area or leakage in any of the Tank Truck at the Tank Lorry

Gantry and at the Pump House, there will be accumulation of Alcohol products. In either of

the cases if it catches fire depending on availability of potential ignition source in the vicinity,





297

it will take form of a Spilled Product Fire. But this fire has comparatively less impact on the

surrounding area and there are less chances of damaging the other facilities of the plant.

Using Software Model, damage distances for Spilled product fire scenario at TT Gantry area

and Pump House area are calculated and tabulated as under:

Table 6.19 Damage Distances Due to Spilled Product Fire Scenario for considered Areas

SN Name of

Product

Maximum

Intensity of Heat

Radiation

Calculated

Using Spilled

Fire Model

(KW/m2)

Damage Distance in

meters Calculated For

Exposure Time of 10s

Damage Distance in

meters Calculated For

Exposure Time of 30s

1% Lethality

(21.2 KW/m2)

First

Degree

Burn (8.5

KW/m2)

1%

Lethality

(9.3

KW/m2)

First

Degree

Burn (4.5

KW/m2)

1 Ethanol/

RS/ ENA 33

NR 1.01 0.934 1.74

NR NR NR 1.94

NR NR NR 1.3

NR: Not Reachable (Within the area under fire)

From results of Spilled Product Fire scenario, it is concluded that, the effect of spilled fire

will be for a lesser distance & will not affect the nearby facilities properties or surrounding

area. Chances of any severe lethality will be least in case of spill fire, however there can be

first degree burns to the people if any close to fire area.

Note: NR in above table represents that radiation of that particular heat intensity will be

limited to spilled fire area only.

6.2.16 Pool Fire Scenario

At Harsha Sugar Plant, during handling or storage operation of Alcohol products (Ethanol,

HSD), if there is a major leakage/total rupture from storage unit within the boundary (due to

any reasons), there will be formation of pool within the Dyke wall in case of less volatile or

non-volatile liquid. If the liquid does not overflow firebreak wall, then the pool will be

limited to the respective unit. However, if the liquid overflows the firebreak wall, it may

engulf the complete dyke area. In both of the cases if it catches fire depending on availability

of potential ignition source in the vicinity, it will take form of Pool fire.

There are dyke walls enclosing tanks of Alcohol products. Individual Alcohol product for

each dyke wall is considered for pool fire study and using software model, results have been

obtained for pool fire scenario. In another possible case, there can be pipeline failure due to

some accidental conditions. In this case pipeline volume and pressure, isolation time through

control system and other software requisite were considered to predict damage potential

Damage distances for particular heat radiation intensity are being tabulated as under:

Table 6.20 Results of Pool Fire Scenario for all Dyke walls

SN Dyke No.

Considered For

Pool Fire

Storage

tanks enclosed

in Dyke

wall

Name of

Product

Maximum

Intensity of Heat Radiation

Calculated Using

Spilled Fire Model (kW/m2)

Damage Distance in meters

Calculated For Exposure Time of 10s

Damage Distance in

meters Calculated For Exposure Time of 30s

1% Lethality First Degree Burn 1% Lethality

First Degree

Burn

1 Dyke 1000 KL Ethanol/ 33 8.02 19.5 18.38 33.34





298

(each) RS/ENA

2 TT Gantry Due to

pipeline

major leak

Ethanol/

RS/ENA

33 5.6 22.58 20.68 36.54

Damage distances for pool fire scenario of each Alcohol product are well within the depot

boundary area. Heat radiations may cause burn injury to personnel’s and heating of nearby

tank. Strict precautions and safe operations need to be carried out by Harsha Sugar Plant

officials.

From above calculations, it is inferred that damage distance (at radiation level 4.5 KW/m2)

36.54m. This is well within HSL boundary and as per license limit.

6.2.16.1Tank on Fire Scenario

Escaping of roof of storage tank due to internal pressure (due to surrounding heat or any other

reason) or due to roof structure failure may result in tank on fire if product within the tank

catches fire.

Each tank of Oil is examined for this scenario and the results were scrutinized. The effect of

fire on people and property outside and inside the HSL is in the form of thermal radiations. A

criterion was selected for deciding the maximum level of thermal radiation to which the

outside population can be subjected. Thermal radiation levels from fire scenarios of each tank

were worked out at various distances and their effects are evaluated against the set criteria.

For HSL, each product tank is examined for Tank on fire scenario. The results are shown in

following table:

Table 6.21 Damage Distances Due to Tank on Fire Scenario

SN Product

Damage Distance (m) From Tank Surface For

Radiation Intensity KW/m2

37.5 KW.m2 12.5 KW/m

2 4.5 KW/m

2

1 ETHANOL/ RS/

ENA/AA 0 0.3 2.8

Analyzing the damage distances and heat radiation intensities for various Tank on fire

scenarios it can be inferred that there will not be any fatality outside the Harsha Sugar Plant

premises as there will be sufficient time to escape and there is no any habitation or facility.

Only burn injuries may occur inside Harsha Sugar Plant to personnel. Thus, damage in the

plant could be limited to the plant only if any. However, necessary due precautions must be

undertaken by plant Personnel to ensure safety within the depot. Frequency of occurrence of

such accidents has been found extremely low.





299

Fig 6.4 Schematic of a Flare/Jet Fire

Fig 6.5 Schematic of a Pool Fire/Spilled Fire





300

Radiation Intensity KW/M2 Effect

A >37.5 100% Lethality

B 25-37.5 50% Lethality

C 12.5-25 1% Lethality

D 4.5-12.5 First Degree Burns

Fig 6.6 Symbolic representation of pool fire and radiation effect from source at centre

(pool/spill)

Centre represents burning pool. Radiation effect diminishes with distance from pool.

Radiation at 12 KW/m2 can be considered as safe distance for burn injury.

D

C

B

A





301

Wind Direction

6.2.17 Vapour Cloud Explosion Scenario

Continuous Alcohol evaporating vapour moves in wind direction and finds ignition source

results into this scenario. It may also likely to be dispersed into atmosphere and diluted into

it. If continue to drift, it will reach below LEL level sometime and thus there will be no

chance of ignition. It will disperse totally. It is not considered as credible scenario.

6.2.17.1 Risk Associated With Solid Hazardous Material Bagasse and Sulphur

Risk Assessment for Bagasse and Sulphur Storage are also being identified. The process for

manufacturing and refining sugar is a standard process. Areas of concern from hazard and

risk points of view in the plant manufacturing of sugar are

Bagasse Storage

Sulphur Storage

Bagasse generation per day will increase to 2250T/day. Present area reserved for of

storage will be increased proportionately.

Large quantity of bagasse stored poses the serious hazard of fire as it is easily

ignitable and fire spreads rapidly. Serious fire accidents have been reported.

Mitigation Measures.

Point Source





302

6.2.17.2 Precautions for fire accident

It should be ensured while routing high tension voltage lines to avoid storage of

bagasse storage below & near high voltage (H.T.) transmission lines.

Avoid route of electric supply cables & AC cable trenches far away from stored

bagasse or bagasse heaps.

Always keep raw & useful material far away from storage of bagasse area.

Installation of Fire Hydrant (self auto-mode fire fighting) system around the area of

bagasse yard.

Posting of proper supervision staff with necessary communication facility.

Hot work, like welding, gas cutting should not be carried out near bagasse storage.

Daily record of bagasse storage data, proper review of conditions taken by higher

authority.

Training of all the involved staff in normal & emergency operating system.

Proper planning & installation of fire hydrant system around the bagasse storage yard

and not depending exclusively on fire tender for fire fighting.

Creating awareness among workers about sudden bagasse fire and emergency action

plan will definitely avoid risks of heavy fire.

In this way, we can save valuable fuel & life of human being working near bagasse handling

and storage.

6.2.18 Design and Installation of Fire fighting: Measures suggested

It is recommended to install fire hydrant piping system around the bagasse storage yard with

fire hydrant points considering it as high hazard category [(6.7) of code IS 13039] and

installing hydrant point every 30 meters and minimum 5.25 Kg/cm sq. pressure should

available at the remotest point. Hydrants should be located 15 meters away from the storage

area boundary. Also, it is recommended to install self auto-mode fire fighting system.

6.2.18.1 Sulphur Storage

120T (1 month stock) of Sulphur will be stored in a closed shed and is transfer manually to

the Sulphur burner in 30-50 Kg bags. Following are the hazards in storage and handling

Sulphur.

Dust Explosion

Fire Dust Explosion

As Sulphur is stored and handled in granular form, there is always some dust formation,

which can lead to dust explosion. A dust explosion occurs when a fine dust in suspension in

air is ignited, resulting in a very rapid burning, and the release of large quantities of gaseous

products. This in turn creates a subsequent pressure rise of explosive force capable of

damaging plant and buildings and injuring people. It is generally considered that a dust

explosion can only be initiated by dust particles less than 500 microns diameter.

6.2.19.2 Conditions for Dust Explosion

Under the following conditions dust explosion can take place in the industry.

The dust must be combustible like Sulphur, Bagasse





303

The dust cloud must be of explosive concentration, i.e. between the lower and upper

explosion limits for the dusts.

Sufficient oxygen in the atmosphere is must to support and sustain combustion.

A source of ignition must be present.

The dust must be fine enough to support an explosion.

6.2.19.3 Explosion Prevention:

Dust explosions can be prevented by ensuring that the following conditions are met:

Formation and Suspensions of Sulphur dust in air are avoided.

To prevent dust formation during the storage and handling of Sulphur, it is necessary

to take necessary precautions to avoid spillage and crushing of granular Sulphur

during bulk loading and unloading in the storage area.

Storage shed should be constructed with a minimum number of horizontal surfaces to

avoid dust accumulation.

All sources of ignition are excluded.

Presence of moisture helps in preventing dust explosion

6.2.19.4 Fire in Sulphur storage

There is a risk of fire in Sulphur storage as ignition temperature is low 190 degree C. Solid

and liquid Sulphur will burn to produce Sulphur dioxide gas, which is extremely irritating

and toxic (refer to appendix 2 & MSDS of SO2). The effects of the fire hazard itself are

slight.

6.3 Mitigation Measures

Smoking and the use of matches shall be prohibited in all areas where Sulphur dust is

likely to be present. Prominent NO SMOKING signs shall be placed around such

areas.

Naked flames or lights and the use of gas cutting or welding equipment is prohibited

during the normal operation of the plant. Repairs involving the use of flames, heat, or

hand or power tools in areas where Sulphur may be present shall be made only after

getting hot work permit from the authorities.

Where this is not possible the Sulphur shall be wetted down.

6.3.1 Safety and Fire Fighting ascribes

Always use Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA). Sulphur fires produce

hazardous Sulphur dioxide gas. Sulphur dioxide gas is heavier than air and will

accumulate in the vapour spaces of the rail car.

Small Sulphur fires are easily extinguished by adding more Sulphur on top of the

burning Sulphur. This depletes the oxygen and smothers the fire.

For larger Sulphur fires use a light water fog or CO2 to extinguish. Do not use heavy

water streams as this may create Sulphur dust which could potentially explode.

Apart from obvious risk from Hazardous material inventory other areas like power plant

components such as Boiler and turbine are potential hazards. However, the system is





304

customized and at times proprietary commodity. It has its own SOP s as well as maintenance

strategy with well define documents as well as skilled manning. Hence all hazards and

associated risks were already being accounted and ascribed for due care and operation. Just

for symbolic representative collation with respect to associated risk being presented as under

6.3.2 Risk Classification Screening Table for Boiler and Turbine

(Risk acceptance criteria are being adopted from standard referred text “Industrial fire

protection“)

Table 6.22 Risk Classification Screening Table for Boiler and Turbine

Boiler Hazards

Sl.

No Hazard

Description

Initiating event

likelihood

Unmitigated

consequences Risk

class

Corrective

action Life

safety

Property

damage

1 Explosion in boiler

due to over pressure

and temperature

1 4 4 C

Maintenance

2 Explosion in boiler

due to improper

combustion of fuel.

1 4 4 C

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

3 Burn injury due to

hot water and hot

steam pipeline

leakage

3 3 3 B

Inspection,

maintenance

4 Exposure to the hot

surface of pipeline

or machineries.

3 1 - A

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

5 Water tube burst

due to Failure in

boiler water level

control

2 - 4 C

Continuous

monitoring,

maintenance

6 Fire in diesel

supply line 3 3 3 B

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

7 Burn injury by hot

fly ash 4 1 - A

Maintenance,

proper exhaust

8 Catches on the

moving part of the

machinery like F.D.

fans or motors

3 2 1 A

Proper fencing

on the moving

part of turbine

9 Burst of the

equipment body

due to over pressure

and over

temperature

3 1 4 A

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

10 Sleep, trip and

from the height 4 4 2 B

Training,

proper





305

during routine

work, maintenance

or inspection

supervision,

PPE’s

GENERATOR AND TURBINE HAZARD

1 Explosion in

turbine due to

cooling system

failure

1 4 5 C

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

2 Damage on

generator due to

lack of lubrication

in coupling shaft

2 1 4 A

Regular

inspection,

maintenance

3 Fire on cooling oil

sources

3 3 3 B

Proper storage,

isolation from

the ignition

4 Fire and explosion

on hydrogen tank

2 5 4 D

Proper storage,

isolation from

the ignition

sources

5 High noise level

1 3 - B

Ear plug, ear

muff will be

provided

Table 6.23 Risk Classification with respect to Above Reference

Class General Description Action

A Low risk events Low risk

level

Further risk reduction action required

B Moderate risk events

Required minor risk reduction improvements;

generally addressed by codes, standards,

company or industry practices

C Moderate-High risk events

Generally required further analysis to determine

an optimal risk reduction strategy or reliability

analysis of propose risk controls

D High risk events Risk required immediate risk reduction analysis

Numbers 1,2,3,4 are the ratings of likelihood of occurrences of such events for sake of

assigning risk level and required mitigation as well as prescribing safety gears. However, co-

gen power plants have its own tailor made safety manual as well as risk mapping.

In power plant operation, towards safety, it is integrated logically for safe operation to

isolate/cut off operation if exceeds limit due to reaching out unintended outcome. Some of

them are being mentioned here for gross understanding as under





306

6.3.3 Standard Safety Features

Turbine is interlocked with high and low steam inlet pressure

Turbine is interlocked with high and low steam inlet high and low pressure

Turbine is interlocked with high vibration of any bearing of turbine, gear box, and

alternator.

Turbine is interlocked with any bearing high temperature.

High axial displacement of the rotor

Turbine is interlocked with high lube oil temperature

Separate Turbine over speed protection has been provided and interlock has been

incorporated for turbine to trip on high speed.

For reducing noise, all stem out lets have been provided with silencers.

Pressure safety relief valves have been provided on stem drum and stem lines.

In addition to mechanical SRVs electrometric safety relief valve is provided.

Smoke leak detector alarm has been provided with alarm.

Jockey pump with auto start has been provided for fire fighting with low pressure

interlock to automatically start main pump on low pressure.

For boiler following safety and interlocks are built in -

Low drum level interlock,

Furnace high pressure interlock

Boiler feed pump interlock

De aerator level interlock

6.4 Disaster Management Plan

Definition - A major emergency in an activity/project is one which has the potential to cause

serious injury or loss of life. It may cause extensive damage to property and serious

disruption both inside and outside the activity/project. It would normally require the

assistance of emergency services to handle it effectively. This is also a mandatory

requirement pursuant to MSIHC 2000 rule for any MAH unit like this one. This is to be

updated at every major /process change as well as at regular interval.

Scope - An important element of mitigation risk is planning for emergency, i.e. identifying

accident possibility, assessing the consequences of such accidents and deciding on the

emergency procedures, both on site and off site that would need to be implemented in the

event of an emergency.

Objective - The overall objectives of the emergency plan will be: To localize the emergency

and, eliminate it; and to minimize the effects of the accident on people and property.

Elimination will require prompt action by operations and works emergency staff using, for

example, fire–fighting equipment, water sprays etc. Minimizing the effects may include

rescue, first aid, evacuation, rehabilitation, head counting and giving information promptly to

people living nearby.

Phases of Disaster-There are various phases of Disaster including Pre and Post Management

of Hazardous Event that may or has occurred.





307

Warning Phase- Emergencies /disasters are generally preceded by warnings during which

preventive measures may be initiated. For example, uncontrollable build-up of pressure in

process equipment, weather forecast give warning about formation of vapour cloud,

equipment failure etc.

Period of Impact Phase - This is the phase when emergency /disaster actually strike and

preventive measures may hardly be taken. However, control measures to minimize the effects

may be taken through a well-planned and ready-to-act disaster management plan already

prepared by organization. The duration may be from seconds to days.

Rescue Phase - This is the phase when impact is almost over and efforts are concentrated on

rescue and relief measures. This will be followed by head count and search of missing.

Relief Phase - In this phase, apart from organization and relief measures internally,

depending on severity of the disaster, external help are also to be summoned to provide relief

measures (like evacuations to a safe place and providing medical help, food clothing etc.).

This phase will continue till normalcy is restored.

Rehabilitation Phase - This is the final and longest phase. During which measures required

to put the situation back to normal as far as possible are taken. Checking the systems,

estimating the damages, repair of equipment and putting them again into service are taken up.

Help from revenue/insurance authorities need to be obtained to assess the damage, quantum

of compensation to be paid etc.

6.4.1 Proposed On–Site Emergency Plan

The onsite emergency is an unpleasant situation that causes extensive damage to plant

personnel, surrounding area and its environment due to in operation, maintenance, design and

human error. Onsite plan will be applied in case of proposed expansion. Following points are

to be taken into consideration:

To identify, assess, foresee and work out various kinds of possible hazards, their

places, potential and damaging capacity and area in case of above happenings.

Review, revise, redesign, replace or reconstruct the process, plant, vessels and control

measures if so assessed.

Measures to protect persons and property of processing equipment in case of all kinds

of accidents, emergencies and disasters

To inform people and surroundings about emergency if it is likely to adversely affect

them.

6.4.2 Disaster control Management system

Disaster management system is all about preparedness in the event of all untoward incidences

/accident or any unpredicted harmful events. A management is expected to prepare well

versed prepare plan to enact in emergency and bring normalcy. This is written and approved

plan wherein all plant persons are assigned with certain duties in the event of emergency.

They are expected to be in readiness for all emergencies. Well-rehearsed team composition

will be formed and tested with mock drill. In this preparedness plant owner shall also make

mutual aid arrangement with nearby installations and shall participate actively in all mock

drill, updating of plan and appraising lacunas if any.





308

Disaster Management group plays an important role in combating emergency in a systematic

manner. In this management, all personnel from top to bottom are aware of assigned duties

being enumerated in this report.

Table 6.24 List of Key Persons at Factory

Sl No Name Designation Contact Detail

1 Smt. Laxmi R

Hebbalkar

Chairman & Managing Director

2 Shri. Channaraj B

Hattiholi

Executive Director 9449014000

3 Mr. Sadashiv Thorat General Manager 7338662031

4 Mr. V.B. Dhundare Process Manager 9606951183

5 Mr.Vishwanath S Patil Environmental Engineer 9606951171

6 Mr.U C Choukimath Admin 9448341808

Table 6.25 Disaster Control Management System

Sl No Name Designation Contact Detail

1 Mr. S.D. Thorat Onsite chief controller 7338662031

2 Mr. Vishwanath Patil Site incident controller 9945383441

3 Mr. N.S.Mangsule Deputy site in charge controller 9611595107

4 Mr. S.D.Thorat Plant manager 9970900555

5 Mr. V.B.Dhundare HOD(p/I) 9420011103

6 Mr.Ningangouda

Mangsule Section in charge

9606951172

7 Mr. Vishwanath S Patil Maintenance 9606951171

8 Mr. M.A.Bagwan Medical coordinator 9606951177

9 Mr. U C Choukimath GOVT Liaison coordinator 9448341808

10 Mr. Vishwanath S Patil Maintenance 9945383441

11 Mr. U C Choukimath Fire/security 9448341808

12 Mr. Samir Attar Communication 9606951173

13 Mr. N M Patil Emergency coordinator 9449171375

14 Mr. Mahesh Shelar Personnel/Adm coordinator 9900560643

16 Mr. Abhay M Sale Transport coordinator 9822622693





309

6.4.3 Onsite Disaster Management - Disaster Control Management System

Fig 6.7 Onsite Disaster Management - Disaster Control Management System (Block

Diagram)

6.4.3.1 Control Room Facility

Following are the facilities to be provided at the control room of Harsha Sugar to tackle the

emergency failure scenarios: Fire Detection System is to be installed in the control room

VHF base station with a range of 25 km and VHF handsets of range 5 km is to be installed

for ready communication in emergency Public address System (PAS) is to be installed to

ease the communication to various corners of the site The duties and responsibilities of

different coordinators of Onsite Disaster Management Plan are to be displayed in the Control

Room.

6.4.3.2 Alarm System

A siren shall be provided under the control of Security office in the plant premises to give

warning. In case of emergencies this will be used on the instructions to shift in charge that is

positioned round the clock. The warning signal for emergency shall be as follows:

Emergency Siren: Waxing and waning sound for 3 minutes. All clear signal: Continuous

siren for one minute.





310

6.4.3.3 Communication

Walkies & Talkies shall be located at strategic locations; internal telephone system EPBX

with external P&T telephones would be provided.

6.4.3.4 Fire Protection System

Fire Fighting System- The fire protection system for the unit is to provide for early detection,

alarm, containment and suppression of fires. The fire detection and protection system has

been planned to meet the above objective an all–statutory and insurance requirement of Tariff

Advisory Committee (TAC) of India. The complete fire protection system will comprise of

the following.

6.4.3.5 Fire Fighting Facility: Available in existing unit and will be maintained in future

6.4.3.6 System Description of Fire Fighting System: The entire fire safety installation shall

be compliant with the most stringent codes / standard for the entire complex to ensure the

highest safety standard and uniformity of system. Further, before property is operational, the

fire protection shall be fully operated and tested under simulated conditions to demonstrate

compliance with the most stringent standards, codes and guidelines

A) Fire pumping system

The fire pumping system shall comprise of independent electrical pumps for hydrant and

sprinkler system, diesel engine driven pump & jockey pump for hydrant & sprinkler system.

Electrical pump shall provide adequate flow for catering requirement of hydrant system.

Diesel engine driven fire pumps shall be provided for ensuring operation & performance of

the system in case of total electrical power failure. Jockey pumps shall compensate for

pressure drop and line leakage in the hydrant and sprinkler installation. Provision of PRS/

orifice plate shall be made in sprinkler riser to restrict pressure on sprinkler system.

Individual suction lines shall be drawn from the fire reserve tanks at the basement level and

connected to independent fire suction header. The electric fire pumps, diesel engine driven

fire pumps and the jockey pumps shall all draw from this suction header. Delivery lines from

various pumps shall also be connected to a common header in order to ensure that maximum

standby capacity is available. The sprinkler pump shall be isolated from the main discharge

header by a non-return valve so that the hydrant pump can also act as standby for the

sprinkler system. The ring main shall remain pressurized at all times and Jockey pumps shall

make up minor line losses. Automation required to make the system fully functional shall be

provided.

B) Fire hydrant system

Internal and external standpipe fire hydrant system shall be provided with landing valve,

hose reel, first aid hose reels, complete with instantaneous pattern short gunmetal pipe in the

Complex. The internal diameter of inlet connection shall be at least 80 mm. The outlet shall

be of instant spring lock type gunmetal ferrule coupling of 63 mm dia. for connecting to hose

pipe. Provision of flow switch on riser shall be made for effective zone monitoring. The flow

switch shall be wired to FAP and shall indicate water flow on hydrant of the identified zone.

Recessed cupboard/ fire hydrant cabinet shall be strategically located for fire fighting

requirement. Location of cabinets shall be accessed as per compartmentation plan in

consultation with the Architect. Provision of fire man’s axe shall be made for internal

hydrant. External hydrant shall be located within 2 m to 15 m from the building to be

protected such that they are accessible and may not be damaged by vehicle movement. A





311

spacing of about 45-50 m between hydrants for the building shall be adopted. Details of fire

hydrant system are as follows:

Piping - Mild Steel pipes (heavy class) as per IS: 1239 shall be provided throughout the

complex. Pipes buried below ground shall be suitably lagged with 2 layers of 400-micron

polythene sheet over 2 coats of bitumen. External Hydrants:

External hydrants shall be provided all around the Complex. The hydrants shall be

controlled by a cast iron sluice valve or butterfly valve. Hydrants shall have instantaneous

type 63mm diameter outlets. The hydrants shall be double outlet with CI duck foot bend and

flanged riser or required height to bring the hydrant to correct level above ground.

For each external fire hydrant two numbers of 63mm dia. 15 m long controlled percolation

hose pipe with gunmetal male and female instantaneous type couplings machine wound with

GI wire, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle shall be provided.

Each external hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain in the bottom plate.

Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.

Internal Hydrants: Internal hydrant shall be provided on each landing and other locations as

required by NBC with double headed gunmetal landing valve with 100 mm diameter inlet,

with shut off valves having cast iron wheels. Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and

instantaneous type outlets.

Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be standard pattern and suitable for fire hoses.

For each internal fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm dia. 15 m long rubberized fabric

lined hose pipes with gunmetal male and female instantaneous type coupling machine would

with GI wire, fire hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle shall be provided.

Standard fire hose reels of 20mm diameter high pressure rubber hose 36.5 m long with

gunmetal nozzle, all mounted on a circular hose reel of heavy duty mild steel construction

having cast iron brackets shall be provided. Hose reel shall be connected directly to the wet

riser with an isolating valve. Hose reel shall be mounted vertically.

Each internal hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain in the bottom plate. The

drain point shall be led away to the nearest general drain.

Each internal hydrant hose cabinet containing items as above shall also be provided with a

nozzle spanner and a Fireman’s Axe. The cabinet shall be recessed in the wall.

Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.

Hose Reel: Hose reel shall be heavy duty, 20 mm diameter, length shall be 36.5 meter long

fitted with gun metal chromium plated nozzle, mild steel pressed reel drum which can swing

up to 170 degree with wall brackets of cast iron finished with red and black enamel complete.

C) Sprinkler system

Elaborate automatic sprinkler system shall be provided. The system shall be suitably zoned

for its optimum functional performance. The sprinkler system shall be provided with control

valves, flow and tamper switches at suitable location and shall be connected to control

module of the fire alarm system for its monitoring and annunciation in case of activation.

Sprinkler type along with its Quartzite bulbs rating shall be selected based on the requirement

of the space and shall be specified accordingly. Inspector’s test valve assembly with sight

glass shall be provided at remote end with discharge piped to drain outlet / pipe.





312

D) Fire Extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers of water (gas pressure), Carbon-di-oxide, foam type, Dry

Chemical Powder and FM-200 or Clean agent type shall be provided as first aid fire

extinguishing appliances. These extinguishers shall be suitably installed in the entire areas as

per IS: 2190. The appliances shall be so installed over the entire sections, that a person is not

required to travel more than 15 m to reach the nearest extinguisher. These shall be placed or

hanged on wall in a group on several suitable places.

E) Fire Pump

The fire pump shall be horizontally mounted, variable speed type. It shall have a capacity to

deliver and developing adequate head so as to ensure a minimum pressure at the highest and

the farthest outlet. The pump shall be capable of giving a discharge of not less than 150 per

cent of the rated discharge, at a head of not less than 65 per cent of the rated head. The shut

off head shall be within 120 per cent of the rated head. The pump casing shall be of cast iron

and parts like impeller, shaft sleeve, wearing ring etc. shall be of non-corrosive metal like

bronze/brass/gun metal. The shaft shall be of stainless steel. Provision of mechanical seal

shall also be made. Bearings of the pump shall be effectively sealed to prevent loss of

lubricant or entry of dust or water. The pump shall be provided with a plate indicating the

suction lift, delivery head, discharge, speed and number of stages. The pump casing shall be

designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure.

F) Foam System

For Fire Fighting Aqueous Film-Forming Foams (AFFF) based on combinations of fluoro-

chemical surfactants, hydrocarbon surfactants, and solvents will be used as foam agent. These

agents require a very low energy input to produce a high-quality fire fighting foam. Foam

concentrate will be stored in a bladder tank system. In AFFF systems a bladder tank

containing a nylon reinforced elastomeric bladder is used to store the foam concentrate.

System water pressure is used to squeeze the bladder providing fire fighting foam

concentrate, at the same pressure, to the proportioner. An aqueous film will be formed on the

surface of the alcohol by the foam solution as it drains from the foam blanket. This film is

very fluid and floats on the surface of most alcohol. This gives the AFFF unequalled speed in

fire control and control the spill fire.

First Aid

A first aid centre with adequate facilities shall be provided. It shall be maintained round the

clock by a compounder cum dresser and a doctor. An Ambulance shall also be provided at

site to carry affected people to hospital.

Security

The security requirements of the company premises shall be taken care of by CSO assisted by

a Fire In charge. The team, apart from the normal security functions will manage the role

required during a disaster management operation as a part of the crisis control team.

Safety

The safety wing led by a Safety Manager will meet the requirement of emergencies round the

clock. The required safety appliances shall be distributed at different locations of the plant to





313

meet any eventualities. Poster/placards reflecting safety awareness will be placed at different

locations in the plant area.

Evacuation Procedure

As the major hazard is only due to fire, which has more or less localized impact no mass

evacuation, procedures are required. Evacuation would involve only the people working very

close to the fire area.

Personal Protective Equipments (PPE)

This equipment is used mainly for three reasons; to protect personnel from a hazard while

performing rescue/accident control operations, to do maintenance and repair work under

hazardous conditions, and for escape purposes. The list of Personal Protective Equipment

provided at the facility and their locations shall be available in ECC. Effective command and

control accomplish these functions necessitates personal trained in this on–site Disaster

Management Plan with adequate facilities and equipments and equipment to carry out their

duties and functions. These organizations and the facilities required to support their response

are summarized in the following subsections. Personal protective equipments play a vital role

in overcoming major disastrous situation saving life during onsite emergency. List of

recommended Personal Protective equipment (PPE) is given below in Table.

Table 6.26 Summary of Recommended Personal Protective Equipment According to

hazard onsite

Objective Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE

Eye and face protection Flying particles molten metal,

liquid chemicals, gases or

vapours, light radiation

Safety glasses with side-

shields, protective shades,

etc.

Head protection Falling objects, inadequate

height clearance, and overhead

power cords

Plastic helmets with top and

side impact protection

Hearing protection Noise Ultrasound Hearing

protectors (ear plugs or ear

muffs0

Foot protection Failing or rolling objects, points

objects.

Corrosive or hot liquids

Safety shoes and boots for

protection against moving

and failing objects, liquids

and chemicals

Hand protection Hazardous materials, cuts or

lacerations, vibrations, extreme

temperatures

Gloves made of rubber or

synthetic material

(Neoprene), leather, steel,

insulation materials, etc.

Respiratory protection Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, gases,

smokes, vapour

Facemasks with appropriate

filters for dust removal and

air purification (chemical,

mists, vapours and gases).

Single or multi-gas personal

monitors, if available

Portable or supplied air





314

Oxygen deficiency Onsite rescue equipment

Body / leg protection Extreme temperatures,

hazardous materials, biological

agents, cutting and laceration

Insulating clothing, body

suits, aprons etc. of

appropriate materials

Contact with HSD Fuel Oil storage and Fuel

Handling

Canister type gas mask. PVC

or Rubber. Goggles giving

complete protection to eyes.

Eye wash fountain with

safety

Fly Ash Fly ash handling and storage Wear dust-proof goggles and

rubber or PVC gloves. When

using large quantities or

where heavy contamination is

likely, wear: coveralls. At

high dust levels, wear: A

Full-face Class P3

(Particulate) or an Air-line

respirator where an inhalation

risk exists, wear: a Class P1

(Particulate) respirator

Mock Drill

As per the Industrial Major Accident Hazard Rules, Mock drills of the on-site emergency

plan are conducted every month. A detail report of the mock drill conducted is to be made

immediately available to all the concerned authority Also, Major Fire and Minor Fire mock

drills are conducted once in three months and one month respectively.

Training

On job training to the engineers on various stages of risk analysis and preparedness during

emergency to reflect in the operation of terminal, especially from the safety stand point. The

fire team belonging to the fire fighting department are to be intensively trained for the use of

all equipment and in various fire fighting methods for handling different types of fires

Details of Training facilities for

Safety

Fire Fighting

Occupational Health & safety

Monthly

Monthly

Monthly

Procedure for Testing & Updating the Plan

Simulated emergency preparedness exercises and mock fire fighting exercises including

mutual aid scheme resources and in conservation with district emergency authority to be

carried out time to time.

Disclosure of Information to Worker & Public

Awareness System in Existence & Anticipated

Safety awareness among workers by conserving various training programs and Seminars,

competition, slogans etc. Practical exercise, Distribution and practices of safety Instructions,

Safety Quiz contests, Display of Safety Posters & Safety Slogans, Developing Safety





315

Instructions for every Job and ensuring these instructions/booklets or manuals by the

workers.

In this management, all types of emergencies are forecasted and all likely actions have been

documented as to how to take on emergencies and to enact in situation be it in bagasse

area/power plant/cane crushing/evaporation/distillery /MCB /transmission section /transform

area etc. Procedure for every emergency shall be handled as per written protocol and shall be

documented as per mandate for MSIHC and factory act 1948 pursuance. Further in the event

if the incidence /situation is out of control and beyond installation boundary, in such

instances Offsite emergency plan will be enacted by district authority. Plant head will assist

district authority in all possible help. It is also a written document prepared for district

authority to act. Following plan is prepared as Offsite emergency plan for district authority.

6.4.4 Off-Site Emergency Planning

The off-site emergency plan is an Integral part of any hazard control system. It is based on

those accidents identified by the works management, which could affect people and the

environment outside the works. Thus, the off-site plan follows logically from the analysis that

took place to provide the basis for the on-site plan and the two plans therefore complement

each other. The roles of the various parties that may be involved in the implementation of an

off-site plan are described below. The responsibility for the off-site plan will be likely to rest

either with the works management or with the local authority. Schematic representation of

various organization involved during emergency is shown below

Table 6.27 Local statutory Government bodies

Sl.No.

Name of Government

Agency

Phone Nos

1 District Collector 0831-2407200

2 Sub Divisional Officer (Tahsildar Saundatti) 08330-222223

3 Factory Inspector of the district 0831-2428066

4 KSPCB, Belagavi 0831-2459956

5 PSI L &O - CPI 08337-222303

6 Deputy Superindent of Police 0831-2405206

7 Fire brigade 0831-2429441

8 Director Ind. Safety and Health (DDF-I) 0831-2421292

9 Dy. Chief Controller of Explosive, Mangalore 0824-2420167/244588

10 Hospital (Dr.Navadgi Nursing Home, Saundatti) 08330-222278

Either way, the plan must identify an emergency coordinating officer who would take overall

command of the off-site activities. Consideration of evacuation may include the following

factors:

In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage tank), only houses

close to the fire are likely to need evacuation. If fire is escalating very fast it is necessary to

evacuate people nearby as soon as possible. In acute emergency people are advised to stay

indoors and shield themselves from the fire.





316

6.4.4.1 Various Organization Involved During Emergency (Block Diagram)

Fig 6.8 Various Organization Involved During Emergency (Block Diagram)

6.4.4.2 Organization

Organizational details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centres include name and appointments of incident controller, site main

controller, their deputies and other key personnel involved during emergency.

6.4.4.3 Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication centre, call signs, network, list of

telephone numbers.

6.4.4.4 Special Emergency Equipment

Details of availability and location of heavy lifting gear, specified fire-fighting equipment,

fireboats etc.

6.4.4.5 Voluntary Organizations

Details of Voluntary organizations, telephone numbers nearby of hospitals, Emergency

helpline, resources etc. are to be available with chief authorities. Medical Aid Local

Authority Environmental Health & Safety Department District Level Emergency Committee

Plant Level Emergency Committee Hazard works Management Fire Department Emergency

Control Centre Chief Coordinators Police/Traffic Department Public Education

EMERGENCY





317

6.4.4.6 Non-governmental Organizations (NGO)

NGO’s could provide a valuable source of expertise and information to support emergency

response efforts. Members of NGOs could assist response personnel by performing specified

tasks, as planned during the emergency planning process. Evacuation of personnel from the

affected area Arrangements at rallying posts and parking yards Rehabilitation of evacuated

persons

6.4.4.7Chemical information

Details of the hazardous substances (MSDS information) and a summary of the risks

associated with them are to be made available at respective site.

6.4.4.8 Meteorological information

There are arrangements for obtaining details of weather conditions prevailing at or before the

time of accident and weather forecasts updates.

6.4.4.9 Humanitarian Arrangements

Transport, evacuation centres, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first aid, ambulances,

temporary mortuaries.

6.4.4.10 Public Information

Dealing with the media-press office, informing relatives, etc. will be carried out by the team

6.4.4.11 Assessment

Collecting information on the causes of the emergency Reviewing the efficiency and

effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan

6.4.4.12 Role of local authority

Local Authorities like Panchayat, Sabha, Samity, municipalities can help in combating

emergency situation after assessing the impact scenario in rescue phase.

6.4.4.13 Role of police

The police are to assist in controlling of the accident site, organizing evacuation and

removing of any seriously injured people to hospitals. Co-ordination with the transport

authorities, civil defence and home guards, Co-ordination with army, navy, air force and state

fire services, Arrange for post mortem of dead bodies, Establish communication centre with

easy contact with ECC.

6.4.4.14 Role of Fire Brigade

The fire brigade is to be organized to put out fires and provide assistance as required during

emergency.

6.4.4.15 Media

The media is to have ready and continuous access to designated officials with relevant

information, as well as to other sources in order to provide essential and accurate information

to public throughout the emergency and to avoid commotion and confusion. Efforts are made





318

to check the clarity and reliability of information as it becomes available, and before it is

communicated to public. Public health authorities are consulted when issuing statements to

the media concerning health aspects of chemical accidents Members of the media are to

facilitate response efforts by providing means for informing the public with credible

information about accidents involving hazardous substances

6.4.4.16 Role of health care authorities

Hospitals and doctors must be ready to treat all type of injuries to causalities during

emergency. Co-ordinate the activities of Primary Health Centres and Municipal Dispensaries

to ensure required quantities of drugs and equipments. Securing assistance of medical and

paramedical personnel from nearby hospitals/institutions.

6.4.5 Occupational Health Surveillance

In this Integrated Sugar Plant, there will be utilization of chemicals. The usage of this above

chemicals will be in low quantities and exposure of these chemicals to the employees will be

also very low. However all the precautionary measures are being taken while handling these

chemicals. The following are the details of the Occupational Health Surveillance

Occupational Health Surveillance (OHS) is being under taken as regular exercise for

all the employees specifically for those engaged in handling hazardous substances.

All the first aid facilities are provided in the Occupational Health Centre.

The medical records of each employee are being maintained separately.

Occupational health centre for medical examination of employees with all the basic

facilities have been established with in the plant.

The noise levels in critical area are being monitored regularly and the workers at high

noise level generating areas will undergo audiometric tests once in six months.

The potential occupational hazardous work places will be monitored regularly. The

health of employees working in these areas will be monitored once in a year.

Liver function test is also being planned for the workers as a part of surveillance.

The equipment and facilities such as First aid medical units, Safety belts, Ear muffs,

masks against dusts, aprons against chemical spillage, Shock proof gloves and mats,

Leather aprons, Safety items - shoes, gum shoes, hand gloves, helmets, goggles,

Safety ladder, Face masks & gas masks (against SO2 gas), Leather gloves, Breathing

apparatus, Stretchers and oxygen cylinder, Flame proof battery and lighting,

Emergency lighting facilities are kept at administrative building/stores building and

are under the control of emergency coordinator

All workers engaged in material handling system will be regularly examined for lung

diseases such as PFT (Pulmonary Function Test) tests; Scheme for occupational

health monitoring will be prepared in detail [BIS code of practices IS: 11451-1986

(Reaffirmed 2005) (Recommendations for safety health requirements relating to

occupational exposure to asbestos)]





319

Table 6.28 Health Evaluation schedule

Occupation Type of evaluation Frequency

Pre-placement

Cane Crushing Area Chest X-ray, spirometry

and vision testing

Every 5 years to age <30;

Every 4 years to age 31-40; and

every 2 years to age 41-50

Sugar Process Area &

Cogeneration Area

Chest X-ray, spirometry

and vision testing


Every 4 years to age 31-

40; and every 2 years to age 41-50

Noise prone areas Audiometry Annually

Main Control Room Far & Near Vision; Colour

Vision; and Hearing tests



40; And every 2 years to age 41-50

Ash Handling Area&

Bagasse Handling Area

Chest X-ray, spirometry,

Vision; and Hearing tests



40; And every 2 years to age 41-50





320

6.4.6 Summary of Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems

Table 6.29 Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems

AREA EFFECT HAZARD MITIGATION MEASURES.

Cane yard Serious nature of

injuries. Due to bad maintenance of

vehicles.

Personnel sleeping/taking rest

near the vehicles.

Driving by unauthorized persons.

Maintain vehicles properly.

Personnel will not allow sleep/rest near vehicles.

Only allow drivers having valid licenses.

Safety officer will monitor continuously.

Cane

unloading bay.

Serious nature of

injuries Snapping of slings & wire ropes

Over loading of cranes.

Dragging of loads

Unauthorized personnel

operating the cranes.

Maintaining and testing regularly & in good

condition.

Following S.O.P. strictly.

Authorised agencies will verify the weighing tools

regularly.

Mill house. Serious nature of

injuries. Cleaning while the machines

running.

Broken plat-forms

Slippery surface.

Dust

Follow S.O.P. strictly.

Good house-keeping.

Use of P.P.E. (safety wears)

Work permit procedure before attending height

oriented jobs.

Clarifier &

evaporators.

Fire & explosion.

Hot atmosphere. Steam leakages.

Faulty gauges.

Defective valves and vents

Maintain equipment properly. Provide good

ventilation like roof extractors, air circulators.

Regular inspection of shell thickness, Hydro trials

before in operation.

Regular hydro testing of boiling vessel calendria





321

tubes and valves

Provision of safety valves and vents.

Crystallizer Injuries Slippery floor and damaged

floor

Good housekeeping & working properly.

Proper testing and alignment of drives and

internal ribbon/ coils

Regular inspection of shell thickness, Hydro

trials before in operation.

Centrifugal Injuries. Non-functioning or removal of

inter-lock guards.

Breakage of basket and internals

Maintain the equipment properly.

Regular balancing of baskets, testing of rubber

buffers and brake pads, bearing housing

assembly, etc.,

Regular inspection of thickness, internal cracks

by DP test/ ultrasonic test

Drying grading

and bagging

Creation of fine

sugar dust Dusty atmosphere Installation of dust collecting points and proper

setting of C/F machine plough operation system

and Hot and Cold air blowers.

Provide P.P.E.

Boiler house Explosion Safety valves not working etc.

Failure of auxiliary and

choking of flue gas path, etc.,

Breakage of boiler vessels

and valves

Proper maintenance of boilers, safety valves,

gauges etc.

Hydro testing of above and ultra sonic testing of

above.

Keeping quality of boiler feed water and fuel

Engaging trained certified boiler operating staff.

Inspection of boiler pressure vessels/

components by authorised govt agencies before

in operation





322

Turbo

generators

Explosion Improper alignment

Failure of valves and

unbalancing of prime mover

rotary assembly

Failure of AVR/ Governer

controller, etc.,

Proper service and alignment of internal

components.

High axial displacement rotar.

Fully automated with interlocks, alarms

Smoke detector alarm

Storage tanks Spillages/ leakages

of chemicals.

Breakage of

vessels.

Corrosion, Wear and tear.

Reducing of shell thickness

Improper provision of drain

valves and internal steam coils

Provision of unsafe ladders,

railings, walkways and structural

design

Proper maintenance of storages and keeping

the equipment in good condition and to be

regularly inspected and tested.

Compliance with standard operating

procedures for material loading and unloading

and working properly

Dyke walls to be provided.

Electrical

installation like

transformer,

switchyard,

M.C.C. room.

etc.

Fire or

electrocution.

Suffocation of

persons inside.

Over loading.

Loose contact.

Short circuit.

Improper earthing, insulation

Providing enclosures

Installation as per electricity rules.

Other controls will be provided.

Lying of insulation mat at MCC rooms.

Adopting TEFC motors

Application of Fire extinguishers and multi-

core cables.

Fireproof paints and primers to be applied.

Bagasse yard Fire Sparks from exhaust of the

vehicles.

Smoking.

External fires.

Provide spark arresters.

Smoking to be prohibited.

Follow work permit system





323

Factory area Fire Electrical Short circuit

Internal combustion of molasses

tanks

Improper insulation of electrical

cables, loose contacts, flashing

of electric control panels

Prohibiting smoking.

Providing fire hydrant system etc.

By laying and maintaining electrical all

equipments properly.

Strictly following work permit systems as per

requirement.

Lightening arrestor will be provided.

Maintaining equipment properly

Sulphur

storage /

sulphur burner

station

Fire and explosion Dust/ vapours can cause fires

and explosion.

Escape of sulphur vapours.

Store in a cool ventilated area separately.

Providing fire hydrant system etc.

Proper maintenance of gas generation furnace

and gas lines.

Usage of Non corrosive material, safety

valves, drains, etc.,

Feeding of sulphur in closed system. Arrest

leakages.

Sugar bag

conveying and

godown

Injuries Electric short circuiting, non

provision of safety guards, fire

hydrants

Non provision of walk ways,

railings, overhead bag conveying

system

Follow standard procedures

Providing of TEFC motors and enclosures,

fire hydrants nearby bag conveying system as

well as inside the sugar godown.

Proper stacking of sugar bags up to the

desired permissible stack height i.e., 32 ft.

Do not stack sugar bags adhered to godown

walls. Keep 1 mt distance and below 3 mts

height from above roof.

Godown floor height should be 300 mm





324

above the FFL/ GL to avoid rainwater entry.

Distillation

section

Static Electricity

generation Electric short circuiting, non


hydrants

Distillation units will be fitted with flame

proof electrical fittings

Distillation units will be earthed.

Proper training of employees and installation

of fire extinguishers

ENA/ RS

storage

Spillage/ leak Contamination of the area, prone

to fire

Will be stored in the MS vertical tanks with

secondary containment

Spill kits will be placed

Sugar bag

conveying and

godown

Injuries Electric short circuiting, non


hydrants

Non provision of walk ways,

railings, overhead bag conveying

system

Follow standard procedures

Providing of TEFC motors and enclosures,

fire hydrants nearby bag conveying system as

well as inside the sugar godown.

Proper stacking of sugar bags up to the

desired permissible stack height i.e., 32 ft.

Do not stack sugar bags adhered to godown

walls. Keep 1 mt distance and below 3 mts

height from above roof.

Godown floor height should be 300 mm

above the FFL/ GL to avoid rainwater entry.

Distillation

section

Static Electricity

generation Electric short circuiting, non


hydrants

Distillation units will be fitted with flame

proof electrical fittings

Distillation units will be earthed.

Proper training of employees and installation

of fire extinguishers





325

ENA/ RS

storage

Spillage/ leak Contamination of the area,

prone to fire

Will be stored in the MS vertical tanks with

secondary containment

Spill kits will be placed

Fig 6.9 Structure of Onsite Emergency Preparedness and Response





326

6.5 Environmental Public Hearing

Environmental public hearing was conducted at project site on 18-07-2018 under the

chairmanship of Shri.S. Ziyaullah IAS, Deputy Commissioner, Belagavi. The proceedings of

the same is as follows:





327





328





329





330





331





332





333





334





335

Attendance list is attached as Annexure-7





336

18.07.2018 11:40 18.07.2018 11:45

18.07.2018 12:45

18.07.2018 12:20

18.07.2018 12:35

18.07.2018 11:41





337

18.07.2018 12:55 18.07.2018 13:15

18.07.2018 13:25 18.07.2018 13:30





338

6.5.1 Compliance to the points raised in the Public hearing

SI.No Description Points Raised during public

Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

1

Sri Suresh Sampagao,

Hittanagi village Tq:

Saundatti Dist: Belagavi.

He expressed that, they are

financially backward peoples and

growing the sugar cane from the past

4-5 years. He said that although they

are getting good income they are

facing the problem of transporting the

sugar cane grown to the factory.

Further, he added that, even though

Sri Someshwara sugar factory is

nearer to the village their demand for

sugar cane is low and the sugar unit

at Munavalli is located far away from

the village and they prefer the

formers from the adjacent villages.

He has also expressed that, from the

establishment of the M/s Harsha

Sugars the problem of transportation

of sugar cane will be solved and also

the supply of power to the nearby

villages from the proposed

cogeneration unit of M/s Harsha

sugars may be anticipated. He has

requested the factory authorities to

maintain the greenbelt around the

industry.

Present Situation faced by the

cane growers was explained

and Positive Response.

Project authorities agreed to

maintain greenbelt around the

premises.

2

Shri.Iranagowda

Pakiragowda Patil,

Suthagatti village,

Saundatti- Tq, Belagavi -

Dist

He expressed that earlier he has faced

the problem of transportation of sugar

cane from his farm to the sugar

industry and now as the M/s. Harsha

Sugars being established at a distance

of 10 Kms from his village he

expressed his gratitude to the factory

authorities. Further, he has informed

that, even if surrounding farmers

grows the crops like jowar, cotton

and vegetables they wouldn't get the

reasonable price for their crops and

sugarcane is the only crop which can

yield better price for the farmers here.

He has informed that, since the

project is proposed at a distance of 10

Km away from the village there will

not be any impact on the environment

and even though if any impact on

environment arises the factory

Authority should control the impact.

Positive Response

Project proponent assured to

take mitigation measures like

installation of ESP for the

chimney against the air

pollution.





339


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

3 Sri Shivarudrappa

Hattiholi, Govanakoppa

Village

He expressed that Someshwara

sugars unit, Malaprabha sugar unit

and Renuka Sugars are located far

away from the Soundatti village and

the said sugar units not responded to

the problems of the farmers hence,

the M/s. Harsha Sugars is the ray of

hope for the surrounding farmers. He

has also informed that, there is a

benefit from the establishment of the

co-generation and distillery units to

the farmers and he has expressed his

faith towards the factory authorities

pertaining to the fixation price for the

sugarcane grown by the farmers.

Further, he has informed that there

will not be any pollution from the

proposed industry as the villages are

located away from the factory and

there are several acts and rules for the

environment protection. Since there

is a sufficient land for providing the

green belt we think the industry is

safe for the farmers he added. He has

also appealed the Deputy

Commissioner, Belagavi that the

consideration of the establishment of

the proposed unit will be beneficial to

both the factory authorities and the

farmers.

Positive Response.

Project authorities agreed to

maintain the green belt

around the unit and assured to

maintain the pollution control

units.

4

Sri.Vijay Jumanal,

Bailhongal

He has requested the Deputy

Commissioner, Belagavi to disclose

the proceedings of the public hearing

as per the EIA Notification, 2006.

In reply, Sri Vijayakumar

Kadakbhavi, Senior

Environmental Officer,

Dharwad said that, the

happenings of the public

hearing are being video and

audio recorded and after the

completion of the public

hearing the proceedings will

be sent to MoEF, New Delhi

for further necessary action.

5.

Sri. Basavaraja Shegavi,

Suthagatti Village

He Expressed that he lives in

Suthagatti village which is located

within 10 Kms radius from the

proposed industry and he has been

convinced from the technical

presentation of the proposed project

Positive Response towards

the establishment of the

industry.

About connecting road to the

agricultural fields, the

Government has to take





340


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

and also from the details furnished by

the concerned Officers during the

public hearing. He has expressed his

gratefulness towards the Managing

Director and the management of the

M/s. Harsha Sugars industry for

establishing the sugar industry which

will improve the economic status and

the living standard of the farmers. In

addition he has also said that, most of

the nearby villages are submerged

areas and deprived of infrastructure

and we grow sugarcane but we don't

have the connecting roads to the

agricultural fields. He has also

requested the Deputy Commissioner,

Belagavi to send the concerned

Officers to rectify the issues of

farmers and further he has added that,

if the issues are solved the financial

status of the farmers will be definitely

stabilized.

necessary action.

6 Sri Prashanth Chennappa

Nigura, Asundi Village

He has requested the management of

the M/s. Harsha Sugars to consider

the unemployed youths of the nearby

villages for the employment as the

farmers of the surrounding villages

have handed over their agricultural

land for the establishment of the

industry. Further, he has also

requested to give the solution to the

disease being caused by the gonne

hulu (white grub pest) to sugar cane

crop by consulting the concerned

scientists.

The proponent ensured to

provide employment

opportunities for youths

based on their qualification of

the nearby villages.

The scientists working in

seed nursery and

demonstration plots owned by

project authorities will find

the solution to the problem

and accordingly proper pest

control measures will be

guided to the farmers.

7 Sri Sughanda Reddy,

Hyderabad

Initially he has congratulated the

management of the M/s. Harsha

Sugars for engaging the efficient and

experienced consultancy for

preparing EIA. He has said that he

was the first Environmentalist in

India to support the industrial

development and he has wished the

M/s. Harsha Sugars and said he is

whole heartedly supporting the

project because in India

approximately 40 crores of youth

Positive Response.

As per the item No. 3 of the

EIA Notification, 2006 dated:

14th

September the public

hearing is only for the public

resided at 10-15 Km radius

from the proposed site and

there is no provision for the

people from other area to

opine about the project.

However, Project authorities





341


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

between the age group of 18-35 are

waiting for the employment

opportunities and there is a urgent

need of industrial development in

Karnataka State. He has further said

that, there is also a necessity to

protect the ecological balance and

hence, suggested the following points

to maintain the ecological balance:

He has said that, the consultancy has

studied the baseline data pertaining to

the air, water and soil which is good

and satisfactory but, my humble

request if there is any possibility

please collect the health status of the

people, data of crop production status

and ground water availability status

within 10 Km radius. It is very useful

in future and it can be utilized to take

precautionary measures to maintain

ecological balance.

He has given the suggestion to take-

up the work to construct the water

storage tank to collect the

overflowing water in rainy season

and requested to construct the water

harvesting structures and said it will

be useful for the industry as well as to

develop the ground water table.

He has requested to take-up the

plantation in villages and also to take-

up avenue plantation in internal roads

in which the movement of vehicles of

the industries to control the dust.

Further, he has requested to plant the

fruit bearing/medicinal plants instead

of normal plants. He has requested

the industry authority to give the top

priority to the local educated

unemployed youth in the industry and

suggested to promote the skill

development training to unemployed

youth to get better chances in

industry and remaining youths to get

jobs at other places. He has also

requested to form a co-ordination

committee with a industry

assured to maintain the

pollution control units and

maintain about the greenbelt

development within the

project site.





342


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

representative; PCB Official and

villagers to take a plan of action to

use CSR fund which will be very

meaningful to take-up demand

oriented works its very essential and

these activities bring great credibility

to the industry. Finally he has

requested the public hearing panel to

recommend the MoEF to give

unconditional permission to Harsha

sugars limited to take-up the

proposed project.

8 Sri Anjaneya Nagenahalli,

Samagra Sahavarthane

Samudaya, Athani.

Initially He has expressed his

gratitude to the Managing Director of

the M/s.Harsha Sugars and also

extended his thanks to Deputy

Commissioner, Belagavi and the

Officials of the KSPCB. He has also

requested to support the

establishment of the proposed project

of expansion as the upcoming project

is beneficial for the farmers of the

surrounding villages.

Positive Response

9 Sri Shivananda Majjage,

Soundatti

He has expressed that, due to the

expansion of the industry the

unemployment will be solved and

thousands of people will get the

employment and surrounding farmers

will get the water for the irrigation

hence the upcoming project is

beneficial for the farmers.

Positive Response. Project

authorities agreed to employ

people from local area based

on their qualification.

The treated water will be used

for on land irrigation to the

nearby 200-300 acres of

agricultural land during

monsoon days since the

treated water is fit for

irrigation.

10 Sri Chandrashekhara

Kademani, Turukara

shigehalli, Bailhongal

Taluk

He expressed that there will not be

any pollution as there are no villages

nearby to the industry and since the

National Highway is nearer to the

industry transportation of

sugarcane/sugar is easier. He has

expressed his gratitude to the

Managing Director of the M/s.Harsha

Sugars for taking up the project and

he has also wished that the proposed

industry is going to be model industry

for the farmers.

Positive Response





343


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

11 Sri Balachandra Jagnnatha

Mukashi, Karkatti Village

He expressed that establishment of

the sugar industry near the National

Highway is beneficial and last time

the farmers have faced the loss due to

(lost 100 tons of sugarcane per year)

due to the delay in harvesting of the

sugarcane as the sugar industries

were situated far away from the

industry. Since, the industry is

located nearer to the National

Highway the farmers of villages;

Karikatti; Asundi; Hittanagi and

Soundatti will be benefitted. He has

also said that there will not be any

pollution from the proposed

expansion activity as the villages are

located away from the industry.

Positive Response.

Pollution control measures

will be taken by the industry

side like Zero Liquid

Discharge (ZLD) facility in

the distillery and Effluent

Treatment Plant (ETP) to

treat effluent from sugar unit.

Further, by providing the

Electrostatic Precipitator

(ESP) instead of dust

collector/wet scrubber to

control the air pollution will

control the dust emission

from the chimney.

12 Sri Yallappa Mallappa

Hakari, Hirebllikatti

Village

He has expressed that, the areas of

nearby villages are submerged areas

and they have undergone both the

sweet and bitter experiences. He has

informed to the Deputy

Commissioner, that they have sold

the sugarcane for Rs.500 per ton to

Rajaram industries, Kolhapur which

was a bitter experience. But now,

from the establishment of the

M/s.Harsha Sugars industry farmers

will feel joyfulness and he has also

requested the Chairperson of the M/s.

Harsha Sugars to give jobs to the

local people. Further, he has added

that, Sankeshwara Sugars is in the

Sankeshwara town with no pollution

and hence, there will not be any

pollution from the M/s. Harsha

Sugars as the industry is located far

away from the surrounding villages.

He has requested the Deputy

Commissioner, Belagavi to provide

all the cooperation to the proposed

industry and h expressed his thanks to

everyone gathered in the public

hearing.

Positive Response.

The proponent ensured to

provide employment

opportunities for youths of

the nearby villages based on

their qualification.

Pollution control measures

will be taken by the industry

side like Zero Liquid

Discharge (ZLD) facility in

the distillery and Effluent

Treatment Plant (ETP) to

treat effluent from sugar unit.

Further, by providing the

Electrostatic Precipitator

(ESP) instead of dust

collector/wet scrubber to

control the air pollution will

control the dust emission

from the chimney.





344


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

13. Sri Mallappa Channappa

Kalabhavi, Koravinakoppa,

Bailhongal Taluk

He has expressed his wishes to

Deputy Commissioner and other

Officers assembled in the public

hearing and he said that the major

crops being grown by the farmers in

Bailhongal taluk are sugarcane and

cotton. Earlier, due to less number of

sugar industries nearby the farmers

hesitated to grow sugarcane but now

the number of sugar industries are

more and establishment of

M/s.Harsha Sugars brought happiness

in the farmers he added. He has also

informed that, as the Malaprabha

river is near to the industry the

farmers will grow the sugar as major

crop and sell the sugarcane to the

industry and he is delighted by the

establishment of the sugar industry.

Positive Response

14 Sri.Ningappa Veerappa

Karikatti, Belawadi village,

Baihogal Taluk

He has informed that, the M/s.Harsha

Sugars would have established earlier

in the area nearer to Soundatti,

Asundi, Karikatti and Udikeri and it

is good that it has been established

now. He has informed that stalk borer

pest is vanishing the sugarcane crop

grown by the farmers and hence, the

farmers who get the good yield one

year will suffer from the poor yield in

the next year due to the pest attack.

Further, he has requested the

management of M/s.Harsha Sugars to

solve the issue through the eminent

Scientists. In addition he has also

requested to provide the water for

irrigation to the nearby farmers

through the pipeline from

Malaprabha River as the water from

Mahadayi River is get delayed due to

some political reasons. He wished

that the farmers should be benefited

from the project.

Positive Response.

The scientists working in

seed nursery and

demonstration plots owned by

project authorities will find

the solution to the problem

and accordingly proper pest

control measures will be

guided to the farmers.

Other issue is not related to

the proposed expansion

activity of the project

15 Sri H

Madhubahu,

Environmentalist,

Hyderabad

He has said that regard to the public

hearing he has already sent the letter

to PCB, Belagavi-1 and the M/s.

Harsha Sugars and requested to

consider the suggestions mentioned

Positive Response.





345


Hearing

Compliance/Remarks

in the letter and he has also submitted

the written letter to the Deputy

Commissioner, Belagavi.

Total 3 representations have been received in favour of the establishment of the industry. The

same has been annexed as Annexure-8





346

PROJECT BENEFITS

The project will not only improve the socio-economic status of the people but will also

increase the state government earning in the way of excise duty. By increase in the crushing

capacity, the cane growers have to travel less distance and can utilise the expansion facility.

Following are some of the other benefits of the proposed project.

7.1 Employment opportunity

The company’s management will recruit semi skilled & unskilled workers from the nearby

villages, thereby improving in the social status of the villagers. It creates employment

opportunities to 100-110 No's directly &200 No's indirectly.

7.2 Infrastructural development

Further, the management will support the local administration and provide other form of

assistance for the development of public amenities viz., water distribution, building of school

rooms, health centres, Education programme, Health camps, Agricultural programmes &

sponsorships to meritorious students.

7.3 Greenbelt

Green belt will be developed within the plant premises covering a total area of about 17 acres

(33 % of total area) and also in the buffer zone. This will not only help to create healthy

environment in the area but also acts as pollution sink. Further avi-fauna population of the

area will increase.

7.4 Socio economics

With the implementation of the total project, the socio-economic status of the local people

will improve and infrastructure facilities like roads, communication systems, drinking water,

etc. will also develop. The land rates in the area will escalate due to the project. This will help

in upliftment of the social status of the people in the area. Educational institutions will also

come-up and will lead to improvement of educational status of the people in the area.

Medical facilities will certainly develop due to the project.

7





347

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 Introduction

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is the process used to integrate environmental

management with planning for proposals. EIA is an established process for:

Ensuring that proponents assume primary responsibility for protection of any

environmental values that may be affected by their proposals;

Addressing the environmental management of the life of proposals;

Forming a basis for statutory decisions on whether a proposal meets ecologically

sustainable development principles, and if so, relevant environmental management

and monitoring conditions;

This Environmental Management Plan has indicated the details as to how various measures

have been or were proposed to be taken. The baseline settings of different relevant

environmental components in the study area were predicted potential impacts on those

components due to the proposed project were documented. In this plan, mitigation measures

for the identified environmental impacts are documented for both construction and

operational stages of the proposed project in the form of an Environmental Management Plan

(EMP).Environmental management plan during construction and operation phase are

suggested below:

Responsibility of Implementation: Harsha Sugars Ltd., through Environmental

management Cell headed by the MD

Time frame: Construction Phase EMP- To be followed during and throughout

construction phase (12 months).

Operation Phase EMP- To be followed all the time during operation of the plant

(Industry life cycle).

8





348

Table 8.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during Construction Phase

Activity Anticipated Impacts Environmental Management Plan Responsibility Budgetary

allocation

1. Land

Site clearing /

Levelling and

approach road

formation

Impact on soil nutrients

and soil biota, Dust

generation

The excavated top soil generating the proposed

construction site will be removed in advance and

reused for greenery development.

During the process of excavation if stones and

gravels are encountered, the same will be used in

construction work or can be used construction of

gully plugs, retaining walls etc.

Slope stabilization and Soil embankments will be

carried out as part of soil conservation measures

Water sprinkling through sprinklers/tankers will be

undertaken All road drainage structures (ditches, out

sloping, culverts, water bars, dips, etc.) will be in

place as soon as possible during the construction of

the road.

Soil binding and fast growing vegetation grass would

be grown in the project site.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

2. Air

Site

clearing/levelling

activities, excavation

activities,

transportation of

construction,

Dislodging of particles

from the ground resulting

dust generation, exhaust

emission from vehicles

Unpaved roads and disturbed areas in the project

construction site will be watered as frequently as

necessary to prevent fugitive dust. The frequency of

watering can be reduced or eliminated during periods

of precipitation. (Thrice daily/ depending on the

weather)

Environmental

Management

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental





349


allocation

movement of trucks,

construction

activities on land

materials, roads

formation, unloading,

operation of

construction

machinery, welding

activities

The vehicle speed limit will be restricted to 15 kmph

within the construction site.

The construction site entrances shall be posted with

visible speed limit signs.

Soil storage piles and disturbed areas that remain

inactive for longer than 10 days will be covered or

treated with appropriate dust suppressant

compounds.

Vehicles used to transport solid bulk material on

public roadways and having the potential to cause

visible emissions will be provided with a cover, or

the materials will be sufficiently wetted and loaded

onto the trucks in a manner to provide at least one

foot of freeboard.

All vehicles and construction equipment with

internal combustion engines in use will be

maintained in good conditions through six monthly

O&M for effective combustion to reduce carbon

particles and CO emission.

Water sprinkling will be done in all the dust

generating activities like site clearing, levelling,

excavation, material handling etc to suppress the

dust.

Vehicles delivering loose and fine materials like

sand and fine aggregates will be covered by tarpaulin

sheets to reduce spills on roads and to reduce

fugitive emissions.

Cell Management

Plan





350


allocation

3. Noise

Site clearing/

Levelling activities,

excavation activities,

Ready Mix Concrete

preparation,

Transportation of

construction

materials,

Construction

activities on Land,

Roads formation.

Increase in Noise Levels

Provision of insulating caps and enclosures at the

exit of noise source on the machinery.

Construction equipment generating minimum noise

and vibration will be chosen.

Internal speed limit for vehicles carrying

construction materials will be maintained with 15 -

20 kmph.

Trained security men will be deployed for guiding

smooth entry/exit without traffic congestion which

will help in reducing honking conditions.

Ear plugs will be provided to the workers exposed to

high noise prone activities and it will be enforced to

be used by the workers.

D.G.Sets with acoustic enclosures complying to

Environment (Protection) Rules will be provided and

it will be ensured prior with supplier before

finalizing and installation.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

4. Surface and Ground Water

Labour camps,

construction

activities,

construction site

works

Disposal of sewage

resulting soil

contamination/ground

water contamination,

stagnation of water leading

to mosquito breeding sites

Construction equipment requiring minimum water

for cooling and operation for optimum effectiveness

will be chosen

High pressure hose will be used for cleaning and

dust suppression purposes.

Water harvesting measures would be taken.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental





351


allocation

and affecting on health,

storm water run-off

resulting flooding

Appropriate sanitation facilities, septic tank and soak

pits will be provided for the workers onsite to reduce

impact on water resources. Regular maintenance will

be done.

No discharge of construction wastes to surface water

bodies or ground water will be allowed during

construction.

Efforts will be made for reuse of water and its

conservation.

Management

Plan

5. Solid & Hazardous Waste

Labour Camps,

excavation,

construction

activities, operation

of DG Set(s) &

Painting works reject

during external &

internal finishing's,

biomedical waste

from first aid unit,

open burning of solid

wastes

Leachate formation,

decomposition of organic

solid wastes, odour

nuisance, breeding of

rats/flies/mosquitoes/birds

fly, dislodging of earth

particles causing dust

generation of debris,

ground water

contamination,

irritation to skin/eyes,

spread of

infection/diseases

The hazardous materials used during the construction

may include petrol, diesel, Welding gas and paints.

These materials will be stored and handled according

to the KSPCB guidelines.

Diesel and other fuels will be stored in separate

enclosures;

Wherever possible, hazardous raw materials to be

substituted by non- hazardous materials, e.g.

cleaning solvent can be replaced with film –free

biodegradable cleaners. Usage of non chlorinated

strippers instead of strippers containing methylene

chloride and substitution of water based paint for oil

based ones;

Separate storage of waste paints, thinners,

contaminated rags and brushes will be adopted.

Vehicle maintenance area to be designed to prevent

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan





352


allocation

contamination of ground water by accidental spillage

of oil

6. Ecology and Biodiversity

Clearing of ground

cover

Loss of vegetative cover

such as herbs and shrubs,

impact on emissions

Greenbelt (17 Acres, 33% of total plot area) will be

developed at project site.

Buffer area plantation will be undertaken

Conservation of Schedule-I & RET species will be

undertaken

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

7. Socio-economics

Site clearing /

levelling activities,

excavation activities,

Transportation of

construction

materials,

construction,

activities on land,

Labour Camps,

Disposal of Sewage,

Noise pollution, impact on

social receptors, Risk of

accidents during transit,

traffic congestion, noise

and dust emanating from

the vehicles

Dust emissions from

various activities, Influx of

people

Disposal of Sewage/Solid

Local people from nearby villages will be employed

for construction work to the maximum extent

possible.

Proper facilities for domestic water supply and

sanitation services will be made available to the

construction workers at the site.

Annual health check-up camps for labours will be

planned.

Well trained safety personnel’s will be employed for

monitoring and implementation of Environmental,

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan





353


allocation

Disposal of Solid

wastes, Construction

activities and labour

camps

wastes, Odour nuisance

and creation of water

borne diseases, Disposal of

Sewage, unhealthy

aesthetics, Degradation of

Solid waste, attraction of

flies, Stagnation of Water,

Mosquito breeding sites

Health and Safety aspects at project site as per

Factories Act and Labour Act.

Security personnel will be employed.

Regular sprinkling of water will be undertaken at site

to evade fly of dust on surrounding plants/trees to

avoid wilting of trees.

Adequate planting of trees will be undertaken by the

PA which will improve the local biota.

Table 8.2 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during operation phase


allocation

1. Land

Disposal of

wastewater

Soil contamination &

Groundwater

contamination

Wastewater generated from the project will be treated in

the 1000 KLD ETP.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

2. Air

Gaseous and fugitive

emissions Boiler of 140 TPH (Existing) and 22 TPH (proposed

incinerator boiler) will be connected with ESP and to

Environmental

Management

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost





354


allocation

Boilers, Process,

storage,

transportation of raw

materials and

finished products,

DG sets

the chimney of 85 mt and 70 mt respectively.

15 mt above the nearest working platform with

acoustic enclosures provided for DG Set (325 KVA

(existing) and will be provided to 2 X 1250 KVA

(proposed)) and HSD (High Speed Diesel) with

sulphur content of <0.05% will be used for D.G.Sets.

Monitoring of stack emissions will be carried out

monthly to ascertain the performance of the air

pollution control equipments including installation of

continuous online emission monitoring system.

Ladder, porthole, power supply points will be

provided to the incineration boiler for monitoring of

emissions.

Water spraying will be adopted at loading, unloading

points and storage yards which will reduce fugitive

emissions.

All the internal roads will be asphalted to reduce the

fugitive dust due to vehicular movement.

Greenbelt will be developed (33% of the project

area).

A good housekeeping and proper maintenance will be

practiced in the industry, which helps in controlling

pollution.

Regular maintenance air pollution control

equipments.

Regular maintenance of vehicles and machinery’s in

order to control emissions.

Cell estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan





355


allocation

Bagasse storage Designing of stockpiles to reduce exposure to

prevailing winds;

Minimising the distance that bagasse falls during

movement;

Fully enclosing the bagasse handling conveyors,

particularly transfer points;

Installing belt cleaning systems so that bagasse is not

carried back on the underside of conveyor belts;

Implementing bagasse dust management plan that

prescribes mitigation measures for unfavourable

weather conditions;

Installing water spray system to reduce dust

emissions around and from, the site;

Cane handling Water spraying for dedusting. Plantation around source.

Transportation Water sprinklers will be provided to reduce dust.

Vehicular traffic Exhaust Emissions

The conditions of the internal roads will be checked

& maintained at least once in a year.

Trained securities will be deployed to guide the

vehicles for smooth entry/exit without causing any

traffic congestion.

Greenery development will create aesthetic

environment and also acts as a pollution sink for dust

emissions.

3. Surface and Ground Water





356


allocation

Process Effluent,

Sewage, Storm water

run off

Ground water & soil

pollution, flooding The process wastewater/effluent will be treated in

1000 KLD ETP (UASB Technology). Sewage will

be treated in septic tank and soak pit.

Condensate polishing unit of 600 KLD will be

implemented to treat the spentlees, cooling tower and

boiler blow down.

Achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) at distillery

unit by adopting evaporation, concentration and

incineration.

Storm water drains will be provided to avoid flooding

in the proposed site. Storm water gutters/drains will

be constructed in the premises on either side of the

haul roads (0.8 m X 0.6 m) and along the periphery

of 1.0 m X 0.6 m.

Garland channels will be provided around the storage

yards.

As per estimation, rain water harvesting potential of

about 5, 00,000 lts/annum will be reused for greenery

development/sprinkling applications and non potable

uses thereby conservation fresh water requirement.

Rainwater harvesting sump of capacity 500 KL (12m

X 12m X 3.5m) is proposed for implementation

10 recharge shafts will be provided for the purpose of

ground water recharge which will be constructed

along the way of internal drains.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

4. Geology and Hydrology

Extraction of water Depletion of water table Since, there is no proposal for water extraction from Environmental Please refer





357


allocation

the Borewell for the project, no impact anticipated.

Implementation of recharge structures will improve

the ground water table in and around the project site.

Management

Cell

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

5. Noise

Manufacturing

process, cogeneration

unit, transportation

of raw materials and

finished products,

D.G Set operation,

Vehicular traffic,

Increase in noise levels

Personnel working near noisy areas will be provided

with adequate personal protective equipment such as

earplugs and earmuffs, use of which will be strictly

enforced.

Sophisticated and low noise generating equipments

will be selected.

Proper mounting of equipments and providing noise

insulating enclosures or paddling where practicable.

The equipments will be maintained at all times to

ensure permissible noise levels.

Appropriate advanced silencers, acoustic barriers;

vibration-reducing pads will be provided for all noise

generating equipments.

The sources of continuous noise generating

equipment such as compressors, pumps etc will be

designed to have noise level not exceeding 85-90 dB

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan





358


allocation

(A).

It would be ensured that there would not be any

operator near the noise generating equipments on

continuous basis.

Boundary walls and dense greenery will be erected to

act as acoustic barriers.

Adequate and appropriate type of greenery will be

developed in and around the proposed project site for

noise mitigation in the area.

Proper maintenance of machineries especially oiling

and greasing of bearing and gears etc.

33 % land area around the factory is covered with

greenery. It includes greenery of 6 to 10 m width

around storage yards.

Trees will be planted on either side of the roads

within the industry premises and within the vicinity

around the factory.

6. Solid and Hazardous Waste

Domestic garbage,

solid waste from

sugar industry,

cogeneration unit

Improper handling will

affect the land/soil and

water environment

Bagasse generated from the sugar plant will be sent

to cogeneration unit to use it as fuel for boiler for

power generation

Boiler-Bottom ash, boiler flyash will be sent to ash

brick manufacturers

Pressmud, ETP sludge, yeast sludge will me mixed in

required proportion and reused as manure and also

handed over to member farmers.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management





359


allocation

Lime grit will be used as filling material / used in

construction purpose.

Used oil from DG sets, spent turbine oil, waste oil

residue from ETP will be used as lubricant within the

industry.

Domestic organic solid waste will be composted,

while the inorganic solid waste will be handed over

to nearby Gram Panchayat.

Plan

7. Ecology and biodiversity

Green belt

development

Improvement of local

flora and fauna

With the development of green belt inside the project,

will increase the movement of birds, butterflies, etc

positively. Watch & ward arrangements with proper

watering during summer.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management

Plan

8. Socio-economics

Quality of Life,

Sharing of local

resources

Employment generation,

Improvement in quality of

life, development of

infrastructure facilities,

increase in housing

accommodation.

There is a great possibility of industrialization in the

vicinity of the proposed sugar complex. This is likely

to bring drastic changes by transforming this

backward area into an industrially developed one.

The project has very strong positive impact, which is

likely to result in the improvement of economic

situation of nearby villages.

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental

Management





360


allocation

Overall peoples’ perception on the project is a mix of

advantages and disadvantages. On one hand, they

expect job opportunities, market expansion etc. as

advantages and on the other hand they are worried

about the damage to agriculture.

As an impact identification of the project, small-scale

industrial economy is likely to flourish in the

surrounding area. The small-scale industrial units are

expected to get financial supports from the financial

institutions and banks. In this way, an overall

development may take place in this area.

The process of development will have maximum

impact on the lifestyle of the local people. The

project and the consequent peripheral industrial

economy will generate income to the local and

migrated people which will increase the aggregate

demand. This demand will get realized in the market

and finally, lead to the market in the locality of the

project. Market expansion supported by expected

infrastructural developments like roads, electricity,

water supply etc. will result in improving the

economic development in the entire region.

Plan

Occupational Safety

and Health

All precautionary methods will be adopted by the

company to reduce the risk of exposure of employees

to occupational safety and health hazards.

Pre & post medical check-ups will be done of all the

employees. Employees will be regularly examined

and the medical records will be maintained for each

Environmental

Management

Cell

Please refer

Table 8.7 Cost

estimates for

implementation

of

Environmental





361


allocation

employee. Pulmonary function test and periodical

medical check-up shall be done once in every year.

The following tests will be conducted for each

worker as Occupational health surveillance

programme: Lung Function Test, Radiology – X-ray,

Pulmonary Function Test, and Audiometric Test.

For the safety of workers, personnel protective

appliances like hand gloves, goggles, aprons, ear

mufflers, nose mask etc. will be provided.

Proper ventilation system will be provided in the

process area.

Management

Plan





362

8.1.1 Environmental Management Cell

Fig 8.1 Environmental Management Cell





363

Table 8.3 Waste Minimization and Management Disposal Considered in the Complex

Sl.No Station Pollutant Preventive Measures

Waste Management Proposals

Considered

Nature Type

1 Cane yard Solid Cane trash & dung Collect as early as possible Municipality

2 Bagasse storage

yard Solid Bagasse Collect at the end of crushing Use as fuel for co-generation unit

3 Milling section

Liquid Oil& grease Collect in trays which can be easily

lifted & stored in drum Re use as lubricants within industry

Liquid Floor washings Dry cleaning will be adopted, proper

slope floors will be given To ETP

Liquid Leakages &

spillovers

Use mechanical seals for all pump

glands & alarms for overflow To ETP

Liquid Cooling waters Collect desuper heater & mill

bearing cooling water Recycle

4 Cane carrier Solid Bagasse Closed transfer system will be

adopted

Cover the drains so that bagasse do

not enter into the drains

5 Sulphur burner Gaseous SO2 Operation scrubbers Provide mask to operators

6 Lime station Semi -solid Lime solution Proper slope to the drains will be

provided To ETP

7 Clarification on

and vacuum filters Liquid

Leakages from

pumps, glands &

pipes overflow

Overflow alarms & mechanical seals

will be installed/provided Recycle the cooling waters

8 Boiler house Liquid

Gaseous

Boiler blow down

Stack emissions

Maintain boiler condition & also

feed water quality

Adjust air fuel ratio for efficient

combustion. Air pollution control

equipments performance will be

checked

Reuse for irrigation after

neutralization

Fly ash will be used as soil

conditioner /composting

9 Crystallizer &pan Liquid Leakages from Mechanical seals wherever it is Recycle the cooling waters





364

Sl.No Station Pollutant Preventive Measures

Waste Management Proposals

Considered

Nature Type

boiling pumps

Spillovers

appropriate will be provided

All cooling waters will be recycled

overloading & the equipment

avoided

To ETP

10

Cleanings of

vessels, boilers

etc., & laboratory

washings

Liquid

High BOD & COD,

chemicals as NaOH

Sulphamic Acid,

lead

NaOH for next cleaning will be

recycled

Standby units to have continuous

operations will be provided

The effluent in a holding tank to

avoid shock loads on ETP

Controlled loading in ETP from a

storage tank

Segregate laboratory

Effluents and join to storage tank

11 Press mud Solid Soil conditioner Immediate disposal Use as a filler material in

“composting”

12 Molasses Semi solid By - product Storage in MS steel tanks To distillery

To avoid auto combustion

13 Fugitive emission Gaseous Sugar Dust SO2 ESP Land filters

14 Vibrating & heavy

machinery Noise Sound

Silencer pads & closed rooms to be

used /provided

Earplugs & earmuffs to workers

will be provided and also change

the work environment frequently

on shift basis

15 Bagasse Solid Dust & Fire

Proper ventilation for storage and

also stand posts in case of fire will be

provided

Store of far away from the industry

Source: Central Pollution Control Board





8.1.1.1 Additional recommendations for sugar industry

Install steam turbine-based combined heat and power technology, enabling the facility

to generate its own process steam and electricity requirements and sell excess

electricity.

Ensure that the bagasse moisture level is below 50% before it is used as boiler fuel to

improve its calorific value and overall efficiency for steam generation and avoid the

need for supplemental fuels.

Keep heating surfaces clean by adding chemicals to prevent incrustations.

Incrustations are generated by minerals salts that are not removed during clarification

and may be prevented or reduced by adding special polymers to the thin juice.

Ensure even energy consumption by management of batch processes (e.g. centrifuges,

vacuum pans) to schedule energy demand and equalize steam demand on the boilers

Reuse vapour from vacuum pans for heating juice or water.

Use an evaporator with at least five effects.

Select the operating conditions of the boiler and steam turbine system to match the

heat-power ratio of the utility system to that of the facility.

8.1.1.2 Conservation Plan for Schedule-I species& RET species

Labourers should be monitored for posing threat to wild animals or birds.

Stringent instructions to be given to labourers and contractors to ensure that they do

not harvest any trees or pose threat to birds and wild animals in the study area.

M/s HSL and their contractors are bound by the provisions of Wildlife (Protection)

Act, 1972 towards conservation of wild animals and birds.

During construction, it should be ensured that noise levels do not cross 75 db (A). If

the project construction activities involve usage of heavy machineries, soldering,

cutting, etc should be restricted during night time, early mornings and during evenings

which are the feeding time of wild animals and birds.

As part of CSR activities, awareness of environment education and importance of

wildlife conservation should be given to school children in the study area with the

help of NGOs.

KFD shall develop Species Recovery Plan with an objective of bringing down the

Schedule -I species to II and III down the line with habitat improvement. In this

regard, M/s HSL shall provide financial support to KFD for this purpose.

If any poaching of Schedule-I/RET species noticed by the M/s HSL Officers, it should

be immediately reported to KFD for further action.

Every year, M/s HSL provide financial assistance to at least 2 schools for undergoing

site visit to Zoos, Wildlife Sanctuaries, Bird Sanctuaries, etc.

Under CSR activities, M/s HSL distribute 1000 fruit bearing tree plant species every

year to farmers within the study area for improvement of wildlife habitat.

8.1.2 Guidelines for plantation

All along the periphery of the distillery, Green belt will be developed (17 acres-33%) to

minimize the impact of air and noise pollution. Layout plan showing the proposed area for





green belt is enclosed as Annexure-3. Species selected for belt are native with high Air

Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI). The planting techniques and monitoring plan is given

below;

The pit size for planting trees will be maintained at 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm.

Top soil removed from the project area shall be used for filling the pit will be mixed

with well decomposed farm yard manure in the range of 2.0– 3.0 kg.

The filling of soil will be completed at least 7 days prior to the plantation.

Seedlings with good condition shall be identified and opted for plantation.

The distance between the trees shall be maintained at 2 m and underneath shrubs and

herbs can be grown.

The plantation needs to be monitored regularly by watering, weeding, application of

manure and impart proper protection.

Dead species will be replaced immediately.

About 10000 saplings will be planted in the buffer area (in 5 years) with the assistance of

NGOs, Agriculture and Horticulture Departments so as to reduce GHG’s. The tree species

recommended for GB plan will also make use for buffer zone plantation. Details of green belt

development plan, time frame and species identified for green belt development is given

below.





367

Table 8.4 Details of Green belt development plan

Proposed area for

green belt

Procurement of

seedlings

Responsibility &

Monitoring Agency

No. of seedlings for

plantation

Cost in Rs.

16.93 Acres

(say 17 Acres)

(33%)

Karnataka Forest

Dept., Nursery,

Belagavi

M/s Harsha Sugars Ltd 600 / acre x 16.93 acres

(say 17 Acres) = 10,158

A. Project site a) Rs. 150/- per tree x 10,158 = Rs.15,23,700/-

b) Watch & ward for 3 years (Lump sum) =

Rs. 17,82,000/-

c) Maintenance of Green belt per year (fourth

year onwards) = Rs. 6,48,000/-

B. Buffer area a) Rs.100/- per tree x 10000= Rs. 10,00,000/-

Table 8.5 Time frame for Green belt development

Year/s No. of rows Area Direction No. of saplings

A. Project site

2018-19 3 All along the periphery SW and NW 3000

2019-20 3 All along the periphery NE and SE 3000

2020-21 2 Internal Roads -- 2500



B. Buffer area

5 years --

Bunds of agriculture lands,

periphery of water bodies,

nala/stream side

Study area 10000





368

Table 8.6 List of tree species recommended for Greenbelt Development

Sl. No Botanical Names Common name Family Uses Height (m) Crown shape Nos. APT Index*

1. Ficus glomerata Atti, cluster tree Moraceae Fruiting 20 Round 200 9.72×

2. Mangifera indica Mavu Anacardiaceae Fruiting 12 Round 300 9.85 ×

3. Peltophorum pterocarpum Copperpod Fabaceae Flowering 15 Round 554 9.05 ×

4. Pongamia pinnata Honge Leguminosae Flowering 10 Round 554 9.92 ×

5. Samanea saman Rain Tree Fabaceae Flowering 15 Round 250 9.86 ×

6. Syzygium cumini Nerale Myrtacecae Fruiting 15 Round 650 11.26 ×

7. Tamarindus indica Hunse, Tamarind Fabaceae Fruiting 18 Round 200 9.54 ×

8. Azhadirachta indica Neem Fabaceae Fruiting 12 Round 700 8.84 ×

9. Muntingia calabura Gasagase Muntingaceae Fruiting 5 Round 700 7.12 ×

10. Madhuca indica Hippe Sapotaceae Fruiting 8 Round 700 8.57 ×

11. Annona squamosa Seethaphala Annonaceae Fruiting 7 Round 750 8.86 ×

12. Gliricidia sepium Gobbarada gida Fabaceae Manure 7 Oblong 1250 9.36 ×

13. Michaelia champaca Sampige Magnoliaceae Flowering 13 Round 500 16.16+

14. Millingtonia hortensis Akasha Mallige Bignoniaceae Flowering 20 Conical 400 13.0+

15. Leucaena leucocephala Subabul Fabaceae Shade 20 Round 400 18.2+

16. Pithecolobium dulce Sihihunase Fabaceae Fruiting 12 Round 800 7.5µ

17. Manilkara zapota Sapota Sapotaceae Fruiting 12 Round 500 8.54β

18. Simarouba glauca Paradise tree Simaroubaceae Fruiting 13 Round 750 -- *Source - x- CPCB, 2016, + Begum, 2010, µ & β -Krishnaveni, 2014 & 16





369

8.2 Cost of Estimates for implementation of EMP

8.2.1 Environmental management cost already incurred

Rs. 100 lakhs on air pollution control equipments

Rs. 40 lakhs for the construction of chimney and necessary structures

Rs. 60 lakhs on water pollution control measures

8.2.2 Environmental management cost for the expansion

The total cost of the project is Rs. 307.32 Crores for the establishment of 7500 TCD sugar, 30

MW/Hr cogen and 60 KLPD distillery and 3 MW/Hr from incineration boiler. The cost of

implementing the above mitigation measures as estimated in Table below, works out to Rs.

9.39Crores. The operational cost of the same is estimated at Rs 87.73 Lakhs/- per year.

Table 8.7 Cost estimates for implementation of Environmental Management Plan

Sl. No Item Cost in Crores Rs.

Capital Cost

1 Installation of Air pollution control equipment 1.2

2 Installation of Water treatment plant 0.40

3 ETP 2.40

4 Installation of Polishing unit for the treatment of spentlees

and condensate water

2.0

5 Spent wash treatment including concentration and

incineration

1.5

6 Continuous online monitoring (effluent and emission) 0.60

7 Rainwater Harvesting/ recharging 0.15

8 D.G, Air pollution control measures 0.10

9 Traffic management 0.10

10 Solid/ hazardous waste management 0.30

11 Health and Medical facilities for construction workers 0.05

12 Greenbelt Development 0.25

13 Watch and Ward including maintenance for first 3 years 0.17

14 Environmental monitoring services 0.02

15 Miscellaneous cost on allied EMP measures during

construction phase including contingencies

0.15

Total 9.39 Recurring Cost/year Cost in Lakhs Rs

1 O & M of Air pollution control equipments and control of

fugitive emission

8.00

2 O & M of Water treatment activities 4.00

3 O & M of ETP activities and CPU 15.00

4 O & M of Incineration boiler activities 5.00

5 O & M of Continuous online monitoring 12.00

6 Maintenance of recharge shafts/ pits/ sump 0.60

7 Maintenance of Greenery 6.48

8 D.G Set Maintenance 3.00





370

9 Solid/ hazardous waste management 6.00

10 Environmental monitoring 6.20

11 Health and Medical facilities for workforce 4.00

12 O&M of traffic management measures 0.50

13 Environment education & awareness to 20 schools in the

study area (2 schools per year) 0.30

14 Financial assistance to schools (2 schools per year) for

visiting Zoos, Wildlife Sanctuaries, Bird Sanctuaries 0.50

15 Financial assistance to KFD for habitat improvement of

Schedule-I species 1.00

16 Distribution of 1000 tree saplings / year 0.15

17 Miscellaneous cost on allied EMP measures during

Operational phase including contingencies 15.00

Total 87.73

8.3 Conservation of Air, Water and Energy recovery

100 % utilization of bagasse for power generation.

100 % utilization of ETP treated wastewater for greenbelt development / on land for

irrigation.

100 % utilization of harvested rainwater after first flush for domestic usage other than

drinking.

ETP sludge, Boiler ash, Pressmud, yeast sludge will be completely reused as manure

Spent wash treatment through concentration and incineration to achieve zero

discharge and in turn to produce minimum power.

100 % utilisation of treated condensate and spentlees thereby reducing the usage of

freshwater (50 %).

LEDs will be used at all the areas for illumination.

Garden lighting based on solar energy.

Water heating application in canteen areas will be based on solar.

Construction debris will be reused in internal drain works.

Use of BEE star rated appliances at all administrative areas of the industry and

officers colony.

Table 8.8 Compliance to the CREP guidelines- Sugar industry

Sl no CREP guidelines Compliance

1. Waste Water Management

Operation of ETP shall be started at least one

month before starting of cane crushing to

achieve desired MLSS so as to meet the

prescribed standards from day one of the

operation of mill

ETP of 1000 KLD capacity is proposed and it

will be made sure that it will be started at

least one month before starting of cane

crushing to achieve required MLSS.

Reduce wastewater generation to 100 litres per

ton of cane crushed by April 2004

Will be adhered accordingly.





371

To achieve zero discharge in inland surface

water bodies by December 2004

No discharge of treated wastewater outside

the premises. Treated wastewater will be re-

used for on land for Irrigation/ greenbelt

development. There is no proposal for

discharge of treated effluent into inland

surface water bodies.

To provide 15 days storage capacity for treated

effluent to take care of no demand for irrigation

by April 2004

Storage capacity of 15000 cum will be

provided.

2. Emission Control

To install ESP/bag filter /high efficiency

scrubber to comply with standards for

particulate matter emission to < 150 mg/Nm3 by

April 2004

ESPs, will be provided

Table 8.9 Compliance to the CREP guidelines - Distillery

Existing Molasses – Based Distilleries

will furnish bank guarantee and Action Plan to concerned

State Board to ensure compliance with any combination

of the following measures;

1 Compost making with press mud/agricultural residue/

Municipal Waste:

II Concentration and drying/ Incineration:

II treatment of spent wash through biomethanation

followed by two stage secondary treatment and dilution

of the treated effluent with process water for irrigation as

per norms prescribed by CPCB/MoEF.

IV Treatment of spent wash through bio- machination

following by secondary treatment (BOD < 2500 mg/I) for

controlled discharge into sea through a proper submerged

marine outfall at a point permitted by SPCB/CPCB in

consultation with National Institute of Oceanography

(NIO), so that Dissolved Oxygen in the mixing zone does

not deplete, less than 4.0 mg/I.

V. For taking decision on feasibility of one time

controlled land application of treated effluent, a study

will be under taken within three months.

The road map for utilization of spent wash by the

distilleries to achieve zero discharge of spent wash in

inland surface water courses will be as below:-

50% utilization of spent wash - By March, 2004

75% utilization of spent wash - By March, 2005

100% utilization of spent wash - By December, 2005

-NA-

New Molasses based distillery.

Spent wash treatment will be

based on concentration followed

by incineration method.





372

The 100% utilization of spent wash is achieved,

controlled and restricted discharge of treated effluent

form lined lagoons during rainy season will be allowed

by SPCB/CPCB in such a way that the perceptible

colouring of river water bodies does not occur.

1. Monitoring Task Force consisting of CPCB, SPCB,

Experts and industry shall be constituted for monitoring

the implementation of action points.

2. New Distilleries & Expansion of Existing Distilleries

( Molasses based)

Proposal for Standalone new distilleries and expansion of

existing distilleries will out achieving zero discharge in

surface water/ ground water will not be considered

MoEF/ SPCB. * to be decided by SPCB/ CPCB/ MoEF

Zero discharge will be achieved

by the implementation of

incineration boiler for the

treatment of spent wash

Table 8.10 Compliance to MoEF&CC notification, 14-01-2016

CONDITIONS COMPLIANCE

The effluent from sugar industry should be

pH 5.5-8.5

Total suspended solids 100 (for disposal on to land)

BOD 100 (for disposal on to land)

BOD3 30 (for disposal in surface waters)

Oil and grease 10

Total dissolved solids 2100

Final wastewater discharge

limit

200 litre per ton of cane crushed (final

treated effluent discharge restricted to 100 lts

per ton of cane crushed and wastewater from

spray pond overflow or cooling tower blow

down to be restricted to 100 litres per ton of

cane crushed and only single outlet point

from the unit is allowed)

Agreed to maintain

the same.

Emission The particulate matter emissions from the stack shall be less than 150 milligrams

per normal cubic metre

Will be complied

through installation

of ESP.

(ii) Waste water conservation and pollution control management

1. Establishment of cooling arrangement and polishing tank for recycling the excess

condensate water to process or utilities or allied units.

Cooling towers

established

2. Effluent Treatment Plant to be stabilized one month prior to the start of the

crushing season and continue to operate one month after the crushing season.

Will be complied

3. During no demand period for irrigation, the treated effluent to be stored in a

seepage proof lined pond having 15 days holding capacity only.

Will be complied

4. Flow meter to be installed in all water abstraction points and usage of fresh water

to be minimized.

Will be complied

5. Suitable Air pollution control devices to be installed to meet the particulate matter

emission standard.

ESP will be

installed





373

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION M/s Harsha Sugars Limited have proposed expansion of sugarcane crushing capacity from

4,500TCD to 7,500TCD, cogeneration power plant from 14MW/Hr to 30MW/Hr and

planning to establishment of distillery of 60 KLPD and also installation of incineration boiler

to generate 3MW/Hr Power. This project development will give rise to social and economic

development measures in the study area.

Any type of development activity has both beneficial and adverse impacts on the

environment in which it operates.

The impacts are identified and evaluated by the project proponents to reduce their

negative impacts and maximize the positive effects on the surrounding environment.

Full fledged Environmental Management Cell exclusively for the proposed project

will be constituted with qualified Engineers to oversee the environment health and

safety aspects of the industry.

The project is considered as eco-friendly in view of the proposal involving utilization

of various waste resources in scientific way and which helps in creating a platform of

sustainable development. The project will be farmer friendly as it helps in

improvement in the livelihood and socio economic status of the area

This industry does not have significant adverse effect on environment. The industry

proposes to adopt an effective environment management system and environment

management plan to protect the environment. Due priority is given for greenery

development and rainwater harvesting in the factory premises.

Implementation of the project will have beneficial impact in terms of providing direct

and indirect employment opportunities. There will be a positive socio-economic

development in the region. Quality of life of the people will be improved.

Recommendations made in the CREP for Sugar Plant will be implemented. HSL will

also undertake various community welfare measures for the upliftment of the villages

of the study area.

Overall, the proposed project will have positive impact on the Environment if, the

recommended Environmental Management & monitoring aspects, measures are fully

implemented in high spirit by the project proponents.

9





374

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED

WITH RESPECT THE PROJECT

10.1 Introduction

Environmental Health and Safety Consultants Pvt Ltd (EHSCPL) established in 2001 is a

prominent provider of environmental consulting services to wide range of clients

(Government / Semi Government / Private /Individual). Our comprehensive range of

diversified services includes obtaining environmental clearance from SEIAA/MoEF, CRZ

Clearance from MoEF, preparation of EIA/EMP and approval/authorizations from KSPCB

and from other regulatory agencies.

10.2 Quality Policy

EHSCPL team will strive to continue to be one of the leading Environmental Consultants by

providing environmental consultancy services in the area of EIA/EMP reports for the

accredited sectors and by deriving customer satisfaction through on-time completion of

projects at competitive pricing and continually improving our Quality Management System at

all levels of the organization through documented training, regular communication and

strengthening during annual employee performance reviews.

10.3 Services Offered

Comprising of qualified and experienced environmental professionals and providing

environmental consultancy services/technical solutions to various government and private

sectors in the field of construction, infrastructure development, engineering, industries like

sponge iron, steel melting, rolling mill, cement, pharmaceuticals, textile, sugar, power

projects, distilleries, food products, milk dairies, chemical, automobiles etc., mining, thermal

and river valley sectors. Also, our environmental laboratory services includes analysis of

Ambient Air Quality, Stack Emissions, Indoor Air Quality, Water Quality, Wastewater

Quality, Noise Level, Soil Quality, Solid & Hazardous Waste, and Research & Development

in the field of Environmental Pollution.

10.4 Completed Projects

Industrial Projects – 38 (Sugar, Sugar with cogen, Distillery, Thermal, Sponge Iron,

Steel and cement)

River Valley and Hydroelectric Projects – 17 (Reservoir and Lift Irrigations Schemes)

Mini hydel Schemes – 18

Karnataka Housing Board Townships and Residential Layouts –51

Private Residential Apartments, layouts, townships and commercial complexes – 175

10





375

Onsite Emergency plans/consent renewals – 65

10.5 Accreditations for Environmental Consultancy Services

ISO 9001:2015 certified organization and accredited by QCI – NABET, Govt. of India for the

following sectors;





376





377

CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL

RESPONSIBILITY

11.1 Environmental Management Cell

The industry not only carryout business but also understands the obligations towards the

Environment. The industry believes in sustainable development and equally concern about

environment preservation and pollution control. It will establish a well organized

Environmental Management Cell (EMC) which will performs all the environmental

management activities. It will have its own Environment, Health & Safety Policy approved

by its Managing Director. The EHS Policy will prescribe to comply with statutory norm with

regards to the Environment, Health & Safety, to prevent pollution by adopting cleaner

production. The environmental Committee meets monthly to review the status of various

aspects of pollution control measures for implementation in the plant.

The industry plans to obtain & maintain ISO14001 certification.

Suggestion scheme will be launched and various suggestions given by the workers

and employees will be implemented in order to improve safety and protect

environment.

The industry will resolve to become zero waste integrated agro business sugar

complex and in its commitment to ensure zero discharge. Measures will be

implemented to recycle and reuse waste water to avoid effluent discharge onto the

surrounding environment.

Involvement of workmen in Safety Management through the Safety Committee which

will be empowered to review accidents and initiate corrective and preventive action.

Ensuring high standards of housekeeping in the factory premises, resulting in a Safe

Shop floor

All personnel will be trained on First Aid and basics of Safety Management.

Table 11.1 Composition of Environment Management Cell (EMC)

Managing Director Overview and implementation of Environmental

management plan

Sugar plant In-charge Monitoring and implementation related to Health, Safety

and Environment (HSE) aspects of the sugar plant

Cogen plant In-charge Monitoring and implementation related to Health, Safety

and Environment (HSE) aspects of the cogen plant

11





378

Distillery In charge

Monitoring and implementation related to Health, Safety

and Environment (HSE) aspects of the distillery

Health and Safety Manager Reporting the Managing Director, Safety Committee and

the Board, on matters regarding HSE performance, HSE

Management System performance and the HSE risk

position in the Industry

Environmental Engineer Providing technical advice on implementation of HSE

management plan.

Environmental Chemist Collecting and analyzing the samples and developing

remediation’s programs.

Safety Officer • To develop and implement occupational health and

safety policy, program and procedure and relevant

timely CAPA

• To increase health and safety awareness at all levels

within the organizations

11.2 Corporate Environmental Responsibility

The CSR addresses issues in the development areas of: Environmental sanitation, Education,

Health and Livelihood in 14 Project influence villages falling within the radius of 10 Km.

The various activities will be organized on the basis of a participatory and need based

approach, aiming holistic and sustainable development, coordinated with the support of a

visionary Non-Government Organization (NGO) like Gramalaya trust who have long term

experience in organizing such activities across the country.

11.2.1 CSR- Policy and approach

By placing initial emphasis on community awareness programmes using Participatory

methods, a foundation will be laid for further development that can be sustained. Community

empowerment, in the form of Self-help Groups of Women ensures that the community

understands, manages, and leads its own development. An Expert NGO to implement and

manage the programme over a period of 5 years will be selected for the purpose and the work

of the NGO in facilitating such activities successfully.

A detailed ‘Action Plan’ will be prepared, on the basis of a participatory survey in the

villages to identify the present situation, felt needs of the community and ensure participation

of the villagers in the implementation of such CSR activities. The project will extent for a

period of 5 years and will have a wide range of CSR initiatives ranging from – participatory

surveys in the villages, formation of women self- help groups, thrift-credit operations, linkage

banking and revolving fund supplementation, supports for the construction of toilets,

provision of drinking water , skill development training for men and women to facilitate

income generation activities, Need based health camps, supports to schools for toilet

construction, other infrastructure facilitation and health & hygiene awareness training for

children, school Health camps etc. More emphasis to Tribal villages to cross cut their

backwardness will be there in the agenda. Existing Government programmes will be

integrated and supplemented to facilitate ‘holistic development’.





379

Every year Social audit will be conducted by an external agency to assess the impact of the

project to improve upon further. Such a CSR plan will ensure the social commitment of the

company to the society in which it is working which in turn is considered essential for the

mutual benefit and combined sustained development. This Village Development Partnership

Programme’ will try to develop all these 14 villages in to model villages through a

participatory partnership and will pool all the available resources, besides the CSR funds.

11.2.2 CSR- Budget estimates

As per the CSR norms 2.5 % of the project estimates (Rs. 307.32 Crores) will be earmarked

for the CSR activities extended for a period of 5 years and the budget estimates are worked

out below:

Table 11.2 CSR- Budget estimates

Project period

Fund allocation

(Crores)

Coverage of villages

Year -1 1.54 There are 14 villages and hence the annual

share per village will be 11 Lakhs only. But

all available resources will be pooled to

implement the project, with NGO support

and through community participation.

Since this is a participatory need based

project, more emphasis will be given to the

most backward and needy villages, cross

cutting the limits of funds, if necessary.

Year-2 1.54

Year-3 1.54

Year-4 1.54

Year -5 1.54

Total 7.7 Crores

Pooling of resources will be an additional channel to expand the horizon for a holistic

development in this area and the same will be done through integrated efforts. 5 year plan for

the CSR activities with budgetary allocation for each activity is mentioned herewith.

Table 11.3 Budgetary allocation for the proposed CSR activities

Program

/ Activity Proposed – Details

Budgetary Allocation (in lakhs) for

2018-19 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 2022-23

Health Sector Free Medical check-up camps

will be held at the

neighbouring cane villages

4 5 4 4 6

Holding of health awareness

camp – drinking water,

sanitation, malaria and dengue

control in all the villages of

cane area.

8 4 8 8 6

Providing safe drinking water

treatment/ RO plant to

villages/ schools 7 9 7 7 5

Education Infrastructural support to the

deserving local industrial

training institutes and

12 14 15 14 10





380

polytechnic institutions.

Providing teaching aids and

books to primary and high

schools falling under cane

area.

8 6 10 10 8

Merit Awards, Cash Prize at

the rate of Rs.10,000/- and

Rs.15,000/- to highest marks

scoring student at 10th

and 12th

standard respectively of cane

notified area

15 15 8 8 15

Development

of Rural

Infrastructure

Construction of Primary/High

school rooms in the villages

of companies' cane notified

area.

14 14 13 14 16

Financial help to the

panchayat in companies cane

notified area

13 14 15 14 13

Development of Rural Roads 18 18 20 20 20

Construction of toilets 16 16 16 16 16

Social welfare Financial help to the

deserving vocational training

centres for woman folk run by

NGOs in the cane notified

area of the factory.

25 25 25 25 25

Infrastructural support to the

NGO’s which are successful

in organizing Self-help groups

(micro-finance) in the cane

notified area of factory.

10 10 10 10 10

Aids and appliances to the

differently- able persons in the

cane notified area

4 4 3 4 4

Total 154 154 154 154 154





381

REFERENCE

1. “Air quality assessment, emission inventory and source apportionment study for

Bangalore city” by TERI

2. “As An Effective Replacement In Fly Ash Bricks” by Apurva Kulkarni , Samruddha

Raje , Mamta Rajgor, Bagasse Ash Published in International Journal of Engineering

Trends and Technology (IJETT) – Volume 4 Issue 10 - Oct 2013

3. “Construction-Generated Criteria Air Pollutant and Precursor Emissions, Sacramento

Metropolitan Air Quality Management District”, CEQA Guide December 2009,

Revised May 2011, Revised April 2013

4. “Dust Control Measures in the Construction Industry” by EVELYN TJOE, SIMONE

HILHORST, TON SPEE, JUDITH SPIERINGS, FRISO STEFFENS, MIEKE

LUMENS and DICK HEEDERIK, nn. occup. Hyg.,Vol. 47, No. 3, pp. 211–218, 2003

© 2003 British Occupational Hygiene Society, Published by Oxford University Press

DOI: 10.1093/annhyg/meg023

5. “Emission Factor development for Indian Vehicles “ as a part of Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring and Emission Source Apportionment Studies by The Automotive

Research Association of India, Puna (March 2008)

6. “Heavy- Duty Vehicles in the Motor Vehicle Emissions Simulator” by USEPA

(September 2012)

7. “Particulate Matter in the Excavation Work Sites in Urban Areas”, by Giuseppe Pizzo

and Marina Clerico, American Journal of Environmental Sciences 7 (6): 499-504,

2011, ISSN 1553-345X

8. “The control of dust and emissions from construction and demolition Best Practice”

Guidance Produced in partnership by the Greater London Authority and London

Councils (Nov 2006)

9. A Kavitha, N Deepthi, N Ganesan, S C Gladwin Joseph (2012), Common Dry Land

Trees of Karnataka, ATREE, Bangalore, India

10. A Kavitha, N Deepthi, N Ganesan, S C Gladwin Joseph (2012), Common Dry Land

Trees of Karnataka, ATREE, Bangalore, India.

11. Abida Begum, S Harikrishna (2010), Evaluation of Some Tree Species to Absorb Air

Pollutants in Three Industrial Locations of South Bengaluru, India, E-Journal of

Chemistry, 7(S1), S151-S156.

12. Air Pollution Sampling and Analysis by Dr. Sharad Gokhale (May 2009)

13. AP 42, Fifth Edition, Volume I, Chapter 13: Miscellaneous Sources (January 1995)

14. Arun Pratap Singh (2011), Butterflies of India, Om Book International, Uttar Pradesh.

15. Assessment of Carbon Sequestration ability of trees for adopting in Green belt of

Cement Industries in Karnataka (2016), Central Pollution Control Board, Zonal

Office, Bengaluru, KA

16. Belagavi Division Forest Working Plan (2012-22), Karnataka Forest Department,

Government of Karnataka.

12





382

17. BLUCEROS: A BNHS Review of the Avi faunal list of the Wildlife (Protection) Act,

1972, ENVIS News Letter: Avian Ecology and Inland Wetlands, Vol. 7, 2002.

18. Canter L.W (1996), Environmental Impact Assessment, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill,

New York.

19. Central Ground Water Board, South Western Region, Bangalore – NHS Data and

Meteorology data, District Broachers for Belagavi.

20. CPCB Guidelines for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (2003), CPCB, New Delhi.

21. CPCB Manual on National Ambient Air Quality Status & Trends in India – 2010.

22. CPCB Report on Epidemiological Study on Effect of Air Pollution on Human Health

(Adults) in Delhi under Environmental Health Series EHS/1/2008 (2008).

23. David J. Nowak (2002), The effects of Urban Trees in Air Quality, USDA Forest

Service, New York

24. EPA report - Average Annual Emissions and Fuel Consumption for Gasoline-Fueled

Passenger Cars and Light Trucks, Office of Transportation and Air Quality, EPA420-

F-08-024, October 2008

25. Forest Working Plan for Belagavi Forest Division, Karnataka Forest Department.

26. Foundation for Revitalization of Local Health and Traditions (FRLHT) Medicinal

Plants Database, http://envis.frlht.org/indian-medicinal-plants-database.php.

27. Geological Survey of India – Geological Map & Mineral Resources of Karnataka

28. Geology of Karnataka, B.P.Radhakrishna and R. Vaidyanadhan, Geological Society

of India, Bangalore

29. Guidelines for Developing Green belts (2000), Central Pollution Control Board,

Programme objective series PROBES/75/1999-2000.

30. Gupta, B., & Sharma, S. (2014). Estimation of biomass and carbon sequestration of

trees in informally protected areas of Rajouri, J&K. India. International Research

Journal of Environment Sciences, 3(6), 56-61.

31. http://cpcb.nic.in/National_Ambient_Air_Quality_Standards.php

32. http://www.cpcb.nic.in/newitems/7.pdf

33. International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN) Red

List of Threatened Species, http://www.iucnredlist.org/search, 2014.3 versions.

34. International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN) Red

List of Threatened Species, http://www.iucnredlist.org/search, 2015.4 versions.

35. IS 10500:2012 Drinking Water Quality Standards.

36. IS 2470 Part-I & Part-II – Code of Practice for Installation of Septic Tanks

37. J C Daniel (2002), The Book of Indian Reptiles and Amphibians, Oxford University

Press, BNHS, Bombay.

38. J C Daniel (2002), The Book of Indian Reptiles and Amphibians, Oxford University

Press, BNHS, Bombay.

39. Karnataka State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB) website.

40. Krishnaveni Marimuthu, Lavanya K (2014), Air Pollution Tolerance Index of Plants:

A Comparative Study, International Journal of Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical

Sciences, Vol 6, Issue 5, 2014

41. Krishnaveni Marimuthu, Sreerenjini V M, Santhosh Kumar (2016), Air Pollution

Tolerance Index and Antioxidant activity of plant leaves collected near Railway

junction, Karrpur, Salem, Tamil Nadu, India, World Journal of Pharmaceutical

Research 5(6):1536-1551 · June 2016

42. Lucio G. Costa, Toby B. Cole, Jacki Coburn, Yu-Chi Chang, Khoi Dao and Pamela

Roque (2014), Neurotoxicants Are in the Air: Convergence of Human, Animal and In





383

Vitro Studies on the Effects of Air Pollution on the Brain, BioMed Research

International Volume.

43. Mineral Resources of Karnataka, B.P.Radhakrishna, Geological Society of India,

Bangalore

44. Mines & Geology, Bangalore, Karnataka State and Central Ground Water Board,

South Western Region, Bangalore – Ground Water Resource Estimation

45. Nayar, M.P & Sastry, A.R.K. (1990) Red Data Book of Indian Plants. Vol. 1-3.

Botanical Survey of India, Calcutta.

46. Nguyen, V. L. (2012). Estimation of biomass for calculating carbon storage and CO2

sequestration using remote sensing technology in Yok Don National Park, Central

Highlands of Vietnam. Journal of Vietnamese Environment, 3(1), 14-18.

47. Potadar Vishnu, R., and Satish Patil, S. (2017). Sequestration and storage of carbon

by trees in and around University campus of Aurangabad city in Maharashtra, India.

International Research Journal of Engineering and Technology (IRJET), 4(1), 598-

602.

48. Ramasammy (2005), Studies on the effects of vehicular pollutants on road side plants

of Puducherry, Govt. of Puduchery.

49. Rathi A.K.A (2016), Environmental Impact Assessment - A Practical Guide for

professional practice, Akar Unlimited Publications, Gujarath, India.

50. Salim Ali (2012), The Book of Indian Birds, Bombay Natural History Society,

Thirteenth Edition, Revised by J.C Daniel

51. Salim Ali (2012), The Book of Indian Birds, Oxford University Press, BNHS,

Bombay.

52. Salim Ali, Dillon Ripley, John Henry Dick (1983), A Pictorial Guide to the Birds of

the Indian Sub -continent, Oxford University Press, London.

53. Slabbekoorn Hans & Ripmeester A.P (2007), Birds song and Anthropogenic noise:

Implications and Applications for conservation, Molecular Ecology, Pg 1 -11.

54. Social Impact Assessment - Report of a Research Project on Social Impact

Assessment of R&R Policies and Packages in India, Council for Social Development

New Delhi, August 2010.

55. Socio-Economic Survey Using a Structured Questionnaire – Integrated Management

of Lagoon Activities of Project (IMOLA), Hue City, TT-Hue, Vietnam.

56. Wildlife (Protection) Act – 1972, MoEF Website, Govt. of India.

57. Zanne AE, Lopez-Gonzalez G, Coomes DA, Ilic J, Jansen S, Lewis SL, Miller RB,

Swenson NG, Wiemann MC, Chave J (2009) Data from: Towards a worldwide wood

economics spectrum. Dryad Digital Repository.

Websites

1. http://www.iucnredlist.org/

2. http://www.bsienvis.nic.in/Database/RedlistedPlants_3940.aspx

3. www.fao.org/docrep/w4095e/w4095e0c.htm

4. db.worldagroforestry.org/wd 5. www.envfor.nic.in/legis/wildlife/wildlife1.html

6. http://envis.frlht.org/indian-medicinal-plants-database.php.

Download - M/s HARSHA SUGARS LTD - environmentclearance.nic.inenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · M/s. Harsha Sugars Ltd M/ s. EHS Consultants Pvt Ltd x ABBREVIATIONS AAQM Ambient

Top Related